Government of Andhra Pradesh

Irrigation & C.A.D. Department

HANDRI NIVA SUJALA SRAVANTHI
PROJECT

Tender Document

VOLUME-II
(Part-A) General Conditions of Contract
(Part-B) Special Conditions of Contract
January-2005

HNSS PROJECT PHASE 1

Volume-II (PART A)
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

CONTENTS

CLAUSE
NO

PARTICULARS

REMARKS

1. GENERAL PROVISIONS
1.1

Definitions
Modified

1.1.2.11

Engineer-in-Charge
Inducted

1.1.2.12
Tenderer / Bidder
Inducted
1.1.3.3
Time for Completion
Modified
1.1.4.6
Provisional Sum
Deleted
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14

Interpretation
Modified
Communications
Modified
Law and Language
Modified
Priority of Documents
Modified
Contract Agreement
Modified
Assignment
Care and Supply of Documents
Confidentiality
Employers Use of Contractors Documents
Contractors Use of Contractors Documents
Confidential Details
Modified
Compliance with Laws
Modified
Joint and Several Liability

2. THE EMPLOYER
2.1
2.2
2.3

Right of Access to the Site

Permits, Licences or Approvals
Employers Personnel

2.4
2.5
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5

4.

Deleted
Employers Claims
THE EMPLOYERS ADMINISTRATION
The
Employers
Modified
Other Employers Personnel
Delegation Persons
Instructions
Determinations

Representative

PAGE NO

CLAUSE PARTICULARS
NO
THE CONTRACTOR

4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4

Contractors
Modified
Performance Security
Modified
Contractors Representative
Subcontractors
Modified
Nominated Subcontractors
Co-operation
Setting Out

4.5
4.6
4.7
Modified
4.8
Safety Procedures
4.9
Quality Assurance
4.10
Site Data
Modified
4.11
Sufficiency of the Contract Price
4.12
Unforeseeable Difficulties
4.13
Rights of Way and Facilities
4.14
Avoidance of Interference
4.15
Access Route
Modified
4.16
Transport of Goods
4.17
Contractors Equipment
Modified
4.18
Protection of the Environment
Modified
4.19
Electricity, Water and Gas
Modified
4.20
Deleted
4.21
Progress Reports
4.22
Security of the Site
4.23
Contractors Operations on Site
4.24
Fossils

General

Obligations

5.

CLAUSE PARTICULARS
NO

DESIGN
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8

General Design Obligations

Modified
Contractors Documents
Contractors Undertaking
Technical Standards and Regulations
Training
As-Built Documents
Operation and Maintenance Manuals
Design Error

6. STAFF AND LABOUR

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11

Engagement of Staff and Labour

Rates of Wages and Conditions of Labour
Persons In the Service of Employer
Labour Laws
Working Hours
Modified
Facilities For Staff and Labour
Modified
Health and Safety
Contractors Superintendence
Contractors Personnel
Modified
Records of Contractors Personnel and Equipment
Disorderly Conduct

7. PLANT, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8

Manner of Execution
Samples
Inspection
Modified
Testing
Rejection
Remedial Work
Ownership of Plant and Materials
Royalties

8. COMMENCEMENT, DELAYS AND SUSPENSION

8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4

Commencement of Work
Modified
Time For Completion
Modified
Programme
Modified
Extension of Time For Completion
Modified

PAGE NO

8.5 CLAUSE

PAGE NO

PARTICULARS

NO

8.6
8.7
8.8

Rate of Progress
Delay Damages
Modified
Suspension of Work
Modified

Deleted

8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12

Deleted
Deleted
Deleted
Deleted

9. TESTS ON COMPLETION
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4

Contractors Obligations
Delayed Tests
Retesting
Failure to Pass Tests on Completion
Modified

10.

EMPLOYERS TAKING OVER

Modified

10.1
Taking Over of the Works and Sections
Modified
10.2
Taking Over of Parts of the Works
Modified
10.3
Deleted
11.
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
11.5
11.6
11.7
11.8
11.9
11.10
11.11
12.
12.1
12.2
12.3

DEFECTS LIABILITY
Completion of Outstanding Work and Remedying Defects
Modified
Cost of Remedying Defects
Failure to Remedy Defect
Removal of Defective Work
Further Tests
Right of Access
Deleted
Performance Certificate
Unfulfilled Obligations
Clearance of Site.
TESTS AFTER COMPLETION
Procedure for Tests after Completion
Modified
Deleted
Retesting

Deleted

12.4

13.
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4

Failure to Pass Tests after Completion

Modified
VARIATIONS AND ADJUSTMENTS
Right to Vary
Value Engineering
Variation Procedure
Payment in Applicable Currencies
Modified

13.5
13.6
13.7
13.8
14.
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
14.8
14.9
14.10
14.11
14.12
14.13
14.14
14.15
14.16
15.
15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5

Deleted
Deleted
Adjustment for Charges in Legislation
Adjustments for Charges in Cost
CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENT
The Contract Price
Modified
Advance Payment
Modified
Application for Interim Payments
Modified
Schedule of Payments
Modified
Interim Payments
Modified
Timing of Payments
Modified
Delayed Payment
Deleted
Payment of Retention Money
Modified
Statement at Completion
Modified
Application for Final Payment
Modified
Discharge
Modified
Final Payment
Cessation of Employers Liability
Currencies of Payment
Modified
Price Adjustment
TERMINATION BY EMPLOYER
Notice to Correct
Termination by Employer
Valuation at Date of Termination
Payment after Termination
Employers Entitlement to Termination

Deleted

Modified

PAGE NO

CLAUSE PARTICULARS
NO
16.

Deleted

RISK AND RESPONSIBILITY

17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
18.
18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4
18.5
19.
19.1
19.2
19.3
19.4
19.5
19.6
19.7

Indemnities
Contractors Care of the Works
Intellectual and Industrial Property Rights
Limitation of Liability
INSURANCE
General Requirements for Insurances
Modified
Insurance for Works and Contractors Equipment
Modified
Insurance against Injury to Persons and Damages to Property
Modified
Insurance for Contractors Personnel
Modified
General Requirements for Insurance
Inducted
FORCE MAJEURE
Definition for Force Majeure
Modified
Notice of Force Majeure
Modified
Duty to Minimise Delay
Consequences of Force Majeure
Modified
Deleted
Optional Termination, Payment and Release
Modified
Release from Performance under the Law

20.

CLAIMS, DISPUTES AND ARBITRATION

20.1
20.2

Contractors Claims
Appointment of the Dispute Adjudication Board
Modified
Failure to Agree Dispute Adjudication Board
Modified

20.3

Deleted
Deleted

20.4
20.5
20.6
20.7
20.8
20.9

Obtaining Dispute Adjudication Boards Decision

Amicable Settlement
Modified
Arbitration
Modified
Failure to Comply with Dispute Adjudication Boards Decision
Modified
Expiry of Dispute Adjudication Boards Appointment
Price Adjustment

APPENDIX TO TENDER
ANNEXURE GCCI PROFORMA FOR PERFORMANCE SECURITY
ANNEXURE GCCII
GUARANTEE

PROFORMA FOR ADVANCE PAYMENT

VOLUME II
PART A
GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
PREFACE

The General conditions governing this contract shall be as stated in the Conditions of Contract for EPC
Turnkey Projects ( 1999 Edition ) Published by Federation International des Ingenieurs - Conseils (FIDIC)
designated. Some of the clauses in the Conditions of Contract for EPC Turnkey Projects ( 1999 Edition )
Published by Federation International does Ingenieurs - Conseils (FIDIC) are modified/amended/deleted as
indicated in the Contents. There are a few additional Sub-Clauses also. However, the bidder(s) should
carefully study all the clauses for comparison with the Conditions of Contract for EPC Turnkey Projects
( 1999 Edition ) Published by Federation International does Ingenieurs - Conseils (FIDIC)

VOLUME- II
(PART A)

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1.

General provision

1.1
Definitions

In the Conditions of Contract, the following words and

expressions shall have the meanings stated. Words indicating
persons or parties include corporations and other legal entities,
except where the context require otherwise.

1.1.1
The Contract
1.1.1.1
Contract means the Contract Agreement, these Conditions, the
Employers Requirements, the Tender, and the further documents (if
any) which are listed in the Contract Agreement.
1.1.1.2

Contract Agreement means the Contract Agreement referred to

in Sub-Clause 1.6 [Contract Agreement], including any annexed
memoranda

1.1.1.3

Employers Requirements means the document entitled

Employers requirements, as included in the Contract, and any
additions and modifications to such documents in accordance with

the Contract. Such document specified the purpose, scope, and/or

design or other technical criteria, for the Works.
1.1.1.4

Tender means the Contractors signed offer for the Works and all
other documents which the Contractor submitted therewith (other
than these Conditions and the Employers Requirements, if so
submitted), as included in the Contract.

1.1.1.5

Schedule of Payments mean the documents so named (if any),

as included in the Contract.

1.1.2
Parties And Persons
1.1.2.1

Party means the Employer or the Contractor, as the context

requires.

1.1.2.2

Employer / EMPLOYER means the Irrigation and Command

Area Development Department, Government of Andhra Pradesh.

1.1.2.3

Contractor means the person(s) named as Contractor in the

Contract Agreement and the legal successors in the title to this
person(s)

1.1.2.4

Employers Representative is the Superintending Engineer,

H.N.S.S. Circle, ANANTAPUR as designated by the Government of
Andhra Pradesh for the purpose of the Contract.

1.1.2.5

Contractors Representative means the person named by the

Contractor in the Contract or appointed from time to time by the
Contractor under Sub-Clause 4.3 (Contractors Representative) who
acts on behalf of the Employer.

1.1.2.6

Employers Personnel means the Employers Representative, the

assistant referred to in Sub-Clause 3.2 (Other Employers Personnel)
and all other staff, labour and other employees of the Employer and
of the Employers Representative; and any other Personnel notified to
the Contractor, by the Employer or the Employers Representative, as
Employers Personnel.

1.1.2.7

Contractors Personnel means the Contractors Representative

and all Personnel whom the Contractor utilises on Site, who may
include the staff, labour and other employees of the Contractor and of
each Subcontractor; and any other Personnel assisting the Contractor
in the execution of the Works.

1.1.2.8

Subcontractor means any person named in the Contract as a

subcontractor, or any person appointed as subcontractor, for a part of
the Works; and the legal successors in the title to each of these
persons.

1.1.2.9

DAB means the person or three persons so named in the Contract,

or other persons(s) appointed under Sub-Clause 20.2 (Appointment of
the Dispute Adjudication Board) or Sub-Clause 20.3 (Failure to Agree
Dispute Adjudication Board)

1.1.2.10

FIDIC means the Fdration Internationale des Ingnieurs-Conseils

the international federation of consulting engineers.

1.1.2.11

Engineer-in-charge
means
the
Executive
H.N.S.S.DIVISION
II,ANANTAPUR
to
whom
the
Representative may have delegated certain duties.

1.1.2.12

Bidder/Tenderer mean the firm/companies /individual /joint

ventures /consortium who have preferred their bid or tender.

Engineer,
Employers

1.1.3
Dated, Test, Periods
and Completion
1.1.3.1

Base Date means the date 28 days prior to the latest date for
submission of the Tender.

1.1.3.2

Commencement Date means the date notified under Sub-Clause

8.1 (Commencement of Works), unless otherwise defined in the
Contract Agreement.

1.1.3.3

Time for Completion means the time for completing Part A of

the Contract for EPC Turnkey Project with any extension under SubClause 8.4 [Extension of Time for Completing]), calculated from the
Commencement Date.

1.1.3.4

Tests on Completion means the test which are specified in the

Contract or agreed by both Parties or instructed as Variation, and
which are carried out under Clause 9 [Tests on Completion] before the
Works comprising Sections I, II, III, IV, V and VI are certified to be
complete by the Employer.

1.1.3.5

Taking-Over Certificate means a certificate issued under Clause

10 [Employers Taking Over].

1.1.3.6

Tests after completion means the test (if any) which are
specified in the Contract and which are carried out under Clause 12
[Tests after completion] after the Works or a Section (as the case may
be) are taken over by the Employer.

1.1.3.7

Defects Liability Period means the period for notifying defects

in the Works or a Section (as the case may be) under Sub-Clause 11.1
[Completion of Outstanding Work and Remedying Defect], as stated
in the Appendix to Tender, calculated from the date on which the
Works or Section is completed as certified under Sub-Clause 10.1
[Taking Over the Works and Section]. The defect liability period shall
be two years from date calculated from the date on which the Works
or Section is completed as certified under Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking
Over the Works and Section]

1.1.3.8

Performance certificate means the certificate issued under SubClause 11.9 [Performance Certificate]

1.1.3.9

day means a calendar day and year means 365 days.

1.1.4

Money and Payments

1.1.4.1

Contract Price means the agreed amount stated in the Contract

Agreement in accordance with the price quoted in the Letter of
Tender.

1.1.4.2

Cost means all expenditure reasonably incurred (or to be incurred)

by the Contractor, whether on or off the Site, including overhead and
similar charges, but does not include profit.

1.1.4.3

Final Statement means the statement defined in Sub-Clause

14.11 [Application for final payment].

1.1.4.4

(Deleted)

1.1.4.5

Local Currency means the lawful currency of India i.e. Indian

Rupees.

1.1.4.6

(Deleted)

1.1.4.7

Retention money means the accumulated retention moneys

which the Employer retains under Sub-Clause 14.3 [Application for
Interim Payments] and pays under Sub-Clause 14.9 [Payment of
Retention Money].

1.1.4.8

Statement means a statement submitted by the Contractor as

part of an application for payment under Clause 14 (Contract Price
and Payment).

1.1.5
Works and Goods
1.1.5.1

Contractors equipment means all apparatus, machinery,

vehicles and other things required for the execution and completion of
the Works and the remedying of any defects. However, Contractors
Equipment excludes Temporary Works, Employers equipment (if any),
Plant, Materials and any other things intended to form or forming part
of the Permanent Works.

1.1.5.2

Goods mean Contractors Equipment, Materials,

Temporary Works, or any of them as appropriate.

1.1.5.3

Material means things of all kinds (other than plant) intended to

form or forming part of the Permanent Works, including the supply
only materials (if any to be supplied by the Contractor under the
Contract.

1.1.5.4

Permanent Works means the permanent Works to be designed and

executed by the Contractor under the Contract.

Plant

and

1.1.5.5

Plant means the apparatus, machinery and vehicles intended to

form or forming part of the Permanent Works.

1.1.5.6

Section means five Sections I, II, III, IV and V of EPC part of the
Contract and Section VI of Operation and Maintenance part of the
contract.

1.1.5.7

Temporary Works means all temporary works of every kind (other

than Contractors Equipment) required on Site for the execution and
completion of the Permanent Works and the remedying of any
defects.

1.1.5.8

Works mean the Permanent Works and the Temporary Works, or

either of them as appropriate.

1.1.6
Other Definitions
1.1.6.1

Contractors Documents means the calculation, computer

programs and other software, drawings, manuals, models and other
documents of a technical nature supplied by the Contractor under the
Contract; as described in Sub-Clause 5.2 [Contractors Documents].

1.1.6.2

Country means India.

1.1.6.3

Employers Equipment means the apparatus, machinery and

vehicles (if any) made available by the Employer for the use of the
Contractor in the execution of the Works, as stated in the Employers
Requirements; but does not include Plant which has not been taken
over by the Employer.

1.1.6.4

Force Majeure is defined in Clause 19 (Force Majeure)

1.1.6.5

Laws means all national (or state) legislation, statutes, ordinances

and other laws, and regulations and by-laws of any legally constituted
public authority.

1.1.6.6

Performance Security means the security (or securities, if any)

under Sub-Clause 4.2 (Performance Security)

1.1.6.7

Site means the places where the Permanent Works are to be

executed and to which Plant and Materials are to be delivered, and any
other places as may be specified in the Contract as forming part of the
Site.

1.1.6.8

Variation means any change to the Employers Requirements or the

Works, which instructed or approved as variation under Clause 13
(Variations and Adjustments)

1.2
Interpretation
1.2.1

Special Conditions shall be read in conjunction with General

Conditions, Technical specifications, Schedule of Works, Project Profile
along with Drawings and other documents forming part of this

Contract wherever applicable or the context so requires.

1.2.2

Notwithstanding the sub-division of the Contract into several contract

documents every part of each shall be deemed to be supplementary
to and complimentary of every other part and shall be read with and
into the Contract so far as it may be practicable to do so.

1.2.3

In the Contract unless otherwise stated specifically, the singular shall

include the plural and vice versa wherever the Contract so requires.
Words importing person shall include incorporated companies /
registered association / body of individuals / firm of partnership as
applicable in context thereof.

1.2.4

All headings and marginal notes to the Clauses / Articles of the

General Condition or to the Specifications or to any other document
forming part of the Contract are solely for the purpose of giving a
concise indication of the general subject matter thereof and not a
summary of the contents thereof, and they shall never be deemed to
be part thereof or be used in the interpretation or construction
thereof.

1.2.5

If during the course of execution of the Works any discrepancy or

inconsistency, error or omission in any of the provisions of the
Contract is discovered which has any effect on the execution of the
Works, and need to be clarified, the same shall be referred to the
Employers Representative who shall give his decision and the issue
instructions directing the manner in which the Works are to be carried
out. Any and all decisions and/or orders of the Employers
Representative shall be deemed decision and/or orders of the
Employer. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance
with such decisions and/or instructions of the Employers
Representative.

1.2.6

Where it is mentioned in the Contract that the Contractor shall

perform certain work or provide certain facilities, it is understood that
the Contractor shall do so at his cost and the Contract Price shall be
deemed to have included the cost of such performances and
provisions so mentioned.

1.2.7

The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable

standards, specifications contained herein and codes referred to.
Where the Contract stipulates requirements in addition to those
contained in the standards, codes and specifications, those additional
requirements shall also be satisfied.

1.3
Communications
All communications during execution of the Contract shall be made at the
following address:
Superintending Engineer, I&CAD Deptt.,
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR,, Andhra Pradesh,
India
PIN 515 004,
Tel : 08554-240237.

Communication through electronic transmission shall be

made to the following e-mail ID besides the Employers
Representative.
E-mail ID of Superintending Engineer, H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,
ANANTAPUR,
the Executive Engineer, H.N.S.S Division No:2 of the
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE, ANANTAPUR
1.4 Law and Language
1.4.1

The language of the Contract shall be English.

1.4.2

All further documents and also correspondence in respect of the

Contract shall be in English.

1.4.3

The Employer's representative and the Contractor's representative

shall be fluent in English.

1.4.4

Governing Law and Jurisdiction

1.4.4.
1

The Contract shall be construed and interpreted in accordance

with and governed by the Laws of India.

1.4.4.
2

In respect of all matters or actions arising out of the Contract and

which may arise at any time, the Courts at Warrangal, shall have
exclusive jurisdiction, subject to Clause 20 hereof (claims, dispute
and Arbitration)

1.5
Priority of Documents
The documents forming the Contract are to be taken as
mutually explanatory of one another. For the purposes of interpretation,
the priority of the documents shall be in accordance with following
sequence:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)

the Contract Agreement;

Letter of Award, notice to proceed
Contractors Bid
Special Conditions of Contract
General Conditions of Contract
Letter of Tender
any other documents forming part of the Contract.

1.6
Contract Agreement
The Contractor shall execute formal Contract agreement on
appropriate value of stamp paper imposed by Law in connection
with entry into Contract Agreement within 15 days from the
date of Letter of Award.
The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read
and construed as part of Contract Agreement

i. The Letter of Tender annexed with the agreement (which

includes the break up of the Contract Price)
ii. The Addenda Nos _________
iii. The Special Conditions of Contract
iv. The General Conditions of Contract
v. The Project Profile
vi. The Technical Specifications
vii. Drawings
viii. any other documents forming part of the Contract.
Unless and until a formal agreement is prepared and executed
this letter of tender together with written acceptance thereof,
shall constitute a binding Contract between the Employer and
Contractor.
1.7
Assignment
Neither Party shall assign the whole or any part of the Contract or any
benefit or interest in or under the Contract. However, either party:
a) may assign the whole or any part with the prior agreement
of the other Party, at the sole discretion of such other Party,
and
b) may as security in favour of a bank or financial institution,
assign its right to any moneys due, or to become due, under
the Contract.

1.8
Care and Supply
of Documents.

Each of the Contractors Documents shall be in the custody and

care of the Contractor, unless and until taken over by the Employer.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contractor shall supply to the
Employer six copies of each of the Contractors Documents.
The Contractor shall keep, on the Site, a copy of the Contract,
publications named in the Employers Requirements, the Contractors
Documents, and Variations and other communications given under the
Contract. The Employers Personnel shall have the right of access to all
these documents at all reasonable times.
If a Party becomes aware of an error or defect of a technical
nature in a document, which was prepared for use in executing the Works,
the Party shall promptly give notice to the other Party of such error of
defect.

1.9
Confidentiality

Both Parties shall treat the details of the Contract as private

and confidential, except to the extent necessary to carry out
obligations under it or to comply with applicable Laws. The Contractor
shall not publish, permit to be published, or disclose any particulars of

the Works in any trade or technical paper or elsewhere without the

previous agreement of the Employer.
1.10
Employers Use of
Contractors documents
As between the parties, the Contractor shall retain the copyright
and other intellectual property rights in the Contractors Documents
and other design documents made by (or on behalf of) the Contractor.
The Contractor shall be deemed (be signing the Contract) to
give to the Employer a non terminable transferable non exclusive
royalty free license to copy, use and communicate the Contractors
Documents, including making and using modifications of them. The
license shall;
a)
b)

c)

apply throughout the actual or intended working life (whichever is

longer) of the relevant parts of the Works.
Entitle any person in proper possession of the relevant part of the
Works to copy, use and communicate the Contractors Documents
for the proposes of completing, operating, maintaining, altering,
adjusting, repairing and demolishing the Works, and
in the case of Contractors Documents which are in the form of
computer programs and other software, permit the use on any
computer on the Site and other places as envisaged by the
Contract, including replacements of any computers supplied by
the Contractor.

The Contractors Documents and other design documents made

by (or on behalf of) the Contractor shall not, without the Contractors
consent, be used, copied or communicated to a third party by (or on
behalf of) the Employer for purposes other than those permitted under
this Sub-Clause.
1.11
Contractors Use of
Employers documents
As between the Parties, the Employer shall retain the copyright
and other intellectual property rights in the Employers
Requirements and other documents made by (or on behalf of)
the Employer. The Contractor may, at his cost, copy, use, and
obtain communication of the documents for the purposes of the
Contract.
They shall not, without the Employers consent, be copied, used
or communicated to a third party by the Contractor, except as
necessary for the purposes of the Contract.
1.12
Confidential Details
Any information which the Contractor described in the tender
being confedential can only be disclosed, if the Employer
demands. The Contractor shall disclose any other information
which the Employer may reasonably require in order to verify
the Contractors compliance with the Contract.

1.13
Compliance with Laws
The Contractor shall, in performing the Contract, comply with
applicable Laws.
a) the Employer shall have obtained (or shall obtain) the
planning, zoning or similar permission for the Permanent
Works as having been (or being) obtained by the Employer;
and the Employer shall indemnify and hold the Contractor
harmless against and from the consequences of any failure
to do so; and
b) the Contractor shall give all notices, pay all taxes, duties
and fees, and obtain all permits, licenses and approvals, as
required by the laws in relation to the design, execution and
completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects
and the Contractors shall indemnify and hold the Employer
harmless against and from the consequences of any failure
to do so.
1.14
Joint and Several Liability
If the Contractor constitutes (under applicable Laws) a joint
venture, consortium or other unincorporated grouping of two or
more persons;
a)
b)
c)

2.

these persons shall be deemed to be jointly and severally

liable to the Employer for the performance of the
Contract:
these persons shall notify the Employer of their leader
who shall have authority to bind the Contractor and each
of these persons; and
The Contractor shall not alter its composition or legal
status without the prior consent of the Employer.

The Employer

2.1
Right of Access to the Site
2.1.1

The Employer shall provide whole / part of the land already available with
the Employer or "as is where is basis" within 15 (fifteen) days from the
Letter of Award without cost to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall have right to use such land for the purpose of the
Contract and shall have unrestricted access to such land.
Within 30 (thirty) days of the date of signing of the Contract agreement,
the Contractor's shall submit for the Employer's approval the Contractors
phased requirement of additional land (if any).

2.1.2

2.2

The Contractor will do all further works in respect of internal project roads
and other infrastructure facilities and also its maintenance during the
currency of the construction period. The necessary cost in respect to
these works is deemed to have been included within the Contract Price.

Permits, Licenses or Approvals

The Employer shall (where he is in a position to do so) provide
reasonable assistance to the Contractor at the request of the
Contractor:
a)

by obtaining copies of the Laws of the Country which are

relevant to the Contract but are not readily available, and
b)
for the Contractors applications for any permits, licenses
or approvals require by the Laws of the Country
(i) which the Contractor is required to obtain under SubClause 1.13 [Compliance with Laws]
(ii) for delivery for goods, including clearance through
customs, and
(iii) for the export of Contractors Equipment when it is
removed from the Site.
2.3
Employers Personnel
The Employer shall be responsible for ensuring that the
Employers Personnel and the Employers other contractors on
the Site;
a)
b)

co-operate with the Contractors efforts under SubClause 4.6 [Co-operation], and
Take actions similar to those which the Contractor is
required to take under sub-paragraphs a), b) and c) of
Sub-Clause 4.8 [Safety procedures] and under SubClause 4.18 [Protection of the Environment].

2.4
(Deleted)
2.5
Employers Claims
If the Employer considers himself to be entitled to any payment
under any Clause of these conditions or otherwise in connection with the
Contract, and/or to any extension of the defection notification period, he
shall give notice particulars to the Contractor. However, notice is not
required for payments due under Sub-Clause 4.19 (electricity, water and
Gas), under Sub-Clause 4.20 [Employers equipment and free issue
material], or for other service requested by the contractors.
The notice shall be given as soon as practicable after the
Employer became aware of the event or circumstances giving rise to the
claim. A notice relating to any extension of the Defects Liability Period shall
be given before the expiry of such period.
The particulars shall specify the Clause or other basis of the
claim, and shall include substantiation of the amount and/or extension to
which the Employer considers him to be entitled in connection with the
Contract. The Employer shall then proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause
3.5 [Determinations] to agree or determine (i) the amount (if any) which the
Employer is entitled to be paid by the Contractor, and/or (ii) the extension (if
any of the Defects Liability Period in accordance with Sub-Clause 11.3
[Extension of Defects Liability Period].

The Employer may deduct this amount from any moneys due,
or to become due, to the Contractor. The Employer shall only be entitled to
set off against or make any deduction from an amount due to the Contractor,
or to otherwise claim against the Contractor, in accordance with this SubClause or with sub paragraph a) and/or b) of Sub-Clause 14.6 [Interim
Payments].

3.

The Employers administration

3.1
The Employers Representative
The Superintending Engineer, H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR is the
employers representative.
3.2
Other Employers Personnel
The
concerned
Executive
Engineers
of
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPURare otherEmployers persons and incharge
Engineers to the works of their jurisdiction (Engineer-in-Charge) as per work
distributed by the Superintending Engineer, H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR.
The Engineer-in-Charge shall be suitably qualified person, who
are competent to carry out these duties and exercise this authority, and who
are fluent in the language for communication defined in Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law
and Language]
3.3
Delegated Persons
All these persons, including the Employers Representative and
assistants, to whom duties have been assigned or authority has been
delegated, shall only be authorised to issue instructions to the Contractor to
the extent defined by the delegation. Any approval, check, certificate,
consent, examination, inspection, instruction, notice, proposal, request, test,
or similar act by a delegated person, in accordance with the delegation, shall
have the same effect as though the act had been an act of the Employer.
However:
a) unless otherwise stated in the delegated persons communication
relating to such act, it shall not relieve the Contractor from any
responsibility he has under the Contract, including responsibility for
errors, omissions, discrepancies and non- compliances;
b)
any failure to disapprove any work, Plant or Materials shall not
constitute approval, and shall therefore not prejudice the right of the
Employer to reject the work, Plant or Materials; and
c) if the Contractor questions any determination or instruction of a
delegated person, the Contractor may refer the matter to the
Employer through the Employers Representative, who shall promptly
confirm, reverse or vary the determination or instruction.
3.4
Instructions
The Employer representative may issue to the Contractor instructions which
may be necessary for the Contractor to perform his obligations under the
Contract. Each instruction shall be given in writing and shall state the
obligations to which it relates and the Sub-Clause (or other term of the

Contract) in which the obligations are specified. If any such instruction

constitutes a Variation, Clause 13 [Variations and Adjustments] shall apply.
The Contractor shall take instructions from the Employer, or
from the Employers Representative or an assistant to whom the appropriate
authority has been delegated under this Clause.
3.5
Determinations
Whenever these Conditions provide that the Employer shall
proceed in accordance with this Sub-Clause 3.5 to agree or determine any
matter, the Employer shall consult with the Contractor in an endeavour to
reach agreement. If agreement is not achieved, the Employer shall make a
fair determination in accordance with the Contract, taking due regard of all
relevant circumstances.
The Employer shall give notice to the Contractor of each
agreement or determination, with supporting particulars. Each Party shall
give effect to each agreement or terminations, unless the Contractor gives
notice, to the Employer, of this dissatisfaction with a determination within14
days of receiving it. Either Party may then refer the dispute to the DAB in
accordance with Sub-Clause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Adjudication Boards
Decision].

4.

The Contractor

4.1
Contractors General Obligations
4.4.1

In addition to the responsibilities and obligations of the contractor

elsewhere provided in the Contractor, the Contractor shall with due care
and diligence and subject to the provision of the Contract perform execute
and maintain the works and provide all labour including supervision
thereof, materials, construction equipment and all other things whether of
a temporary or a permanent nature, required in and for such execution,
completion and maintenance of the works as specifically provided in or to
be reasonably inferred from the Contract.

4.1.2

The contractor shall take full responsibility for the adequate stability and
safety for all its operations including site operations and methods of
construction and providing / arranging adequate security for all its and its
sub-contractors' personnel and their families, property either owned by it
or held by it in trust, work-in-progress and installation responsibilities etc.
in the project area.
If the Contractor or his sub-Contractor or their employees break, deface or
destroy any property belonging to the Employer or others during the
execution of the Contract, the same shall be made good by the Contractor
at his own expense and in default thereof, the Employers Representative
may cause the same to be made good by other agencies and recover
expenses from the Contractor for which the certificate of expenses from
the Employers Representative shall be final.

4.1.3

The Contractor shall make arrangements, for the full anticipated

requirement by installing Diesel Generating sets and operate these sets for

his requirements of power at no extra cost to the Employer.

The Employer will provide full assistance to the Contractor to obtain
construction power from APGENCO/APTRANSCO to meet part requirement
as standby arrangement. Contractor will not have any claim, if
construction power is not available from APGENCO/APTRANSCO. The
Contractor will also be responsible for making all payments to
APGENCO/APTRANSCO and will make no claims if the power is not available
due to grid failure or otherwise.
4.1.4

The Contractor shall be responsible for further upgradation and

maintenance of all internal roads in the Project to be made available
pursuant to Clause - 2.1 hereof and provision of additional roads as
necessary including their maintenance, without additional cost to the
Employer. However the Contractor shall not be responsible for the
upgrading and / or maintenance of the State Highway within the Project
Area.

4.1.5

The Contractor shall be responsible for all arrangements for water

including pumping all water requirements for all his work sites and colonies
/ camps.

4.1.6

The Contractor shall be responsible for all arrangements for gas including
for all his work sites and colonies / camps.

4.1.7

The Contractor shall be responsible for construction and maintenance of

additional access roads where necessary or the purpose of transporting all
the materials from the quarry sites and the Contractor shall also be
responsible for operation of the quarry sites and supply of the aggregate
for the works.

4.1.8

The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all licenses, permits,

consents right of way approvals etc. in Indian for carrying out his
obligations and / or the obligations of his sub-contractors under this
contract.
However, if so required on case-to-case basis, the employer may assist, by
recommending the issue of such permits etc. to the appropriate authorities
in India.

4.1.9

The Site shall be handed over to the Contractor along with existing
infrastructure on "as is where is" basis. The Contractor shall be responsible
for up keeping and maintaining of all the infrastructure taken over by him.

4.2
Performance Security
4.2.1

The Contractor shall, for due performance of the Contract, furnish

performance security in the form of a bank guarantee for an amount
equivalent to 2.5% (Two and Half percent) of the Contract Price for
PART A in the form set out in Annexure GCCI.
The Contractor shall also furnish to the Employer a performance

security in the form of a bank guarantee for an amount equivalent to

2.5% (Two and Half percent) of the Contract Price for PART B in the
form set out in Annexure GCCI.
Guarantees for amounts expressed in Indian Rupees shall be
acceptable only if they are issued by the State Bank of India or any of
its subsidiaries or a Nationalized Bank in India through any of its
branches in India, or a foreign bank notified as a Scheduled Bank
under the provisions of the Indian Banking Companies Regulation Act
through any of its branches in India, provided that any guarantee
issued by such foreign bank shall be acceptable only after its
confirmation by the State Bank India, New Delhi Main Branch.
4.2.2

The bank guarantee for performance security covering Contract Price

Part A shall come into force upon the Date of commencement and
shall remain valid for a period of 3 (three) months beyond the date of
expiry of defect liability period for EPC portion of the contract.
The bank guarantee for performance security covering Contract Price
Part B shall come into force upon the Date for O&M and shall remain
valid for a period of 3 (three) months beyond the date of completion
of Operation and Maintenance period for O&M portion of the contract.

4.2.3

The Bank Guarantee for performance security shall be submitted to

the Employer before signing of agreement.

4.3
Contractors
Representative

The Contractor shall appoint the Contractors Representative

and shall give him all authority necessary to act on the Contractors behalf
under the Contract.
Unless the Contractors Representative is named in the
Contract, the Contractor shall, prior to the Commencement Date, submit to
the Employer for consent the name and particulars of the person the
Contractor proposes to appoint as Contractors Representative. If consent is
withheld or subsequently revoked, or if the appointed person fails to act as
Contractors Representative, the Contractor shall similarly submit the name
and particulars of another suitable person for such appointment
The Contractor shall not, without the prior consent of the
Employer, revoke the appointment of the Contractors Representative or
appoint a replacement.
The Contractor Representative shall, on behalf of the Contractor,
receive instructions under Sub-Clause 3.4 [Instruction]
The Contractors Representative may delegate any power,
functions and authority to any competent person, and may at any time revoke
the delegation. Any delegation or revocation shall not take effect until the
Employer has received prior notice signed by the Contractors Representative,
naming the person and specifying the powers, functions and authority being
delegated or revoked.

The Contractors Representative and all these persons shall be

fluent in the language for communications defined in Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law and
Language]
4.4
Sub-contractors
4.4.1

The Contractor cannot sub-contract more than 50 % of contract value of

whole works.

the

No part of the Contract sub-let by the Contractor directly or indirectly to any firm
or company without the prior consent the writing of the Employer for which the
Contractor shall give a written request to the Employer at least 15 (fifteen) days
in advance of the proposed day of sub-contacting (if any) which shall contain:
a) Contractors certification regarding the financial soundness of the
proposed sub-contractor for the work;
b) Its scope and estimated value in relation to the Contract Price;
c) Experience of the sub-contractor, in the related areas of work;
d) The manpower, equipment, material and other resources available with
the sub-contractor for the work;

Within four weeks of the date of the receipt of request for consent pursuant to
this Clause
4.4.1, the Employer shall either give in writing consent thereof or communicate
its refusal with reasons. In the event of the Employer failing to communicate its
refusal within the above said four weeks period, the Contractor shall be entitled to
proceed as if the Employer had granted consent to such request.
4.4.2 Notwithstanding the provisions contained in Clause 4.4.1 above the consent of
the Employer shall not be required in respect of the following transfer,
assignment, sub-contracting:
(a) any charge in favour of the Contractors bankers of the moneys due under the
Contract or the subrogation of insurers to the Contractors rights to receive
payments due under the Contract.
(b) sub-contracts for the supply of constructions materials such as steel and
cement and consumables such as explosives, oil and petroleum products
procured within India;
(c) sub-contracts with sub-contractors and suppliers named in the Contract;
(d) sub-contracts for Construction Equipment and Temporary Works;
(e) sub-contracts for clearance and/or transportation.
4.4.3

Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein the Contractor shall

remain solely responsible for and shall obtain all permits, licenses, approvals and
authorization as may be required under all applicable laws and the regulations in
respect of any award or performance of any transfer, sub-contract.

4.4.4

Notwithstanding any transfer sub-contracting with the approval of the Employer

as aforesaid, the Contractor shall be and shall remain solely responsible and liable

to the Employer for the quality, proper and expeditious execution and
performance of the Works and for due performance and observance of all the
conditions of the Contract in all respects, as if such transfer has not taken place
and as if the work so transferred has been done directly by the Contractor.
4.4.5

If any such sub-contractor engaged upon the Works, executes any work, which in
the opinion of the Employers Representative is not in accordance with the
Contract, the Employer may by written notice to the Contractor request him to
terminate such sub-contract and the Contractor upon the receipt of such notice
shall terminate such sub-contract and dismiss such sub-contractor and the later
shall forthwith leave the work failing which the Employer shall have the right to
remove such sub-contractor from the site. In such cases no liability whatsoever
will be attached to the Employer, nor will the Employer bear the cost of such subcontract.

4.4.6

Any action taken by the Employer under this sub-clause shall not relieve in any
manner whatsoever the Contractor of any of his liabilities and obligations under
the Contract including Time for Completion or give rise to any right to
compensation / extension of time or otherwise

4.5
Nominated
Subcontractors

In this Sub-Clause, nominated Subcontractor means a

Subcontractor whom the Employer, under Clause 13 [Variations and
Adjustments], instruct the Contractor to Employ as a Subcontractor. The
Contractor shall not be under any obligation to employ a nominated
Subcontractor against whom the Contractor raises reasonable objection by
notice to the Employer as soon as practicable, with supporting particulars.

4.6
Cooperation
The Contractor shall, as specified in the Contract or as
instructed by the Employer, allow appropriate opportunities for carrying
out work to:
a)
b)
c)

the Employers Personnel,

any other contractors employed by the Employer, and
the Personnel of any legally constituted public
authorities.

who may be employed in the execution on or near the Site of

any work not included in the Contract.
Any such instruction shall constitute a Variation if and to the
extent that it causes the Contractor to incur cost in an amount, which was
not reasonably foreseeable by an experienced contractor by the date for
submission of the Tender.
Services for these personnel and other
contractors may include the use of Contractors equipment, Temporary
Works or access arrangements, which are the responsibility of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall be responsible for his construction
activities on the Site, and shall co-ordinate his own activities with those of

other contractors to the extent (if any) specified in the Employers

Requirements.
If, under the Contract, the Employer is required to give to the Contractor
possession of any foundation, structure, plant or means of access in
accordance with Contractors Documents, the Contractor shall submit such
documents to the Employer in the time and manner stated in the
Employers Requirements.
4.7
Setting Out
The Contractor shall verify at site the location lines / profile,
levels and reference points as specified in the Contract. The Contractor on
the basis of actual field survey shall carry out setting out of the entire
project component and its relative position. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the correct positioning of all parts of the works and shall
rectify any error in the position, levels, and dimensions of alignment of the
works.
The necessary cost in respect of these works is deemed to have
been included within the Contract price.

4.8
Safety Procedures

The Contractor shall:

a)
b)
c)
d)

e)

4.9
Quality Assurance

comply with all

applicable safety regulations,

take care for

the safety of all persons entitled to be on the Site,
use reasonable
effort to keep the Site and Works clear of unnecessary
obstruction so as to avoid danger to these persons,
provide fencing,
lighting, guarding and watching of the Works until
completion and taking over under Clause 10 [Employers
Taking Over], and
provide
any
Temporary Works (including roadways footways, guards
and fences) which may be necessary, because for the
execution of the Works, for the use and protection of the
public and of Employers and occupiers of adjacent land.

The Contractor shall institute a quality assurance system to

demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the Contract:
The system shall be in accordance with the details stated in the
Contract. The Employer shall be entitled to audit any aspect of
the system.
Details of all procedures and compliance documents shall be
submitted to the Employer for information before each design
and execution stage is commenced. When any documents of a

technical nature are issued to the Employer, evidence of the

prior approval by the Contractor himself shall be apparent on
the document itself.
Compliance with the quality assurance system shall not relieve
the Contractor of any of his duties, obligations or responsibilities
under the Contract.
4.10
Site Data
The Employer shall have made available to the Contractor for
his information, prior to the Base Date, all relevant data in the
Employers possession on subsurface and hydrological
conditions at the Site, including environmental aspects. The
Employer shall similarly make available to the Contractor all
such data which come into the Employers possession after the
base data.
The data and information given in the Project Profile (Vol. II Part
C) of the Bid Document are based on the Investigations
conducted so far. Variations / alternations in the said data /
information more particularly in respect of Geology, which have
bearing on the Design and Construction cannot be ruled out.
The Contractor shall, therefore, satisfy himself about the
adequacy and accuracy of the said data / information and
interpretation thereof and if necessary, by any further
Investigations to be conducted by the Contractor. Thus,
Employer shall not be responsible for the accuracy / adequacy
of the said data / information and interpretation thereof by the
Contractor.

4.11
Sufficiency of
the Contract Price
The Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied himself as to
the correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price.
Unless otherwise stated in the Contract, the Contract price
covers all the Contractors obligations under the Contract
(including those under provisional sums, if any) and all things
necessary for the proper design, execution and completion of
the Works and the remedying of any defects.
4.12
Unforeseeable
Difficulties
Except as other stated in the Contract:
a)

the Contractor shall be deemed to have obtained all

necessary information as to risks, contingencies and
other circumstances which may influence or affect the
Works:

b)
c)

4.13
Rights of Way
and Facilities

by signing the Contract, the Contractor accepts total

responsibility for having foreseen all difficulties and
costs of successfully completing the Works; and
the Contract Price shall not be adjusted to take account
of any unforeseen difficulties or costs.

The Contractor shall bear all costs and charges for special
and/or temporary rights-of-way which he may require, including
those for access to the Site. The Contractor shall also obtain, at
his risk and cost, any additional facilities outside the Site which
he may require for the purposes of the Works.

4.14
Avoidance of
Interference
The Contractor shall not interfere unnecessarily or improperly
with:
a)
b)

the convenience of the public, or

the access to and use and occupation of all roads and
footpaths, irrespective of whether they are public or in
the possession of the Employer or of others.

The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Employer harmless

against and from all damages, losses and expenses (including
legal fees and expenses) resulting from any such unnecessary
or improper interference.

4.15
Access Route

The Contractor shall be deemed to have been satisfied as to the

suitability and availability of access routes to the Site. The
Contractor shall use reasonable efforts to prevent any road or
bridge from being damaged by the Contractors traffic or by the
Contractors Personnel. These efforts shall include the proper
use of appropriate vehicles and routes.
Except as otherwise stated in these Conditions:
a)
b)

c)

the
Contractor shall (as between the Parties) be
responsible for any maintenance which may be required
for his use of access routes;
the Contractor shall provide all necessary signs or
directions along access routes, and shall obtain any
permission which may be required from the relevant
authorities for his use of routes, signs and directions;
the Employer shall not be responsible for any claims
which may arise from the use or otherwise of any access
route,

d)
e)

the Employer does not guarantee the suitability or

availability of particular access routes, and
Costs due to non-suitability or non-availability, for the use
required by the Contractor, of access routes shall be
borne by the Contractor.

For details refer Drawing for Approach Road to Intake and

various Intermediate Tanks.
4.16
Transport of
Goods
a)
b)
c)

4.17
Contractors
Equipment

the Contractor shall give the Employer not less than 21

days notice of the date on which any Plant or a major
item of other Goods will be delivered to the Site;
the Contractor shall be responsible for packing, loading,
transporting, receiving. unloading, storing and protection
all Goods and other things required for the Works; and
the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Employer
harmless against and from all damages, losses and
expenses (including legal fees and expenses) resulting
from the transport of Goods, and shall negotiate and pay
all claims arising from their transport.

The Contractor shall be responsible for all Contractors Equipment.

When brought on to the Site, Contractors Equipment shall be
deemed to be exclusively intended for the execution of the Works.

Plant, etc.,
Exclusive Use for
the Works

1) All Constructional Plant, Temporary Works and materials provided

by the Contractor shall, when brought on to the site, be deemed to
be exclusively intended for the execution of the Works and the
Contractor shall not remove the same or any part thereof, except
for the purpose of moving it from one part of the site to another,
without the consent, in writing, of the Engineer, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld.

Removal of Plant,
etc.

2) Upon completion of the works the Contractor shall remove from

the site all the said Constructional Plant and Temporary Works
remaining thereon and any unused materials provided by the
Contractor.

Employer not Liable

for Damage to
Plant, etc.

3) The Employer shall not at any time be liable for the loss of or
damage to any of the said Constructional Plant, Temporary Works or
materials .

Re-export of Plant

4) In respect of any Constructional Plant which the Contractor shall

have imported for the purposes of the Works, the Employer will
assist the Contractor, where required, in procuring any necessary
Government consent to the re-export of such Constructional Plant
by the Contractor upon the removal thereof as aforesaid.

Customs Clearance

5) The Employer will assist the Contractor, where required, in

obtaining clearance through the Customs of Constructional Plant,

materials and other things required for the Works.
4.18
Protection of the
Environment

4.19
Electricity, Water
and Gas

The Contractor shall take all reasonable steps to protect the

environment (both on and off the Site) and to limit damage and
nuisance to people and property resulting from pollution, noise
and other results of his operations.
The Contractor shall ensure that emissions, surface discharges
and effluent from the Contractors activities shall not exceed
the values prescribed by applicable laws.

The Contractor shall except as stated below, be responsible for

the provision of all power, water and other services he may
require in accordance with Sub-Clause 4.1 [Contractors General
Obligations].
The Contractor shall be entitled to use for the purpose of the
Works such supplies of electricity, water, gas and other services
as may be available on the Site. The Contractor shall, at his risk
and cost, provide any apparatus necessary for his use of these
services and for measuring the quantities consumed.
The quantities consumed and the amounts due (at these prices)
for such services shall be agreed or determined in accordance
with Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employers claims] and Sub-Clause 3.5
[Determinations]. The Contractor shall pay these amounts to
the Employer.
4.20
4.21
Progress Reports

Deleted

Monthly progress reports shall be prepared by the Contractor

and submitted to the Employer in six copies. The first report
shall cover the period up to the end of the first calendar month
following the Commencement Date. Reports shall be submitted
monthly thereafter, each within 5 days after the last day of the
period to which it relates.
Reporting shall continue until the Contractor has completed all
work, which is known to be outstanding at the completion date
stated in the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works.
Each report shall include:
(a)

charts and detailed descriptions of progress, including

each stage of design, Contractor's Documents,
procurement,
manufacture,
delivery
to
Site,

(b)
(c)

construction, erection, testing, commissioning and trial

operation;
photographs showing the status of manufacture and of
progress on the Site;
for the manufacture of each main item of Plant and
Materials, the name of the manufacturer, manufacture
location, percentage progress, and the actual or
expected dates of:
(i)
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)

commencement of manufacture,
Contractors inspections,
tests, and
shipment and arrival at the Site;

(d)

the details described in Sub-Clause 6.10 [Records of

Contractor's Personnel and Equipment];
(e)
copies of quality assurance documents, test results and
certificates of Material;
(e)
list of Variations, notices given under Sub-Clause 2.5
[Employer's Claims] and notices given under Sub-Clause
20.1 [Contractor's Claims];
(g)
safety statistics, including details of any hazardous
incidents and activities
relating to environmental aspects
and public relations; and
(h)
comparisons of actual and planned progress, with details
of any events or
circumstances
which
may
jeopardize the completion in accordance with the
Contract, and the measures being (or to be) adopted to
overcome delays.

4.22
Security of the Site
(a)
(b)

the Contractor shall be responsible

unauthorised persons off the Site, and

for

keeping

authorised persons shall be limited to the Contractor's

Personnel and the Employer's Personnel; and to any
other personnel notified to the Contractor, by (or on
behalf of) the Employer, as authorised personnel of the
Employer's other contractors on the Site.

4.23
Contractor's Operations
on Site
The Contractor shall confine his operations to the Site, and to
any additional areas which may be obtained by the Contractor
and agreed by the Employer as working areas. The Contractor
shall take all necessary precautions to keep Contractor's
Equipment and Contractor's Personnel within the Site and these
additional areas, and to keep them off adjacent land.

During the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall keep the
Site free from all unnecessary obstruction, and shall store or
dispose of any Contractor's Equipment or surplus materials. The
Contractor shall clear away and remove from the Site any
wreckage, rubbish and Temporary Works, which are no longer,
required.
Upon the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works, the
Contractor shall clear away and remove all Contractors
Equipment, surplus material, wreckage, rubbish and Temporary
Works. The Contractor shall leave the Site and the Works in a
clean and safe condition. However, the Contractor may retain
on Site, during the Defects Liability Period, such Goods as are
required for the Contractor to fulfill obligations under the
Contract.
4.24
Fossils
All fossils, coins, articles of value or antiquity, and structures
and other remains or items of geological or archaeological
interest found on the Site shall be placed under the care and
authority of the Employer. The Contractor shall take reasonable
precautions to prevent Contractor's Personnel or other persons
from removing or damaging any of these findings.
The Contractor shall, upon discovery of any such finding,
promptly give notice to the Employer, who shall issue
instructions for dealing with it. If the Contractor suffers delay
and/or incurs Cost from complying with the instructions, the
Contractor shall give a further notice to the Employer and shall
be entitled subject to Sub-Clause.20.1 [Contractor's Claims] to:
(a)
(b)

an extension of time for any such delay, if completion is

or will be delayed, under Sub-Clause 8.4 [Extension of
Time for Completion], and
payment of any such Cost, which shall be added to the
Contract Price.

After receiving this further notice, the Employer shall proceed in

accordance with Sub- Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to agree or
determine these matters.

5.

Design

5.1
General Design
Obligations
The Contractor shall be deemed to have scrutinized, prior to the
Base Date, the Employer's Requirements (including design
criteria and calculations, if any). The Contractor shall be
responsible for the design of the Works and for the accuracy of
such Employer's Requirements (including design criteria and
calculations), except as stated below.

The Employer shall not be responsible for any error, inaccuracy

or omission of any kind in the Employer's Requirements as
originally included in the Contract and shall not be deemed to
have given any representation of accuracy or completeness of
any data or information, except as stated below. Any data or
information received by the Contractor, from the Employer or
otherwise shall not relieve the Contractor from his responsibility
for the design and execution of the Works.
5.2
Contractor's Documents
The Contractor's Documents shall comprise the technical
documents specified in the Employer's Requirements,
documents required to satisfy all regulatory approvals, and the
documents described in Sub-Clause 5.6 [As-Built Documents]
and Sub-Clause 5.7 [Operation and Maintenance Manuals].
Unless otherwise stated in the Employer's Requirements, the
Contractors Documents shall be written in the language for
communications defined in Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law and Language].
The Contractor shall prepare all Contractor's Documents, and
shall also prepare any other documents necessary to instruct
the Contractors Personnel.
If the Employer's Requirements describe the Contractor's
Documents which are to be submitted to the Employer for
review, they shall be submitted accordingly, together with a
notice as described below. In the following provisions of this
Sub-Clause, (i) "review period" means the period required by
the Employer for review, and (ii) "Contractors Documents"
exclude any documents which are not specified as being
required to be submitted for review.
Unless otherwise stated in the Employer's Requirements, each
review period shall not exceed-21 days, calculated from the
date on which the Employer receives a Contractors Document
and the Contractor's notice. This notice shall state that the
Contractor's Document is considered ready, both for review in
accordance with this Sub-Clause and for use. The notice shall
also state that the Contractor's Document complies with the
Contract, or the extent to which it does not comply.
The Employers may, within the review period, give notice to the
Contractor that a Contractor's Document fails (to the extent
stated) to comply with the Contract. If a Contractor's Document
so fails to comply, it shall be rectified, resubmitted and
reviewed in accordance with this Sub-Clause, at the
Contractor's cost.
For each part of the Works, and except to the extent that the
Parties otherwise agree:
(a)

execution of such part of the Works shall not commence

prior to the expiry of the review periods for all the

(b)
(c)

(d)

Contractors Documents which are relevant to its design

and execution;
execution of such part of the Works shall be in
accordance with these Contractor's Documents, as
submitted for review; and
if the Contractor wishes to modify any design or document
which has previously been submitted for review, the
Contractor shall immediately give notice to the
Employer. Thereafter, the Contractor shall submit
revised documents to the Employer in accordance with
the above procedure.
if the Employer's Representative instruct that further
Construction Documents are necessary for carrying the
works, the Contractor shall upon receiving the
Employer's Representative Instructions prepare such
construction documents and shall not be considered as
variation under Clause - 13.0.

Any such agreement (under the preceding paragraph) or any

review (under this Sub-Clause or otherwise) shall not relieve the
Contractor from any obligation or responsibility.
5.3
Contractor's Undertaking
The Contractor undertakes that the design, the Contractors
Documents, the execution and the completed Works will be in
accordance with:
(a)
the Laws in the Country, and
(b)
the documents forming the Contract, as altered or
modified by Variations.

5.4.
Technical Standards and Regulations
The design, the Contractors Documents, the execution and the
completed work shall comply with the Country's technical
standards, building, construction and environmental Laws, Laws
applicable to the product being produced from the Works, and
other standards specified
in the Employer's Requirements, applicable to the Works, or
defined by the applicable Laws.
All these Laws shall, in respect of the Works and each Section,
be those prevailing when the Works or Section are taken over
by the Employer under Clause 10 [Employer's Taking Over].
References in the Contract to published standards shall be
understood to be references to the edition applicable on the
Base Date, unless stated otherwise.

If changed or new applicable standards come into force in the

Country after the Base Date, the Contractor shall give notice to
the Employer and (if appropriate) submit proposals for
compliance. In the event that:
(a) the Employer determines that compliance is required, and
(b) the proposals for compliance constitute a variation,
then the Employer shall initiate a Variation in accordance with
Clause 13 [Variations and Adjustments].
5.5
Training
The Contractor shall carry out the training of Employers
Personnel in the operation and maintenance of the Works to the
extent specified in the Employers Requirements. If the Contract
specifies training which is to be carried out before taking-over,
the Works shall not be considered to be completed for the
purposes of taking-over under Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking Over of
the Works and Sections] until this training has been completed.
5.6
As-Built Documents
The Contractor shall prepare, and keep up-to-date, a complete
set of 'as-built' records of the execution of the Works, showing
the exact as-built locations, sizes and details of the work as
executed. These records shall be kept on the Site and shall be
used exclusively for the purposes of this Sub-Clause. Two copies
shall be supplied to the Employer prior to the commencement
of the Tests on Completion.
In addition, the Contractor shall supply to the Employer as-built
drawings of the Works, showing all Works as executed, and
submit them to the Employer for review under Sub-Clause 5.2
[Contractor's Documents]. The Contractor shall obtain the
consent of the Employer as to their size, the referencing
system, and other relevant details.

5.7
Operation and

Prior to the issue of any Taking-Over Certificate, the Contractor

shall supply to the Employer the specified numbers and types of
copies of the relevant as-built drawings, in accordance with the
Employer's Requirements. The Work shall not be considered to
be completed for the purposes of taking-over under Sub Clause
10.1 [Taking Over of the Works and Sections] until the Employer
has received these documents.
Maintenance Manuals
Prior to commencement of the Tests on Completion, the
Contractor shall supply to the Employer provisional operation
and maintenance manuals in sufficient detail for the Employer
to operate, maintain, dismantle, reassemble, adjust and repair
the Plant.

The Works shall not be considered to be completed for the

purposes of taking-over under Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking Over of
the Works and Sections] until the Employer has received final
operation and maintenance manuals in such detail, and any
other manuals specified in the Employer's Requirements for
these purposes.
5.8
Design Error
If errors, omissions, ambiguities, inconsistencies, inadequacies
or other defects are found in the Contractor's Documents, they
and the Works shall be corrected at the Contractor's cost,
notwithstanding any consent or approval under this Clause.
6.

Staff and Labour

6.1
Engagement of Staff
and Labour
Except as otherwise stated in the Employer's Requirements, the
Contractor shall make arrangements for the engagement of all
staff and labour, local or otherwise, and for their payment,
housing, feeding and transport.
6.2
Rates of Wages and
conditions of labour
The Contractor shall pay rates of wages, and observe,
conditions of labour which are not lower than those established
for the trade or industry where the work is carried out. If no
established rates or conditions are applicable, the Contractor
shall pay rates of wages and observe conditions which are not
lower than the general level of wages and conditions observed
locally by employers whose trade or industry is similar to that of
the Contractor

6.3
Persons in the Service of Others
The Contractor shall not recruit, or attempt to recruit, staff and
labour from amongst he Employers Personnel.
6.4
Labour Laws
The Contractor shall comply with all the relevant labour Laws
applicable to the Contractor's Personnel, including Laws relating
to their employment, health, safety, welfare, immigration and
emigration, and shall allow them all their legal rights.

The Contractor shall require his employees to obey all

applicable Laws, including those concerning safety at work.
6.5
Working Hours
Subject to Indian laws and regulations, the contractor is
authorized to work day and night, as well as on Sundays and/or
festival days, provided that it makes payment of all sums due
therefore to its labour and personnel.
6.6
Facilities for Staff and Labour
Except as otherwise stated in the Employer's Requirements, the
Contractor shall provide and maintain all necessary
accommodation and welfare facilities for the Contractor's
Personnel. The Contractor shall also provide facilities for the
Employer's Personnel as stated in the Employer's Requirements.
The Contractor shall not permit any of the Contractors
Personnel to maintain any temporary or permanent living
quarters within the structures forming part of the Permanent
Works.
The Contractor shall remain responsible for removal and site
clearance of the entire project area as per instruction of the
Employer's Representative; unless the facilities are taken over
by the Employer.
6.7
Health and Safety

The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions

to maintain the health and safety of the Contractor's Personnel.
In collaboration with local health authorities, the Contractor
shall ensure that medical staff, first aid facilities, sick bay, and
ambulance service are available at all times at the Site and at
any accommodation for Contractor's and Employer's Personnel,
and that suitable arrangements are made for all necessary
welfare and hygiene requirements and for the prevention of
epidemics.
The Contractor shall appoint an accident prevention officer at
the Site, responsible for maintaining safety and protection
against accidents. This person shall be qualified for this
responsibility, and shall have the authority to issue instructions
and take protective measures to prevent accidents. Throughout
the execution of the Works, the Contractor shall provide
whatever is required by this person to exercise, this
responsibility and authority.
The Contractor shall send, to the Employer, details of any
accident as soon as practicable after its occurrence. The
Contractor shall maintain records and make reports concerning
health, safety and welfare of persons, and damage to property,
as the Employer may reasonably require.

6.8
Contractor's Superintendence
Throughout the design and execution of the Works, and as long
thereafter as is necessary to fulfill the Contractor's obligations,
the Contractor shall provide all necessary superintendence to
plan, arrange, direct, manage, inspect and test the work.
Superintendence shall be given by a sufficient number of
persons having adequate knowledge of the language for
communications (defined in Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law and Language]
and of the operations to be carried out (including the methods
and techniques required, the hazards likely to be encountered
and methods of preventing accidents), for the satisfactory and
safe execution of the Works.
6.9
Contractor's Personnel
The Contractor shall provide and employ on the site in
connection with the execution of the works and performance of
its obligations under the Contract:
(a) Only such technical personnel as are skilled and
experienced in their respective callings and such subagents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to do
or give proper supervision to the work they are required to
perform or supervise, and
(b) Such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is
necessary for the proper and timely execution of the works.
The Employer may require the Contractor to remove (or cause
to be removed) any person employed on the Site or Works,
including the Contractor's Representative if applicable, who:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

persists in any misconduct or lack of care,

carries out duties incompetently or negligently,
fails to conform with any provisions of the Contract, or
persists in any conduct which is prejudicial to safety,
health, or the protection of the environment.

If appropriate, the Contractor shall then appoint (or cause to be

appointed) a suitable replacement person.
6.10
Records of Contractor's
Personnel and Equipment
The Contractor shall submit, to the Employer, details showing
the number of each class of Contractors Personnel and of each
type of Contractor's equipment on the Site. Details shall be
submitted each calendar month, in a form approved by the
Employer, until the Contractor has completed all work which is
known to be outstanding at the completion date stated in the
Taking-Over Certificate for the Works.
6.11

Discorderly Conduct
The Contractor shall at all times take all reasonable precautions
to prevent any unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct by or
amongst the Contractors Personnel, and to preserve peace and
protection of persons and property on and near the Site.

7.

Plant, Materials and Workmanship

7.1
Manner of Execution
The Contractor shall carry out the manufacture of Plant, the
production and manufacture of Materials, and all other
execution of the Works:
(b)
(c)
(d)

in the manner (if any) specified in the Contract,

in a proper workmanlike and careful manner, in
accordance with recognised good practice, and
with properly equipped facilities and non-hazardous
Materials, except as otherwise specified in the Contract.

7.2
Samples
The Contractor shall submit samples to the Employer for review
in accordance with the procedures for Contractor's Documents
described in Sub-Clause 5.2 [Contractor's Documents], as
specified in the Contract and at the Contractor's cost. Each
sample shall be labeled as to origin and intended use in the
Works.
7.3
Inspection

The Employer's Personnel or an outside agency authorized by

the Employer shall:
(a) have full access to all parts of the Site and to all places
from which natural Materials are being obtained, and
(b) during production, manufacture and construction (at the
Site and, to the extent specified in the Contract,
elsewhere), be entitled to examine, inspect, measure, and
test the materials and workmanship, and to check the
progress of manufacture of Plant and production and
manufacture of Materials.
The Contractor shall give the Employer's Personnel or an
outside agency authorized by the Employer full opportunity to
carry out these activities. Including providing access, facilities,
permissions and safety equipment. No such activity shall relieve
the Contractor from any obligation or responsibility.
In respect of the work which The Employer's Personnel or an
outside agency authorized by the Employer are entitled to
examine, inspect, measure and/or test, the Contractor shall give
notice to the Employer whenever any such work is ready and
before it is covered up, put out of sight, or packaged for storage
or transport. The Employer shall then either carry out the

examination, inspection, measurement or testing without

unreasonable delay, or promptly give notice to the Contractor
that the Employer does not require to do so. If the Contractor
fails to give the notice, he shall, if and when required by the
Employer, uncover the work and thereafter reinstate and make
good, all at the Contractor's cost.
7.4
Testing
This Sub-Clause shall apply to all tests specified in the Contract,
other than the Tests after Completion (if any).
The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, assistance,
documents and other information, electricity, equipment, fuel,
consumables, instruments, labour, materials, and suitably
qualified and experienced staff, as are necessary to carry out
the specified tests efficiently. The Contractor shall agree, with
the Employer, the time and place for the specified testing of
any Plant, Materials and other parts of the Works.
The Employer may, under Clause 13 [Variations and
Adjustments], vary the location or details of specified tests, or
instruct the Contractor to carry out additional tests. If these
varied or additional tests show that the tested Plant, Materials
or workmanship is not in accordance with the Contract, the cost
of carrying out this Variation shall be borne by the Contractor,
notwithstanding other provisions of the Contract.
The Employer shall give the Contractor not less than 24 hours'
notice of the Employer's intention to attend the tests. If the
Employer does not attend at the time and place agreed, the
Contractor may proceed with the tests, unless otherwise
instructed by the Employer, and the tests shall then be deemed
to have been made in the Employer's presence.

If the Contractor suffers delay and/or incurs Cost from

complying with these instructions or as a result of a delay for
which the Employer is responsible, the Contractor shall give
notice to the Employer and shall be entitled subject to Sub
Clause 20.1 [Contractor's Claims] to:
(a)

an extension of time for any such delay, if completion is

or will be delayed, under Sub-Clause 8.4 [Extension of
Time for Completion].

After receiving this notice, the Employer shall proceed in

accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to agree or
determine these matters.
The Contractor shall promptly forward to the Employer duly
certified reports of the tests. When the specified tests have

7.5
Rejection

7.6
Remedial Work

been passed, the Employer shall endorse The Contractor's test

certificate, or issue a certificate to him, to that effect. If the
Employer has not attended the tests, he shall be deemed to
have accepted the readings as accurate.
If, as a result of an examination, inspection, measurement or
testing, any Plant, Materials, design or workmanship is found to
be defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract,
the Employer may reject the Plant, Materials, design or
workmanship by giving notice to the Contractor, with reasons.
The Contractor shall then promptly make good the defect and
ensure that the rejected item complies with the Contract.
If the Employer requires this Plant, Materials, design a
workmanship to be retested, the tests shall be repeated under
the same terms and conditions. If the rejection and retesting
cause the Employer to incur additional costs, the Contractor
shall subject to Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer's Claims] pay these
costs to the Employer.
Notwithstanding any previous test or certification, the Employer
may instruct the Contractor to:
(a)
(b)
(c)

remove from the Site and replace any Plant or Materials

which is not in accordance with the Contract,
remove and re-execute any other work which is not in
accordance with the Contract, and
execute any work which is urgently required for the
safety of the Works, whether because of an accident,
unforeseeable event or otherwise.
If the Contractor fails to comply with any such
instruction, which complies with Sub-Clause 3.4
[Instructions], the Employer shall be entitled to employ
and pay other persons to carry out the work. Except to
the extent that the Contractor would have been entitled
to payment for the work, the Contractor shall subject to
Sub Clause 2.5 [Employer's Claims] pay to the Employer
all costs arising from this failure.

7.7
Employer ship of
Plant and Materials
Each item of Plant and Materials shall, to the extent consistent
with the Laws of the Country, become the property of the
Employer at whichever is the earlier of the following times, free
from liens and other encumbrances:

(a)

when it is delivered to the Site;

(b)

when the Contractor is entitled to payment of the value

of the Plant and Materials under Sub-Clause 8.10
[Payment for Plant and Materials in Event of Suspension].

7.8
Royalties
Unless otherwise stated in the Employer's Requirements, the
Contractor shall pay all royalties, rents and other payments for:
(a)
(b)

8.

natural Materials obtained from outside the Site, and

the disposal of material from demolitions and
excavations and of other surplus material (whether
natural or man-made), except to the extent that disposal
areas within the Site are specified in the Contract.

Commencement, Delays and Suspension

8.1
Commencement of Works
The Contractor shall commence the Design Engineering and
Infrastructure works within 15 days (fifteen) days from the date
of issue of Letter of Award (LOA). Execution of Civil Works shall
come into effect subsequent to when each and all of the
following conditions have been fulfilled, which shall be subject
to a maximum time limit of 15 (fifteen) days from the date of
issue of LOA.
(a) Signing of the Contract Agreement and Credit Agreements
(if any);
(b) Delivery to the Employer of the Performance Security
pursuant to Sub-Clause 4.2 hereof;

8.2
Time for Completion
8.2.1

Time for completion of works as per Sub-Clause 10.1 shall be 24

months reckoned from the date of order to commence referred to
Sub-Clause 8.1.

8.2.2

The Contractor shall complete the whole of the works and each
section (if any) within the time for completion for the works or section
(as the case may be) including:
(a) Achieving the passing of the Tests on Completion and
(b) Completing all works which are stated in the Contract as being
required for the Works or Sections to be considered to be
completed for the purposes of issue of completion certificate
covering part A of the contract in accordance with Sub-Clause
10.1 [Taking Over of the Works and Sections].

8.2.3

For the purpose of Sub-Clause 8.2.3, 8.4 and 10.2 hereof "Works"
shall have the same meaning as defined in Sub-Clause 4.4 and shall
include all the Permanent and Temporary Works to be executed, all
items and things to be supplied / done and all services and activities
to be performed such as the planning, design and engineering

service, civil works, electrical, mechanical, hydro-mechanical and

other supply, erection works including testing and commissioning and
all auxiliary and associated works and services all required for the
completion in all respects of all the pumping units.
8.3
Programme
8.3.1

The Contractor shall submit a time programme to the employer

within 10 (ten) days after the commencement date and the
programme shall be based on the basic time period for completion
and milestone as indicated in the Contract Document. Contractors
programme shall be considered effective upon acceptance by the
Employer's Representative.

8.3.2

The Contractor shall also submit a revised programme whenever the

previous programme is consistent with actual progress or with the
Contractor's obligations unless other wise stated in the contract each
programme shall include:
(a) the order in which the Contractor intends to carry out the Works,
including the anticipated timing of each major stage of the Works.
(b) The periods for reviews under Sub-Clause 5.2 [Contractor's
Documents],
(c) The sequence and timing of inspections and tests specified in the
Contract, and
(d) A supporting report which includes:
(i)

8.3.3

8.3.4

a general description of the methods which the Contractor

intends to adopt for the execution of each major stage of the
Works, and
(ii)
the approximate number of each class of Contractor's
Personnel and of each type of Contractor's Equipment for each
major stage.
Unless the Employer, within 21 days after receiving a programme,
gives notice to the Contractor stating the extent to which it does not
comply with the Contract, the Contractor shall proceed in accordance
with the programme, subject to his other obligations under the
Contract. The Employer's Personnel shall be entitled to rely upon the
programme when planning their activities.
The Contractor shall promptly give notice to the Employer of specific
probable future events or circumstances, which may adversely affect
or delay the execution of the Works. In this event, or if the Employer
gives notice to the Contractor that if a programme fails (to the extent
stated) to comply with the Contract or to be consistent with actual
progress and the Contractor's stated intentions, the Contractor shall
submit a revised programme to the Employer in accordance with this
Sub-Clause.

8.4
Extension of
Time for Completion

8.4.1

Time allowed for execution of the works as specified in SubClause 8.2.3 is the essence of the Contract.

8.4.2

However, if the Work is delayed on account of the following

events and affect the Time for Completion of the Works:
(i)
Force Majeure as defied in Sub-Clause 19.6 or
(ii)
Excepted Risks
(iii)
Suspension of Work for which extension is admissible as
per Sub-Clause 8.8 or
(vi) a) General strikes in India or in the country of the
Contractor
b) Railway or Road way or Port or Shipping Strikes in India
or outside India
c) Country wide Strikes in Cement of Steel factories or Oil
Companies in India, but always excluding strikes limited
to personnel of the contractor and / or its subContractors.
The contractor shall subject to the provisions of the Contract,
within 14 days of the happening of any such event as aforesaid
give notice thereof in writing to the Employers Representative
and within a period of further four weeks following the 7 days
period, shall give a second notice to the Employer
Representative setting out therein particulars of the event
impeding or delaying the Works, the part of the works affected
by such event, the likely effect on the Time of Completion of
the Works specified in Sub-Clause 8.2 and, the extension in
Time for Completion required with justification therefore. Such
notice shall be accompanied by evidence of the happening of
the event referred to in Sub-Clause 8.4.2 herein above. On
receipt of such notice, the Employer Representative may grant
such extension of time as considered fair and reasonable in his
opinion.

8.5

(Deleted)

8.6
Rate of Progress
If, at any time:
(a)
(b)

actual progress is too slow to complete within the Time

for Completion, and/or
progress has fallen (or will fall) behind the current
programme under Sub-Clause 8.3 [Programme],

other than as a result of a cause listed in Sub-Clause 8.4

[Extension of Time for Completion], then the Employer may
instruct the Contractor to submit, under Sub Clause 8.3
[Programme], a revised programme and supporting report
describing the revised methods which the Contractor proposes
to adopt in order to expedite progress and complete within the
Time for Completion.

Unless the Employer notifies otherwise, the Contractor shall

adopt these revised methods, which may require increases in
the working hours and/or in the numbers of Contractor's
Personnel and/or Goods, at the risk and cost of the Contractor. If
these revised methods cause the Employer to incur additional
costs, the Contractor shall subject to Sub-Clause 2.5
[Employer's Claims] pay these costs to the Employer, in
addition to delay damages (if any) under Sub-Clause 8.7 below.
8.7
Delay Damages
If the Contractor fails to comply with Sub-Clause 8.2 (Time for
Completion), the Contractor shall be subject to Sub-Clause 2.5
(Employers Claims) pay delay damages to the Employer for this
default. These delay damages shall be the sum stated in the
Appendix to Tender, which shall be paid for every day which shall
elapse between the relevant mile stone/Time for Completion and the
date stated in the Taking Over Certificate. However, the total amount
due under this Sub-Clause shall not exceed 10% of the total Part A of
contract price.
These delay damages shall be the only damages due from the
Contractor for such default, other than in the event of termination
under Sub- Clause 15.2 (Termination by Employer) prior to
completion of the Works. These damages shall not relieve the
Contractor from his obligation to complete the Works, or from any
other duties, obligations or responsibilities, which he may have under
the Contract.
8.8
Suspension of Work
The Employer may at any time instruct the Contractor to
suspend progress of part or all of the Works. During such
suspension, the Contractor shall protect, store and secure such
part or the Works against any deterioration, loss or damage.
The Employer may also notify the cause for the suspension. If
and to the extent that the cause is notified and is the
responsibility of the Contractor, the Contractor shall not be
entitled for payment of any such cost, which shall be added to
the Contract Price.
8.9

(Deleted)

8.10

(Deleted)

8.11

(Deleted)

8.12

(Deleted)

9.

Tests on Completion

9.1
Contractors
Obligations

The Contractor shall carry out the Tests on Completion in

accordance with this Clause and Sub-Clause 7.4, [Testing] after
providing the documents in with Sub Clause 5.6 [As-Built
Documents] and Sub-Clause 5.7 [Operation and Maintenance
Manual].
The Contractor shall give to the Employer not less than 21 days'
notice of the date after which the Contractor will be ready to
carry out each of the Tests on Completion. Unless otherwise
agreed, Tests on Completion shall be carried out within 14 days
after this date, on such day or days as the Employer shall
instruct.
The Tests on Completion shall be carried out in the following
sequence:
(a)

(b)

(c)

pre-commissioning tests, which shall include the

appropriate inspections and ("dry" or "cold") functional
tests to demonstrate that each item of Plant can safely
under-take the next stage,(b);
commissioning tests, which shall include the specified
operational tests to demonstrate that the Works or
Section can be operated safely and as specified, under all
available operating conditions; and
trial operation, which shall demonstrate that the Works or
Section perform reliably and in accordance with the
Contract.

During trial operation, when the Works are operating under

stable conditions, the Contractor shall give notice to the
Employer that the Works are ready for any other Tests on
Completion, including performance tests to demonstrate
whether the Works conform with criteria specified in the
Employer's
Requirements
and
with
the
Performance
Guarantees.
Trial operation shall not constitute a completion certificate
under Clause 10 [Employer's Taking Over]. Any product
produced by the Works during trial operation shall be the
property of the Employer.
In considering the results of the Tests on Completion,
appropriate allowances shall be made for the effect of any use
of the Works by the Employer on the performance or other
characteristics of the Works. As soon as the Works, or a Section,
have passed each of the Tests on Completion described in subparagraph (a), (b) or (c), the Contractor shall submit a certified
report of the results of these Tests to the Employer.
9.2

Delayed Tests
If the Tests on Completion are being unduly delayed by the
Contractor, the Employer may by notice require the Contractor
to carry out the Tests within 21 days after receiving the notice.
The Contractor shall carry out the Tests on such day or days
within that period as the Contractor may fix and of which he
shall give notice to the Employer
If the Contractor fails to carry out the Tests on Completion
within the period of 21 days, the Employers Personnel may
proceed with the Tests at the risk and cost of the Contractor.
These Tests on Completion shall then be deemed to have been
carried out in the presence of the Contractor and the results of
the Tests shall be accepted as accurate.

9.3
Retesting
If the Works, or a Section, fail to pass the Tests on Completion,
Sub-Clause 7.5 [Rejection] shall apply, and the Employer or the
Contractor may require the failed Tests, and Tests on
Completion on any related work, to be repeated under the same
terms and conditions.
9.4
Failure to Pass
Tests on Completion
If the Works, or a Section, fail to pass the Tests on Completion
repeated under Sub-Clause 9.3 [Retesting], the Employer shall
be entitled to:
(a)
(b)

(c)

order further repetition of Tests on Completion

under Sub-Clause 9.3;
if the failure deprives the Employer of
substantially the whole benefit of the Works or Section,
reject the Works or Section (as the case may be), in
which event the Employer shall have the same remedies
as are provided in sub-paragraph (c) of Sub-Clause 11.4
[Failure to Remedy Defects]; or
issue a completion Certificate after levying
liquidated damages as specified in Appendix to Tender

In the event of sub-paragraph (c), the Contractor shall proceed

in accordance with all other obligations under the Contract, and
the Contract Price shall be reduced by such amount as shall be
appropriate to cover the reduced value to the Employer as a
result of this failure. Unless the relevant reduction for this
failure is stated (or its method of calculation is defined) in the
Contract, the Employer may require the reduction to be (i)
agreed by both Parties (in full satisfaction of this failure only)
and paid before this Completion Certificate is issued, or (ii)
determined and paid under Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer's Claims]
and Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations].

10.

Employer's Taking Over

10.1
Taking Over of the
Works and Sections
Except as stated in Sub-Clause 9.4 [Failure to Pass Tests on
Completion], the total Works covering part A of the contract
comprising Sections I, II, III, IV and V shall be initially certified to
be complete by the Employer when (i) the Works have been
completed in accordance with the Contract, including the
matters described in Sub-Clause 8.2 [Time for Completion] and
except as allowed in sub-paragraph (a) below, and (ii) a
completion Certificate for the Works has been issued, or is
deemed to have been issued in accordance with this SubClause.
The Contractor may apply by notice to the Employer for a
completion Certificate not earlier than 14 days before the
Works will, in the Contractor's opinion, be complete and ready
for operation.
The Employer shall, within 28 days after receiving the
Contractor's application:
(a) Issue the completion certificate to the Contractor stating
the date on which the total works of part A comprising
Sections I, II, III, IV and V were completed in accordance
with the Contact; or
(b)

reject the application, giving reasons and specifying the

work required to be done by the Contractor to enable the
completion Certificate to be issued. The Contractor shall
then complete this work before issuing a further notice
under this Sub-Clause.

The Contractor shall be handed over the project along with all
its components including Intake pump house, intermediate and
booster pump houses, pipeline and allied works immediately
after issue of completion certificate for part A (EPC Part)
comprising Sections I, II, III, IV and V and the Contractor would
Operate and Maintain the project for a period of 2(two) years in
accordance with Employers Requirements. After completion of
the operation and maintenance period of 2(two) years, takingover certificate will be issued in accordance with the provision
in the Contract.

10.2
Taking Over of Parts of the Works

Parts of the Works shall not be taken over or used by the

Employer, except as may be stated in the Contract or as may
be agreed by both Parties.
10.3

11.

(Deleted)

Defects Liability

11.1
Completion of Outstanding Work
and Remedying Defects
Defect liability period shall be two years from the date of issue
of completion certificate in accordance with Sub-clause 10.1.
In order that the Works and Contractors Documents, and each
Section, shall be in the condition required by the Contract (fair
wear and tear excepted) by the expiry date of the relevant
Defects Liability Period or as soon as practicable thereafter, the
Contractor shall:
(a)
(b)

complete any work which is outstanding on the date

stated in a Taking-Over Certificate, within such
reasonable time as is instructed by the Employer, and
execute all work required to remedy defects or damage,
as may be notified by the Employer on or before the
expiry date of the Defects Liability Period for the Works
or Section (as the case may be).

If a defect appears or damage occurs, the Employer shall notify

the Contractor accordingly.
11.2
Cost of Remedying Defects
All work referred to in sub-paragraph (b) of Sub-Clause 11.1
[Completion of Outstanding Work and Remedying Defects] shall
be executed at the risk and cost of the Contractor if and to the
extent that the work is attributable to:
(a)
(b)
(c)

(d)

the design of the Works,

Plant, Materials or workmanship not being in accordance
with the Contract,
improper operation or maintenance which was
attributable to matters for which the Contractor is
responsible (under Sub-Clauses 5.5 to 5.7 or otherwise),
or
failure by the Contractor to comply with any other
obligation.

If and to the extent that such work is attributable to any other

cause, the Employer shall give notice to the Contractor
accordingly, and Sub-Clause 13.3 [Variation Procedure] shall
apply.

11.3

(Deleted)

11.4
Failure to Remedy
Defects

If the Contractor fails to remedy any defect or damage within a

reasonable time, a date may be fixed by (or on behalf of) the
Employer, on or by which the defect or damage is to be
remedied. The Contractor shall be given reasonable notice of
this date.
If the Contractor fails to remedy the defect or damage by this
notified date and this remedial work was to be executed at the
cost of the Contractor under Sub-Clause 11.2 [Cost of
Remedying Defects], the Employer may (at his option):
(a)

(b)
(c)

carry out the work himself or by others, in a reasonable

manner and at the Contractor's cost, but the Contractor
shall have no responsibility for this work; and the
Contractor shall subject to Sub-Clause 2.5 [Employer's
Claims] pay to the Employer the costs reasonably
incurred by the Employer in remedying the defect or
damage;
agree or determine a reasonable reduction in the
Contract price in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5
[Determinations]; or
if the defect or damage deprives the Employer of
substantially the whole benefit of the Works or any major
part of the Works, terminate the Contract as a whole, or
in respect of such major part which cannot be put to the
intended use. Without prejudice to any other rights,
under the Contract or otherwise, the Employer shall then
be entitled to recover all sums paid for the Works or for
such part (as the case may be), plus financing costs and
the cost of dismantling the same, clearing the Site and
returning Plant and Materials to the Contractor.

11.5
Removal of Defective Work
If the defect or damage cannot be remedied expeditiously on
the Site and the Employer gives consent, the Contractor may
remove from the Site for the purposes of repair such items of
Plant as are defective or damaged. This consent may require
the Contractor to increase the amount of the Performance
Security by the full replacement cost of these items, or to
provide other appropriate security.
11.6
Further Tests
If the work of remedying of any defect or damage may affect
the performance of the Works, the Employer may require the
repetition of any of the tests described in the Contract,
including Tests on Completion and/or Tests after Completion.

The requirement shall be made by notice within 28 days after

the defect or damage is remedied.
These tests shall be carried out in accordance with the terms
applicable to the previous tests, except that they shall be
carried out at the risk and cost of the Party liable, under SubClause 11.2 [Cost of Remedying Defects], for the cost of the
remedial work.
11.7
Right of Access
Until the Performance Certificate has been issued, the
Contractor shall have the right of access to all parts of the
Works and to records of the operation and performance of the
Works, except as may be inconsistent with the Employer's
reasonable security restrictions.
11.8

(Deleted)

11.9
Performance Certificate
Performance of the Contractor's obligations shall not be
considered to have been completed until the Employer has
issued the Performance Certificate to the Contractor, stating the
date on which the Contractor completed his obligations under
the Contract.
The Employer shall issue the Performance Certificate within 28
days after the latest of the expiry dates of the Defects Liability
Periods, or as soon thereafter as the Contractor has supplied all
the Contractor's Documents and completed and tested all the
Works, including remedying any defects. If the Employer fails to
issue the Performance Certificate accordingly:
(a)

(b)

the Performance Certificate shall be deemed to have

been issued on the date 28 days after the date on which
it should have been issued, as required by this SubClause, and
Sub-Clause 11.11 [Clearance of Site] and sub-paragraph
(a) of Sub-Clause
14.14 [Cessation of Employers
Liability] shall be inapplicable.

Only the Performance Certificate shall be deemed to constitute

acceptance of the Works.
11.10
Unfulfilled Obligations
After the Performance Certificate has been issued, each Party
shall remain liable for the fulfillment of any obligation which
remains unperformed at that time. For the purposes of
determining the nature and extent of unperformed obligations,
the Contract shall be deemed to remain in force.

11.11
Clearance of Site
Upon receiving the Performance Certificate, the Contractor shall
remove any remaining Contractor's Equipment, surplus
material, wreckage, rubbish and Temporary Works from the Site.
If all these items have not been removed within 28 days after
the Employer issues the Performance Certificate, the Employer
may sell or otherwise dispose of any remaining items. The
Employer shall be entitled to be paid the costs incurred in
connection with, or attributable to, such sale or disposal and
restoring the Site.
Any balance of the moneys from the sale shall be paid to the
Contractor. It these moneys are less than the Employer's costs,
the Contractor shall pay the outstanding balance to the
Employer.

12.

Test after Completion

12.1
Procedure for Tests after Completion
If Tests after Completion are specified in the Contract, this
Clause shall apply.
(a)
(b)

(c)

the Employer shall provide all electricity, fuel and

materials, and make the Employer's Personnel and Plant
available;
the Contractor shall provide any other plant, equipment
and suitably qualified and experienced staff, as are
necessary to carry out the Tests after Completion
efficiently; and
the Contractor shall carry out the Tests after Completion
in the presence of such Employer's and/or Contractor's
Personnel as either Party may reasonably request.

The Tests after Completion shall be carried out as soon as is

reasonably practicable after the period of 2 (two) years of
Operation and maintenance. The Employer shall give to the
Contractor 21 days' notice of the date after which the Tests
after Completion will be carried out. Unless otherwise agreed,
these Tests shall be carried out within 14 days after this date,
on the day or days determined by the Employer.
The results of the Tests after Completion shall be compiled and
evaluated by the Contractor, who shall prepare a detailed
report. Appropriate account shall be taken of the effect of the
Employer's prior use of the Works.
12.2

(Deleted)

12.3
Retesting

If the Works, or a Section, fail to pass the Tests after Completion

(a) sub-paragraph (b) of Sub-Clause 11.1 [Completion of
Outstanding Work and Remedying of Defects] shall apply,
and
(b) either Party may then require the failed Tests, and the Tests
after Completion on any related work, to be repeated under
the same terms and conditions.
If and to the extent that this failure and retesting are
attributable to any of the matters listed in sub-paragraphs (a) to
(d) of Sub-Clause 11.2 [Cost of Remedying Defects] and cause
the Employer to incur additional costs, the Contractor shall
subject to Sub- Clause 2.5 [Employer's Claims] pay these costs
to the Employer.
12.4
Failure to Pass Tests
after Completion
If the following conditions apply, namely:
(e)
the Works, or a Section, fail to pass any or all of the Tests
after Completion,
(f)
the relevant sum payable as non-performance damages
for this failure is stated (or its method of calculation is
defined) in the Contract, and
(g)
the Contractor pays this relevant sum to the Employer
with in the validity period of performance security ,
Otherwise the Employer will proceed for recovery of the
amount by encashment of the performance security.
then the Works shall be deemed to have passed these Tests
after Completion.
If the Works fail to pass a Test after Completion and the
Contractor proposes to make adjustments or modifications to
the Works or such Section, the Contractor may be instructed by
(or on behalf of) the Employer that right of access to the Works
or Section cannot be given until a time that is convenient to the
Employer. The Contractor shall then remain liable to carry out
the adjustments or modifications and to satisfy this Test, within
a reasonable period of receiving notice by (or on behalf 0f the
Employer of the time that is convenient to the Employer.
However, if the Contractor does not receive this notice during
the currency of the contract, the Contractor shall be relieved of
this obligation and the Works shall be deemed to have passed
this Test after Completion.
After receiving this notice, the Employer shall proceed in
accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to agree or
determine this Cost and profit.

13.

Variations and Adjustments

13.1
Right to Vary
Variations may be initiated by the Employer at any time prior to
issuing the Taking-Over Certificate for the Works, either by an
instruction or by a request for the Contractor to submit a
proposal. A Variation shall not comprise the omission of any
work which is to be carried out by others.
The Contractor shall execute and be bound by each Variation,
unless the Contractor promptly gives notice to the Employer
stating (with supporting particulars) that (i) the Contractor
cannot readily obtain the Goods required for the Variation, (i) it
will reduce the safety or suitability of the Works, or (iii) it will
have an adverse impact on the achievement of the Performance
Guarantees. Upon receiving this notice, the Employer shall
cancel, confirm or vary the instruction.
13.2
Value Engineering

The Contractor may, at any time, submit to the Employer a

written proposal which (in the Contractors opinion) will, if
adopted, (i) accelerate completion, (ii) reduce the cost to the
Employer of executing, maintaining or operating the Works, (iii)
improve the efficiency or value to the Employer of the
completed Works, or (iv) otherwise be of benefit to the
Employer.
The proposal shall be prepared at the cost of the Contractor
and shall include the items listed in Sub-Clause 13.3 [Variation
Procedure].

13.3
Variation Procedure
If the Employer requests a proposal, prior to instructing a
Variation, the Contractor shall respond in writing as soon as
practicable; either by giving reasons why he cannot comply (if
this is the case) or by submitting:
(a)
(b)

a description of the proposed design and/or work to be

performed and a programme for its execution,
the
Contractor's
proposal
for
any
necessary
modifications to the programme according to Sub-Clause
8.3 [Programme] and to the Time for Completion, and

(c)

the Contractor's proposal for adjustment to the Contract

Price.
The Employer shall, as soon as practicable after receiving such
proposal (under Sub Clause 13.2 [Value Engineering] or
otherwise), respond with approval, disapproval or comments.

The Contractor shall not delay any work whilst awaiting a

response.
Each instruction to execute a Variation, with any requirements
for the recording of Costs, shall be issued by the Employer to
the Contractor, who shall acknowledge receipt. .
Upon instructing or approving a Variation, the Employer shall
proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5 [Determinations] to
agree or determine adjustments to the Contract Price and the
Schedule of Payments. These adjustments shall include
reasonable profit, and shall take account of the Contractor's
submissions under Sub Clause 13.2 [Value Engineering] if
applicable.
13.4
Payment in Applicable
Currencies
The Contract provides for payment of the Contract Price in
Indian Rupees only.
13.5

(Deleted)

13.6

(Deleted)

13.7
Adjustments for
Changes in Legislation
No price adjustment shall be applicable on any account either for
increase or decrease in cost resulting from a change in the laws of
Union of India including the introduction of new laws and also due to
variation in exchange rates for conversion of currencies.
13.8
Adjustments for
Changes in Costs
The Contract Price shall not be subject to adjustment for any
changes in the cost of labour, materials or other inputs to the
works during the Contract period.

14. Contract Price and Payment

14.1

The Contact Price shall be comprising of:

PART A Total value of the work for EPC Turnkey Contract as per Contract
Agreement.
PART B Total value of the work for Operation and Maintenance of the
installation for a period of 2 (two) years as per Contract Agreement.
(a) The Employer will pay the Contractor a Firm Contract Price for
completion of all works as specified under the scope of work /
employers requirement; which shall include but not limited to supply
and installation of all plants and its accessories leading to successful

(b)

(c)
(d)

(e)

commissioning of 2 nos. of 7,4.2,3,2.5 Cumecs pumps at pump houses

and 3000 mm to 2000 mm steel pipeline as shown in tabular form
4.5.8 of Vol-II_Part-C with allied works including operation and
maintenance of the Pumps, other allied electric equipment for a period
of 2 (two) years after successful commissioning of the project PhaseII
on EPC Turnkey cum O&M contract basis.
payment for the Works shall be made on a fixed lump sum monthly
basis. Assessment for verification of payment shall be made on the
basis of the quantity executed and corresponding quoted rates in the
Contract. However, the Contractor shall be entitled to get fixed lump
sum monthly installment payment provided the value of the work
executed is more than or equal to the fixed lump sum monthly
installment as indicated in Contract under Sub- Clause 14.4
The Contractor shall pay all duties and taxes in consequence of his
obligations under the Contract, and the Contract Price shall not be
adjusted for such costs, as stated in Sub-Clause 13.7;
any quantities set out in the price schedules by the Contractor shall be
considered as minimum quantities to be executed against each item of
works identified in the price schedules. However, in all cases payment
shall be limited to the total price quoted by the Contractor against each
item of works.
any quantities, prices or rates of payment per unit quantity which may
be set out in a Schedule are only to be used to assess the value of
interim payments as per Clause 14.3.

(f) the Contract Price will be paid to the Contractor in Indian Rupees only as
indicated in the Contract Price Schedule.
14.2

Advance Payments

14.2.1

The Employer will make recoverable advance payments to the extent of 10%
(ten Percent) of the total value of the Part A of the Contract Price in two
installments. Interest @8% per annum (simple interest) against the above
advance shall be charged.

14.2.2

First installment equivalent to 5% (five percent) of the PART A contract price

as advance payment for mobilization shall be certified upon submission of:
(a) Bank Guarantee (in the form set out in Annexure GCCII)
of equivalent amount,
(b) Contract agreement as per Sub-Clause 1.6
(c) Performance security 5% (five percent) of the total value of the Contract as
indicated in Sub- Clause 4.2.

14.2.3

Second installment equivalent to 5% (five percent) of the total PART-A

contract price as advance payment shall be certified upon submission of:
(a) Bank Guarantee (in the form set out in Annexure GCCII)
of equivalent amount,
(b) Confirmation about mobilization
(c) Additional Investigation Documents,
(d) Submittal of Pipe line Design documents for approval
Both the above Bank Guarantee for advance shall be remain valid for a period
of 3 (three) months in excess of time for completion as specified under Sub-

Clause 8.2 for Section (I), (II), (III), (IV) and (V) of the work.
14.3

Application for Interim Payment Certificates

The Contractor shall submit a statement in six copies to the Engineer-in-charge
after the end of each month, in a form approved by the Engineer-in-charge,
showing the amounts to which the Contractor considers himself to be entitled,
together with supporting documents which shall include the detailed report on
the progress during the month in accordance with Sub-Clause 4.14 for each
section of the Work. The statement shall include the following items, as
applicable, which shall be expressed in Indian Rupees and also shall include the
following items, as applicable, which shall be expressed in the sequence listed
below:
(a)

the estimated contract value of the Construction Documents produced and

the Works executed up to the end of the month;

(b)

amount to be deducted for retention, shall be @5% from the each interim
bills except form advance payments.

(c)

any amount to be deducted against recovery of advance amount in

accordance with rate specified in Appendix to Tender,

(d)

Delay damages in respect of non-achievement of milestone as per

Appendix to Tender

(e) any other additions or deductions which may have become due in
accordance with the Contract (including those under Clause 20)
(f)

Deduction of Income tax, works contract tax and other taxes etc. as
applicable.

(g) The total amounts certified on all previous Interim Payment Certificates.
14.3.1

14.3.2

Payment for Section I separate payment for Design and Engineering

services for Civil/Hydro-mechanical/Electro-mechanical engineering works and
plants shall be assessed on the basis of the rate specified in the contract
Payment for Section II - Civil Works as indicated in the Schedule shall be
paid towards execution of civil works against monthly interim payment
certificate prepared on the basis of various items and quantities of work
executed at the unit rates of various items of works as per detailed Schedule of
Works and upon subsequent certification by the Engineer- in- charge. No
secured advance against any placement and purchase of construction
materials/manufactured materials/ brought out items shall be made against any
civil works. All progressive payments made towards civil works shall be treated
as interim payment. No payment against any earthwork in excavation in
foundation of structure shall be made until the foundation concrete has been
laid and foundation work of the relevant structure has been completed.
However, in all cases payment shall be limited to the total price quoted by the
Contractor against each item of works. Payment shall be effective to the extent
of execution of each activity in respect of each individual structure. Contractor
shall submit a bill to the Employer indicating cumulative value of the works
executed against individual structure, payment already received against each

14.3.3

of the structure till the date of next/preceding bill and the balance of the
amount payable under these items for individual structure.
Payment for Section III Hydro-mechanical works shall be made as under:
a) 70% of the quoted price shall be paid on receipt of each brought out item of
works as indicated in the Price Schedule (Ex-works) as progressive payment
against interim payment certificate.
b) 20% of quoted price shall be paid on erection of hydro-mechanical
equipment as progressive payment against interim payment certificate
prepared on the basis of various items erected.

14.3.4

c) 10% of the quoted price shall be paid on successful testing and

commissioning of each equipment as progressive payment against interim
payment certificate prepared on the basis of various items supplied,
erected, tested and commissioned in accordance with the Contract
Agreement.
Payment for Section IV Electromechanical works shall be made as under:
(a) 70% of the quoted price for supply of goods (Ex-works) shall be paid on
receipt of goods at site as progressive payment against interim payment
certificate prepared on the basis of various items supplied in accordance
with the Contract Agreement
(b) 20% of erection, testing and commissioning charges shall be paid in monthly
installments against pro-rata contract value of the work completed as per
the agreed construction schedule and on certification by the Engineer-incharge.

14.3.5

(c)10% of the quoted price shall be paid on

successful testing and
commissioning of each equipment as
progressive payment against
interim
payment certificate prepared on the basis of various items
supplied, erected, tested and commissioned
in accordance with the
Contract Agreement.
.

14.3.6

Deleted

All progressive payments made to the Contractor shall be reviewed on

quarterly basis and reconciled with the break-up of the Schedule. Over
payments/under payments made, if any, shall be adjusted in the next
interim payments.
14.4

Schedule of Payments
The Contractor shall include a schedule of monthly payments for both Part A
and Part B of the Contract separately specifying the installments spread over
the stipulated entire construction period in which the Contract Price will be
paid.
The monthly installment as quoted in the schedule of payments during bidding
stage and subsequent revision / modification (if applicable) during Contract
Agreement stage shall be considered as guideline for interim payment
certificate.
Certification for interim payment shall be based on the assessment of actual
progress achieved in executing the works and if actual progress is found to be
less than the value on which the schedule of payment was based, then the
employer representative may proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5
(Determinations) to agree or determine revised installments, which shall take
account of the extent to which progressive executed value of the work is less
than that the value of work on which the installments were previously based.

14.5

(Deleted)

14.6

Interim Payment
No amount will be paid until the Employer has received and approved the
Performance Security. Thereafter, the Employer shall within 28 days after
receiving a Statement and supporting documents, give to the Contractor notice
of any items in the Statement with which the Engineer in charge disagrees,
with supporting particulars. Payments due shall not be withheld, except that:
(a) if any thing supplied or work done by the Contractor is not in accordance
with the Contract, the cost of rectification or replacement may be withheld until
rectification or replacement has been completed; and/or
(b) if the Contractor was or is failing to perform any work or obligation in
accordance with the Contract and had been so notified by the Engineer in
charge, the value of this work, or obligation may be withheld until the work or
obligation has been performed.
The Employer may, be any payment, make any correction or modification that
should properly be made to any amount previously considered due. Payment
shall not be deemed to indicate Engineer in charge acceptance, approval,
consent or satisfaction.

14.7

Timings of Payment
(a) the Employer shall pay the amount certified in each Interim Payment
Certificate within a reasonable time from the date on which the Engineer-incharge received the Contractor's statement and supporting documents;
otherwise the Contractors statement shall be returned within within a
reasonable time with specific remarks for reconciliation .
(b) the Employer shall pay the amount certified in the Final Payment Certificate

within a reasonable time from the date of issue of the Certificate.

14.8
14.9

(Deleted)
Payment of Retention Money
When the Employers Representative has issued the Completion Certificate for
the Works covering Part A of the Contract, and the Works have passed all
specified tests, the first half of the Retention Money shall be certified by the
Engineer-in-charge for payment to the Contractor against submission of bank
guarantee of equivalent amount which shall be remain valid up to 3(three)
months in excess of defect liability Period. The bank guarantee shall be suitably
extended to such time any work remain to be executed under Clause 11 or
Clause 12.
Unless otherwise stated in the contract, upon expiry of the Defect Liability
period, the Engineer-in-charge shall certify the second half of the Retention
money to the Contractor for payment. Except that, if at such time any work
shall remain to be executed under Clause 11 or Clause 12, the Engineer-incharge shall be entitled to withhold certification, until completion of such work,
of so much of the balance of the Retention Money as shall represent the cost of
the work remaining to be executed.

14.10

Statement at Completion
within a reasonable time after the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate
for the Works, the Contractor shall submit, to the Employer's Representative,
six copies of a statement at completion with supporting documents showing in
detail, in the form approved by the Employer's Representative under SubClause 13.3:
(a) the final value of all work done in accordance with the Contract up to the
date stated in such Taking-Over Certificate,
(b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due. and
(c) an estimate of amounts which the Contractor considers will become due to
him under the Contract.
The estimated amounts shall be shown separately in such statement at
completion..

14.11

Application for Final Payment

within a reasonable time after the issue of the Performance Certificate.
the Contractor shall submit to the Employer's Representative six copies of a
draft final statement with supporting documents showing in detail in a form
approved by the Employer 's Representative:
(a) the value of all work done in accordance with the Contract. and
(b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due to him under the
Contract or otherwise .
If the Employer's Representative disagrees with or cannot verify any part of the
draft final statement, the Contractor shall submit such further information as
the Employer's Representative may reasonably require and shall make such
changes in the draft as may be agreed between them. The Contractor shall
then prepare and submit to the Employer's Representative the final statement
as agreed (for the purposes of these Conditions referred to as the "Final
Statement").

If, following discussions between the Employer's Representative and the

Contractor and any changes to the draft final statement which may be agreed
between them, it becomes evident that a dispute exists, the Employers
Representative shall deliver to the Employer (with a copy to the Contractor) an
Interim Payment Certificate for those parts of the draft final statement which
are not in dispute. The dispute may then be resolved under Clause 20, in
which case the Contractor shall then prepare and submit to the Employer (with
a copy to the Employer's Representative) a Final Statement in accordance with
the outcome of the dispute.
14.12

Discharge
When submitting the Final Statement, the Contractor shall submit a written
discharge, which confirms that the total of the Final Statement represents full
and final settlement of all monies due to the Contractor under the Contract.
Such discharge may state that it shall become effective only after payment due
under the Final Payment Certificate has been made and the Performance
Security referred to in Sub-Clause 4.2 has been returned to the Contractor.

14.13

Final Payment
The Employers Representative shall issue to the Employer, with a copy to the
Contractor, the Final Payment Certificate within a reasonable time after
receiving the Final Statement and written discharge in accordance with SubClauses 14.11 and 14.12, stating:
(a) the amount which is finally due, and
(b) after giving credit to the Employer for all amounts previously paid by the
Employer and for all sums to which the Employer is entitled, the balance, if
any, due from the Employer to the Contractor or from the Contractor to the
Employer as the case may be.
If the Contractor has not applied for a Final Payment Certificate in accordance
with Sub-Clauses 14.11 and 14.12, the Employers Representative shall
request the Contractor to do so. If the Contractor fails to make such an
application within a reasonable time, the Employers Representative shall
issue the Final Payment Certificate for such amount as he considers to be due.

14.14

Cessation of Employers Liability

The Employer shall not be liable to the Contractor for any matter or thing
arising out of (or in connection with) the Contract or execution of the Works,
unless the Contractor shall have included a claim for it in his Final Statement
and (except for matters or things arising after the issue of the Taking Over
Certificate for the Works) in the statement at completion described in SubClause 14.10.

14.15

Currency of Payments
All payments whatsoever will be made in Indian Rupees only as per Contract
Agreement.

14.16

Price Adjustment:-

14.16.1 Procedure:
14.16.1(A)
No escalation on prices and wages will be paid. The bidder has to quote
the bid taking into account of any variation in rates and wages during the period
of execution i.e.; from the date of quoting the rates to the end of completion of
work in all respects.
(B)
However, in respect of cement and steel escalation of prices will be
made for the actual quantity used in the work if the prices increase by more than
5% over prevailing market rates of Rs2700 per M.T. and RS 27500 per M.T. for
cement and steel respectively. For the purpose of assessing the increase in prices,
the actual market price of cement and steel communicated by the Engineer-in
chief ,Admn.wing, I&CAD Dept. will be adopted.
The contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates and prices for
labour, cement, steel, fuel, lubricants and other materials ( Electro mechanical
works) in accordance with the following principals and procedures as defined in
clause 20.9 of conditions of contract.
i)

Price adjustment shall apply only for work carried out within the stipulated time
or extension granted by the Employer and shall not apply to work carried out
beyond the stipulated time for reasons attributable to the Contractor, and

ii)

Price adjustment shall be calculated separately for the local and foreign
components of the payment for work done in the manner explained in the
following clauses.

iii)

The price adjustment formula shall be applied to the value of work done during
each quarter as defined below:

R=Total value of work done during the quarter as defined in clause 47.1 of
conditions
of contract.
RI= Portion of R, payable in local currency.
RF = Portion of R, payable in foreign currency (at fixed exchange rats)
R= RI + RF
14.16.2. Local Currency Component
a) Labour
Price adjustment for increase or decrease in local labour costs shall be paid in
accordance with the following formula.

VL

0.85 x PL/100 x RI (LI-LO)/LO

Where,
VL = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under
consideration due to change in rates for local labour.
PL = % of labour component of the work.
LO = Average consumer price index for industrial workers for KURNOOL Center
for quarter preceding the stipulated date of opening of bids ( as published by the
Labour Bureau, the Ministry of Labour, Government of India ).
LI = Average consumer price index for industrial workers for KURNOOL Center
for the quarter under consideration (as published by the Labour Bureau, the
Ministry of the Government of India, New Delhi ).
b) Materials
The price adjustment for increase or decrease in cost of local materials shall be
paid in accordance with the following formula.
i) Cement
VC = 0.85 x PC/100 x RI (CI CO)/ CO
Where,
VC = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under
consideration due to change in rates of cement.
PC = % of cement component of the work.
CO = Average whole sale price index for cement for the quarter preceding the
date of opening of bids (as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development,
Government of India, New Delhi ).
CI = Average wholesale price index for cement for the quarter under
consideration (as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development,
Government of India, New Delhi).
ii)

Steel

VS = 0.85 x PS/100 x RI (SI SO)/SO

Where,
VS = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under
consideration due to change in rates of steel.
PS = % of steel component of the work.
SO = Average whole sale price index for steel (bars and rods) for the quarter
preceding the stipulated date of opening of Bids (as published by the Ministry of
Industrial Development, Government of India, New Delhi).
SI = Average whole sale price index for steel ( bars and rods ) for the quarter
under consideration ( as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development,
the Government of India, New Delhi ).
iii)

Other Material

VM = 0.85 x PM/100 x RI (MI MO)/MO

Where,
VM = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under
consideration due to change in rates of local materials other than cement and
steel.
PM = % of material component of the work (other than cement and steel).

MO = Average whole sale price index for all commodities for the quarter
preceding the stipulated last date of opening of the Bids (as published by the
Ministry of Industrial Development, Government of India, New Delhi).
MI = Average whole sale price index for all commodities for the quarter under
consideration ( as published by the Ministry of Industrial Development, the
Government of India, New Delhi ).

c) Fuel and Lubricants

The price adjustment for increase or decrease in the cost of fuel and lubricants
shall be paid in accordance with the following formula.
VF = 0.85 x PF/100 x RI (FI FO)/ FO
Where,
VF = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under
consideration due to change in rates for fuels and lubricants.
PF = % of fuel and lubricants component of the work.
FO = Average official retail price of HSD at the existing consumers pumps of
IOC at KURNOOL on the day one of the calendar month preceding the
stipulated date of opening of bids.
FI = Average official retail price of HSD at the existing consumers pumps of IOC
at KURNOOL on the 15th day of the middle calendar month of the quarter under
consideration.
Note :
PL + PC + PS + PM + PF should not be more than 100.

14.16.3. Foreign Currency Component

The price adjustment due to increase or decrease in the portion of cost of
work payable in foreign currency shall be made in accordance with the following
formula.
VFX = 0.85 x RF (PLI PLO)/ PLO
Where,
VFX = Increase or decrease in the portion of cost of work payable in foreign
currency during the quarter under consideration due to change in prices of
foreign inputs.
PLO = Index for the foreign inputs as published in the country of origin for
quarter proceeding the stipulated date of opening of Bids.

PLI = Index for the foreign inputs as published in the country of origin for the
quarter under consideration.
a) The Bidder shall in his Bid, indicate the appropriate Index / Indices, the
source of publication and the period in which it is published and furnish
copies or extracts from the preceding 12 months of publications. The
proposed Index or indices shall be subject to approval of the Employer.
b) Indices shall be appropriate for their purpose and shall relate to the
Contractors proposed source of supply of inputs on the basis of which his
Bid price and anticipated foreign currency requirements should have been
computed. As the proposed basis for price adjustment the Contractor shall
submit with the Bid.
i) Schedule of indices duly completed by the Bidder to show the source of all
indices and the latest value of official or provisional base indices.
ii) Official publications showing the values of the proposed indices as available
during the twelve months preceding to the stipulated date of opening date of
bids.
c) If the currencies in which the foreign exchange is expressed are different from
the currencies of the source of the relevant indices, the Engineer shall
determine the correction to be applied in calculating the price adjustment
factor in order to avoid difference in the amount of price adjustment. Such
correction should correspond to the ratio of the exchange rates between the
respective currencies on the date one of the calendar month prior to the
stipulated date of opening of Bids.
d) If the bidder has requested payment in more than one foreign currency,
foreign currency RF shall be suitably broken up and a separate formula be
applied to each currency component by applying the corresponding indices
for the foreign input procured with that currency.

14.16.4. Changes in Cost due to Legislation

a) If after the date for opening of Bids for the works, there occurs in India any
change to any National or state statue, Ordinance, Decree or Other Law or
regulation or Bye Law of any local or duly constituted Authority, or the
introduction of any such National or State status, Ordinance, Decree, Law
regulations or Bye-Law which causes additional or deduced cost to

Contractor, other than under the component indicated under the Sub-Clauses
14.16.1 to 14.16.3 above, in the execution of the works, such additional or
reduced cost shall be certified by the Engineer after examining the records
provided by the claimant and shall be paid by or credited to the Employer.
b) Notwithstanding the foregoing, such additional or reduced cost shall not be
separately paid or credited if, (i) the same has been paid in whatever manner
including payment made though any of the inputs to the price adjustment
formulae in accordance with the provisions of Clause 20.9.1 of General
Conditions of Contract or (ii) the same has been taken into account by any
other clause of the Contract.
14.16.5. Components with Percentages
The following percentages are estimated by the Employer for the price
adjustment for the entire contract. However, the Bidder may not be bound by
the following percentages, provided that the Bidder
shall indicate such percentages in appendix to the Bid with full evidence.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Labour PL
Cement PC
Steel PS
POL PF
Other Materials PM

8%
1%
50%
24%
17%

15. Termination by Employer

15.1
Notice to Correct

If the Contractor fails to carry out any obligation under the

Contract, the Employer may by notice require the Contractor to
make good the failure and to remedy it within a specified
reasonable time.

15.2
Termination by Employer
The Employer shall be entitled to terminate the Contract if the
Contractor:
(a)
(b)
(c)

fails to comply with Sub-Clause 4.2 [Performance

Security] or with a notice under Sub-Clause 15.1 [Notice
to Correct],
Abandons the Works or otherwise plainly demonstrate
the intention not to continue of his obligations under the
Contract.
without reasonable excuse fails to proceed in accordance
with Clause 8 [Commencement, Delays and Suspension]

(d)
(e)

(f)

subcontracts the whole of the Works or assigns Contract

without the required agreement
becomes bankrupt or insolvent, goes into liquidation, has
a receiving administration order made against him,
compounds with his creditors. or carries on business
under a receiver, trustee or manager for the benefit of
his creditors, or if any act is done or event occurs which
(under applicable Laws) has a similar effect to any of
these acts or events, or
gives or offers to give (directly or indirectly) to any
person any bribe, gift, gratuity, commission or other
thing of value, as an inducement or reward:

i. for doing or forbearing to do any action in relation to the

Contract, or for showing or forbearing to show favour or
ii. disfavour to any person in relation to the Contract,
or if any of the Contractor's Personnel, agents or
Subcontractors gives or offers to give (directly or
indirectly) to any person any such inducement or reward
as is described in this sub-paragraph (f). However, lawful
inducements and rewards to Contractor's Personnel shall
not entitle termination.
In any of these events or circumstances, the Employer may,
upon giving 14 days notice to the Contractor, terminate the
Contract and expel the Contractor from the Site. However, in
the case of sub-paragraph (e) or (f), the Employer may by
notice terminate the Contract immediately.
The Employer's election to terminate the Contract shall not
prejudice any other rights of the Employer, under the Contract
or otherwise.
The Contractor shall then leave the Site and deliver any
required Goods, all Contractor Documents, and other design
documents made by or for him, to the Employer. However, the
Contractor shall use his best efforts to comply immediately with
any reasonable instructions included in the notice (i) for the
assignment of any subcontract, and (ii) for the protection of life
or property or for the safety of the Works.
After termination, the Employer may complete the Works and/or
arrange for any other entities to do so. The Employer and these
entities may then use any Goods, Contractor's Documents and
other design documents made by or on behalf of the Contractor.
The Employer shall then give notice that the Contractor's
Equipment and Temporary Works will be released to the
Contractor at or near the Site. The Contractor shall promptly
arrange their removal. at the risk and cost of the Contractor
However, if by this time the Contractor has tailed to make a
payment due to the Employer, these items may be sold by the
Employer in order to recover this payment. Any balance of the
proceeds shall then be paid to the Contractor.

15.3
Valuation at Date of Termination
As soon as practicable after a notice of termination under SubClause 15.2 [Termination by Employer] has taken effect, the
Employer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5
[Determinations] to agree or determine the value of the Works,
Goods and Contractor's Documents, and any other sums due to
the Contractor for work executed in accordance with the
Contract.
15.4
Payment after
Termination

After a notice of termination under Sub-Clause 15.2

[Termination by Employer] has taken effect the Employer may:
a)
proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 2.5
[Employer's Claims],
b)
with-hold further payments to the Contractor
until the costs of design, execution, completion and
remedying of any defects, damages for delay in
completion (if any), and all other costs incurred by the
Employer, have been established, and/or
c)
recover from the Contractor any losses and
damages incurred by the Employer and any extra costs
of completing the Works, after allowing for any sum due
to the Contractor under Sub-Clause 15.3 [Valuation at
Date of Termination]. After recovering any such losses,
damages and extra costs, the Employer shall pay any
balance to the Contractor

15.5
Employer's Entitlement
of Termination
The Employer shall be entitled to terminate the Contract, at any
time for the Employer's convenience, by giving notice of such
termination to the Contractor. The termination shall take effect
28 days after the later of the dates on which the Contractor
receives this notice or the Employer returns the Performance
Security.

16.

(Deleted)

17.

Risk and Responsibility

17.1
Indemnities
The Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Employer,
the Employer's Personnel, and their respective agents, against

and from all claims, damages, losses and expenses (including

legal fees and expenses) in respect of:
(a)

bodily injury, sickness or death, of any person

whatsoever arising out of or in the course of or by
reason of the design, execution and completion of the
Works and the remedying of any defects, unless
attributable to any negligence, willful act or breach of
the Contract by the Employer, the Employer's
Personnel, or any of their, respective agents, and

(b)

damage to or loss of any property, real or personal

(other than the Works), to the extent that such damage
or loss:
1. arises out of or in the course of or by reason of the
design, execution and completion of the Works and
the remedying of any defects, and
2. is not attributable to any negligence, willful act or
breach of the Contract by the Employer, Employer's
Personnel, their respective agents, or anyone directly
or indirectly employed by any of them.

The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the

Contractor, the Contractor's Personnel, and their respective
agents, against and from all claims, damages, losses and
expenses (including include legal fees and expenses) in respect
of (1) bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, which is
attributable to any negligence, willful act or breach of the
Contract by the Employer, the Employer's Personnel, or any of
their respective agents, and (2) the matters for which liability
may be excluded from insurance cover, as described in subparagraphs (d)(i), (ii) and (iii) of Sub-Clause 18.3 [Insurance
Against Injury to Persons and Damage to Property].
17.2
Contractor's Care
of the Works

The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of the
Works and Goods from the Commencement Date until the
Taking-Over Certificate is issued (or is deemed to be issued
under Sub-Clause 10.1 [Taking Over of the Works and
Sections]) for the Works, when responsibility for the care of the
Works shall pass to the Employer. If a Taking-Over, Certificate is
issued (or is so deemed to be issued) for any Section of the
Works, responsibility for the care of the Section shall then pass
to the Employer.
After responsibility has accordingly passed to the Employer, the
Contractor shall take responsibility for the care of any work
which is outstanding on the date stated in a Taking-Over
Certificate, until this outstanding work has been completed.

If any loss or damage happens to the Works, Goods or

Contractor's Documents during the period when the Contractor
is responsible for their care, from any cause not listed in SubClause 17.3 [Employer's Risks], the Contractor shall rectify the
loss or damage at the Contracts, risk and cost, so that the
Works, Goods and Contractor's Documents conform with the
Contract.
The Contractor shall be liable for any loss or damage caused by
any actions performed by the Contractor after a Taking-Over
Certificate has been issued. The Contractor shall also be liable
for any loss or damage which occurs after a Taking-Over
Certificate has been issued and which arose from a previous
event for which the Contractor was liable.
17.3

(Deleted)

17.4

(Deleted)

17.5
Intellectual and
Industrial Property
Rights
In this Sub-Clause, "infringement" means an infringement (or
alleged infringement) of any patent, registered design,
copyright, trade mark, trade name, trade secret or other
intellectual or industrial property right relating to the Works;
and "claim" means a claim (or proceedings pursuing a claim)
alleging an infringement.
Whenever a Party does not give notice to the other Party of any
claim within 28 days of receiving the claim, the first Party shall
be deemed to have waived any right to indemnity under this
Sub-Clause.
The Employer shall indemnify and hold the Contractor harmless
against and from any claim alleging an infringement which is or
was:
(a) an unavoidable result of the Contractors compliance with
the Employer's Requirements, or
(b)a result of any Works being used by the Employer:
(i)

for a purpose other than that indicated by,

reasonably to be inferred from, the Contract, or
(ii)
in conjunction with any thing not supplied by
Contractor, unless such use was disclosed to
Contractor prior to the Base Date or is stated in
Contract.

or
the
the
the

The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Employer harmless

against and from any other claim which arises out of or in
relation to (i) the Contractor's design, manufacture,

construction or execution of the Works, (ii) the use of

Contractor's Equipment, or (iii) the proper use of the Works.
If a Party is entitled to be indemnified under this Sub-Clause,
the indemnifying Party may (at its cost) conduct negotiations
for the settlement of the claim and any litigation or arbitration
which may arise from it. The other Party shall, at the request
and cost of indemnifying Party, assist in contesting the claim.
This other Party (and its Personnel) shall not make any
admission which might be prejudicial to the indemnifying Party,
unless the indemnifing Party failed to take over the conduct of
any negotiations, litigation or arbitration upon being requested
to do so by such other Party.

17.6
Limitation of Liability
Neither Party shall be liable to the other Party for loss of use of
any Works, loss of profit loss of any contract or for any indirect
or consequential loss or damage which may be suffered by the
other Party in connection with the Contract, other than under
Sub-Clause 17.1 [Indemnities].
The total liability of the Contractor to the Employer, under or in
connection with the Contract other than under Sub-Clause 4.19
[Electricity, Water and Gas], Sub-Clause 4.20 [Employer's
Equipment and Free-Issue Material], Sub-Clause 17.1.
[Indemnities] and Sub-Clause 17.5 [Intellectual and Industrial
Property Rights], shall not exceed the Contract Price stated in
the Contract Agreement.
This Sub-Clause shall not limit liability in any case of fraud,
deliberate default or reckless misconduct by the defaulting
Party.

18.

Insurance
18.1

Insurance for Design

The Contractor shall effect professional indemnity insurance, which
shall insure the Contractors liability by reason of professional
negligence in the design of the Works. Such insurance shall be for a
limit of not less than the amount specified in the Appendix to
Tender.
The Contractor shall use his best endeavors to maintain such
professional indemnity insurance in full force and effect throughout

the periods of his liability, under the Contract and under the law of
the Country. The Contractor undertakes to give the Employer
reasonable notice in the even of difficulty (if any) in extending,
renewing of reinstating such insurance.
18.2

Insurance for Works and Contractors Equipment

The contractor shall insure the Construction Documents, Plant,
materials and Works in the joint names of the Employer, the
Contractor and Subcontractors, against all loss or damage.
This
insurance shall cover loss or damage from any cause other than the
Employers risks listed in Sub-Clause 17.3 sub-paragraphs (a),
(b), (c) and (d) in so far as such insurance is readily obtainable.
Such insurance shall be for a limit of not less than the full
replacement cost (including profit) and shall also cover the costs of
demolition and removal of debris. Such insurance shall be in such a
manner that the Employer and the Contractor are covered from the
date by which the evidence is to be submitted under Sub-Clause
18.5(a), until the date of issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate for
the Works. The Contractor shall extend such insurance to provide
cover until the date of issue of the Performance Certificate, for loss or
damage for which the Contractor is liable arising from a cause
occurring prior to the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate, and
for loss or damage occasioned by the Contractor or Subcontractors in
the course of any other operations (including those under Clauses
11 and 12).
The Contractor shall insure the Contractors Equipment in the joint
names of the Employer, the Contractor and Subcontractors, against
all loss or damage. This insurance shall cover loss or damage from
any cause other than the Employers risks listed in Sub-Clause 17.3
sub-paragraphs (a), (b), (c) and (d) in so far as such insurance is
readily obtainable.
Such insurance shall be for a limit of not less
than the full replacement value (including delivery to Site). Such
insurance shall be in such a manner that each item of equipment is
insured while it is being transported to the Site and throughout the
period it is on or near the Site.

18.3

Insurance against Injury to Persons and Damage to Property

The Contractor shall insure against liability to third parties, in the
joint names of the Employer, the Contractor and Subcontractors, for
any loss, damage, death or bodily injury which may occur to any
physical property (except things insured under Sub-Clause 18.2) or
to any person (except persons insured under Sub-Clause 18.4),
which may arise out of the performance of the Contract and occurring
before the issue of the Performance Certificate. Such insurance shall
be for a limit of not less than the amount specified in the Appendix
to Tender.

18.4

Insurance for Contractors Personnel

The Contractor shall effect and maintain insurance against losses and
claims arising from the death or injury to any person employed by the
Contractor or any Subcontractor, in such a manner that the Employer
and the Employers Representative are indemnified under the policy

of insurance. For a Subcontractors employees, such insurance may

be effected by the Subcontractor, but the Contractor shall be
responsible for compliance with this Clause.
18.5

General Requirements for Insurance

Each insurance policy shall be consistent with the general terms
agreed in writing prior to the Effective Date, and such agreement
shall take precedence over the provisions of this Clause.
The Contractor shall, within 30 days (calculated
Commencement Date), submit to the Employer:

from

the

(a) evidence that the insurances described in this Clause have been
effected, and
(b) copies of the policies for the insurances described in SubClauses 18.2 and 18.3.
When each premium has been paid, the Contractor shall submit copy
receipts to the Employer. The Contractor shall also, when providing
such evidence, policies and receipts to the Employer, notify the
Employers Representative of so doing.
The Contractor shall effect all insurance for which he is responsible
with insurers and in terms approved by the Employer. Each policy
insuring against loss or damage shall provide for payments to be
made in the currencies required to rectify such loss or damage.
Payments received from insurers shall be used for the rectification of
such loss or damage.
The Contractor (and, if appropriate, the Employer) shall comply with
the conditions stipulated in each of the insurance policies. The
Contractor shall make no material alteration to the terms of any
insurance without the prior approval of the Employer. If an insurer
makes (or purports to make) any such alteration, the Contractor shall
notify the Employer immediately.
If the Contractor fails to effect and keep in force any of the
insurances required under the Contract, or fails to provide
satisfactory evidence, polices and receipts in accordance with this
Sub-Clause, the employer may, without prejudice to any other right
or remedy, effect insurance for the coverage relevant to such default,
and pay the premiums due. Such payments shall be recoverable
from the Contractor by the Employer, and may be deducted by the
Employer from any monies due, or to become due, to the Contractor.
Nothing in this Clause limits the obligations, liabilities or
responsibilities of the Contractor or the Employer, under the other
terms of the Contract or otherwise. Any amounts not insured or not
recovered from the insurers shall be borne by the Contractor and/or
the Employer accordingly.

19.

Force Majeure

19.1
Definition of
Force Majeure

In this Clause, "Force Majeure" means an exceptional event or

circumstance:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)

which is beyond a Party's control,

which such Party could not reasonably have provided
against before entering into the Contract,
which, having arisen, such Party could not reasonably
have avoided or overcome, and
which is not substantially attributable to the other Party.

Force Majeure may include but is not limited to, exceptional

events or circumstances of the kind listed below, so long as
conditions (a) to (d) above are satisfied:
(ii)
(iii)
(iv)
(v)

(vi)
19.2
Notice of Force Majeure

war, hostilities (whether war be declared or not),

invasion, act of foreign enemies,
insurrection, military or usurped power, or civil war,
disorder within the country by persons other than the
Contractors Personnel and other employees of the
Contractor and Sub- contractors,
munitions of war, ionizing radiation or contamination by
radio-activity, except as may be attributable to the
Contractor's use of such munitions, radiation or radioactivity, and
Natural catastrophes such as earthquake, hurricane,
typhoon or volcanic activity.

If a Party is or will be prevented from performing any of its

obligations under the Contract by Force Majeure, then it shall
give notice to the other Party of the event or circumstances
constituting the Force Majeure and shall specify the obligations,
the performance of which is or will be prevented. The notice
shall be given within 14 days after the Party became aware, or
should have become aware, of the relevant event or
circumstance constituting Force Majeure.
The Party shall, having given notice, be excused performance of
such obligations for so long as such Force Majeure prevents it
from performing them.
19.3
Duty to Minimize Delay
Each Party shall at all times use all reasonable endeavors to
minimize any delay in the performance of the Contract as a
result of Force Majeure.

A Party shall give notice to the other Party when it ceases to be

affected by the Force Majeure.
19.4
Consequences
of Force Majeure

19.5

If the Contractor is prevented from performing any of his

obligations under the Contract by Force Majeure of which notice
has been given under Sub-Clause 19.2 [Notice of Force
Majeure], and suffers delay and/or incurs Cost by reason of
such Force Majeure, the Contractor shall be entitled to claim to
be changed suitable extension of time for any such delay, if
completion is or will be delayed, under Sub-Clause 8.4
[Extension of Time for Completion],
(Deleted)

19.6
Optional Termination,
Payment and Release
If the execution of substantially all the Works in progress is
prevented for a continuous period of 84 days by reason of Force
Majeure of which notice has been given under Sub-Clause 19.2
[Notice of Force Majeure], or for multiple periods which total
more than 140 days due to the same notified Force Majeure,
then the Employer may give a notice of termination of the
Contract. In this event, the termination shall take effect 7 days
after the notice is given and the Contractor shall proceed in
accordance with sub-clause 16.3 (Cessation of work and
Removal of Contractors equipment)
Upon such
Contractor:
(a)
(b)

(c)
(d)

(e)

19.7

termination,

the

Employer shall

pay

to the

the amounts payable for any work carried out for which
a price is stated in the Contract;
the Cost of Plant and Materials ordered for the Works
which have been delivered to the Contractor, or of which
the Contractor is liable to accept delivery: this Materials
shall become the property of (and be at the risk of) the
paid for by the Employer and the Contractor shall place
the same Employer's disposal;
any other Cost or liability which in the circumstances
was reasonably incurred by the Contractor, expectation
of completing the Works;
the Cost of removal of Temporary Works and Contractor's
Equipment Site and the return of these items to the
Contractor's Works in his country (or to any other
destination at no greater cost); and
the Cost of repatriation of the Contractor's staff and
labour employed wholly in connection with the Works at
the date of termination.

Releases from Performance

under the Law
Notwithstanding any other provision of this Clause, if any event
or circumstance outside the control of the Parties (including,
but not limited to, Force Majeure) arises which makes it
impossible or unlawful for either or both Parties to fulfill its or
their contractual obligations or which, under the Law governing
the Contract, entitles the Parties to be released from further
performance of the Contract, then upon notice by either Party
to the other Party of such event or circumstance:
(a)

(b)

20.

the Parties shall be discharged from further

performance, without prejudice to the rights of either
Party in respect of any previous breach of the Contract,
and
the sum payable by the Employer to the Contractor shall
be the same as would
have been payable under
Sub-Clause 19.6 [Optional Termination, Payment and
Release] if the Contract had been dominated under SubClause 19.6.

Claims. Disputes and Arbitration

20.1
Contractors
Claims

If the Contractor considers himself to be entitled to any extension of

the Time for Completion and/or any additional payment, under any
Clause of these Conditions or otherwise in connection with the
Contract, the Contractor shall give notice to the Employer, describing
the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim. The notice shall be
given as soon as practicable, and not later than 28 days after the
Contractor became aware, or should have become aware, of the
event or circumstance.
If the Contractor fails to give notice of a claim within such period of
28 days, the Time for Completion shall not be extended, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to additional payment, and the
Employer shall be discharged from all liability in connection with the
claim. Otherwise, the following provisions of this Sub-Clause shall
apply.
The Contractor shall also submit any other notices which are required
by the Contract, and supporting particulars for the claim, all as
relevant to such event or circumstance.
The Contractor shall keep such contemporary records as may be
necessary to substantiate any claim, either, on the Site or at another
location acceptable to the Employer. Without admitting liability, the
Employer may, after receiving any notice under this Sub-Clause,
monitor the record keeping and/or instruct the Contractor to keep
further contemporary records. The Contractor shall permit the
Employer to inspect all these records, and shall (if instructed) submit
copies to the Employer.
Within 42 days after the Contractor became aware (or should have

become aware) of the event or circumstance giving rise to the claim,

or within such other- period as may be proposed by the Contractor
and approved by the Employer, the Contractor shall send to the
Employer a fully detailed claim which includes full supporting
particulars of the basis of the claim and of the extension of time
and/or additional payment claimed. If the event or circumstance
giving rise to the claim has continuing effect:
(a)
this fully detailed claim shall be considered as
interim;
(b)
the Contractor shall send further interim claims at monthly
intervals, giving the accumulated delay and/or amount claimed, and
such further particulars as the Employer may reasonably require; and
(c)
the Contractor shall send a final claim within 28 days after the
end of the effects resulting from the event or circumstance, or within
such other period as may be proposed by the Contractor and
approved by the Employer.
Within 42 days after receiving a claim or any further particulars
supporting a previous claim, or within such other period as may be
proposed by the Employer and approved by the Contractor, the
Employer shall respond with approval, or with disapproval and
detailed comments. He may also request any necessary further
particulars, but shall nevertheless give his response on the principles
of the claim within such time.
Each interim payment shall include such amounts for any claim as
have been reasonably substantiated as due under the relevant
provision of the Contract. Unless and until the particulars supplied are
sufficient to substantiate the whole of the claim, the Contractor shall
only be entitled to payment for such part of the claim as he has been
able to substantiate.
The Employer shall proceed in accordance with Sub-Clause 3.5
[Determinations] to agree or determine (i) the extension (if any) of
the Time for Completion (before or after its expiry) in accordance with
Sub-Clause 8.4 [Extension of Time for Completion], and/or (ii) the
additional payment (if any) to which the Contractor is entitled under
the Contract.

20.2
Appointment
of Dispute
Adjudication
Board

The requirements of this Sub-Clause are in addition to these of any

other Sub-Clause, which may apply to a claim. It the Contractor fails
to comply with this Sub Clause in relation to any claim, any extension
of time and/or additional payment shall take account of the extent (if
any) to which the failure has prevented or prejudiced proper
investigation of the claim, unless the claim is excluded under the
second paragraph of this Sub-Clause.
Disputes shall be adjudicated by a DAB in accordance with SubClause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Adjudication Board's Decision]. The
Parties shall jointly appoint a DAB by the date 28 days after a Party
gives notice to the other Party of its intention to refer a dispute to a
DAB in accordance with Sub-clause 20.4.
The DAB shall comprise three suitably qualified persons designated
as members.

If the DAB is to comprise three persons, each Party shall nominate

one member for the approval of the other Party. The Parties shall
consult both these members and shall agree upon the third member,
who shall be appointed to act as chairman.
The agreement between the Parties and each of the three members
shall incorporate by reference the General Conditions of Dispute
Adjudication Agreement contained in the Appendix to these General
Conditions, with such amendments as are agreed between them.
The Parties when agreeing the terms of appointment shall mutually
agree upon the terms of the remuneration of either the sole member
or each of the three members. Each Party shall be responsible for
paying one-half of this remuneration.
If at any time the Parties so agree, they may appoint a suitably
qualified person or persons to replace any one or more members of
the DAB. Unless the Parties agree otherwise, the appointment will
come into effect if a member declines to act or is unable to act as a
result of death, disability, resignation or termination of appointment.
The replacement shall be appointed in the same manner as the
replaced person was required to have been nominated or agreed
upon, as described in this Sub-Clause.

20.3
Failure to Agree
Dispute
Adjudication
Board

The appointment of any member may be terminated by mutual

agreement of both Parties, but not by the Employer or the Contractor
acting alone. Unless otherwise agreed by both Parties, the
appointment of the DAB (including each member) shall expire when
the DAB has given its decision on the dispute referred to it under Sub
Clause 20.4, unless other disputes have been referred to the DAB by
that time under Sub-Clause 20.4, in which event the relevant date
shall be when the DAB has also given decisions on those disputes.
If any of the following conditions apply, namely:
(a)
the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the sole
member of the DAB by the date stated in the first paragraph of SubClause 20.2.
(b)
either Party fails to nominate a member (for approval by the
other Party) of a DAB of three persons by such date,
(c)
the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of the third
member (to act as chairman) of the DAB by such date, or

20.4
Obtaining Dispute
Adjudication
Boards Decision

(d)
the Parties fail to agree upon the appointment of a
replacement person within 42 days after the date on which the sole
member or one of the three members declines to act or is unable to
act as a result of death, disability resignation or termination or
appointment,
In that case Employers representative shall, upon the request of
either or both of the Parties and after due consultation with both
Parties, appoint this member of the DAB. This appointment shall be

final and conclusive. Each Party shall be responsible for paying onehalf of the remuneration of the appointing entity or official.

If a dispute (of any kind whatsoever) arises between the Parties in

connection with or arising out of, the Contract or the execution of the
Works, including any dispute as to any certificate, determination,
instruction, opinion or valuation of the Employer then after a DAB has
been appointed pursuant to Sub-Clauses 20.2 [Apartment of the DAB]
and 20.3 [Failure for Agrees DABJ, either Party may refer the dispute
in writing to the DAB for its decision, with a copy to the other Party
Such reference shall state that it is given under this Sub-Clause.
For a DAB of three persons, the DAB shall be deemed to have
received such reference on the date when the chairman of the DAB
receives it. Both Parties shall promptly make available to the DAB all
information, access to the Site, and appropriate facilities, as the DAB
may require for the purposes of making a decision on such dispute.
The DAB shall be deemed to be not acting as arbitrator(s).
Within 84 days after receiving such reference, or the advance
payment referred to in Clause 6 of the Appendix - General Conditions
of the Dispute Adjudication Agreement, whichever date is later, or
within such other period as may be proposed by the DAB and
approved by both Parties, the DAB shall give its decision, which shall
be reasoned and shall state that it is given under this Sub-Clause.
However, if neither of the Parties has paid in full the invoices
submitted by each Member pursuant to Clause 6 of the Appendix, the
DAB shall not be obliged to give its decision until such invoices have
been paid in full. The decision shall be binding on both Parties, who
shall promptly give effect to it unless and until it shall be revised in
an amicable settlement or an arbitral award as described below.
Unless the Contract has already been abandoned, repudiated or
terminated, the Contractor shall continue to proceed with the Works
in accordance with the Contract.

20.5
Amicable
Settlement
20.6
Arbitration

If either Party is dissatisfied with the DAB's decision, then either Party
may, within 28 days after receiving the decision, give notice to the
other Party of its dissatisfaction. If the DAB fails to give its decision
within the period of 84 days (or as otherwise approved) after
receiving such reference or such payment, then either Party may,
within 28 days after this period has expired, give notice to the other
Party of its dissatisfaction.
In either event, this notice of dissatisfaction shall state that it is given
under this Sub Clause, and shall set out the manner in dispute and
the reason(s) for dissatisfaction. Except as stated in Sub-Clause 20.7
[Failure to Comply with Dispute Adjudication Board's Decision] and
Sub-Clause 20.8 [Expiry of Dispute Adjudication Board's
Appointment], neither Party shall be entitled to attempt any
discussion for amicable settlement of a dispute unless a notice of
dissatisfaction has been given in accordance with this Sub-Clause.
If the DAB has given its decision as to a matter in dispute to both

Parties, and no notice of dissatisfaction has been given by either

Party within 28 days after it received the DAB's decision, then the
decision shall become final and binding upon both Parties.
Where notice of dissatisfaction has been given under Sub-Clause 20.4
above, both Parties shall attempt to settle the dispute amicably
before taking any action legal course of action.
Unless settled amicably, any dispute in respect of which the DAB's
decision (if any) has not become final and binding shall be finally
settled as per Indian Arbitration Act, 1996.
The arbitration shall be conducted in the language
communications defined in Sub-Clause 1.4 [Law and Language].
20.7
Failure to Comply
with Dispute
Adjudication
Boards Decision

for

The arbitrator(s) shall have full power to open up, review and revise
any certificate, determination, instruction, opinion or valuation of (or
on behalf of) the Employer, and any decision of the DAB, relevant to
the dispute.
Neither Party shall be limited in the proceedings before the
arbitrator(s) to the evidence or arguments previously put before the
DAB to obtain its decision, or to the reasons for dissatisfaction given
in its notice of dissatisfaction. Any decision of the DAB shall be
admissible in evidence in the arbitration.

20.8
Expiry of Dispute
Adjudication
Board's
Appointment

Arbitration may be commenced prior to or after completion of the

Works. The obligations of the Parties and the DAB shall not be altered
by reason of any arbitration being conducted during the progress of
the Works.
In the event that:
(a) Neither Party has given notice of dissatisfaction within the period
stated in Sub Clause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Adjudication
Board's Decision],
(b) The DAB's related decision (if any) has become final and binding,
and
(c) a Party fails to comply with this decision,
then the other Party may, without prejudice to any other rights it
may have, refer the failure itself to arbitration under Sub-Clause
20.6. [Arbitration]. Sub-Clause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute Adjudication
Board's Decision] and Sub-Clause 20.5 [Amicable Settlement] shall
not apply to this reference.
For any legal course of action it will be under civil court of competent
jurisdiction (ANANTAPUR, Andhra Pradesh, India).
If a dispute arises between the Parties in connection with, or arising
out of, the Contract or the execution of the Works and there is no
DAB in place, whether by reason of the expiry of the DABs
appointment or otherwise:

(a)
(b)
20.9
Price Adjustment

Sub-Clause 20.4 [Obtaining Dispute

Adjudication Boards Decision] and Sub- Clause 20.5
[Amicable Settlement] shall not apply, and
The dispute may be referred directly to arbitration under SubClause 20.6 [Arbitration].

The contract price shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in rates and
prices for labour, cement, steel, fuel, lubricants and other materials
(electro mechanical works) in accordance with the following principals
and procedures and as per formula given in the contract data.
a)

The cost of materials and electrical

energy supplied by the Employer if any at fixed prices shall be
excluded from the scope of price adjustment.

b)

The Price adjustment shall apply for

the work done from the start date given in the Contract Data
upto end of the initial intended completion date or extensions
granted by the Engineer and shall not apply to the work carried
out beyond the stipulated time for reasons attributable to the
Contractor.

c)

The Price adjustment shall be

determined during each quarter from the formula given in the
Contract Data.

d)

Following expressions and meanings

are assigned to the work done during each quarter.

R= Total value of work done during the quarter excluding the cost of
materials and electrical energy supplied by the Employer at the
fixed prices. It would include the value of materials on which
secured advance has been granted if any, during the quarter, less
the value of materials inrespect of which the secured advanced has
been recovered, if any, during the quarter.
20.9.1

To the extent that full compensation for any rise or fall costs to the
Contractor is not covered by the provisions of this or other clauses in the
Contract, the unit rates and prices included in the Contract shall be
deemed to include amounts to cover the contingency of such other rise
or fall in costs.

APPENDIX TO TENDER
Hereunder does the Employer provide the relevant data to the
specific work. However, bidders are required to fill the necessary
data in appropriate blank spaces below.
RATE OF PROGRESS
The total period of completion of work is 24 months from the date
of entering into agreement to proceed including rainy season the
work shall be programmed such as to achieve the milestones as
under.
1)WORK PROGRAMME OF ACHIEVING THE MILE STONES :
H.N.S.S CIRCLE ANANTAPUR, ANDHRA PRADESH, INDIA.
Item
Time

for
notice
commence
Defect Liability Period

to

Time for completion of the

works and Milestones

Clause/SubClause
1.1.3.3 & 8.1
1.1.3.7
8.2

1 Up to 2 Month

Period in
Months
2 Months

2 (up to 6 months)

3 Months

Sl.No.

Mile Stone No.

Particulars
15 ( Fifteen) days
2 (two) years after issue of completion
certificate for Part A of the Contract
comprising Sections I, II, III, IV and V
24(Twenty four) months as detailed below:

Description of
work
1) Completion of
Composite
Hydraulic Model
study and
submission of
detailed design &
drawings of the
total scheme and
approval.
1) Placing order and
manufacture of one
pump with motor
including all
accessories
2) Civil works
3) Supply of
PSC/Steel pipes for
one row.
4) Substation works

Phy/Qty. to be
Completed.
100 % of work

1 No.

50%
35% of total length
of one row.
50% of work

3 (Upto 10 Months)

4 Months

including
accessories

1 No.

1) Delivery of
pumps andmotors
including
accessories

All the remaining

Nos. 100% (Full
length)

2) placing order and

manufacturing of
remaining pumps
and motors
including
accessories.

100%
One Row 100 % full
length

3) Civil woirks
4.

4 (upto 13 months)

3 Months

4) Suppply and
laying of pressure
main 1 Row

100 %
1 No.

5) Supply, erection,
testing of
substation.
1) Erection, Testing
and commission of
pump and motors
including
accessories.
5.

5 (upto 17 months)

4 Months

2) Manufacture of
remaining pumps
and motors,
accessories.
3) Supply of pipes
of pressure main for
remaining rows.

6.

6 (upto 21 Months)

4 Months

1) Manufacture of
remaining pumps
and motors
accessories.
2) a) Supply of
pipes of pressure
main for remaining
two Rows.
b) Erection - do
1) Delver to site

Remaining Nos.

20% of total length

of remaining Rows.
Remaining Nos.

50% of total length

remaining rows.
40% of total length
remaining rows.
Remaining Nos.

100% length of
remaining rows.

7.

7 (upto 24 Months)

3 Months

and erection testing

and commissioning
remaining pumps
and motors
complete

100%

2) Supply, laying
testing and
commissioning of
remaining Rows of
pressure main.
Trial run and
completion of works
in full as per
contract including
finishing works.
ii) HANDING OVER OF SITE.
Schedule of programme of handing over of Site to the Contractor.
Sl.No.

Mile Stone No.

Reach

Date of Handing over of site.

The entire site will be handed over to the contractor at a time on the date of concluding
Agreement itself./ finalization of alignment of canal and approval of H.P.s by the competent
authority.

Local currency

1.1.4.5

Definition of Section
Laws and Languages
Time for possession of
site

1.1.5.6
1.4
2.1

Amount
of
performance Security

4.2

Validity
of
performance Security

Indian Rupees
Under Special Conditions of Contract
Laws of Union of India, English
Within 15 days from the date of LOA. No
compensation is applicable within that period.
2.5% of Part A contract amount
2.5% of Part B contract amount

3 ( Three ) Months after defect liability period

for Part A contract amount.
3 ( Three ) Months after completion of O&M
period of 2 (two) years for Part B contract
amount.

Notice

of
subcontractors
Normal working hours

4.4
6.5

Subject to Indian laws and regulations, the

contractor is authorized to work day and night,
as well as on Sundays and/or festival days,
provided that it makes payment of all sums due
therefore to its labour and personnel.

Time for submission of

programme
Delay Damages

8.6

15 ( fifteen) days from the date of LOA.

8.7

Amount of Delay damages see Table below:

Section of Works
All Civil Works
Pipelines
15% of the total Pipe Line length
25% of the total Pipe Line length
30% of the total Pipe Line length
including all civil works of Intake
pump
house,
Intermediate
pump house, cross drainage
work, Road crossing, Railway
crossing.
30% of the total pipeline length
including Gravity Canal.
100% of the Pipe Line including
all Cross Drainage Works
Pumps and other related equipment
Note:- Refer table against Clause
8.2

15 (fifteen) days notice

Delay Damages for Delay per Day

0.05 % of the Total value of civil works

0.05% of the Price of the respective items

against each mile stone

0.05% of the Price of the respective items

Limit

of delay
8.7
10 (ten) percent of the Total Part A Contract Price
damage
for delay
Liquidated
9.4
As given below
damage
for
failure
in
Performance
tests
The performance guarantees which shall attract liquidated damages are:
i)
ii)
iii)

Power input in KW at motor terminals when each pump is

delivering rated flow at rated head.
Flow through each pump at rated head.
Energy losses in the auxiliary transformers on principal tap at
rated voltage and frequency
a) Iron loss
b) Copper loss at full load and 750 C.

The above guaranteed parameters shall be without any tolerance values.

All margins required for instrument inaccuracies and all other reasons shall
be deemed to be included in the guaranteed figures. No tolerance or
allowance on the test results will be permitted for instrument errors or
inaccuracy, the method of testing or any other causes.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR SHORT FALL IN PERFORMANCE

Should the results of the formal performance test show that the
equipments have failed to meet the guarantees the CONTRACTOR shall
carry out the modification, at his own cost, if considered necessary to
meet the guaranteed values. In such a case the performance and
guarantee tests shall be repeated by the CONTRACTOR within one (1)
month from the date the equipment is ready for re-test. If the specified
guarantees are not established within 90 days of notification by the
EMPLOYER, the EMPLOYER may at his discretion reject the equipment and
recover the payments already made or accept the equipment after
assessing the liquidated damages payable at the rates specified below for
each equipments. Such liquidated damages shall be recoverable by
invoking the Performance Bank Guarantee of the CONTRACTOR or by
deduction from the contract price, or otherwise.
Sl.
No
1.

2.

3.

Guarantee
Increase in power consumption, at
motor input terminals, for each pump
(as determined at site during
performance & guarantee tests).
Flow
through
each
pump
(as
determined at all delivery points
during performance & guarantee
tests).
Energy losses in the auxiliary
transformers on principal tap at rated
voltage and frequency.
a) Iron loss

b) Copper loss at full load and at

750 C

Amount of Liquidated Damages for

shortfall in performance
Indian Rs. 3,00,000/- (Three hundred
thousand only) for every KW or part
thereof increase of the power over the
guaranteed value.
India Rs. 20,00,000/- (Twenty lakhs only)
for every 0.1 cumces or part thereof
reduction of flow below the guaranteed
value.

Indian Rs. 3,00,000/- (Three hundred

thousand only) for every KW or part
thereof increase of the power over the
guaranteed valued.
Indian Rs. 75,000/- (Seventy Five thousand
only) for every KW or part thereof increase
of the power over the guaranteed value.

The liquidated damages shall be prorated for the fractional pats of the
appropriate unit of
measurement indicated, unless otherwise specified.
One pump of each type (in case of more than one type of pump) shall
be
tested in each
pumping station. The pump to be performance
tested shall be selected solely at the discretion of the EMPLOYER. For
shortfall in performance, if found, in any of the pump, liquidated
damages shall be levied on all the pumps of same type & size by
multiplying the liquidated damages for one pump by number of such
pumps.

Recovery
of
advance

Schedule
of
payment
Application
for
interim payment
and
interim
payments

Amount
of
insurance
for
works
and
Contractors
Equipment
Amount of third
party insurance

14.3

The advance shall be recovered on each interim payment

in proportion to the value of the payment certificate such
that it shall be fully repaid when work has been executed
to the value 80% (eighty percent) of the Part A Contract
Price. Repayment shall start with the first interim
payment certificate certifying payment for work
executed, and thereafter until the advance has been
repaid subject to the provision that the balance of the
advance to be repaid shall be repaid prior to expiry of the
time for completion or any extended time pursuant to
General Conditions of Contract and failing such
repayment by the Contractor the amount shall become
due on summary demand from the guarantor.
14.4
Contactor to submit a cash flow statement specifying the
monthly requirement of payment covering the entire
price and contract period.
14.3 & Contractor shall submit a monthly statement in six
14.6
copies indicating quantum of work executed and
corresponding measurements
Employer will assess the value of the work executed
on the basis of the item rates furnished by the
Contractor
18.2

Not less than full reinstatement cost

18.3

Rs. 20,00,000

Period

of
submissi
on of
Evidence of
insurance
Relevant policies

Sections
Description
Part A - EPC Turnkey
Contract
Design and Engineering
Civil works
Hydro-mechanical works
Electro-mechanical works
Pipeline and Allied Works
Total Part A Contract

Within 30 days
Within 60 days

INDIAN RUPEES

Percentage of Bid/Contract
price

Part B - O & M Contract

Operation and Maintenance
for a period of 24 months
Total Part B Contract

ANNEXURE GCCI

Proforma For Performance Security

(To be furnished separately for Part A and Part B)

To,
THE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER,
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,
ANANTAPUR
ANANTAPUR (DIST.), ANDHRA PRADESH,
INDIA
WHEREAS ____________________________
(Name and address of Contractor)
(hereinafter called the Contractor) has under taken in pursuance of Contract No.
____________dated________________
to execute______________________ (name of
Contract and brief description of Works) (hereinafter called the Contract);
AND WHEREAS it has been stipulated by you in the said Contract that the
Contractor shall furnish you with a Bank Guarantee by a recognized bank for the sum
specified therein as security for compliance with his obligations in accordance with
the Contract;
AND WHEREAS we have agreed to give the Contractor such a Bank
Guarantee;
NOW THEREFORE we hereby affirm that we are the Guarantor and responsible
to you, on behalf of the Contractor, up to a total of _______________________ (amount of
guarantee) 1_________
__________________ (in words), such sum being payable in the types and proportions of
currencies in which the Contract Price is payable, and we under take to pay you, upon
your first written demand and without cavil or argument, any sum or sums within the
limits of ___________________________ (amount of guarantee) 1 as aforesaid without
your needing to prove or to show grounds or reasons for your demand for the sum
specified therein.
We hereby waive the necessity of your demanding the said debt from the
Contractor before presenting us with the demand.
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the
terms of the Contract or of the works to be performed there under or of any of the
Contract documents which may be made between you and the Contractor shall in
any way release us from any liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive
notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall be valid until 3 months from the date of expiry of the
Defects Liability Period.
Signature and seal of the guarantor_________________________
Name of Bank_________________________________________
Address ______________________________________________
Date _________________________________________________
1

An amount shall be inserted by the Guarantor, representing the percentage

of the Contract Price specified in the Contract and denominated in Indian Rupees.

Proforma for Advance Payment Guarantee

To,
THE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER,
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,
ANANTAPUR
ANANTAPUR (DIST.), ANDHRA PRADESH,
INDIA
____________________________________ (name of Contract)
Gentlemen:
In accordance with the provisions of the Conditions of Contract, Sub-clause
14.2
(
Advance
Payments)
of
the
above-mentioned
Contract,
_______________________________________________ (name and address of Contractor)
( hereinafter called the Contractor) shall deposit with THE SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER,
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR,ANANTAPUR
(DIST.),
ANDHRA
PRADESH, INDIA a bank guarantee to guarantee his proper and faithful
performance under the said Sub-clause of the Contract in an amount of
____________________________________
(amount
of
guarantee)
1
____________________________________________ (in words).
We, the ________________________________________ (the bank), as instructed by
the Contractor, agree unconditionally and irrevocably to guarantee as primary
obligator and not as Surety merely, the payment to THE SUPERINTENDING
ENGINEER,
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR,ANANTAPUR
(DIST.),
ANDHRA
PRADESH, INDIA on his first demand without whatsoever right of objection on our
part without his first claim to the Contractor, in the amount nor exceeding
1
___________________________
(amount
of
guarantee)
_____________________________________ in words).
We further agree that no change or addition to or other modification of the terms of the Contract or
of the work to be performed there under or of any of the Contractor documents which may be between
THE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR,ANANTAPUR,
(DIST.), ANDHRA PRADESH, INDIA and the Contractor, shall in any way release us from any
liability under this guarantee, and we hereby waive notice of any such change, addition or modification.
This guarantee shall remain valid and in full effect from the date of the
advance payment under the Contract until THE SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER
H.N.S.S.CIRCLE,ANANTAPUR,ANANTAPUR (DIST.), ANDHRA PRADESH, INDIA
receives full repayment of the same amount from the Contractor.
Yours truly, __________________________________
Signature and seal_____________________________
Name of Bank ________________________________
Address:_____________________________________
Date:________________________________________
An amount shall inserted by the Bank or financial institution representing the amount of the Advance
Payment, and denominated in India Rupees.

GOVERNMENT OF ANDHRA PRADESH

IRRIGATION & C.A.D. DEPARTMENT.

PART - II
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NAME OF WORK: Investigation, Design, Estimation and construction of pumping

stations including design, manufacture, supply of pumps at site
of work including erection and commissioning and testing of
mechanical, electrical accessories etc., complete inclusive of all
civil works such as pump house including sump house,
pumping mains etc., required and maintenance of system for
three years at km.0.000, km.9.450, km. 56.750, km. 68.000,
km. 81.000, km.90.700, km.98.185 and km.174.000 of H.N.S.S.
main canal and at km.2.650, km. 4.600 of Peruru branch canal
and another pumping station at a suitable location for an
approximate lift height around 23 mts to cater the ayacut at a
higher contour +523.000 mts in the distributory system of
Peruru branch canal under H.N.S.S. phase-I in Kurnool and
Anantapur of Andhra Pradesh.

OFFICE OF THE

SUPERINTENDING ENGINEER
H.N.S.S. CIRCLE, ANANTAPUR
ANANTAPUR DISTRICT, ANDHRA PRADESH.
SPECIAL NOTE ON CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENTS:
The contract price shall be comprising of total value of the work for EPC Turn
Key Contract including operation and maintenance of the installation for a period of
2 (two) years as per contract agreement.
The employer will pay the contractor a firm contract price for completion of all
works as specified under the scope of the work / employers requirement which shall
include but not limited to supply and installation of all plants and its accessories leading
to successful commissioning of the pumping scheme with allied works including
operation and maintenance of the pumps, other allied electrical equipment for a period of
2 (two) years after successful commissioning of the project on EPC Turn Key cum O&M
contract basis.
Intermediate payment for the works shall be made on the basis of the quantity
executed and corresponding quoted rates in the contract. The measurement and
payment clause under the technical specification of various items in the Volume II
pertain to intermediate payments only and in all cases payment shall be limited to the
total price quoted by the contractor against each item of work.

SCHEDULE 'C'
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS (S.S.)
SCOPE OF WORK
The information and data furnished herein relevant to the work
and site conditions are general. It shall be the responsibility of
the contractor to fully acquaint himself with the nature and
location of works, quarries, local conditions and other aspects
which are relevant to the work.
A)

Location of the work:

In the districts of Kurnool and Anantapur districts
At km.0.000, km.9.450, km.56.750, km.68.000, km.81.000, km.90.700,
km.98.185 and km.174.000 of H.N.S.S. main canal and at km.2.650 and
km.4.600 of Perur branch canal and another pumping station at a suitable
location in the distributary system of Perur branch canal under H.N.S.S. phaseI.

B)

Road (Best ways to approach the work site)

Connected by rail and road routes from Kurnool and

Anantapur.
C)

Climate, Rainfall, Temperature (working season).

Normal

D)

Hydraulic particulars (Canal Drain, Reservoir).

Plans enclosed

E)
Estimate Considerations (Soil Classifications and the
quantities of respective classifications.
The quantities of
excavation proposed for construction purpose.
All soils up to SDR, F & F Rock and Hard rock etc.,
F)

S.S.R. (Year, and extra allowances considered).

S.S.R. 2004 -2005

G)

Deleted.

H)
Any other information available with the department
relevant to the work
(land acquisition, funds)
A.P. State Funding
I)

Details of works in each Mile Stone (Finished Items of work).

As per page 79 to 81 of Volume-I Part-A

Note: The information furnished is the best available. However

the department does not guarantee the correctness of
interpretations, deductions of conclusions which are given as
supplementary information. The information have been produced
as found communicated ascertained or otherwise learned by the
department.
1.1
1.1.

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
1.a) These Technical specifications, shall apply to all works as are
required to be executed under the contract or otherwise directed by
the Engineer. In every case the work shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and conform to the location, lines, grades
and cross - sections shown on the drawings or as indicated by the
Engineer. The quality of work and materials, shall comply with the
requirements set-forth in this and succeeding sections. Where the
drawings and specifications describe a portion of the work in only
general terms and not in complete details. It shall be understood that
only the best general practice is to prevail, materials and
workmanship of the best quality are to be employed and the
instructions of the Engineer are to be fully complied with.

b)

The contractor shall carry out the works in accordance with the
specifications laid down in this section together with the detailed
specifications stipulated under succeeding sections, Andhra Pradesh
Standard Specification, relevant codes with the all amendments
published up to the date to tendering and the departmental manual
for quality control.

1.1.2 REFERENCE MARKS AND BENCH MARKS :

a)

The basic center lines, reference points and bench marks will have to
be fixed.

b)

The Contractor shall establish at his own cost, at suitable points,

additions reference lines and bench marks as may be necessary. The
contractor shall remain responsible for the sufficiency and accuracy of
all his bench marks and reference lines. He shall take precautions to
see that the lines, points and bench marks fixed by the Department
are not disturbed by his work and shall make good to any such
damage.

1.1.3 SETTING OUT WORKS :

a)

The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct setting out of all
works at his cost. The Contractor shall execute the work true to
alignment grade and levels as shown in the drawings and as directed
by the Engineer and shall check these at frequent intervals. The
contractor shall provide all facilities like labour and instruments and
shall cooperate with the departmental officers to check all alignments,
Grades, levels and dimensions such checking shall not absolve the
Contractor of his own responsibility of maintaining the accuracy of the
work.

2.0

CLEARING OF SITE

2.1.1 GENERAL
The date, pertaining to the work furnished in the relevant report and
drawings, are for information of tenderers the Govt. of Andhra Pradesh
does not guarantee the reliability or accuracy of any of the data and
shall assume no responsibilities for any deductions, conclusions or
interpretations that may be made from them. The contractor shall
undertake at his expenses such studies as are necessary to assess the
reliability and accuracy of the information presented in the data.
2.1.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING:
a)

The portion of the right--of--way, where required for earth work under
these specifications, shall be cleared of all trees, bushes, rubbish and
other objectionable matter. Trees designated by the Engineer-incharge shall not be cut and shall be protected from injury, such
cleared material shall be disposed off as provided in paragraph-2.1. 4
below or removed from the site of work before the date of completion
of the contract as approved by Engineer in charge. The useful
materials should be stacked and handed over to the Department. The
clearing operation shall be in accordance with clause 4.1, 4.1.1, 4.2

and 4.3 of I.S. 4701-1982 Indian Code of Practice for earth work.
Surface boulders either loose or partly embedded in the ground will
have to be removed and stacked as directed. All holes and hollows
whether originally existing or produced by digging up roots shall be
filled with suitable earth, well rammed and leveled off. Thus more than
30 cms. girth, will be paid for separately at the rates specified in the
Schedule-'A'. The logs/stumps cleared shall be neatly stacked and
handed over to the representative of Engineer in charge as directed at
the places indicated. The pits formed up roots which shall be filled
with suitable earth and compacted and leveled at the cost of
contractor.
2.1.3. GRUBBING
a)

The ground surface under all the embankments and the surface of all
excavation is to be used for embankments as shown in the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer in charge shall be cleared of all stumps,
roots and vegetable matter of every kind the stumps shall be pulled or
otherwise and tools shall be grubbed.

2.14

DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL :

a)

The disposal of cleared and grubbed material shall be in accordance

with clause 4.1.1 of I.S. 4701 Code of Practice for earthwork in canals.
A1-1 waste material to be burnt shall be piled neatly and when in
suitable condition shall be burnt completely as ashes. Piling of waste
material for burning shall be done at such a location and in such a
manner as would not cause any fire risk. Necessary precautions shall
be taken to prevent spreading of fire to areas beyond the limits of
cleared areas. Suitable materials and equipment for prevention and
suppression of fire shall be kept available at all time.

2.1.5 PAYMENT:
a)

Separate payment will not be made for clearing of trees below 30 cm.
girth and grubbing including filling of holes and hollows and disposal
of the cleared and grubbed material require under the above
paragraphs. The contractor shall include the cost thereof in the
Schedule 'A' of the contract for the relevant of finished item of work
for which clearing and grubbing as mentioned in the above para are
required. No payment towards removal of small stones and the
boulders of size less than 0.03 cubic meters will be made, and the rate
quoted for excavation should be inclusive of this item. However
surface boulders of size greater than 0.03 cubic meters but less than 3
cubic meters. either loose or partly embedded in the ground, when
removed payment will be made for actual quantity. Surface boulders
shall be premeasured, after removal, the quantity based on stack
measurement duly deducting 40% or more towards voids as
considered by the Engineer in charge will be compared and minimum
of the above measured quantity will be paid at the rate quoted in
schedule 'A' for the relevant classification.

3.0. EXCAVATION FOR CANAL AND STRUCTURERS AND OTHER WORKS

3.1.1

The list of I.S. Codes

section is given below :

and other publications applicable to this

The abbreviations, A.P.S.S.., I.S., I.R.C., B.S., ASTM shall be considered

to have the following meanings.
A.P.S.S. : Andhra Pradesh Standard Specification
I.S. :

Indian Standard of the Bureau of Indian Standards

Sl.No. :
01.

I.S. Number Short Title

IS : 4701 - 1982

Code of practice for Earth work on canal

02.
IS : 7293 - 1974
machinery

Safety

code

for

working

with

construction

03.

IS : 3764 - 1966

Safety code for excavation work

04.

IS : 1498 - 1970

Classification and identification of soils for general

Engineering purposes.

05.
IS 2720 - 1973
water
(Part. 2)

Method of test for Soils part-2 Determination of

06.
IS 2720 - 1980
water
(Part. 7)

Method of test for Soils part-7 Determination of

07.
Dry

Method of test for soils part. 28 Determination of

IS 2720

content.

content dry density relation using light compaction.

Density of Soils (Part. 28) - 1974 in place by sand

replacement method.
08.
dry

IS 2720 - 1976

Method of test for soils part. 29 Determination of

(Part. 29)

density of soils in place by core cutter method

09.

IS 1888 - 1982

Method of load test on soils

10.

IS 2131 - 1981

Method of standard penetration test for soils.

11.
IS 4332 - 1967
sampling
(Part. 1)

Methods of test for stabilized soils Methods of

12.

IS 2720 - 1983

Method of test for soils - Grain Size

(Part. 4)

Analysis.

IS 2720 - 1985
(Part. 5)

Method of test for soils

Determination of liquid and plastic limits.

13.

and preparation of stabilised soils for testing.

14.
IS 2720 - 1971
relation
(Part. 9)

Determination of dry Density moisture content -

15.

Determination of unconfined compressive strength

IS 2720 - 1991
(Part. 10)

by constant weight of soil Method.

16.

IS 2720 - 1986
(Part. 13)

Method of test for soils part. 13 direct shear test,

17.

IS 2720 - 1986
(Part. 15)

Method of test for soils : part 15 Determination of

consolidation properties.

18.

IS 2720 - 1983
(Part. 14)

Method of test for soils Determination of Density

Index (relative density) of cohesion less soils.

19.

IS 2720 - 1987
(Part. 16)

Method of test for soils

Laboratory determination of C.B.R.

20.

IS 2720 - 1964
(Part. 18)

Method of test for soils

Determination of field moisture equivalent.

21.

IS 2720 - 1977
(Part. 40)

Method of test for soils Determination of free

swell of soils

22.

IS 2720 - 1977
(Part. 41)

Method of test for soils of soils. Determination of

swelling pressure of soils.

23.

IS 8237 - 1985

Code of practice for protection of slope for reservoir

embankment.

24.

IS 8414 - 1977

Guidelines for design of under seepage control

measures for earth and rock fill dams.

In addition to the above I.S. codes, the specifications of A.P.S.S. and

manual for Quality Control and Inspection shall also be complied with.
3.1.2.GENERAL
a)

The work to be done under these specifications shall consist of

furnishing all tools, constructional plant, labour, materials and other
things required for excavation in all strata, conveyance and disposal of
the excavated materials, leads and lifts, temporary work for
performance of all the operations connected with the work embraced
under the contract as will secure a satisfactory quality of work.

b)

Construction and maintenance of diversions in case diversion of

existing communication lines, channels, vagus or drains where they
were disturbed due to excavation of canal and for construction of
structures.

3.1.3 SCOPE :
Excavation of canal/Channel/approach channel/drain/cut off trench/Key
trench/ toe wall/toe drain/foundations for structures/Cut off wall/Chute drains
etc. all soils/HDRI and 11/F&F rock/Nandyal Shales/HR in both wet and dry
conditions and disposal of spoil not useful for construction on spoil bank and
soils not required for construction of stock piles and stacking of useful stone,
disposal of not useful stone, conveyance of excavated spoil/soils including
swell, conveyance of excavated rock including voids, with all leads, lifts and

delifts and formation of spoil bank/stock piles, including dewatering, diversion

of streams, formation and removal of ramps, diversion roads/approach roads,
shoring/strutting etc., as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer in
charge to complete the finished item of work.
3.1.4 PLANNING:
a)

Prior to the commencement of work, all relevant data shall be

collected by the Contractor and drawing prepared by him showing the
location of the excavation, spoil, deposition and filling. On these
drawings, full cutting reaches, partial cutting reaches, partial cutting
and partial embankment reaches and full embankment reaches should
be distinctly indicated separately. The quantity of material to be
placed in fill shall be noted clearly in these reaches. Where the
material to be excavated consists of different types and if the various
types have to be used separately in the fill or dumped to spoil bank,
the quantities of each class of material in each area should be shown
on drawings.

b)

The contractor shall present his planning of the work along with
required details to the Executive Engineer at least 15 days before
starting the work.

3.1.5 a)
b)

Setting out works: Specification 1.1.3 shall apply.

Bench mark: Specification 1.1.2 shall apply.

c)

Prior to starting any work, the contractor shall erect additional

permanent bench marks, reference lines, reference points and check
profiles at convenient locations approved by the Executive Engineer.
The Bench Mark stones shall be of 600 mm 200 mm. X 200 mm. size
with 450 mm. embedded under firm ground in concrete and 150 mm.
projecting above ground. The word B.M. showing value of R.L. shall be
conspicuously carved and painted.

d)

The check profiles shall be located at 25m apart or closer as directed

by the Engineer in charge so as to ensure execution of all slopes,
steps and elevations, to the profile or profiles indicated on the
approved drawings. All the important levels and all control points with
respect to Bench Marks and reference lines shall be fixed and
correlated by the Engineer in charge.

e)

The contractor shall take all precautions to see that the lines, points
and Bench Marks fixed by the Department are not disturbed by his
work and shall make good of any such damage.

f)

All materials and labour for setting out works including construction of
Bench Marks, reference lines, check profiles and surveys, as may be
required at various stages of construction shall be supplied by the
Contractor at his cost. The cost of such work shall be deemed to have
been included in the cost of the relevant item of excavation in the
Schedule - A.

g)

The alignment of the canal is only tentative. Even if the alignment is

changed the rates quoted by the contractor will hold good.

3.1.6 CLEARING THE SITE :

The provisions of specification 2.0 shall apply.
3.1.7 Preparation of surface under embankment :
A)

GENERAL :
The preparation of surfaces to the full width of proposed canal cutting
including the bed, berms and under canal banks and tank bund and
borrow area shall be in accordance with clause 6.5 IS: 4701 - 1982.
Before commencing the work, the toe of the slope on each side of the
banks plus 450 to 600 mm on each side for trimming to loose soils
from the edge after compaction shall be lock spitted (Dog-belled) and
marked by pegs, firmly driven into the ground at intervals of 25m. or
closer. Profiles made by bamboos, earth or other convenient materials
and strings shall be set up for the guidance of the workmen at about
50 meters apart over straight reaches and about 25 meters apart at
curves. In setting up the profile for an embankment a suitable
allowance shall be made for settlement.

b)

Before beginning the excavation and or construction of embankments,

the surface area of ground to be occupied and also the area of canal
cutting from which useful materials for construction of embankments
are to be used shall be cleared as per the provisions of specification
2.0.

3.1.8. STRIPPING:
If separate schedule 'A' item for stripping is not provided the minimum
stripping depths are as follows:
TABLE.1 DEPTH OF STRIPPING
SL.
No.

TYPE OF VEGETATIVE
COVER ON THE SOIL

DEPTH OF STRIPPING

1)

Soil Containing Light Grass Cover

5.0 to 7.5 Centimeters.

2)

Agricultural Land
sually

To the bottom of Ploughed Zone

15.0 to 22.5 Centimeters.

a)

The stripping shall be done in advance.

b)

No separate payment will be made to the contractor for complying the

requirements of this paragraph and all costs shall be deemed to have
been included in the rates quoted in schedule-A for the items of
formation of embankment, unless otherwise specified.

c)

Where the ground surface under any embankments is not suitable as

determined by the Engineer for foundation of the embankment such
as sand mixed BC soils, the contractor shall strip the area under the

embankment of such unsuitable material to such depths as may be

directed by the Engineer. Measurement for payment for this extra
depth of stripping of unsuitable material under embankments will be
made only to the lines and to such depths as may be directed by the
Engineer and payment will be made at unit rate of relevant item in
Schedule-"A" for excavation.
d)

Where the ground surface is below the bed level of the canal this area
shall also be stripped.

e)

All the stripped material shall be deposited beyond the catch drain at
the rear toe of embankment.

3.1.9 SCARIFICATION:
a)

The stripped surface under all canal embankments (excepting rock

surfaces) shall be loosened or scarified by means of a plough or ripper
or any other method. The furrows shall be not less than 20
centimeters deep below the stripped ground surface at intervals not
more than I metre.

b)

Where the ground surface is below the bed level of the canal, the
entire surface of the foundations for bed filling shall also be scarified
above.

c)

No payments shall be made for scarifying. The cost of scarifying the

foundation
surface
under
canal
embankments
and
other
embankments shall be deemed to have been Included in the unit rate
of relevant item in Schedule - "A" for item of formation of
embankment.

3.1.10 RECORDING OF CROSS SECTIONS:

a)

After clearing the area required for canal excavation and construction
of embankments., in accordance with the provisions of specifications
2.1. cross sections shall be taken at every 25 M. interval or closer,
depending on the nature of ground, normal to axis of canal up to
sufficient distance outside the limits of the work. Levels on cross
sections shall be at 3M. intervals or closer intervals as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge and entered in level field books by the Engineer in
charge in the presence of the contractor or his authorised
representative and these shall be binding on the contractor. The
contractor shall write a certificate: Accepted the prelevels recorded on
page from .... to .... " and sign at the end of levels in the level field
book in token of acceptance.

b)

After stripping and prior to commencement of excavation cross

sectional levels of the stripped surface shall be taken at the same
locations and intervals as specified in para (a) above and certificated
as mentioned shall be recorded by the contractor.
At the earliest, cross sectional profiles shall be prepared duly plotting
the prelevels and the contractor's signature shall be obtained on these

cross section sheets. The cross sections called initial cross section
taken after striping shall form the basis of all future measurements
and payments. These initial cross sections duly signed by the
contractor and Exe. Engineer shall be preserved. All linear dimensions
shall be measured in metres to the nearest 0.01 metre volumes
worked out in cubic metres corrected 0.01 cubie metre. However, In
case of rock excavation occurring in bed or sides, the actual quantity
of rock shall be arrived by taking block levels at 2.5M. intervals all
along the entire area of bed and sides.
c)

Initial stripping level will be taken by Asst. Engineer/Asst. Executive

Engineer and check levels by the officer not lower than the rank of Dy.
Exe. Engineer before starting the work and the signature of the
contractor will be taken in token of acceptance of the levels.

d)

No separate payment will be made to the contractor for the materials

and labour provided for taking the cross - sectional levels.

3.1.11. AUTHORITY FOR CLASSIFICATION:

a)

The classification shall be done by the construction Executive

Engineer and Executive Engineer / Quality control & Inspection. If the
variation in classification is 10% and above, the classification shall be
done by the concerned Superintending Engineer / S.E./Q.C&I.

b)

The final classification shall be decided by the Superintending

Engineer and his decision shall be final and binding on the contractor.
The Soil Classification shall be based on the open classification.

c)

Merely the use of explosives in excavation will not be considered as a

reason for a higher classification unless blasting is clearing necessary
in the opinion of the Executive Engineer. Contractor shall assume all
responsibility for deductions and conclusions, as to the nature of the
materials to be excavated and the difficulties of making and
maintaining the required excavations.

Note : The department will have the right to reclassify the soils and rock
even after excavation and payment based on the inspection of
excavate materials and the existing slopes of the canal.
d)

It is the responsibility of the contractor to perform and maintain the

excavation to the pay lines described in these specifications or as
shown on the drawings.

3.1.12. CLASSIFICATIONS OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS :

All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the
Executive Engineer into the following groups.
A)

ALL SOILS :
This shall comprise ordinary soils such as sand and loose soils, wet
sand not under water, silt in canals, channels and drains. Loamy and
clayey soils like black cotton soils, red earth and ordinary gravel.

Slushy soils, clayey soils in wet and slushy condition. Hard gravely
soils, mixture of gravel, and soft disintegrated rock like shales,
ordinary gravel, stoney earth and earth mixed with fair size boulders,
soft disintegrated rocks (removable by pick axes and crow bars) and
stone matrix in any direction and mixture of these and similar
materials in both dry and wet conditions.
b)

Hard Disintegrated Rock - I & II :

This shall comprise hard disintegrated rock and conglomerate rock
etc. removable by pick axes, and crow bars and Hard disintegrated
rock or soft rock or conglomerate rock, hard lime kankar requiring
partial blasting.

c)

Fissure and Fractured rock :

Fissured and fractured rock and boulders upto 3 cubic metres in size
requiring blasting.

d)

Hard Rock :
Hard rock and boulders of size greater than 3 cubic metres in size
requiring blasting.

3.1.13. EXCAVATION :
a)

Where sub-soil water is expected the excavation shall be started

preferably from the nearest valley.

b)

The contractor shall commence excavation immediately after the

surface area of ground is prepared.

c)

The cross sections are shown on the drawings. The Government

reserves the right, during the progress of work to vary the slope of
excavation or the slope of embankment and the dimensions depended
thereon. Any Increase or decrease of quantities excavated as a result
of such variations will be included for payment.

d)

Suitable arrangements for drainage shall be provided to take surface

water clear of excavation during the progress of work. Sump pits if
found necessary shall be excavated at suitable places and the water
thus collected shall be bailed out or let into a nearby valley at his cost.
When cutting on cross sloping ground, the contractor shall cut a catch
water drain on the higher side to prevent water from flowing down the
cutting slope. No separate payment shall be made for this work unless
otherwise specified.

e)

No distinction shall be made as to whether the material being

excavated is wet or dry or in water.

f)

All washable materials and any soil which generally becomes unstable
on saturation such as organic soil, loose soils and expansive soils shall
be removed as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Payment will be
made for this work as per the relevant rate in Schedule - "A".

g)

All suitable excavated material within economic lead shall be used for
construction of embankments.

h)

Stones of more than 75mm. in size and indurate materials shall be

removed from material to be used for compacted embankments.

i)

In soils the Contractor shall not excavate out side the slopes or below
the established grades or loosen any materials outside the limits of
excavation. Any excess depth excavated below the specified levels it
shall be made good at the cost of the contractor to standards as
prescribed by the Engineer in charge.

j)

The method of drilling and blasting to be resorted to the excavation in

rock shall be in accordance with specification 3.3. "Drilling and
Blasting" and got approved by the Executive Engineer.

k)

Above the lining, in case of lined canals and above the proposed water
level in case of unlined canals, the rock may be allowed to stand at it's
safe angle and no finishing is required other than removal of rock
masses which are loose and are liable to fall.

l)

Except in areas of rock, all areas to be excavated shall be pre-wetted

so that at the time of excavation moisture content, will be at about
optimum. However, in case of the spoils to be deposited on spoil bank
such pre wetting need not be done.

m)

During rock excavation, the contractor will not be allowed to dispose

of the rubble, Surplus usable rubble shall be allowed to be used in
construction of rock toe... masonry works and for crushing to use as
metals in concrete works etc. subject to approval of the Executive
Engineer. The cost thereof will be recovered from the contractor's bills.

n)

The regradation for tail channel and approach channel for structures
and diversion of drains or vagus shall conform to the lines,
dimensions, grades, side slopes, and levels as shown on drawings or
as directed by the Engineer in charge. Payment shall be made for this
work at the relevant rate of Schedule-"A" for excavation.

o)

Where suitable materials in excess of that required to construct

adjacent embankments or in deficit sections by conveyance or back
filling of structures or to construct O. & M. Road, Ramps and Bridge
approach embankments as determined by the Engineer in charge in
one continuous operation, then such materials shall be stockpiled at
places designated by the Executive Engineer for later use.

p)

All gangways, roads and stopping shall be such that they fall within
the cross sections so that the final dressing of slope will consist of
digging and no rolling will be required.

q)

During rock excavations, over-hangs or unsafe slopes shall not be

permitted.

r)

Unless otherwise specified, over excavation in rocks/soils shall not be

permitted.

s)

Blasting in a manner as to produce over-breakage which in the opinion

of Executive Engineer is excessive shall not be permitted. Special care

shall be taken to prevent over breakage or loosening of material on

bottom and side slopes against which lining is to be placed.
t)

Final cutting for 300 MM. in rock shall be carried out by controlled
blasting or trimming or by chiseling wedging, barring with the help of
pneumatic paving breakers and no extra payment will be made. The
cost of such work shall be deemed to have been included in rates of
relevant item in Schedule - "A".

u)

In the case of fissured rock and hard rock premeasurements shall be

taken by the Dept. The contractor shall before commencing the
excavation in rock etc., expose the surface for inspection by the
Executive
Engineer
or
his
authorised
subordinates.
The
premeasurements will be taken by taking levels at 2.5M. intervals both
ways which forms the basis for payment of excavation for rocks.
Where the rock is intermingled with ordinary soils contained
premeasurements of soils shall be taken and measurement of soils
shall be obtained after deducting from the contained measurements,
the quantity of boulders etc. Which will have to be stacked as per
A.P.S.S.

v)

In the case of boulders they should be marked by the

premeasurements recorded. After removal and stacked as directed by
the Executive Engineer or his subordinates, the contractor will be paid
for the quantity of boulders as per the premeasurement or as per their
stack measurements whichever is less.
Wherever stack
measurement are taken a minimum of 40% shall be deducted for
voids. After the work is completed a certificate shall be given in the
measurements will be resorted to by making due allowance of voids if
it is necessary to deduce any other information. For example, fissured
and fractured rock and hard rock and H.D.R. occur very badly
intermingled in certain places and cannot be premeasured or finally
measured or separately. In such cases any combined measurement
shall be taken as mentioned above and measurements of Hard
Disintegrated rock shall be deduced from the stacks of hard rock that
have been formed. The spoil of the boulders so removed shall be
stacked or deposited separately as directed and in place as shown by
the Executive Engineer or his Subordinates and shall not be mixed
with other soils. No separate charges for stacking done for the
purpose explained above shall be paid to contractor.

w)

In case of reservoir / tank works, the useful materials excavated in the

cut of trenches, key trenches approach channels from the sluices, over
burden removal on the U/S and D/S sides of surplus weir, and
foundations excavation for sluices and surplus weir, excavated under
the provisions of schedule 'A' shall be used for construction purposes.
Any materials unsuitable for construction purposes shall be disposed
off as directed by the Engineer in charge.

3.1.14 . EXCAVATION FOR KEY TRENCHES AND CUT OFF TRENCHES :

a)

Immediately after preparation of the ground surface for embankment

and prior to commencement of canal excavation the contractor shall

excavate key and cutoff trenches to dimensions, slopes, grades and

levels as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in
charge.
b)

All materials suitable for embankment construction as determined by

the Engineer-in charge based on laboratory test results shall be used
in construction of the embankments. Any material unsuitable for
embankments shall be disposed off as directed by the Engineer-incharge on the spoil bank on the rear side of catch drain / toe drain.

3.1.15.

SLIDES / SLIPS :

a)

If slides occur in cuttings during the process of excavation they shall

be removed by the contractor at his cost as directed by the Engineer
in charge.

b)

If finished slope slide into the canal subsequently such slips in rock
shall be removed measured and paid, provided such slips are not due
to the negligence on the part of the contractor. The nature and
quantity of such slips shall be determined by a joint inspection by the
Executive Engineer / Inspection & Quality control and Executive
Engineer (Construction)
The decision taken by them is binding on the contractor.

c)

The Classification of debris materials shall confirm to its conditions at

the time of removal and payment made accordingly regardless of its
conditions earlier, If side/slip is due to the causes beyond the control
of the contractor.

3.1.16 . OVER EXCAVATION:

a)

In soils any excess depth below the specified levels and any excess
excavation in slopes and widths shall be made good at the cost of the
contractor with suitable soils of similar characteristics and compacted
to a density not less than 95% of proctor's density.

3.1.17 For excavation in rock, tolerance of 75mm beyond the designed canal
profile will however be permitted. No extra payment will be made for
the excavation beyond the designed canal profile. The over breakage
within the tolerance limit of 75 mm shall be refilled with.
i)

Sand and metal in (1:2) ratio using 40mm & 20mm size metal
obtained from canal spoil in (4:1) ratio in bed.

ii)

M 7.5 mix using 40mm. MSA. H.B. Metal graded or approved quality
obtainable from canal spoil for side lining.
Payment for filling such over breakages shall be at the unit rate
quoted in Schedule-"A"

a)

Should any excavation occur beyond the tolerance limit, the excess
quantity so removed beyond tolerance limit, will not be paid on the
other hand the contractor is liable for penal recovery twice the
agreement rate for similar item for the excess quantity excavated. The
same shall also be refilled at contractor's own expenses, with

i)

Sand and metal in (1:2) ratio using 40 mm. and 20mm. size metal in
(4:1) ratio in bed.

ii)

R.R. Masonry in C.M. (1:6) in sides.

b)

However, over-breakages occurring due to natural causes and slips in

rock which are not due to the negligence of the contractor will be
measured for payment. The nature and quantity of such over
breakages will be determined by joint inspection by a Geologist and
the Superintending Engineer. The decision taken by them is binding on
the contractor. Refilling of the same shall be done as indicated at (i)
and (ii) under (a) above and such will be paid at the applicable unit
rate in the item of Schedule -A for refilling of over breakages.
The tenderer while quoting for excavation shall keep the above
conditions in view.

c)

In the land canal where expansive type of soil such as C.H. type of soil
is encountered and over which cement concrete lining directly be laid,
the canal prism shall be over excavated to the extents as directed by
the Engineer in charge and such over excavated section shall be filled
with suitable cohesive non-swelling (CNS) type soil and shall be placed
in uniform horizontal layers and compacted as directed by the
Engineer in charge. The over excavation made in such strata filling by
suitable soil locating and compacting of such soil will be paid
separately.

3.1.18 .

DEWATERING:

If water is met in the excavation due to sub - soil ground water,

springs, seepage, rain or other causes, it shall be removed by suitable
diversions, pumping or bailing out and the sub-soil water table shall
be kept below the excavation so that the excavation kept dry
whenever so required as directed by the Engineer-in-charge care shall
be taken to discharge the drained water as not to cause damage to
the works, crops or any other property. In case of lined canals, the sub
soil water shall not be allowed to accumulate in the bottom of the
canal. The bed/sides shall be moistured to receive lining as directed by
the Engineer in charge. No separate payment will be made for
dewatering. The cost of such work, shall be deemed to have been
included in rate of respective item of Schedule - "A".
3.1.19.DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL :
a)

No rehandling of excavated materials due to injudicious selection of

place for dumping will be paid for.

b)

Materials removed in excavation including stripped top soil and

expansive soils not required for embankments, back fill or other
required earth work shall be deposited in waste banks on right of way
owned by or controlled by the department as directed, by the
Engineer - in - charge. A gap of 3 M. wide shall be left in spoil banks at
150M. Intervals or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge for disposal of
drainage in accordance with clause 8.20 of IS: 4701-1982.

c)

Minimum gap of I metre or 1/2 the depth of canal excavation as per

drawing (whichever is more) from the edge of the canal excavation
canal at G.L. in cutting reaches and I M gap from the outer toe of the
embankment to the inner toe of the spoil bank or a greater distance
as prescribed by the Engineer in charge shall be maintained.

d)

In case of Reservoir / Tank works, if the excavated materials in

stripping under embankment, foundations for sluices, surplus weir, toe
wall, toe drain, cut off trench, over burden removal on the U/S and D/S
Sluice of surplus weir, surplus course excavation, approach channels
to the sluices excavated under the provisions of schedule "A" and not
suitable for construction of embankment, shall be deposited beyond
the toe drain of embankment of reservoir / tank, leaving a gap of 1.0
meter or 1/2 the depth of toe drain or more and on either sides of the
surplus course on the rear side of the guide banks formed leaving a
gap of 1.0 meter or 1/2 the depth of surplus course, or more, as per
the drawings and as directed by the Engineer - in - charge. No
excavated or foreign materials shall be left in the foreshore area of the
reservoir / Tank.

e)

Where the canal is aligned on sloping ground, excavated material not

required for construction of adjacent embankments at any other place,
shall be deposited on the lower side. Where canal is on level or nearly
level ground, the materials from excavation shall be deposited on
embankments on both sides of the canal.

f)

In case of deep cutting the spoil shall be so disposed off as not to

result in unsightly heaps and shall be leveled and properly dressed.
The top of both the finished banks shall slope away from the inner
edge with a suitable gradient.

g)

If there is excess of useful material from the excavation than needed

for construction of embankments of canal/reservoir/tank, it shall be
used to strengthen the embankment on either side of the
canal/reservoir/tank, deposited in low areas uphill of the canal to
eliminate trapped drainage, or it should be deposited in stock piles as
directed by the Engineer - in - charge. The disposal of excavated
material shall be in accordance with clauses o.1. of I.S. 4701 - 1982.

h)

The useful rock obtained from the cutting shall not be mixed with
other soils and shall be closely stacked to the gauge separately
beyond spoil bank and all other stone not useful for construction
purpose shall be deposited on the slopes of the canal spoil banks, If
the rock and soil or mixed up while depositing at the spoil banks
suitable deduction from the agreement rate as decided by the
Engineer-in-charge will be made which is binding on the contractor.

i)

Except as specially provided in these specifications for payment for

conveying on placing of individual items of excavated materials, the
cost of all work described in this paragraph shall be included in the
unit rate per one cubic metre in respect of both soils and rock in the
Schedule - "A".

j)

The contractor has no claim over any of the materials got out of
excavation of the canal cutting and foundation excavation.

k)

The responsibility for arranging the land required for disposal of

excavated material rest with contractor. If the contractor desires to
dispose the materials at near by places other than the places shown
by the Engineer - in - charge to reduce the lead and thereby the cost
of conveyance.

3.1.20 .

LEADS:

a)

The leads and lifts for the soils excavated either in canal or in
foundations of embankments and structures and deposited on spoil
bank or on stock piles will be measured as under.

i)

Up to 100 mitres lead and 9 metres depth.

Up to 100 metres lead and 9 metre depth of canal excavation the
payment for over all shall be on head load and head lifts for all soils,
up to soft disintegrated rock, hard disintegrated rock and hard rock
including F & F. rock.

3.1.21.

HEAD LEADS AND LIFTS:

i)

The head leads and lifts will be measured in accordance with the
clause 301.5.1.1 of A.P.S.S.

ii)

Above 100M. lead and depth of excavation exceeding 9M. the lead will
be measured along the shortest route from the centre of excavation to
the center of deposition.

b)

The leads and lifts will not be measured for the soils utilized for
formation of embankment obtained from canal excavation or from
foundation excavation or from cut off excavation or from Surplus
course excavation or from any soils excavated under the provisions of
schedule 'A' items or from borrowed soils.

NOTE : If no separate item is provided in Schedule ''A" for leads, delifts and
for conveyance the respective schedule 'A' item for excavation should
include the cost of leads, lifts, delifts and for conveyance for disposal
of spoil/soil/rock or any other excavated material for disposal as per
clause 3.1.19 above.
3.1.22.

PAY LINE:

a)

The canal shall be excavated to the lines, dimensions side slopes and
levels shown on the drawings. Pay line for excavation in all soils and
rocks including subsequent removal of the extra depth for seating to
lining shall be to the dimensions, slips and grades and levels as shown
on the drawings unless otherwise specified.

b)

Payment for excavation done shall be strictly as per design section or

for the section as directed by Engineer-in-charge. No payment will be
made for excavation done beyond the pay lines shown on drawings
and defined as above unless otherwise specifically indicated.

3.1.23.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

Measurement:

a)

All original works shall be measured by levels.

b)

Where payments are to be made with reference to the levels the level
field Books, the cross-section sheets and the calculation sheets shall
be treated as adjuncts to the measurement books.

c)

All linear measurements shall be in metre correct to 0.01 metre and

volume worked out in cubic metres corrected to 0.01 cubic metre.

d)

Unless otherwise specified in these specifications excavation for cut

off trenches, canal, drains etc. shall be measured in excavation to the
lines, slopes, grades and as shown on the drawings or as provided in
these specifications or as prescribed by the Engineer in charge.

e)

It shall be clearly understood that no excavation beyond pay line shall

be measure for payment.

f)

On the initial cross-sectional plans which form the

basis for all
payments, lines, grades, side slopes, and level of excavation
according to classification and construction embankments shall be
marked duly taking levels. On completion of excavation, final crosssections and the Quantities between the initial cross sections and final
cross-sections within the pay lines shall be worked out for payment.

g)

The unit for payment of earthwork excavation in soils is 10 cubic

metre and rock shall be one cubic metre.

3.1.24.

INTERMEDIATE PAYMENTS

a)

For intermediate payments lowest level may be taken for

bund/embankment and highest level in canal cutting in a bay of 25m.

b)

Payment for earth work embankment compacted to proctor's density

will be for the net Quantity of earth work after deducting the Quantity
towards shrinkage from the rolled Quantity computed based on the
compacted bund which should include allowance for shrinkage.

c)

Intermediate payment also will be made based on levels.

3.1.25.

RATE FOR PAYMENT:

The contract unit Quoted rate for the items of excavation in scheduleA for one cubic metre shall be the payment in full for carrying out the
following operations required for the individual items including full
compensation:
i)

Setting out

ii)

Site Clearance

iii)

Top soil removal or stripping and jungle clearance

iv)

Marking out providing and forming model sections, lock spitting,

strings and stakes as may be considered necessary by the Engineer in
charge to guide the contractor in excavating and depositing.

v)

Providing materials and labour for fixing reference lines, reference

points, additional bench marks, for taking levels and connecting bench
marks.

vi)

Initial rate for excavation by suitable machinery.

vii)

Dressing bed and trimming side slopes to exact sections as shown on

working plans.

viii)

Drilling wherever necessary or ripping

ix)

Blasting wherever necessary including cost, conveyance and storage

of blasting materials and control blasting.

x)

Final cutting for 300mm in all rocks by control blasting or wedging &
baring or trimming with the help of pneumatic paving breakers for
finishing.

xi)

Safety measures

xii)

All dewatering

xiii)

Providing temporary ramps and steps at the sides of deep trenches

and subsequent removal.

xiv)

Transporting the excavated materials and depositing the same on

sides of embankment or on spoil banks or stacking in stock piles to
the specifications inclusive of all leads and lifts, delifts including
preparation and maintenance of approach roads.

xv)

All work necessary to maintain the excavation in good order during

excavation.

xvi)

All labour, materials, tools, equipments, safe guards and incidentals

necessary to complete the work as per drawing to specifications.

3.1.26. EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES:

Description of work:
a)

Excavation and depositing the soil on spoil bank or at any place

specified by the Engineer - in - charge with all leads and lifts for
structures shall consist of the removal of material for the construction
of foundations for the Structures like Bridges. Under Tunnels,
Aqueducts, Super-passages, retaining walls, canal side walls, in lets,
out lets, head walls, cut off walls, pipe under-tunnels, cross regulators,
off-take sluices and other similar structures, in accordance with the
requirements of these specifications and the lines elevations and
dimensions shown on the drawings or as indicated by the Engineer-incharge.

b)

The work shall include providing all the materials, tools and plants and
labour required for presplitting and utilising controlled blasting
technique over and above the normal blasting technique in hard rock
and quartzes excavation, construction of the necessary coffer dams
and cribs and their subsequent removal and necessary sheeting,
shoring, strutting, benching, draining and pumping the removal of all
logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and obstructions
necessary for placing the foundations : trimming bottom of
excavations : all leads and all lifts of excavated materials back filling
with selected approved material and clearing up the site and the
disposal of all surplus materials, spoil and the stone not useful for

construction purpose shall be deposited beyond the profile of the

structure, canal, stream etc. leaving a minimum gap of 5 metres, and
in accordance with clause 8.1 of IS 4701 - 1982 or at greater distance
as directed by the Engineer - in - charge The useful stone stacking and
soils required for back filling shall be placed at the contractors
convenience without foregoing the working space. No. rehandling of
materials will be paid and at the same time recovery will be made if
the obstructions are not removed after completion of the work form
the final bill at the rate calculated by the Engineer in charge to do the
same work with other agency. In so far as practicable, the material
removed in excavation for structures shall be used for backfilling and
embankments.
3.1.27CLASSFICATION OF EXCAVATION:
All material involved in excavation shall be classified in accordance
with para. 3.1.12.
3.1.28CONTRUCTION OPERATIONS:
i)

Setting - out
After the site has been cleared to the limits of excavation the work
shall be set out true to lines, curves, and slopes as shown on plans.

II)

EXCAVATION:

a)

Excavation shall be taken to the width of the lowest step of the footing
and the side shall be left to plumb where the nature of soil allows it.
Where the nature of soil or the depth of the trench does not permit
vertical sides, the contractor at his own expense shall put up
necessary shoring, strutting and planking or cut slopes to a safer
angle or both with due regard to safety of personnel and works and to
the satisfaction of the Engineer - in - charge.

b)

The depth to which the excavation is to be carried out shall be as

shown on the drawings, unless the type of material encountered is
such as to require changes in which case the depth shall be as ordered
by the Engineer - in - charge and will be paid for.

c)

Excavation in rock shall be carried out by crow bars, pick axes, chisels
or pneumatic drills etc., Unless permitted by Engineer-in-charge
blasting shall not be resorted to.

d)

Where blasting is to be resorted to the same shall be carried out to the

requirements of specification 3.3 and all precautions therein observed.

e)

No distinction shall be made as to whether the material being

excavated is dry or moist or in water.
The method of drilling and blasting to be adopted for hard rock
including F & F, rock excavation shall be approved by the Engineer-inCharge.
Blasting in a manner as the produce over breakage which in the
opinion of Engineer in charge is excessive shall not be done. In order
to minimise over breakage and loosening of material at the finished

surface on bottom and side slopes over which foundation concrete is

to be laid, final cutting for the last 300mm in hard rock shall be carried
out by controlled blasting or chiseling or trimming with the help of
pneumatic paying breakers. If excavation is required to be done within
30m. from the existing structures the same should be carried out by
chiseling without resorting to blasting for which no extra rate is
payable.
3.1.29DEWATERING AND PROTECTION:
a)

Where water is met with in excavation due to stream flow, seepage,

rain or other reasons, the contractor shall take adequate measures
such as bailing, pumping, construction of diversion channels, drainage
channels, bunds, cofferdams and other necessary works to keep the
foundation trenches dry when so required and to protect the green
concrete/masonry against damage by erosion or sudden rising of
water level. The methods to be adopted in this regard and other
details there of shall be left to the choice of the contractor but subject
to approval of the Engineer-in-charge.

b)

Approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall however not relieve the

contractor of the responsibility for the adequacy of dewatering and
protection arrangements and for the quality and safety of the works.

c)

The Contractor shall take all precautions in diverting the channels and
discharging the drained water as not to cause damage to the works,
crops or any other property.

d)

Pumping form the interior of a foundation shall be done in such a

manner as to preclude the possibility of the movement of water
through any fresh concrete. No pumping shall be permitted during the
placing of concrete or for any period of at least 24 hours thereafter,
unless it is done from a suitable sump separated from the concrete
works by watertight wall or other similar means.

3.1.30 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION:

a)

The contractor shall prepare firm foundation for the structure as

shown in the drawings. The bottom and side slopes of foundation upon
or against which the structure is to be placed shall be finished to the
prescribed levels and dimensions shown on plans.

b)

The bottom of the foundation shall be leveled both longitudinally and

transversely or stepped as directed by Engineer-in-charge. Before
foundation concrete is laid, the surface shall be slightly watered and
rammed. In the event of excavation having been made deeper than
that shown on the drawings the extra depth shall be made up with
concrete or masonry of the foundation grade at the cost of the
contractor as directed by the Engineer - in-charge. Ordinarily earth
filling shall not be used for the purpose to bring the foundation level. If
a hard stratum is not met at foundation level shown in the drawings
extra depth as directed by Engineer - in- charge shall be excavated to
remove unsuitable material. The extra excavation or extra depth
made up with masonry or concrete will be paid for as approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.

c)

When rock or other hard strata is encountered, it shall be free from all
soft and loose material, cleaned and cut to a firm surface either level,
stepped or serrated as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. All seams
shall be cleaned out and filled with cement mortar or grout to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

d)

If it is considered necessary by the Engineer in charge, to consolidate

the foundation strata by grouting cement slurry, the drilling and
grouting or any other foundation treatment as directed by the
Engineering-in-charge shall be done by the contractor and payment
will be made at the rates quoted in Schedule 'A'.

e)

Separate payment will not be made to the contractor for moistening

and compacting the foundation of structures. The contractor shall
include the cost thereof in the rate per cubic metre of the item of
Schedule-'A' for preparation of foundation.

f)

The quantities for payment will be to the dimensions shown on the

drawings.

3.1.31. OVER EXCAVATION

a)

If at any point in common excavation, the foundation material is

excavated beyond the lines required to receive the structure or the
natural foundation materials is disturbed or loosened during the
excavation process, it shall be done as follows :

i)

In excavation of soils, over excavation shall be filled back with suitable

selected bedding material and compacted.

ii)

The Soils loosened or disturbed shall be compacted by filling extra

selected bedding material if found necessary and compacted.

iii)

In respect of rock all excess excavation or over excavation performed

by the contractor for any purpose or reason except for additional
excavation as may be prescribed by the Engineer - in - charge whether
or not due to the negligence or fault of the contractor, the excess or
over excavation shall be filled in by C.C. of grade directly coming over
it or M. 15.

iv)

No extra claim for such excavation, filling and compaction of soil/filling

concrete as specified above shall be entertained.

3.1.32.

SLIPS AND BLOWS:

If there are any slips or blows in the excavation, these shall be

removed by the contractor at his cost.
3.1.33.
a)

Regardless of excavation, pay line shall be to the lines dimensions and

actual foundation levels shown on the drawings or the subsequent
levels and dimensions as directed by the Engineer in charge in writing.

3.1.34.
a)

PAY LINE:

BACK FILLING:

Back filling shall be done with approved material after concrete on

masonry is fully set and carried out in such a way not to cause undue
thrust on any part of the structure as specified in para 3.2.26. All

space between foundation masonry/concrete and the sides of

excavation shall be refilled to the original surface, making due
allowance for settlement in 250 mm. loose layers which shall be
watered and compacted.
3.1.35.

MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT :

a)

Excavation for structures shall be measured in cubic meters for each

class of materials encountered, limited to the dimensions shown on
the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in charge. Excavation for
structures will be measured for box cutting with vertical sides of
foundation dimensions. Excavation of increased width, cutting of
slopes, shoring, shuttering and planking shall be deemed as
convenience for the contractor in executing the work and shall not be
measured and paid for separately.

b)

Foundation sealing, dewatering including pumping shall be deemed to

be incidental to the work and no separate payment will be made.

c)

The quantity for excavation in soils and rock will be arrived at form the
prelevels and finished levels of respective strata taken at 3 Metre or
less intervals both ways as decided by the Engineer in charge. The
levels will be plotted on graph sheet and average levels arrived at for
purpose of determining the quantity of excavation.

d)

The contractor or his authorised agent's signature in token of his

acceptance shall be recorded in level field books and graph sheet on
which levels have been plotted. Final payment will be made on levels
only. The contractor shall expose the surface of the strata for
inspection of Engineer in charge and for taking levels wherever the
classification and strata gets changed.

3.1.36

RATES FOR PAYMENT:

a)

The contractor unit rate per cum. quoted in Schedule 'A' for the items
of excavation for structures shall be the payment in full for carrying
out the required operations including full compensation for.

i)

Site clearance, such as clearing of shrubs, brushwood and disposal.

ii)

Setting out.

iii)

Forming temporary steps at sites of deep trenches and subsequent

removal.

iv)

Construction of necessary cofferdams, cribs, shuttering, shorting

strutting and bracing and their subsequent removal.

v)

Removal of all logs, stumps, grubs and other deleterious matter and
obstructions for placing the foundations including trimming of bottom
of excavation.

vi)

Foundation sealing dewatering including pumping.

vii)

All labour, materials, tools, plant, machinery equipment, safe guards

and incidentals necessary to complete the work to the specifications
and depositing of excavated useful materials on temporary stock piles

or on embankments under construction and disposing the waste

materials.
viii)

Trimming of rock foundation by controlled blasting technique over and

above the normal blasting technique and cleaning the foundation
surface and filling / sealing of all seams with cement grout or mortar
including all materials, labour and incidentals required for completing
the work and cleaning site after completion of work.

ix)

Removing slips and blows during excavation.

x)

Public safety measures

xi)

Disposal of surplus materials, with all leads, lifts and delifts the
excavated material

xii)

Completing the finished item of work.

3.1.37.
a)

PUBLIC SAFETY:

Nearest towns, villages and all frequented places, trenches and

foundation pits shall be securely fenced, provided with proper caution
signs and marked with red lights at night to avoid accidents. The
contractor shall take adequate protective measures to see that the
excavation operations do not effect or damage adjoining structures or
property.

3.1.38.

DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL :

a)

No re-handling of excavated material due to injudicious selection of

the place for dumping will be paid for.

b)

All surplus excavated material, which is not useful for any

embankment, or filling shall be disposed in accordance with clause
3.1.19 and as directed by the Engineer in Charge.

3.1.39.
a)

SIDE DRAINS:

The location, grades and sections of the drains shall be as shown on

the drawings and or as directed. Measurement of excavation for the
above drains will be made to the lines shown on the drawings or as
directed. Payment for excavation for the above drains and channels
will be made at the unit rate for excavation which unit rate shall
include the cost of excavation and placing the materials in
embankments or otherwise disposing of the excavated material and
all work necessary to maintain the work in good order.

3.2
EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
3.2.1 SCOPE:
Site clearance, stripping and formation of embankment of
homogeneous section/Zonal section viz., casing zone/hearting zone with the
useful excavated soils and balance soils of approved quality from the borrow

area including the cost of soil, if any, sampling, testing and pre-wetting of
soils at source of excavation and conveyance of Soil and extra soils required
for shrinkage including swell factor with all leads, lifts, delifts, laying on bank,
spreading breaking clods, sectioning, extra watering and consolidation
including benching of Old embankment Slopes, joining with the new
embankment formation, trimming of side slopes, formation and removal of
ramps, formation of Dowel banks etc., as per drawing and as directed by the
Engineer in charge to complete the finished item of work.
3.2.2. EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
a)

Setting out: specifications NO. 1.1.3 shall apply

3.2.3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

a)

The Cross sections for embankment are designed to suit the

characteristics of the best quality soils available in the vicinity of the
proposed work. If the contractor proposes to use any other type of
soils than those mentioned in the design to save the lead and there
by the cost pursuant to the clause of I.S. Code and A.P.S.S. the
contractor has to form the embankment to the revised profiles worked
out by the competent authority sanctioning the estimate. The extra
quantity involved will not be measured and paid. The theoretical
quantity required based on the original cross-sections will only be
measured and paid. But the Contractor has to form the bund to the
revised cross sectional designed with the characteristics of the
proposed soils. The designs given by the estimate sanctioning
authority are final.

b)

Embankment shall be built to the height, top width and side slopes as
shown on the drawings. All the edges of the embankment shall be
neatly aligned symmetrical to the central line. They shall be absolutely
straight in all reaches except at bends. At bends they shall be
smoothly curved.

c)

The top of each embankment shall be leveled and finished so as to be

suitable for road way and given a cross slope to drain away
rainwaters. The bank-carrying road shall be given a suitable cross
slope.

3.2.4.

MATERIAL : The provisions of schedule 'D' shall apply.

a)

The suitability of foundation of placing embankment materials thereon

and all materials proposed for use in construction of embankment
shall be determined by the Executive Engineer well in advance on the
basis of Laboratory Test results. Chemical and Physical tests of the
material proposed for construction of embankment shall be carried out
to ensure that the soil does not contain soluble lime content soluble
lime salt content or cohesion less fines, in quantities harmful to the
embankments.

b)

Material for construction of embankment should be free from the

organic materials. Unless otherwise directed by the Superintending
Engineer / Executive Engineer all materials shall be deposited in
embankments so that cobbles, gravel and boulders are well

distributed through other material and not wested in any position

within or under are embankment as per clause 6.4. of IS. 4701 - 1982.
c)

Suitable excavated materials available from the cut off trenches, canal
cutting, extra cutting for seating to lining. Foundation excavation for
structures, approach and tail channels for structures, vagu diversions,
removal of ramps obstruction removal on the upstream and down
stream of surplus weirs and excavation in surplus course and any such
excavations, shall be used for construction of adjacent embankments
and also embankments of deficit reaches.

d)

After completing the construction of embankments with the materials

as indicated in (c) above, material required for the construction of
balance embankment shall be obtained from the borrow areas.

e)

The soils and morum excavated and useful for construction of the
embankment shall be classified by the Superintending Engineer /
Executive Engineer as impervious and Semi-Pervious based on
Laboratory Test results. They shall be utilised on the embankment
work.

3.2.5. Preparation of ground surface for embankment

a)

Clearing site: Specification no 2.0 shall apply

b)

Stripping: Specification 3.1.8 shall apply.

c)

All portions of excavation made for test pits or other subsurface

investigations, all holes, hollows and all other existing cavities found
within the area to be covered and to the extent below the established
lines of excavation for embankment seat shall be filled in earth of the
corresponding zone of the embankment and suitably compacted. The
pits of surface boulders shall be filled with suitable material and
compacted at no extra cost.

d)

Pools of water shall not be permitted in the foundation for

embankment and such water shall be deemed and cleared prior to
placing the first layer of embankment materials.

e)

On sloping ground on in case of existing banks, where embankment

portions are to be modified, benching of slopes shall be done with a
little slope towards the inside of benching so as to give a good grip to
the embankment soil with the subgrade. Unless otherwise specified
the benches shall be 0.3 x 0.6 m on the front and rear slope of the
embankment. Before benching, the bank slopes shall be cleared of all
roots and vegetables matter as per specification 2.0. No separate
payment will be made for either benching or refilling. The rate quoted
for raising embankment is inclusive of above operations. The bank
section shall be brought to design standards by filling the scours with
suitable material and compacting to 98% proctor's density by suitable
measure of compaction.

f)

Soil foundation.
The ground surface under embankment and area of bed filling
wherever necessary (except rock surfaces) shall be loosened or

scarified making open furrows by means of a plough, or ripper or any

other methods to a depth of not less than 200 mm deep below the
stripped surface at intervals of not more than 1 M. to the satisfaction
of the Engineer. Roots or other debris turned up during scarifying shall
be removed from the entire foundation area for the fill. The areas
under the embankments shall be pre-wet by sprinkler before the
construction of embankment begins. The moisture content shall be
optimum. Water applied or pre-wetting of areas under the
embankment will not be measured for payment and shall be included
in the unit rate per cum quoted in Schedule 'A' for compacting
embankment.

g)

Rock foundation
The treatment of the rock surface under the embankment shall be
done so as to ensure tight bond between embankment and the
foundation. This shall be done by the following procedure.

i)

The area of the rock surface, which is to be in contact with the

embankment, shall be fully exposed by removing all the loose and
disintegrated rock having the surface of rock rugged. Hard rock
projects and overhangs shall be removed. If blasting is to be resorted
to, care shall be taken to avoid objectionable shocks to foundation
rock. As far as possible the whole contact area shall be exposed at one
time to enable examination of rock surface characteristics and
planning the method of treatment.

ii)

Exposed rock shall be benched.

3.2.8. COMPACTION
a)
General
The earth compacting equipment specified in appendix-C of I.S. 47011982 shall be used for compacting the soils shown against them. The
compacting equipment shall conform to the relevant I.S. Specification.
While the I.S. Specifications specify the compacting. It is contended
that the use of improved compaction equipment for embankment
construction shall be encouraged as may be most suited to the site
conditions and the programme of construction. The methods of
compaction shall conform to clause 7.2., 7.2.2 and 7.2.3 of I.S. 4701 1982.
3.2.7. COHESIVE MATERIALS.
a.

When each layer of materials has been prepared so as to have the

proper moisture content uniformly distributed throughout the
materials, it shall be compacted by passing the roller. The layer shall
be compacted in strips over lapping not less than 0.30 Meter. Rolling
shall commence at edges and progress towards centre longitudinally.
The rollers shall travel in a direction parallel to the axis of the bank.
Turns shall be made carefully to ensure uniform compaction. Density

tests shall be made after rolling and dry density attained shall be not
less than 98% of the maximum dry density (standard proctor) as
obtained in the laboratory for the type of materials used. The density
achieved shall not normally be less than the designed density. The dry
density of soil in field shall be determined in accordance with I.S. 2720
(Part - XXVIII) - 1974 or I.S. 2720 (Part. XXIX) - 1975.
b.

Standard proctor density test shall be carried out at regular intervals

to account for variations in the borrow area materials as well as that
in-situ excavated material. Not less than three tests shall be carried
out to indicate variations in the Standard Proctor Density attained in
laboratory.

c.

Engineer - might review the design if necessary on examination of

density test results and the contractor shall have no claim arising out
of such a review and consequent change, if any, in the design.

d.

i) In case embankment covers the barrels of cross drainage or any

other structures, first 45 cm. of the embankment shall not be
compacted with roller but it shall be compacted with pneumatic/hand
tampers in thin layers. The compaction above this layer of total 45 cm
shall be done by using suitable slight rollers to avoid damage to the
structure, by adjusting the thickness of layers until sufficient height is
achieved to permit compaction by heavy rollers. Density test shall be
conducted from time to time on site to as certain whether the
compaction is attained as specified above.
ii) Separate tests shall be conducted for each zone of the
embankment for every 1500 cubic metres of compacted earth work,
at least one field density test shall be taken in each layer. Minimum
two density tests shall be taken in each layer per day irrespective of
the quantity of earthwork specified above. In case the test shows that
the specified densities are not attained, suitable measure shall be
taken by the contractor either by moisture correction or by entire
removal and relaying of layer or by additional rolling so as to obtain
the specified density which shall be checked again by taking fresh
tests at the same locations. The Contractor shall provide necessary
unskilled labour required for carrying out such density tests.

e.

Compaction shall be achieved by the use of smooth rollers, pneumatic

type rollers, sheep foot rollers, mechanical compactors like vibratory
rollers, vibrating plates, programmers, power rammers, slope
compacting equipment, pneumatic tamping equipment and such other
equipment as shall be specified by the Engineer based on type of
material and actual field tests.

f.

The dimensions and weight of the rollers should be such as to exert a

ground pressure of not less than 12 kg/cm 2 of tamping when it is
empty and 25 kg cm2 when ballasted. The number of passes required
for each layer to obtain the specified density shall be determined by
actual field tests.

3.2.8 .

COHESIONLESS MATERIALS

a.

Where compaction of cohesion less free-draining material such as

sand and gravel is required, the materials shall be deposited in
horizontal layers and compacted to the relative density specified. The
excavating and placing operations shall be such that the material,
when compacted, shall be blended sufficiently to ensure the highest
practicable degree of compaction and stability. Water shall be added
to the materials if required to obtain the specified density depending
on the method of compaction being used.

b.

As per Clause 6.6.2.1 of I.S. 4701 - 1982, the thickness of

embankment layer shall not exceed 25 cms. (Loose) before
compaction and it should be spread over the full width of
embankment and compaction shall be done by rollers or tampers to
obtain specified density. The thickness of the horizontal layers after
compaction shall not be more than 10 cm. if compaction is performed
by tampers, not more than 15 cms. if by 8 to 10 tonnes rollers and not
more than 30 cm. If compaction is performed by vibratory or
pneumatic rollers or similar equipment. The relative density of the
compacted materials shall not be less than 70 percent as determined
by laboratory tests as per I.S. 2720 Part - XIV. If compaction is
performed by internal vibrators, the thickness of layers shall not be
more than the penetrating depth of the vibrator.

3.2.9. Embankment without controlled compaction.

a.

No materials shall be placed in any section of the earth fill portion of

the embankment until the embankment seat for that section has been
approved by Executive Engineer.

b.

Where the natural ground surface is above the maximum water but
below the top of the embankment, the embankment shall be built in
layers not exceeding 15 cm. in thickness and to the full width of
embankment. Each layer shall be commenced from the edge farthest
from excavation. It shall be compacted with Two tons roller.

c.

The excavating and hauling equipment shall travel over the

embankment to evenly distribute the materials and compacting effect
over the whole surface.

3.2.10.

EMBANKMENTS WITH CONTROLLED COMPACTION.

a.

Bushes, roots, sods or other perishable or unsuitable materials shall

not be placed in the embankment.

b.

(i) Unless otherwise specified, embankment materials shall be spread

in successive horizontal layers generally not exceeding 25 cm. in
thickness (loose layer) in the zones where these are required to be
laid, extending to the full width of the embankment including slopes at
the level of the particular layer. Each layer shall be commenced from
the edge farthest from excavation. In no case shall embankments be
widened by material dumped from the top.
(ii) Top of each layer shall be kept slightly depressed in the centre.

c.

(i) Extra width of 600 mm. in thickness as measured perpendicular to

the slope shall be provided on either side so that when compacted,

lines of the finished embankment slopes shall have not less than
specified density.
(ii) Later the extra width shall be neatly trimmed and the trimmed
material shall be permitted for re-use in embankment at higher
elevations.
(iii) No payment shall be made for providing or removal of the extra
section. Removal of extra section in the embankment shall be deemed
to have been included in the item of compaction.
d.

Thickness of layers shall be adjusted with particular type of

compactors used to give the required density by carrying out trial
compaction and requisite tests and required number of passes should
also be determined as directed by the Engineer.

e.

No fresh layer shall be laid until the previous layer is properly watered
and compacted as per requirement. The work of spreading and
compaction shall be so adjusted as not to interfere with each other
and in such a way that neither of the operations is held up because of
non-completion of the rolling and watering. The surface of the banking
shall at all times of construction be maintained true to required cross
section. If the surface of any compacted layer of earth fill is too dry or
too smooth it shall be moistened and scarified to provide a
satisfactory bonding surface before the succeeding layer is placed. All
the rollers used on any one layer of fill shall be of the same type and
same weight.

f.

The contractor shall ensure that only approved soils are used for
construction of embankment.

g.

For proper bond of the embankment done in the previous season with
the new embankment, the work shall be carried out as detailed
below :
(i) In case of the old bank to be extended horizontally. It shall be cut to
a slope not steeper than 1 in 4 and the surface so prepared shall be
scarified and made loose at least for a depth of 15 Cm. Necessary
watering shall be done and the earth surface shall be thus prepared to
receive the new embankments. The soils shall be laid in layers and
compacted to the required degree of compaction to have a proper
bond with the old one.
(ii)
If the old bank is to be raised vertically, vegetation shall be
cleared followed by scarifying, watering and placing of the new earth
layer as specified above.
(iii) The surface which are damaged due to rain shall be made good
by filling with proper soil duly compacted by tampers. A cross slope
away from the centre of canal of about 1 in 80 shall be maintained
throughout the rainy season to ensure proper drainage in the event of
occasional rainfall. No extra or separate payment shall be made for
these items of work.

h.

Settlement allowance:

(i) The canal embankments shall be constructed to a higher elevation

than that shown on drawings at the rate of 2.5 cm. per every one
meter height of bank if power driven equipment is used and 25 cm/
height if other than power driven equipment is used for compaction
towards Shrinkage / Settlement.
(ii) No extra or separate payment shall be made for this work as this
shall be deemed to have been included in the respective item of
construction and consolidation of embankment.
i.

(i) Care shall be exercised that all large clods are broken and no clod
bigger than say 8 cm. rock, are buried in the banks.
(ii)

Homogenous Section

The homogeneous section for canal embankments shall be

provided as specified on the drawings. The available coarser and more
previous materials shall be placed nearby outer slopes in order to
have increasing permeability from inner to outer side. The compaction
shall be carried out as per Clause. 6.6.2 of I.S. 4701 - 1982.
iii)

Zonal Embankments.

In zonal sections the selected and approved soils shall be spread to

the required widths of respective zones. All the zones shall be
tackled simultaneously and the difference in level between zone to
zone shall not be more than 150 mm.
3.2.11.
a)

Moisture Content :
The initial moisture content of the material shall be determined at
the source of supply (all excavations including from the borrow
areas) in field laboratory test. Prior to and during compaction
operations, the embankment shall have optimum moisture content
required for the purpose of compaction and this moisture content
shall be fairly uniform throughout the layer as per clause 6.6 of I.S.
4701 - 1982.
In so far as practicable the moistening of the material shall be
performed at the site of excavation but such moistening shall be
supplement as required by sprinkling water at the site of
compaction, if necessarily. Flooding shall not be permitted under
any circumstances. Sprinkling of water shall be done either through
a proper sprinkler tanker or using proper spray nozzles. Sprinkling
straight from the water hose shall not be allowed.

b)

If the earth delivered to the embankment is too wet, it shall be dried

by aeration, exposure to the sun by ploughing or other using any
other methods, till the moisture content is acceptable optimum for
compaction. If due to wet weather, the moisture content cannot be
reduced to the required optimum by the above procedure, work on
compaction shall be suspended until such time the earth has dried
to the optimum moisture content. For such suspension of work no
extra claim by the contractor shall be allowed.

c)

If the moisture content is not uniformly distributed throughout the

layer or less than the optimum rolling shall be stopped and shall be
started again only when the above conditions are satisfied.
After adding the required amount of water, if found necessary, the
soil shall be processed by means of harrows, rotary mixers or as
otherwise approved until the layer is uniformly wet at optimum
moisture content.

d)

3.2.12.

Moisture content of each layer of soil shall be checked in accordance

with I.S.2720 (Part-II) 1973 and unless otherwise mentioned shall be
adjusted, making due allowance for evaporation losses that at any
time of compaction; upto -1% to +2% than the optimum moisture
content in casing zones and upto +1% to -1% than the optimum
moisture content in the hearting zones may be permissible. The
optimum moisture content shall be determined in accordance with
I.S.2720 (Part-VII) 1973. The above compaction tests will be
conducted by the Engineer or his authorized representative and the
contractor shall ensure compaction till it is satisfied that 98% of the
maximum dry density at OMC is obtained.
SPECIAL PRECAUTIONS:

a)

During the actual construction of any earthwork, maximum use

should be made of construction plant and routing of the plant should
be carefully controlled to obtain uniform compaction over as wide an
area as possible. Care should also be taken during the compaction
operation to shape the surface of the works to facilitate the
shedding and to minimize the absorption of rain water, particular
attention being given to the prevention of ponding of water. The
contractor shall do this at the end of each day's work.

b)

The earth moving machinery shall not be allowed to pass over a

compacted portion of the embankment beyond certain limits by
varying the hauling routes and ramps, thus ensuring that over
compaction does not take place in any particular reach.

c)

During the Construction, a small transverse slope from centre

towards the edges shall be given and further in the reach when
bank is being raised, the works shall be tackled in continuous
horizontal layers to avoid pools of water and concentration of flow of
water during rains, which will cause damages, scours and rain
gullies.

d)

Special precautions shall also be taken while rolling the spread soil
near structures, conduits, sluice barrels, filters, rock toes at the
junctions of bank connections with the structures, using hand or
power tampers. It is essential that the compaction of filling should
be carried out in such a manner as to avoid an unbalanced thrust on
walls etc., which might displace or damage it. The equipment shall
be provided with suitably shaped heads to obtain the required
density.

3.2.13. EMBANKMENT TEST SECTION:

Test Embankment section shall be built as directed by the Engineer

prior to starting fill operations or at an early stage of embankment
construction. The test section shall be used to establish
i) Layer thickness of fill materials.
ii) Optimum practicable moisture content.
iii) Number of passes of sheep footed roller/vibratory roller for
effective compaction.
3.2.14. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
i)

Embankment with Excavated Soils, and borrowed Soils:

The quantities between the levels taken after stripping and cross
sectional levels taken after construction of consolidated embankments with
the available useful excavation soils and with the soils obtained from Borrow
areas within the pay lines shall be worked out excluding rock toes and filters.
It shall be clearly understood that construction of embankments to extra
widths and extra height formed for shrinkage allowance as specified in
preceding paras will not include for payment.
3.2.15. INTERMEDIATE PAYMENT:
1)

For intermediate payments lowest

bund/embankment a bay of 25 M.

level

may

be

taken

for

2)

Payment for earth work embankment compacted to Proctor's

density will be for the net quantity of earthwork after deducting the
quantity towards shrinkage from the rolled quantity computed based
on the completed bund which should include allowance for
shrinkage.

3)

Intermediate payment also will be made based on levels.

3.2.16. RATE FOR PAYMENT:

i)

The payment shall be made for ten cubic meter of finished item of
work at the rate quoted in the Schedule "A" for the item of forming
embankment with excavated soils and the balance with Barrow Soils
& the rate shall include.

a)

Setting out site clearance, sampling, testing.

b)

Compacting Original Ground under embankment, pre-wetting of

soils at source of excavation, if the soils proposed for embankment
are from canal excavation, cut off excavation, foundation
excavation, overburden removal on U/S and D/S of surplus weir,
surplus course on by any other excavation soils covered under the
provisions of schedule 'A'.

c)

Breaking clods, spreading and sectioning.

d)

Extra watering and compaction to 98% proctor density or 90%

proctor density.

e)

Conducting pre construction tests of materials, and tests during

execution of work.

f)

Hire and operational charges of all machinery.

g)

Trimming of outer slopes of embankment.

h)

Extra width to ensure

required profile.

edges consolidation and trimming to the

i)

Shrinkage allowance and all other operations necessary to complete

the finished item of work.

j)

Cost and conveyance of Soils including shrinkage allowance, swell

factor and water with all leads and lifts, de-lifts.

k)

Cost of soils includes cost of borrow area, (if necessary) excavation

of soils at borrow area, rewetting of soils at borrow area, removal of
top soils at borrow area, removal of boulders and stones, wastage
etc.

l)

All other operational and incidental charges necessary to complete

the finished item of work.
Payment shall only be made after the completed section of
embankment.

3.2.17. REFILING OF KEY TRANCH AND CONSOLIDATION:

a)

Key trench shall be back filled with impervious material of the same
specifications and in the same manner, as for the impervious
hearting zone of the embankment of the canal. The impervious soil
shall be placed in continuous and approximately horizontal layers
not more than 25 Cm. (loose) and compacted by 8 to 10 Tonne
Power roller under optimum moisture content.

b)

Rolling shall be done along the key trench and the roller shall be
taken close to the sides of the trench.

c)

In cases where the compaction by rollers in not possible,

compaction to the required density shall be achieved by such other
means as specified by the Superintending Engineer/Executive
Engineer.

d)

Each layer shall be compacted to achieve the required dry density of

not less than 98% of the maximum dry density (Proctor's density)
for the type of material at optimum moisture content.

e)

Watering of material for its compaction shall have to be arranged by

the Contractor at his cost as the quoted rate for consolidation of
Schedule "A" is inclusive of watering.

f)

During placing and compaction of impervious soils in the key trench

where dewatering is involving, the sub soils water level at every
point in the key trench shall be maintained below the bottom of the
earth fill until the compacted fill in the key trench at that point has
reached a height of 3 m after which water level shall be maintained
at 1.5 below the top of compacted fill.

g)

The quantity for payment shall be the volume of key trench

measured in cubic meters. The unit for payment shall be ten cubic
metres, payment shall be at the quoted rate in schedule "A"
formation of embankment of embankment of ten cubic meter.

3.2.18. COMPACTING BY OTHER THAN POWER DRIVEN EQUIPMENT:

a)

This shall conform to that of embankments compacted by power

driven equipment except that instead of using power driven rollers
ordinary rollers driven by tillers shall be adopted for compaction if
the work is at small magnitude. No manual compaction shall be
allowed except through the use of pneumatic tampers laid only very
occasionally hand tampers shall be used.

b)

Thickness of layer shall not exceed 150 mm before compaction

(loose).

c)

Each layer shall be compacted to not less than 90% dry density
(Proctor's density) at optimum moisture unless otherwise specified.

d)

Any loose soil shall be removed by trimming and bringing

embankment and side slopes of canal to the sections shown on the
drawings.

e)

Measurement and rate for payment shall conform to Para 3.2.14.

slope compacting equipment and Pneumatic tamping equipment
should be used.

3.2.19. DOWEL BANKS:

a)

Dowel Banks shall be constructed to the dimensions, grades, slopes

as shown on the drawings.

b)

Payment will not be made for construction of Dowel Banks. The

rates quoted in Schedule "A" for formation of embankment is
inclusive of cost and conveyance of soils, forming dowel Banks neat
sectioning and all other operations necessary for the finished item of
work.

3.2.20. WEATHER CONDITIONS:

a)

Embankment soils shall be placed only when the weather conditions

are satisfactory to permit accurate control of the moisture content in
the embankment material. Before closing work in embankment, in
any continuous reach prior to setting of monsoon, the top surface
shall be graded and rolled with a smooth wheeled roller to facilitate
run-off away from the canal. Prior to resuming work, the top surface
shall be scarified and moistened or allowed to dry as necessary.

b)

The Contractor shall provide suitable protection works protect the

slope from erosion due to rainwater. No payment what so ever shall
be made for providing such protection work and rectifying any
monsoon damages.

3.2.21. BORROW AREA CONSIDERATION:

a)

The contractor shall use only the suitable soils for formation of
embankments, out of the soils excavated under the provisions of
schedule 'A', if they are proved to be suitable, based on Laboratory
test results, and if they are with in the Economic lead. Otherwise the
contractor shall borrow the soils from the borrow area after test

checking the suitability of the soils for the embankment for

particular embankment work.
b)

The contractor shall be allowed to borrow the soils from the fore
shore areas of Reservoirs/tanks, upto the MWL contour and on the
sides of the Canal. Where the department is having provision to
borrow or exploit the soils. The Contractors can avail this provision.
If, for any reason, the contractor is not interested to borrow the
soils, from the above said areas the Contractor is free to borrow the
soils from any other places of his choice.

c)

The responsibility for arranging and obtaining the land for disposal
of spoil and the land for borrowing or exploitation in any other way
shall rest with the Contractor, who shall ensure smooth and
uninterrupted supply of materials/earth for the quantity required in
construction during the construction period.

d)

The Contractors quoted rates in schedule 'A' shall include all the
above considerations. No extra payment will be made for any of the
above considerations. The payment for respective schedule 'A' item
shall be at the quoted rate.

3.2.21.2.

BORROW PITS

1)

The borrow pits shall not normally be more than 25 M in length, and
10 M in width and 1 1/2M depth. A clear spacing of one metre
between each pit shall be left out. Each pit shall be clearly peg
marked and number tags of the pits shall be maintained.

2)

In the case of earth dams unless otherwise specified the borrow pits
shall not be located within a distance of 10 times the height of the
embankment on the upstream side and two times the height of the
embankment on the down-stream side.

3)

The depth of the pits shall be so regulated that their bottom does
not cut the hydraulic gradient line having a slope 4:1 from the top
edge of the embankment.

4)

In no case the pits shall be located within 5m from the toe of the
embankment. If there are old pits in the borrow area the new pits
shall be located one metre away from them.

5)

If the contractor excavated the pits near to the toe against to the
above clauses and the same is observed at any time during or after
the execution of work, the contractor has to fill the same pits with
the soils suitable for hearting zone of embankment and compact to
98% proctors density at the cost of contractor.

3.2.22. STRIPPING OF BORROW AREAS.

a)

Borrow areas shall be stripped of top soil and any other

objectionable materials to the required depths as ordered by the
Superintending Engineer/Executive Engineer (Stripping operations
shall be limited only to designed borrow areas) Materials from
stripping shall be deposited off in exhausted borrow areas or in the
approved adjacent areas. Particular care shall be taken to exclude

all organic matter from the borrow area. The cleared areas shall be
maintained free of vegetable growth during the progress of work.
b)

No payment shall be made for removal of top soil on borrow area.

The cost of the same shall be deemed to have been included in the
quoted rate in Schedule "A" for formation of embankment.

3.2.23. MOISTURE CONTROL AT BORROW AREAS:

a)

Borrow area watering shall be done by the Contractor in the manner

specified by the Engineer.

b)

No payment shall be made for watering the borrow area or drying

the material in borrow area or on bank to reduce extra moisture
content or for delay due to this.

c)

The cost for such works shall be deemed to have been included in
the rate in Schedule "A" for the item of compacting borrow quantity.

3.2.24. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

The leads and lifts for borrow earth will not be measured. The quantity
on the embankment will be measured interims of clause 3.2. and paid as per
the rate in Schedule "A". The tenderer has to quote his rates duly considering
this aspect.
3.2.25. CLAY BLANKETS:
a) Scope: Clay blankets are made from impervious soils and are used
on the beds of reservoirs or in channels or canals to reduce
seepage.
b) Requirements: The materials used for these purposes, shall be
impermeable, free from excessive shrinkage and swelling, shall
resist erosion and have adequate stability. As for as possible, B.C. or
S.C. materials shall be used. When satisfactory soils are not
available, the surface shall be protected with a blanket of stable
gravelly soils if so instructed by the Engineer-in-charge.
c) Laying: The clay blankets shall be laid and compacted to 98%
proctors density to a length and depth.
d) Measurement: Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01
metre and volume worked out to the nearest 0.01 cum.
e) Rate: The rate for clay blanket shall be for a unit of 10 cum and
shall include sampling, testing all operations of quarrying,
transporting, laying, watering, compaction of 98% proctors density
etc., complete. The rate shall include cost and conveyance of water
and earth with all leads, lifts and delifts and all other operations
necessary to complete the finished items of work as per Drawings
and as directed by the Engineer in charge.
3.2.26. BACK FILLING:
1.

Back filling with selected material in foundation trenches round

structures and above lining key.

GENERAL

2.

a)

The type of material used for backfill, and the manner of depositing
the material, shall be subject to approval of the Engineer. As far as
practicable, backfill material shall be obtained from the excavation
for structures or from adjacent canal excavation or from the
excavation of the other ancillary works. Back filling shall be done
with approved material after the concrete or masonry is fully set.

b)

Backfill material shall not contain stone larger than 7.5cm size.

c)

The pervious materials (sand) with profuse watering used for

backfilling around the cut off wall shall be placed as shown on
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

d)

Backfill shall not be placed against retaining walls until the retaining
wall is cured adequately and is strong enough to take lateral
pressure of the backfill. Trimming of the sides of excavation against
which the backfill is to be laid shall be delayed until immediately
prior to backfilling and any excessive drying of the surface shall be
conditioned properly and made adequately moist to avoid potential
desiccation of the rock or partly compacted/consolidated materials.

e)

The backfill material shall be placed carefully and spread in uniform

layers. The backfill shall be brought up as uniformly as practicable
on both sides of walls and all sides of structures to prevent unusual
loading. The backfill material shall be placed at about the same
elevation on both sides of the pipe portions of the structures and
culverts and difference in elevation shall not exceed 15 cm at any
time. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing adequate
earth cover over pipe to prevent damage due to loads of
construction equipment.

f)

If a haul road is built over a pipe, all back fill around and over the pie
shall be placed to a uniform surface and no humps or depressions
shall be permitted at the pipe crossing.

COMPACTION OF BACKFILL
a)

When compacting the soil against the steep rock, abutment walls of
masonry or concrete structures, the construction surface of
embankment shall be sloped away from the rock or masonry or
concrete structure leaving a minimum distance of 0.6 metre and at
an inclination of 3:1. Roller shall not be used close to structures as
structural damage is very likely more particularly when structures
have not been fully cured. The size and weight of equipment will
depend on nature of material, the height and load assumed in
design of structure. The backfill close to the structure upto the rolled
layer shall be compacted in suitable uniform layers, using
pneumatic tampers as appropriate to obtain dry density of at least
98% of Proctor density. The moisture content of the earth fill placed
against rock or the structure shall be on higher side of OMC by
about 2% or so, to allow it to be compacted into all irregularities of
the rock. Profuse watering shall be done to pervious materials (sand)

before compaction as per instruction shall be carried out with

special care without claiming any extra cost.
b)

3.

No payment shall be made of backfilling around the structures and

consolidation as the cost of the same shall be deemed to have been
included in the relevant item of concrete/masonry shall not be made
till the contractor carries out the compaction of backfill as per the
above specifications. Deployment of hand tampers be restricted to
rare usage that too for very small jobs.

STRUCTURES ON BACKFILL :
Where the original ground surface is below the base of the structure
or below the bottom of pipe, all fill required for the structure
foundation and all fill upto the bottom in the pipe shall be placed as
compacted embankment. The embankment over nature ground upto
pipe bottom and over the pipe shall be laid in accordance with
Clause 9.2.4., 9.2.5 and 9.2.6 IS. 783 of 1985. the compacted back
fill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 15cm. after
compaction. Heavy stones shall either be dropped on top of pipes
nor shall be allowed to roll down the side of the embankment
against the pipes.

3.2.27.INSPECTION AND TESTS:

1. GENERAL:
a) The Engineer-in-charge shall maintain and exercise thorough
check on the quality of fill material delivered to the embankment
and shall arrange to obtain the data and in-situ properties of the
material after compaction for compression with design assumptions.
To achieve these objectives, programme of field-testing and
inspection shall be planned to effect quality control.
b) Scope of testing and inspection:
Field control of fill material shall be required by visual and
laboratory checks. The checks on the effectiveness of placement
and compaction procedures shall be made by field density tests at
prescribed intervals.
2. Tests: The following tests shall be carried out for determine
compaction.
(a) Density moisture relation of the soil: In accordance with
(Part-VII - 1980)
(b) Density of the Soil in field:

In accordance with I.S.2720

(Part- XXVIII) -1974
(OR)
I.S.2720 (Part-XXIX) - 1975

(c) Moisture Content:

(Part-II)- 1973.

In

accordance

with

I.S.2720

Before compaction: Materials delivered to the fill shall be

visually examined and their properties estimated by way of
inspection.
3.

EMBANKMENT:
i)

Moisture content tests shall be carried out in the field laboratory

while placing the fill materials.

ii)

Moisture content shall be controlled by adding water or allowing the

soil to dry.

iii) It shall be ensured that the methods of dumping, spreading and

moisture conditions are such as will result in reducing segregation
and/or variation of moisture content to a minimum.
4.

BORROW AREA.
i)

Excavation of borrow areas shall be limited in extent and depth as

indicated in specification 3.2.

ii)

Estimation of moisture content of materials by visual examination

and feel.

iii) Different samples shall be taken for laboratory analysis in case the
soil is of different characteristics.
These inspection checks shall be supplemented by sampling the
materials at prescribed minimum intervals and by testing the samples in the
laboratory for gradation and moisture content.
DURING COMPACTION:
It is intended that the checks in operations during compaction shall
verify.
i)

That the layer thickness of the material is as specified.

ii)

That the fill is compacted at least to 98% of standard proctor's

Density or (Dry density at OMC) or 70% relative density as the case
may be.

iii) That no excessive rutting, waving, or scaling of the fill occurs during
compaction.
5

AFTER COMPACTION:

The condition of the fill after compaction shall be observed and

recorded particularly with respect to rutting or waving. However, the
properties of materials after compaction shall be determined primarily by
field density tests. Routine tests on samples taken from constructed
embankments shall include besides density tests, grain size distribution.
Attenberg limits, permeability, shear and consolidation characteristics.
3.2.27.1.FREQUENCY OF TESTING:
a)

It will be necessary to carryout sampling and testing of materials

before and after compaction at sufficient frequencies so that
effective checks on the full operations are maintained. Testing
frequencies proposed should correspond to the frequencies as

mentioned in the relevant paragraphs. However, the actual

frequencies shall be adjusted to suit the nature and variability of
materials placed and the rate of fill placement.
b)

C)

Testing shall be performed at frequent intervals than those specified

in table during initial stages of placing in each zone in order to
establish control on testing techniques and also testing should be
conducted at higher rates in case of special problem of control
caused by such factors such as material variation, equipment
performance and weather.

COMPACTION:

Test location shall be chosen only through random sampling technique.

Control shall not be based on the result of any other test but on the mean
value of 5 to 10 density determinations. Generally these shall be at the
locations indicated below or any other areas so determined by the Engineer
in addition, these tests shall be made at the following locations:
a)
b)
c)

i)
ii)

In areas where the degree of compaction is doubtful.

In areas where embankment operations are concentrated.
For record tests at the locations of all embedded instruments. Areas
of doubtful density may be detected by the inspection by Engineerin-charge and possible location of insufficient compaction include:
The junction between areas of mechanical tamping and rolled
embankment along abutment or cut-off walls.
Areas where rollers turn during rolling operations.

iii)
iv)
v)
vi)

Areas where too thick layer is being compacted.

Areas where improper water content exists in material.
Areas where less than specified number of roller passes were made.
Areas where dirt clogged rollers were used to compact the
materials.
vii) Areas where compacted by rollers that have possibly lost part of
their ballast.
viii) Areas where oversized rock which has been over looked is contained
in the fill.
ix) Areas containing materials differing substantially from the average.
3.2.27.2RECORD AND REPORT:
Record of borrow area material and embankment placing operations
shall be maintained in order to have a continuous check on the suitability and
availability of fill materials and quality of the fill. Thus, it shall be possible to
have complete description of materials in any portion of the embankments.
The record shall be maintained on the form specified in annexure.1.
3.2.27.3FIELD TEST DATA:
Records of Field Test Data results should be presented in the form of
statistical analysis sheets and summary sheets in order to provide control
required for enforcement of statistical requirements of the specifications.

The test data summary sheets and inspection reports be used to form
the basis of construction control report. Which should be issued from the site
at fort-nightly intervals, during constructing season. The report would contain
narrative accounts of the progress and problems of field constructions,
statistical analysis of test data and photographs of the fill operations.
ANNEXURE-1
Earth work Engineers daily Report:
Construction
..........................................................................................................................................
................................
date ......................................
shift
Weather .......................................................

.............................................

Inspector...........................................................................................................................
.................Following
Inspector...........................................................................................................................
...................................
Type

roller
equipment
used...................................................................................................................
weight

of roller...............................................................................................................
(A) EXCAVATION
1.

Type of Excavator.
2. Depth of Cut.
3. Type of Soil.
4. Borrow Pit Location.
5. Whether water added at borrow pit.
6. Percentage of moisture content.
(B) FILL CONDITION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Location of fill.
Elevation
Whether water added at the fill.
Moisture condition before rolling.
Roller passes.
(C) TEST DATA

1.
(a)
(b)
2.
3.
4.

Location of sampling point:

Chainage.
Off-set.
Serial Number.
Moisture content
Dry density (G/C)

5.
6.

Plasticity needle reading (Kg./Sq.cm)

Quality of Earth Work rolled.
II. LABORATORY CHECK

1.
2.
3.
4.

Serial Number.
Optimum moisture content percent.
Maximum dry density (Gr/CC)
Plasticity needle reading (Kg./Sq.Cm).
(D) COMPACTION EFFICIENCY

1.

Field moisture deviation from optimum.

2. Percentage Compaction.

3.2.28. SURFACE DRAINS:

a)

This work shall consist of constructing surface drains, Schedule of

work shall be so arranged that the drains are completed in proper
sequence with canal excavation works is necessary subsequently or
any damage is caused to these works due to lack of drainage.

b)

Surface drains shall be excavated to the specified lines, grades,

levels and dimensions. The excavated soils shall be removed from
the area adjoining the drains and if found suitable utilised in
embankment construction. All unsuitable Soils shall be disposed off
as directed.

c)

The excavated bed and sides of drains shall be dressed to bring

these in close conformity with the specified dimensions, levels and
slopes.

d)

All works on drain construction shall be planned and executed in

proper sequence with other works as approved by Executive
Engineer with a view to ensure adequate drainage for the area.

3.2.29. ROCKFILL IN TOE OF EMBANKMENTS AND FILTERS:

Scope: This specification covers filters to be laid for internal drains,
sandy filter blankets, horizontal and inclined filter drains,
longitudinal and transverse filters around rock toe etc.
3.2.29.1.
i)

FILTERS:

Sand as filter materials: The provisions of schedule 'D' shall apply.

II) SCOPE:
Formation of sand filters of specified thickness using the sand of
approved quality including cost and conveyance of sand sampling,
testing and laying with all leads, lifts, delifts and compaction to 70%
relative density including hire and operational charges of power
roller seigniorage charges and all other incidental and operational
charges necessary to complete the finished item of work for filter
blanket, horizontal and inclined filter drains, longitudinal and
transverse filters around rock toe etc., as per drawings and as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

3.2.29.2.

BASE FILTER BLANKETS:

a)

As and where indicated in the approved drawings, Filter Blanket

should be laid on the base, under the down stream portion of the
canal embankment. The number of layers in the filter blankets and
the thickness of each layer shall be, as specified in the drawings.
Sand shall be placed and compacted to an average relative density
of 85% with a minimum relative density of 70% the sand shall be
placed and tamped into placed in such a manner that mixing of
sand with foundation or backfill materials will not occur. The filter
materials should satisfy the following criteria.

i)

D.15 of Filter material>4<20

D. 15 base material
ii)

D.15 of Filter material < 5

D.85 Base Material

iii) D.50, of Filter material < 25

D.50 Base material

iv) Co-efficient of Curvature Cc=D.30

-------------->/< 3
D.10X D.60
v)

Co-efficient of Uniformity:

Cu=D.60
>6 for SW
D.10

and

CU=D.60

>4 For GW

D.10
Where
SW: Sand Well Graded and
GW: Aggregate well graded.
b)

The base filter materials should be well graded so as to satisfy the

above mentioned criteria. The grain size Curve should be
approximately parallel to that of base materials, especially in the
fine range. Filter materials should not contain more than 5% of fines
i.e., materials finer than 0.075 mm passing through sieve No.200 I.S.
sieve 75 micron) and fines should be cohesion less to ensure that
filter does not sustain a crack. The filter should not have particles
larger than 75mm. so as to minimise the segregation.

c)

D.15 is the size at which 15% of the total soil particles are smaller,
the percentage being by weight, is being propped to be determined
by mechanical analysis. D.85 size is that at which 85% of the total
soil particles are smaller. As more than one filter layer is required,

similar criteria is followed in each case, viz., the finer filter is

considered as base materials for the selection of the gradation at
the coarser filter.
d)

The requirement for grading of the filter shall be established by the

tests conducted in the field laboratory on the basis of mechanical
analysis of adjacent materials, Mechanical analysis shall be
performed of all samples. which have been compacted by the
methods equivalent to compaction by roller, so that the individual
particles are broken to their field condition in the embankment.

e)

The filter materials shall be compacted to an average relative

density 85% with minimum relative density of 70% as determined
by the standard U.S. Bureau of Reclamation relative density test for
cohesion less free draining soils).
Dd= e max --- e
_____________
e max - e min.
where e=In place void ratio.
e max = void ratio in loosened state.
e min = void ratio in most compacted state, and
Void ratio= Volume of Voids
__________________
Volume of solids
The relative density may also be computed using the maximum
and min density as follows:
Dd. - Yd max (Yd-Ymin) Yd, (Yd max-Yd. min)
Where Yd Max=Minimum dry density of soil as obtained by the
laboratory procedure.
Yd min = Minimum dry density of soil as obtained by the laboratory
procedure.
Yd = dry density at which the soil is to be placed or the in place dry
density.

(f) The thickness of each filter layer shall be less than 150 mm.
3.2.29.3.

PLACING OF FILTER

(a) Filters shall be laid to the lines and grades and dimensions shown on
the drawings.
(b) The foundation shall be cleared and stripped in accordance with
specification 2.0 before laying the bottom layer of filter material.
(c) Filter material shall be laid in layers of 150mm adequately watered
and compacted by required number of passes of crawler type tractor
or any method approved by the Superintending Engineer to get dense
and stable filter.

(d) Care shall be taken ensure that materials of different layers do not
get mixed both at the time of placing and during compaction.
Extreme care shall be taken when placing materials to obtain fill free
lenses, layers and streaks of segregated materials.
(e) In case of horizontal filters after being compacted earth fill material
shall be laid over it in layers of 150mm and compacted as directed by
the Engineer-in-charge sheep foot roller or DRR shall not be used till
earth has been laid and compacted to a thickness of 600mm over the
filter blanket. However the construction of earth fill in the initial 600
mm thickness shall be subject to the same quality control regarding
moisture content and dry density as for the rest of the embankment.
(f) In case of inclined filter, the filter shall be raised along the adjoining
embankment layers and shall be properly compacted by suitable
means., In order to avoid contamination of filters with adjoining earth
fill material, the top of filter be kept slightly higher than the adjacent
embankment level and any contaminated portion shall be scrapped
and removed before adding the new layer.
3.2.29.4.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

The measurement shall be in meters correct to 0.01 meter and

volume shall be worked out to nearest 0.02 cubic metres. Payment
shall be for one cubic metre of finished work at the rate quoted in
schedule A
3.2.30. METAL FILTER
A) MATERIAL: Provisions of schedule D shall apply.
B) SCOPE:
Formation of metal filters of specified thickness using approved quality
of well graded metal of size 10mm to 75 mm at the specified place including
cost and conveyance of metal, sampling, testing and laying with all leads,
lifts, delifts, watering, compacting, seigniorage charges and all other
incidental and operational charges necessary to complete the finished item of
work as per drawings and as directed by the Engineering-in-charge.
C) PLACING
i)

The Coarse aggregate filter shall be laid to the lines and grades and
dimensions shown on the drawings.

ii)

Filter material shall be laid in layers of 150mm adequately watered

and compacted by any method approved by the Executive Engineer
to get a dense and stable filter, when placing materials to obtain a fill
free from lenses, layers and streaks of segregated materials.

iii) In case of horizontal filters, after being compacted, earth fill materials
shall be laid over it in layers of 150mm and compacted as directed by
the Superintending Engineer/Executive engineer sheep foot roller of
DRR shall not be used till earth has been laid and compacted to a
thickness of 600mm. over the filter blanket.
However, the
construction of earth fill in the initial 600., thickness shall be subject

to the same quality control regarding moisture content and dry

density as for the rest of the embankment.
iv) In case of inclined filters, the filter shall be raised along the adjoining
embankment layers and shall be properly compacted by suitable
means. In order to avoid contamination of filters with adjoining earth
fill material, embankment level and any contaminated portion shall be
scraped and removed before adding the new layer.
3.2.31.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

All linear measurement shall be in meters correct to 0.01 meter

column shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 cubic metre. Payment
shall be for one cubic meter of finished work at the rate quoted in
schedule A.
3.2.32.

ROCK FILL IN TOE OF EMBANKMENT. (ROCK TOE)

A) MATERIAL: Provisions of schedule D shall apply.

B) SCOPE:
Formation of Rock toe using approved quality of well graded metal and
stone of size 75mm to 450mm including cost and conveyance of metal,
sampling, testing laying with all leads, lifts, delifts and at least 225mm thick
rough stone dry packing to the external face including labour charges for
packing, seigniorage charges and all other operations necessary to complete
the finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-incharge.
c)

Rock fill shall consist of sound, durable and well grade broken rock
obtained from approved excavation of work and /or from quarries and
shall be approved prior to being transported to the areas of
deposition. The materials shall range in size from 75mm to 450mm.
However, no load shall contain more than, 10 percent by volume of
rock fragments smaller than 75mm in size. All brush roots, or other
perishable materials shall be removed from rock fill during the
spreading.

D) PLACING
i)

The rock fill shall be constructed, true to the lines and grades as
shown in the drawings.

ii)

The rock fill shall be placed and packed to obtain a suitable well
graded and free draining fill.

iii) The smaller rock fragments shall be placed adjacent to the filter of
embankment and large rock fragments near the outer edge of the fill.
iv) The rock fill shall be placed and roughly leveled in layers not greater
than one meter in thickness.
v)

The stones shall be properly hand packed and the interstices shall be
well filled with spalls and chip and tightly wedged to ensure firm
packing so as to have dense well graded fill with no larger voids and
cavities.

vi) Contamination of rock toe with finer material from any other zones
shall be avoided.
vii) Suitable outfall for draining out the seepage water collected in the
rock toe shall be provided depending upon the site conditions.
3.2.33.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

All linear measurement shall be in meters, correct to 0.01 Volume shall

be worked out to nearest 0.01 Cum. Payment shall be for one cubic meter of
finished work at the quoted rate in schedule A.
3.2.34.

PROTECTION

The contractor shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of
the work by diversion of stream local Surface drainage, rain water etc., if
these are likely to damage the work. Any damage to earthwork due to any
reason what so even shall be made good by the contractor at his cost till the
work is certified as completed and taken over by the, superintending
Engineer/Executive Engineer.
3.2.35.

ROADS AND RAMPS

The Contractor shall construct operation and maintenance roads, and

earth ramps adjacent to the canal and structures at his own expense suitable
material from excavation or borrow area shall be placed as embankment for
the roads and ramps. The width of the road shall be not less than 4.25 M.

3.3.
3.3.1

DRILLING AND BLASTING

GENERAL :

a)

Blasting where required will be permitted only when proper

precautions have been taken for the protection of persons and
property in accordance with I.S.4081-1967 (Indian Standard
specification for safety code for blasting and related drilling
operations). While carrying out excavations, adequate precautions in
accordance with I.S. 3764-1966 (Indian standard specifications for
safety code for excavation work) shall be taken.

b)

Explosive such as gelatin, detonators and fuse coils etc required for
the rock blasting are to be procured by the Contractor at his cost. It
shall be responsibility of the Contractor to store the explosives
purchased by him in accordance with the rules of the explosives act
and other rules framed by Government of India.

c)

He shall also furnish the following details :

______________________________________________________________________________
___________
Capacity

License No.

Validity

and date

period

______________________________________________________________________________
___________

______________________________________________________________________________
___________
d)

The Contractor shall acquaint himself with all the applicable laws and
regulations concerning storing, handling and the use of explosives.
All such laws, regulations and rules, as prevalent from time to time
shall be binding upon the Contractor.

c)

The provisions detailed in the specifications are supplementary to the

above laws; rules and regulations are also applicable. Further, the
Engineer may issue modifications, alterations and new instructions
from time to time. The Contractor shall comply with the same without
these being made a cause of any claims.
A list I.S. Codes applicable is furnished below:

01 IS

4081-1986

Safety Code blasting and related drilling operations.

02 IS

4668-1985

Ammonium nitrate for explosives.

03 IS
6609-19
Method test for commercial blasting explosives
(part 1 to 5) and
accessories.
04 IS

7632-1975

Detonators

05 IS

5454-1986

Portable pneumatic Drilling machine

06 IS

3764-1966

Safety code for explosive work.

In addition to the above I.S. codes, the specifications of A.P.S.S. and

manual for Quality control and inspection shall also be complied with.
3.3.2. MATERIALS

The provisions of schedule D shall apply

3.3.3. PERSONNEL
a)

Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under the personal

supervision of competent and licensed persons and trained workmen
employed by the contractor at his cost. All supervisors and workmen
in charge of handling storage and blasting work shall be adequately
insured by the Contractor.

b)

The person in charge of the explosive magazine shall be very reliable

and shall be approved by the Engineer.

c)

The Contractor shall make sure that his supervisor workmen are fully
conversant with all the rules to be observed in storing, handling and
use of the explosives, It shall be assured that the supervisor in
charge, is thoroughly acquainted with all the details of handling and
the blasting operations.

3.3.4. USE OF EXPLOSIVES:

a)

For the transport of the explosives and detonators between the store
and the site, closed and strong container made of soft materials such
as timber, zinc, copper, leather shall be used.

b)

Explosives and detonators shall be carried in separate boxes. For the

conveyance of primer, special container shall be used.

c)

The boxes and containers used shall be kept closed. Explosive shall
be stored and used chronologically, earlier received shall be used
first. A make up house shall be provided at each working place in
which cartridges will be made up by competent and licensed men as
required for the work. The make up house shall be separated from
other buildings. Only electric storage battery lamps shall be used in
this house.

d)

No smoking shall be allowed in the make up house or generally while

dealing with explosives.

3.3.5. DISPOSAL OF DETERIORATED EXPLOSIVES:

a)

All deteriorated explosives shall be disposed off in an approved

manner the quantity of the deteriorated explosives to be disposed of
shall be intimated to the Engineer prior to its disposal.

3.3.6. PREPARATION OF PRIMERS:

a)

The primers shall not be prepared near open places or fire. The work
of preparation of primers shall always be entrusted to the same

personnel. Primers shall be used as early as possible after they are

ready.
3.3.7. CHARGING OF HOLES:
a)

The work of charging of holes shall not commence before all the
drilling work at the site is completed and the Contractors supervisor
shall satisfy himself to that effect by actual inspection, while charging,
open lamps shall be kept way, For charging with powered explosives,
a naked flame shall not be allowed only wooden tamping rods,
without any kind of metal on the rod shall be allowed to be used. The
tamping rods shall have cylindrical ends. Borehole must be of such
size that the cartridges can easily pass down them; they shall not
however be too big.

b)

Only one cartridge shall be inserted at a time and gently pressed into
the hole with the tamping rods. The sand, clay or other tamping
materials used for filling the holes completely shall not be tamped to
hard.

3.3.8. BLASTING:
a)

Blasting shall be carried during the fixed hours of the day which shall
have the approval of the Engineer, the hours once fixed shall not be
altered without prior written approval of the Engineer.

b)

The site of blasting operation shall be prominently demarcated by red

danger flags. The order to fire shall be given only by the contractors
supervisor in charge of the work and this order shall be given only
after giving the warning signal three times, so as to enable all the
labour, watchmen etc., to reach safe shelters.

c)

A whistle/biggle with distinctive note shall be used to give the

warning signals. The biggle shall not be used for any other purposes.
All the labour shall be made acquainted with the sound of the biggle
and shall be strictly warned to leave their work immediately at the
first warning signal and to move for safe shelters. They are not to
leave the shelters until all clear signals have been given.

d)

All the rods and footpaths leading to the blasting areas shall be
watched.

e)

In special cases, suitable extra precautions shall be taken, The

Engineer may however permit blasting for under ground excavation,
without restriction of fixed time, provided that he is satisfied that
proper precautions are taken to give sufficient warning to all
concerned and that the work of other agencies on the site is not
hampered. For lightning the fuse, a lamp with a strong flame such as
a carbide lamp shall be used.

f)

The Contractors supervisor shall watch the required time for the
firing of the fuses and shall see that all the workmen are under safe
shelters in good time.

3.3.9. ELECTRICAL FIRING:

a)

Only the Contractors supervisor in charge shall possess key of the

exploder and short firing accessories and he shall keep it always with
himself. Special apparatus shall be used as a source of current for the
blasting operations: power lines shall not be tapped for the purpose.

b)

The detonators shall be checked before use. For blast in series, only
detonators of the same manufacture and of the same group of
electrical resistance shall be used. Such of the electrical lines as
could constitute danger for work of charging shall be removed from
the site. The firing cables shall have a proper, insulating cover so as
to avoid short-circuiting due to contact with water, metallic parts of
rock.

c)

The firing cables shall be connected to source of current only when

nobody is in the area of blasting. Before firing, the circuit shall be
checked by a suitable apparatus. After firing with or without an actual
blast, the contact between the firing cable and the source of current
shall be cut off before any one is allowed to leave the shelters.
During storm rain the blasting operations shall be suspended.

3.3.10.

PRECAUTIONS AFTER BLASTING:

a)

After the blast, the Contractors supervisor must carefully inspect the
work and satisfy himself that all the charges have exploded. After the
blast has taken place in the under-ground works, workmen shall not
be allowed to go to the place till the toxic gases are evacuated from
the face.

b)

MISFIRES:- If it is suspected that part of the blast has failed to fire or

is delayed, sufficient time shall be allowed to elapse before entering
the danger zone. When fuse and blasting caps are used, a safe time
should be allowed and then the Contractors supervisor alone shall
leave the shelter to see misfire.

c)

None of the drillers are to work near this hole until one of the two
following operations have been carried out by the supervisor.

Either (i) the supervisor should very carefully (when the tamping is of
damp clay) extract the tamping with a wooden scraper or jet of water or
compressed air using pipe of soft materials) and withdraw the fuse with the
primer and detonator attached after which a fresh primer and detonator with
fuse should be placed in this hole and fired out or (ii) the hole may be cleared
of 300mm, of capping and the direction and then be ascertained by placing a
stick in the hole. Another hole may be drilled at least 225 mm away, and
parallel to it. This hole should then be charged and fired. The balance of the
cartridge and detonators found in the muck shall be removed.
d)

Before leaving his work, the contractors supervisor should inform the
supervisor of the relieving shift of any case of misfires and should
point out the position with red cross denoting the same, also stating
what action if any, he has taken in the matter, A register of misfires
and their location and how they were dealt with shall be maintained
by the Contractor.

e)

The contractors supervisor should also at once report at the

Contractors office all cases of misfires and the cause of the same and
steps were taken in connection therewith.

f)

The names of the day and night shift supervisors of the contractor
must be noted daily in the contractors Office. If misfire has been
found to be due to a defective detonator. Or dynamite, the whole
quantity of box from which the defective articles was taken must be
returned to the contractors office for inspection, and shall be
disposed off.

g)

Drilling in the holes not completely exploded by blasting shall not be

permitted.

h)

The contractor should produce the firers license and furnish the
particulars in the following statement.

______________________________________________________________________________
_____________
SL

Name

No.of firers

Validity

No.

license & data

License & data

period

______________________________________________________________________________
______________
i)

Blasting operation, when considered necessary shall be resorted to

only with the written permission of the Engineer, prior inspection shall
be carried out for the safety of the public and property. Blasting
operations in the proximity of over-head power lines, communication
lines, utility lines or other structures shall not be carried out until the
Operator or the owner or both of such lines have been notified and
precautionary measures deemed necessary have been taken.
______________________________________________________________________________
______________
4.0.
4.1.

PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE:

LIST OF APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS:
All concrete, its constituents, methods and procedures of manufacture
shall confirm to the specifications prescribed in the codes published
by the Bureau of Indian standards. In addition to above IS codes the
specifications of APSS and manual for quality control and inspection
shall also be complied with.

SL.No

IS.Number

1 (a) 456-1978
1 (b) 457-1963

Short title
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete for
dams and mass concrete.

2.

2386-1977

Methods of test for aggregates for concrete. (part-1 to

8)

3.

516-1959

Methods of test for strength of concrete.

4.

4925-1968

Specification for concrete batching and mixing plant.

5.

1791-1985

Specification batch type concrete mixers.

6.

650-1991

Specification for standard sand for testing cement.

7.

2330-1986

Methods for sampling of aggregate for concrete.

8.

2722-1964

Specification for portable swing weigh batchers for

concrete (single and double bucket type)

9.

4634-1991

Batch
type
performance.

10.

5515-1983

Specification for compacting factor apparatus

11.

5640-1970

Method of test for determining aggregates impact

value of soft course aggregates

12.

5816-1970

Method of test for splitting tensile strength of concrete

cylinder

13.

5889-1970

Specification for vibratory plate compactor.

14.

5892-1970

Specifications
agitators.

15.

6461-1972&
1973
Glossary of terms relating to cement
aggregate, materials etc. (Part. 1-12)

concrete

for

concrete

mixers-methods

transit

mixers

test

and

concrete

16.

6925-1973

Method of test for determination of water soluble

chlorides in concrete admixtures.

17.

1838

Specification for performed fillers for expansion joints

in concrete pavements and structures.

18.

7320-1974

Specification for concrete slump test Apparatus.

19.

7861-1975&
1981
Code of practice for extreme weather concreting.

20.

8142-1976

Method of test for determining setting time of

concrete by penetration resistance.

21.

9013-1978

Method
of
making
curing
and
determining
compressive strength of accelerated cured concrete
test specimen.

22.

9284-1979

Method of test for abrasion resistance of concrete

23.

1200-1974
(Part 2)

Method of measurement of building & engineering

works, concrete
works

5751-1984

Specification for precast concrete coping blocks.

24.

25.

3085-1965

Method of test for permeability of cement mortar and

concrete.

26.

3873-1978

Code of practice for laying insets cement concrete

lining of canals.

27.

2506-1985

General requirement for concrete vibrators screed

board type.

28.

3363-1965

Specification for pan vibrators

29.

1199-1959

Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete..

30.

3370-1965 &
1967
Code of practice for concrete structures for the
storage of liquids
(Part 1 to 4)

31.

2505-1980

General requirement for concrete vibrators, immersion

type.

32.

3558-1983

Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for

consolidating concrete.

33.

4656-1968

Specifications for form vibrators for concrete.

34.

8989-1978

Safety code for erection of concrete framed structures

35.

4990-1981

Specifications for plywood for concrete shuttering

works.

36.

6505-1985

Code of practice for installation of joints in concrete

pavements

37.

3696-1991

Safety code of scaffolds and ladders.

4.2.0.

GENERAL:

a.

M 5 and M 7.5 grade of concrete shall be used for plain cement

concrete for laying screed layer (i.e., bed concrete) under the
foundations of structures. The mix need not be designed and the
nominal mix proportions given in the specifications shall be adopted
to produce the required grade of concrete.

b.

M 10 and above grade of concrete shall be used for plain cement

concrete for casting the structural components of foundations and
superstructures.

c.

M 15 and above grade of concrete shall be used for Reinforced

cement concrete for casting the structural components of
foundations and superstructures.
In both cases (b) and (c) above. the mix shall be of Designed mix or
nominal mix as the case may be as per the drawings and
specifications. For Design mix, the mix proportions shall be evolved
in the laboratory and for the later, the proportion given in the
specifications shall be adopted to produce the required grade of
concrete.

4.3.0.

SCOPE:
The specifications covers the requirements of plain and reinforced
concrete for various structures and comprised of:

1.

Cost of all materials of approved quality such as specified quality of

cement, sand, graded coarse aggregate of specified MSA. Admixture
(if necessary), water, including the cost of seigniorage charges,
sampling, testing of materials, sales Tax and any other taxes
imposed by the Government, required to manufacture a structural
component of specified grade but excluding the cost of steel and its
fabrication charges.

2.

Conveyance of all materials with all leads.

3.

Mixing of all ingredients by weigh batching for the mix.

4.

Hire and operational charges of all machinery (tools, plant and

equipment).

5.

Preparation of surface for placing of concrete.

6.

Cost of initial dewatering, and dewatering during execution,

diversion of stream, and protection works as may be necessary
during or after concrete works.

7.

Designing and construction of form work for the structural

component including scaffolding, shuttering and removing after
curing.

8.

Transporting, the concrete with all leads, lifts, delifts either by labour
or by placing in position, vibrating, compacting, finishing and curing
of the cement concrete, plain or reinforced and performing all other
operations necessary and ancillary thereto, compete for finished
item of works as specified in Schedule A for M 7.5, M10, .M15, M20
and above concrete mixes in any structural portion or its
components as per the drawings and as directed by the Engineer in
charge of the work.

9.

Sampling testing, green cutting, repairing and finishing of concrete.

4.4.1.

MINIMUM CEMENT CONTENT IN CEMENT CONCRETE FOR

STRUCTURAL PURPOSES:
For casting any structural component, keeping in view of durability
requirement. Whether it is a design of nominal concrete mix, the
minimum cement content and Maximum water cement ratio should
not be less than the following values for 20 mm M.S.A. The cement
content may be reduced by about 10 percent for 40 mm M.S.A. and
increased by 10 percent for 12.5 mm M.S.A.
EXPOSURE

PLAIN C.C.
CEMENT

W.C.R
(Kg/cum.)
(kq/cum.)

W.C.R

R.C.C
CEMENT

1.

Structural component
completely protected

220

0.70

250

Structural component
saturated with water
buried concrete in soil and
continuously under water

250

0.60

290

Structural component
exposed to sea water and

310

0.50

360

0.65
against weather or
aggressive conditions
2.

0.55
3.
0.45
subject to heavy corrosive fumes
4.

Structural component
of bridges

360

0.45

400

Structural component
of bridges (pre-stressed)

400

Dams, spillways and Mass

concrete structures

150-230

355

7.

Cement concrete roads

350

8.

Cement concrete lining

250

0.6

0.45
5.
0.40
6.
In no case the cement content in a concrete mix for all case should
not exceed 540 kg/cum.
4.4.2.

MAXIMUM NOMINAL SIZE OF COARSE AGGREGATE (MSA)

FOR STRUCTURAL PURPOSES:

In absence of specific mention in the drawings and contract

documents, the maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate for difference
structural members are shown below:
STRUCTURAL

COMPONENT

M.S.A
i)

Structural components of buildings

ii)

Bridge works:

mm

20

1.

RCC well curb

20

2.

RCC / PCC well steining

40

3.

Well cap or pile cap, solid type

mm
mm

pier & abutments

40

mm
4.

RCC work in girders, slabs, wearing

coat, kerb, approach slab, hallow piers
and abutments, pier/abutment caps, piles

20

PSC work

20

mm
5.
mm
iii) Foundations of structure and
retaining walls (Mass concrete)

40

mm
iv) Canal lining
1.

Lining of thickness 100 mm or more

40

2.

Lining of thickness 75 mm

20

v.

Cement concrete roads

25

mm
mm
mm
vi. Dams, spillways and Mass concrete structures 75, 150 - 230 mm
NOTE: 1)

The maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be as large as can

be used practicably and economically under the given
conditions, but shall not be large than any one of the following.

a.

1/4th, the narrowest dimension between the faces of forms.

b.

1/3rd, the depth of any slab.

c.

3/4th, the clear space between the reinforcement bars, and

d.

3/4th, the narrowest space through which the concrete shall

have to be passed.

2)

Maximum nominal size of aggregates shall also restrict to the

smaller of the following values.

a.

10 mm less than the minimum lateral clear distance between the

main reinforcements.

b.
4.4.3.

10 mm less than the minimum clear cover to the reinforcements.

Materials: The provisions made in schedule D shall apply for
cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, admixtures, etc.

4.5. CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONING:

The mix proportions shall be selected to ensure that the workability of
fresh concrete is suitable for the conditions of handling and placing, so that it
surrounds all reinforcements (in case of R.C.C) and completely fills the
formwork. When concrete is hardened, it shall have the required strength,
durability and surface finish.
The Mix proportion shall be as follows.
4.5.1.

DESIGN MIX CONCRETE:

The mix shall be designed in a laboratory to produce the grade of

concrete having the required workability and a characteristic strength not
less than values given in the following table. The procedure to design and
produce the concrete, the standards given in IS: 10262-1982-Recommended
guide lines for concrete mix design and SP: 23 - Hand book on concrete
mixes published by B.I.S Shall be adopted.
GRADE OF
COMPRESSIVE
CONCRETE
M
M
M
M
M
M
M
M

SPECIFIED

STRENGTH AT 28 DAYS. (N/SQ.MM)

10
15
20
25
30
40
45
50

4.5.2.

CHARACTERISTIC

10
15
20
25
30
40
45
50
NOMINAL MIX CONCRETE :

The following proportions shall be adopted for the nominal mix concrete.
GRADE OF

TOTAL
QUANTITY
OF
MAXIMUM QUANTITY

DRY

AGGREGATE

CONCRETE
PER 50 KGS

PER 50 KG OF CEMENT

OF WATER

(COARSE AGGREGATE + SAND)

OF

CEMENT
M 5
Litres

800 KG

60

M 7.5
Litres

625 KG

45

M 10
Litres

840 KG

34

M 15
Litres

350 kg

32

M 20
Litres

250 kg

30

NOTE:
a)
b)

Graded coarse aggregate shall be used.

For an average grading of fine aggregate to coarse aggregate the
proportions shall be
1:1.5 - for 10 mm M.S.A
1:2.0 - for 20 mm M.S.A and
1:2.5 - for 40 mm M.S.A
c)

In all cases, fine aggregates should confirm to the grading of ZONE

- II or ZONE - III of IS : 383-1970.

d)

To overcome the difficulties of placement and compaction if the

quantity of water in a mix is increased, the cement content of the
mix specified in the above table shall be proportionately increased,
so that water cement ratio as specified is not exceeded.

e)

In case of vibrated concrete, the water content shall be suitably

reduced to avoid segregation.

f)

When, nominal maximum size of aggregate is 20 mm, a rough guide

for the nominal mix proportions by volume will be 1:3:6, 1:2:4 and
1:1.5:3 for M 10, M 15 and M 20 concretes respectively. For other
sizes of aggregated adjustments in the ratios of the weight of coarse
and fine aggregates shall be done.

4.6.0.

PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE:

4.6.1.

BATCHING OF MATERIALS:

All materials entering in to the concrete shall be batched by weight

except water, which shall be in liters. When the weight of cement is
determined on the basis of weight of cement per bag, a reasonable number
of bags should be weighed periodically to check-the net weight. Admixtures if
permitted by the Engineer-in-charge should be added to the concrete by
weight.
All measuring equipment and weigh batching machinery shall be
approved by the Engineer-in-charge and maintained in a clean serviceable
condition and their accuracy shall be periodically checked. The batching and
mixing plant for concrete is to be designed to suit the local conditions and out
put requirements as per IS: 4925 - 1968 specification of batching and mixing
plant for concrete.
The aggregates of different sizes should be stocked in separate stock
piles, the same shall be blended in right proportions to ensure a uniform
grading of aggregate as determined by the Engineer-in-charge.

In case uniformity in the materials used for concrete making has been
established over a period of time, the proportioning may be done by volume
batching, provided periodic checks are made on weight/volume relationships
of materials.
Where weigh batching is not practicable, the quantities of fine coarse
aggregate (not cement) may be determined by volume.
If fine aggregate (sand) is moist and volume batching is adopted,
allowance shall be made for bulking in accordance with IS: 2386 (part. III) 1963-Methods of test for aggregates for concrete.
The amount of the added water to concrete shall be adjusted to
compensate for any observed variations in the moisture contents determined
by the above tests for both design and nominal mix of concrete making for
weigh and volume batching.
4.6.2.

MIXING:

Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer complying with IS :

1791 1968-specification of batch type concrete mixtures. The mixing shall be
continued until there is a uniform distribution of the materials and the mass is
uniform in colors and consistency. If there is segregation after unloading from
the mixer, the concrete should be remixed.
The Mixing time may be 1.5 to 2 minutes for all normal cements.
In exceptional circumstances, such as (i) mechanical break down, (ii)
work in the remote areas, (iii) when the quantity of concrete work is small.
Hand mixing is permitted subject to adding 10 percent extra cement.
The Hand mixing shall be carried out in a water tight platform and care
shall be taken to ensure that mixing is continued until the concrete is uniform
in colour and consistency.
4.6.3.

WORKABILITY

Workability of concrete should be controlled by direct measurement of

water content. Workability should be checked at frequent intervals as per the
procedure laid down in IS: 1199-1959-methods of sampling and analysis of
concrete.
Slump test to check workability:
The slump test for concrete shall be adopted only for concretes of
medium to high workabilitys (i.e. slump 25 to 100 mm). For very stiff mixes
having zero slump, the slump test does not indicate any difference in
concrete of different workability.
TYPE
SLUMP
1.

(a) Structure with exposed inclined

Surface requiring low slump concretes,
to allow for proper compaction
(b) Plain cement concrete

.................25 mm
.....................25 mm

2.

3.

4.

5.

RCC structures with widely spaced

reinforcement; e.g. solid columns,
piers, abutments, footings, well steining

....................40-50 mm

RCC structures with fair degree of

congestion of reinforcement e.g.
pier, and abutment caps, box culverts, well curbs
and caps, walls with thickness greater than 300 mm

..................50-75

RCC and PSC structures with highly congested

reinforcements e.g. deck slab girders, box girders
walls with thickness less than 300 mm

..............75-125 mm

Under water concreting through tremte.g.

bottom plug, cast - in - situ pilling

..........100 - 200 mm

VEE - BEE test method to check workability:

VEE - bee test shall be done for stiff concrete mixes having low or
very low workability. The ranges for VEE-BEE-TIME method for some placing
conditions are given in clause: 6 of IS: 456-197, which shall be followed.
4.7.0

FORM WORK:

4.7.1

General

The form work shall conform to the shape, lines and dimensions as
shown on the plans and be so constructed as to remain sufficient rigid during
the placing and compaction of the concrete and shall be sufficiently water
tight to prevent loss of cement slurry from the concrete. The form work shall
be made leak proof by providing kraft paper.
Form work or centering shall be constructed of steel or timber and
adequately designed to support the full weight of wet concrete without
deflection and retain its form during laying, ramming, vibrating and setting of
concrete. Timber uses shall be properly seasoned to avoid deformation when
wetted.
All rubbish, particularly chippings, shavings and sawdust, shall be
removed from the interiors of the forms before the concrete is placed and the
form work in contact with the concrete shall be cleaned and thoroughly
wetted (in case of timber) or treated by coating with a constraining mineral
oil or other approved material. Care shall be taken that such approved
composition is kept out of contact with the reinforcement.
The forms shall be removed after expire of the following periods in the
normal circumstances and when O.P.C is used for making concrete.
i)

Walls, columns and vertical

faces of all structural member

.............24 to 48 Hrs. or as directed

(by the Engineer - in- charge.)

ii)

Slabs (props left under)

3 dyas

................

iii)

Beam so fits (props left under)

7days

................

iv)

Removal of props under slabs

1)

Spanning up to 4.5 meter

7days

................

2)

Spanning over 4.5 meter

14 days

................

V)

Removal of props under beams and arches

1)

Spanning up to 6.0 meter

14 days

................

2)

Spanning over 6.0 meter

21 days

................

However the above periods may be increased or decreased at the

discretion of the Engineer-in-charge.
All form works shall be removed without shock or vibration and shall be
eased off carefully in order to allow the structure to take up load gradually.
Forms shall not be disturbed until concrete has adequately hardened to take
the superimposed load coming on to it and in no circumstances shall forms
be struck until the concrete reaches a strength of at least twice the stress to
which the concrete may be subjected to at the time of striking.
After removal of form work, in any case no concrete work shall be
finished, plastered or made good in any form unless and until the Engineer-incharge, inspect and certify the surface for such finishing, plastering or
making good.
4.7.2.

(b).

COVER REQUIREMENTS :

Unless other wise specified in drawings and directed by the Engineer,

the cover requirements for cast-in-situ structural members shall be as
follows:
a)

At each end of reinforcing bar not less than 25 mm nor less than
twice the diameter of such rod or bar.

b)

For a longitudinal reinforcing bar in a vertical member or a column

not less than 40 mm, nor less than the diameter of bar. In the case
of columns of minimum dimension of 200 mm or under whose
reinforcing bars do not exceed 12 mm the cover of 25mm shall be
used.

c)

For longitudinal reinforcing bar in a beam, not less than 25mm, not
less than the diameter of such bar.

d)

For R.C.C. Member immersed in seawater, the cover shall be 50 mm

more than specified in (a), (b) and (c) above.

e)

For footing, resting directly on soil the minimum clear cover shall be
50 mm and in the case of concrete in contact with earth faces
contaminated with chemicals, it shall be 75mm.

f)

Lesser thickness than those specified above shall be permissible for

precast construction with the permission of the Engineer.

g)

For water retaining structures, the cover requirements are

i)
For liquid faces
the dia. of bar
ever is greater.

...........

ii) For the faces away form the liquid ...........

specified above in (a) to (f)

Minimum 25 mm or
which
the

cover

as

with

respect

to

structural member.
All reinforcement shall be placed and maintained in position as shown
in the drawings as directed by the Engineer- in - charge adopting chairs and
cover blocks with in the tolerance limits specified in clause : 11.3 of IS : 4561978.
The bars shall be supported / held in position by suitable means until
concrete is poured. Any one of the following devices shall be used for the
purpose. (i) providing steel reinforcement supports/spacers, (ii) providing of
mortar supports/spacers and (iii) providing plastic supports/ spacers.
The steel support/spacers shall be used for slabs except in case of form
finished surfaces. The mortar units can be used for slabs, beams and
columns as well as plastered or form finished surfaces.
Use of pebbles, broken stone, metal pipe, brick, wooden blocks etc., as
devices for positioning reinforcement will not be permitted.
Suitable shape and size of cement mortar cover block with proportion
of (1:1) shall be used on the work as per the drawing and as directed and
approved by the Engineer in charge.
4.7.3.

FORM WORK

FINISHING:
The following specifications shall apply for the various types of formed
surfaces:4.7.3.1. GENERAL:
The classes of finish for formed concrete surfaces shall be designed by
the use of symbol F1,F2,F3,F4 and shall be as described below.
FINISH F1: shall apply to formed surface upon which or against which
backfill of concrete is to replaced. The surface requires no treatment after
removal of forms except removal and repairs of defective concrete.
Correction of surface irregularities shall be done only for depressions which
when measured exceed 25 mm.
FINISH F2: shall apply to all permanently exposed formed surfaces of which
finishes F3 and F4 are not specified. Surfaces for which finish F2 specified
will read no filling of pits or Sack rub and no grinding other than that needed
for repair of surface. Imperfect surface, irregularities, measured shall not
exceed 6 mm for abrupt irregularities and 12 mm for gradual irregularities.

FINISH F3: Immediately after removal of forms from surfaces designated for
F3 finish, all required patching, clean up and correction of major
imperfections shall be completed and the surfaces shall be given a rubbed
mortar finish as described below. The surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted
and permitted to approach surface drying before starting, The surfaces shall
be finished in areas sufficiently large and shall prevent complete drying of
any part before the sack-rubbing is completed for that area. The mortar used
for the sack-rubbing shall consist of one part of cement to two parts, by
volume, of sand passing on IS sieve too and enough water so that the
consistency of the mortar is that of thick cream. The mortar shall be rubbed
thoroughly over the area with clean brush be a sponge rubber float,
completely filling all pits and irregularities.
4.7.3.2. UNFORMED SURFACES
The classes of finish for unformed concrete surfaces are designed by
the symbols U1 U2 and U3. Inter for surfaces, shall be stopped for drainage
where shown on the drawings. Surfaces, which will be exposed to, the
whether and which would normally believe, shall be slopped for drainage.
Unless the one of other slopes or level surfaces specifies narrow surface such
as tops of walls and curbs, shall be slopped approximately at 3.0 cm per
meter. Border surfaces such as walls, roadway platforms and decks, shall be
approximately at 1.5 cm per meter.
4.7.3.3. Classes of finish to be applied shall be as detailed below.
FINISH U1: (Screeded Finish) shall apply to unformed surfaces that are to be
covered by back fill or by concert, and surfaces of sub-floors which will be
covered by concrete floor topping, Finish KU1 is also used as the first stage
for finishers U2 and U3. Finishing operation shall consist of sufficient leveling
and screening to produce even and uniform surfaces. Surface irregularities,
measured shall not exceed 10 mm.
4.7.3.4. FINISH U2 (Floated finish) shall apply to uniformed surfaces that
are to be covered by back filled by concrete or unformed surfaces
for which finishes U1 and U3 are not specified, and shall include
floors of sumps, tops of walls. Parking areas, parapet, walls, surface
of gutters, sidewalls and entrance slabs. Finish U2 is also used as
the second stage for finish U3. Floating may be per formed by use
of hand or power driven equipment. Floating shall be started as
soon as the screeded surface has stiffened sufficiently, and shall be
the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from
screed marks and is uniform in texture. Finish U3 is to be applied,
floating shall be continued until a small amount of mortar
irregularities, shall not exceed 6 mm joints and edges of gutters,
sidewalls, entrance slabs, another joints and edges shall be tooled
where necessary, dry ingredients of the mortar, in the same
proportions shall be rubbed over the area. After the mortar has
stiffened adequately to prevent but before it hardened the excess
mortars shall be removed by rubbing with clean bur lap. After the
final scrubbing a light fog spraying shall be applied to the coated
surface, the moisture thus applied being just sufficient to damp the
surface with out all owing water to run down the face of the walls.

All scrubbed areas shall be kept continuously damp for at least 72

hours after the final rubbing on until completion of the curing period
for the concrete. When measured abrupt irregularities shall not
exceed 6 mm for irregularities parallel to the direction of flow, for
irregularities exceeding these limits shall be reduced by grinding on
a level of 1 to 20 ratio of height to length.
4.7.3.5. FINISH F4 : shall apply to formed surfaces where absorptive form
lining is used Surfaces Provided by absorptive form lining shall not
be rubbed or treated in any way except for cleaning by finish U3
(troweled finish) shall apply to unformed surfaces such as slabs to
be covered with built up roofing or membrane water proofing and
stair treads. When the floated surface has hardened sufficiently to
prevent excess of final materials from being drawn surface steel
troweling shall be started. Steel troweling shall be performed with
film pressure so as to fhitten the sandy texture of the floated
surface and produce a dense uniform surface, free from blemishes
and trowel marks; light steel troweling will be permissible on
surfaces of slabs to be covered with or membranes waterproofing, in
which light trowel marks are not considered objectionable. Surface
irregularities, measured shall not exceed 6 mm.
4.7.3.6. .
The following finishes shall be provided for the concrete used in
the various works.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Spillway crest
Spillway stilling basin
Spillway pipe
Spillway bridge road slab
Elevator tower exterior face
-do- Interior
Around sluice
Around galleries, audits, sump well
Face concrete in retaining wall
divide wall, or retaining wall (water side).

F1
F3
F3
F2
F4
F2
F3
F2
F3

or
or
or
or

U2
U2
U3
U2

or
or
or
or

U2
U2
U2
U2

4.7.3.7 Tolerances for concrete construction:

Permissible surface irregularities for the various classes of concrete
surface finishes specified and defined as finishes are to be distinguished
from tolerances described herein
ii)

Tolerances in Dams and Appurtenant works

1) All structures.

a)

Variation constructed line outline from established position in plain

In 6 m
In 12 m

b)

12 mm
18 mm

Variation of dimension to individual structural features from established

position.

In 24 meters or more 30mm

In buried construction: twice the above amount.
c)

Variation from the plumb from the specified batter or from the curved
surface of all structures, including the lines and surfaces of columns
walls, piers and vertical joint grooves.
In 3 meters
In 6 meters
In 12 meters or more

12 mm
20 mm
30 mm

In buried construction: twice the above amounts.

d)

Variation from level from the grades indicated on the drawings in slabs.
beams, soffits and horizontal joint grooves and visible arises.
In 3 meters
In 10 meters

6 mm
12 mm

In buried construction: twice the above amounts

e)

Variations in cross sectional dimensions columns, beams, piers

Minus
6 mm
Plus
12 mm

f)

Variation thickness of slabs, walls and similar watertight joints variation

from the plumb and levels should not be greater than 3mm in 3 meters.

g)

For sill and side walls for gate and similar water tight joints variation from
the plumb and level should not be greater than 3 mm, in 3 mts.

h)

Tolerance for placing reinforcement steel.

i)

Variation of protective covering.

With 5 cm cover
With 7.5 cm cover

ii)

6 mm
12 mm

Variation from indicated spacing

10 mm for spacing
5 mm for spacing

greater than 15 cm
less than 15 cm.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.
4.7.3.8 Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete,
shape it to the required lines, or to ensure against contamination of the
concrete by materials caving or Sloughing from adjacent excavations or other
features of the work. All exposed concrete surfaces having slopes of 1 to 1 or
steeper shall be formed where the side slopes of walls of an excavation for
concrete structure can be trimmed to the prescribed lines without Sloughing,
the Sloughing, the use of forms, will not be required. Forms shall have
sufficient strength to with stand the pressure resulting from placement and
vibration of the concrete and shall be maintained rigidly in correct position.
Forms shall be tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete.

Moulding strips shall be placed in the corners of forms so as to produce

leveled edges at formed surface and edges at formed joints will not require
beveling unless so indicated on the drawings. Forms for concrete surfaces for
which finished F3 and F4 are specified shall be reset and tightened at
construction joints, so that, they fits firmly against the hardened concrete
when concrete replacement is resumed. Additional forms ties shall be as
necessary to ensure against spreading of the reset forms under pressure of
the subsequently placed concrete and consequent offset from the previously
formed face.
TONGUE-AND-GROOVE SHEATHING:
Tongue and groove sheathing where used for forming shall be
10cm to 15cm common T & G and shall be placed horizontally.
4.7.3.9 Forms for warped surfaces designated for F4 finish: Forms for
warped surface, shall be constructed so as to conform accurately to the
required curvatures of the sections. Intermediate sections shall be
interpolated as necessary for the type of form construction from being
used and the forms shall be constructed so that the curvatures will be
continuous between sections. Where necessary to meet requirements of
curvature the form sheathing built of laminated splices is cut to make
tight and smooth form surface. The forms constructed such that the joint
marks on the concrete surfaces insider of principle water conduits shall
as far as possible follow the line of water flow. After the forms have
hidden and any roughness and all angles on the surfaces of the forms
caused by matching the form materials shall be dressed to the required
curvatures.
4.7.3.10 FORMS SHEATHING AND LINING:
Wood sheathing or lining shall be of such kind and quality or shall
be so treated or coated that there will be no chemical defoliation or
discoloration of the formed concrete surfaces. The type and condition of
form sheathing and lining, the ability of the forms to withstand distant
caused by placement and variation of the concrete, and the workman
ship used in form construction shall be such that the formed surfaces,
after being finished will conform with the applicable requirements of
these specifications pertaining to finish of formed surfaces. Where finish
F3 specified, the sheathing or lining shall be so placed that the joint
marks on the complete surfaces will be general alignment both
horizontally and vertically. Except where other wise specifically provided,
materials used for form sheathing or lining shall conform to the following
requirements.
Required
Finish of

Wood sheathing or lining.

Steel sheathing or
lining

Any grade

Steel

Formed surface
F1
permitted

sheathing

Steel lining permitted

F2
permitted

No. 1 common ship lap

Steel

sheathing

Steel lining permitted

if necessary.
F3
not permitted

No. 1 common tongue & grooved

Steel sheathing

Except where plywood lining or

Steel lining not

permitted
Sheathing is specifically required
F4
not permitted.

F5
not permitted

NO. 1 common tongue & grooved

Steel sheathing

For plane or cylindrical surfaces.

Thin plywood lining for warped
surfaces.

Steel lining not

permitted.

Absorptive form lining backed

Steel sheathing

With No.1 common shiplap.

Steel lining not

permitted.
NOTE:
"Steel sheathing" denoted steel sheets not supported by backing of
wooden boards. "Steel lining" denotes then steel sheets supported by
backing of wooden boards.
4.7.3.11. Absorptive form lining: Absorptive form lining, where directed
to be used, shall be of the type and quality approved by the Executive
Engineer. The form lining shall be highly absorptive to air and water and
through its absorptive capacity able to eliminate voids, pits and other
common effects from the concrete surface. The lining shall be readily
removable from the concrete without damage to the surface. It shall produce
dense concrete surface of uniform and satisfactory texture and colour. The
lining itself and treatment employed in its manufacture shall not discolor the
concrete nor interfere with normal chemical reaction of the cement. The
backing to which absorptive lining is attached shall be sufficiently smooth,
even and free from cracks, knot holes, and other imperfections to avoid
unevenness in the finished surface. The lining shall be in sheers of uniform
length and width. Location and direction of the joints shall be approved by the
Executive Engineer. The joints between sheets shall be fitted smoothly and
accurate and patching shall be avoided. Cutting and trimming shall be true
and shall be done with tools well adopted to this work so that sharp, smooth,
square edges are produced. The lining shall be attached to the forms in such
a manner that it is held securely and smoothly in place. Nails or tacks, if
used, shall be spaced in uniform pattern and shall be driven flush. Dents and
hammer marks in the surface of the lining shall be avoided. After then lining
has been attached in the form. The joint shall be rubbed with a smooth tool to
press down any projecting fibers. Where absorptive form lining is in contact
with the face of previous pour, care shall be used in setting and sufficient
pressure shall be applied in tightening form anchors to produce continuity

and evenness at the face, free from offset, and streaks, and other
irregularities. The lining shall be kept dry and shall not be reused.
4.8.0. TRANSPORTATION OF CONCRETE:
Concrete shall be transported from the mixer to the formwork as
rapidly as possible by methods grooved by the Engineer-in-charge, which will
prevent the separation or loss of any of the ingredients and maintaining the
required workability.
The concrete shall be transported, laid and compacted in its final
position with in 30 minutes of its discharge from the mixer unless carried by
in properly designed agitators.
Where the time of haul exceeds 20 minutes, mixed concrete shall be
transported in a suitable agitators or transit mixer as directed and approved
by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.9.0. PLACING OF CONCRETE:
All surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be laid shall be
prepared in accordance with the drawings.
No concrete shall be placed until all form works; installation of parts to
be embedded and preparation of surface involved in the placing have been
approved by the Engineer-in-charge. No concrete shall be placed in water
except when specifically so permitted. All surfaces of forms and embedded
materials have become incrusted with dried mortar from previously placed
shall be cleaned before surrounding of adjacent concrete is placed.
If concreting is not started within 24 hours of the approval being given,
it shall have to be obtained again. The contractor shall notify the Engineer at
least 24 hours before batching begins for placement of concrete.
All absorptive surfaces against which concrete is to be laid shall be
moistened thoroughly so that moisture will not be method of placing should
be such as to preclude segregation with drawn from the freshly placed
concrete. The concrete shall be deposited as nearly as possible in its final
position and compacted before setting commences and should not be
subsequently disturbed.
Care should be taken to avoid displacement of reinforcement or
movement of formwork.
Placing is allowed with a limitation of free fall of 1.5 meter.
All concrete shall be placed in continuous and approximate horizontally
layers, the thickness of which shall not more than 450mm for mass concrete
and 150mm for RCC and plain cement concrete works)
Concrete shall not be placed faster than the placing crew can compact it
properly.
On sloping surfaces, concrete should be placed at the lower end of the
slope first, progressing upwards, and thereby increasing natural compaction
of the concrete.

High velocity discharge, which may cause segregation of the concrete,

should be avoided. Recommended methods of placing concrete in
segregation prone location are;
4.9.1.

In narrow forms: If very wet concrete were to be placed in narrow,

deep form word, water content in the upper layers would be
gradually reduced to compensate for water gain.

b) Placing through side points in column form work: concrete

shall be dropped vertically in to the outside pockets under each form
work opening (port) so that concrete stops and then flows easily into
the column formwork.
c)

Placing on sloping surfaces:

Concrete shall not be discharge from free end of a chute on to a

sloping surface, as the heavier coarse adopting separated and carried down
the slope. The chute lumps be called with a battle and a drop at its end, so
that marked on slope.
d) Temperature:
Concrete when deposited shall have a temperature of not less than 5
degree Celsius, and not more than 40 degrees Celsius.
WEATHER CONDITIONS:
Concreting operations shall temporarily suspend during excessively,
hot or rainy weather when conditions are such that the concrete cannot be
placed and cured.
During the hot weather, no concrete shall be deposited when the
temperature with in the forms is more than 49 degree Celsius. Whenever
necessary exposed surface of fresh or green concrete shall be shaded from
the direct rays of sun and immediately protected against premature setting
or drying by being cured under continuous fine spray of water.
During continued rainy weather or heavy downpour all freshly placed
concrete shall be covered and protected against surface wash. Then all badly
washed or stressed surface shall be removed and washed before depositing
the next course.
e) Preparation of foundation surface:
Immediately before placing concrete all surfaces of foundations upon
or against which concrete to be placed shall be free from standing water
mud, debris, free from oil, objectionable coatings, loose, semi detached or
unsound fragments of rock. Surface of rock shall be cleaned with the use of
high velocity air jet., wet sand blasting, stiff broom picks or by effective
means.
f)

Preparation of concrete surface:

Concrete surface upon which fresh concrete is to be placed shall be

chipped and Roughened to a depth of not greater than 25 mm. The roughing
shall be performed be chipping or other satisfaction, methods and in such a
manner as not to loosen, crack or shatter, any part of the concrete beyond
the roughened surface. After being roughened, the surface of the concrete

shall be cleaned thoroughly of all loose, dust and other objectionable

substances and shall be sound and hard and in such conditions as to assure
good mechanical bond between old and new concrete. All concrete, which is
not hard, dense and durable, shall be removed to the depth required to
secure a satisfactory surface.
G)

CEMENT SLURRY AND MORTAR LAYER:

After surfaces have been prepared satisfactory, all surfaces, rock, old
concrete and old masonry shall be coated with a thin layer of cement slurry
(comprising 1 cement to 2/3 water by volume) and covered with a layer of
mortar not less than 12mm, not more than 20 mm thick. The mortar shall be
similar to the mortar in the regular concrete mixture having the same cement
sand ratio of the mortar used in concrete unless otherwise directed. The
cement slurry and mortar shall be spread uniformly and shall be worked
thoroughly, into all regulates of the surface. Concrete shall be placed
immediately up on the fresh concrete.
4.10.0. COMPACTION OF CONCRETE:
4.10.1
GENERAL:
Compaction should preferably be achieved by mechanical vibration.
But in isolated locations, it can also be achieved if approved by the Engineerin-charge by manual methods, namely, Roding, spading and tamping. The
mechanical compaction is achieved by vibration. The methods like spinning
mechanical tamping and use of shock are restricted to special situations as
approved by the Engineer.
Under vibration is harmful should be avoided. Even vibration
may cause
i.

Settlement of the course aggregate (ii) heavy bleeding of the

concrete, (iii) excessive formwork deflection and from work damage.

The following vibrators shall be used for compaction as per the

directions of the Engineer-in-charge.
10.2.

IMMERSION VIBRATORS:

Immersion vibrators as per IS: 2505 - 1980 shall be used for

consolidation of plain as well as reinforced concrete. They shall be of either.
a.

Flexible shaft type, powered by different types of motors or

b.

Motor-in-head type, electrically or pneumatically driven.

While compacting with internal vibrators, concrete should be deposited

in layers of 300 to 450 mm thick and the vibrator inserted vertically at
uniform spacing over the entire area of placement. The vibrator should
penetrate rapidly to the bottom of the layer and at level 150mm into the
preceding layer, if there is any. It should be held generally 5 to 15 seconds)
until the compaction is considered adequate and then withdrawn slowly at
the rate of about 80mm/second.
Operational frequency: 8000 to 12000 per minute.
4.10.3. SCREED BOARD TYPE VIBRATORS:

Concrete vibrators of screed board type as per IS: 2506 - 1964 shall be
used for compaction of concrete beds, floors, pavements and then slabs,
Where the area to be compacted is large or the thickness is too small (less
than 200 mm) to allow the use of immersion vibration.
Operational frequency: 3500 per minute (under no load state)
4.10.4. FORMWORK VIBRATORS:
Formwork vibrators as per IS: 4656 - 1968 shall be used for compaction
of concrete, precast concrete moulds, gullies and deep post-tensioned
beams. They shall be used for compaction of in situ concrete is small and
narrow sections of very, heavily reinforced section where immersion of
vibrators cannot be used. There are of two types
a. The fixed on clamped type, and
b. The manual type.
Operational frequency: 2800 per minute (Under no load state)
4.10.5. VIBRATING TABLE:
Vibrating table as per IS: 2514 - 1963 shall be used for compaction of
concrete in moulds for the manufacture of precast products and structural
elements. They compact concrete through rapidly alternating horizontal,
vertical or circular vibrations, which are transmitted to moulds filled with
concrete and placed or clamped on the tabletop.
Operational frequency: 3000 to 6000 cycles per minute.
Immediately after compaction concrete shall be protected against
harmful effects of weather, including rain, running water, shocks, vibration.,
traffic, rapid temperature changes and drying out.
4.11.0. CONSTRUCTION
BLASTING:

JOINTS

GREEN

CUTTING

AND

SAND

4.11.1. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:

Construction joints are the stopping places in the process of placing of
concrete, as it is impracticable to place concrete to a continuous operation.
The position and arrangement of joint are predetermined as shown in the
drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge as per the site and
conditions of placing.
The spacing of construction joints shall be determined by the design
parameters, construction limitations and type of work and site conditions and
shall be as few as possible. These shall be provided at proper places where
they may be carefully constructed with attention to workmanship. From the
strength of structure consideration, it is desirable to position construction
joints at points of minimum shear. (Clause 12.4.1 and 12.4.2 of IS: 456 1978).
If directed by the Engineer, joint should be supplemented by dowels to
provide adequate bond between the old and new concrete.
When the work has to be resumed on a surface which has hardened
such surface shall be roughened. It shall then be swept clean and thoroughly

wetted. For vertical joints neat cement slurry shall be applied on the surface
before it is dry. For horizontal joints the surface shall be covered with a layer
of mortar about 10 to 15 mm thick compound of cement and sand in the
same ration as the cement and sand in concrete mix. This cement slurry or
mortar shall be freshly mixed and applied immediately before placing of the
concrete.
Where the concrete has not full hardened, all laitance shall be removed
by scrubbing the wet surface with wire or bristle brushes, care being taken to
avoid dislodgement of particles of aggregate. The surface shall be thoroughly
wetted and all free water removed. The surface shall be then be coated with
neat cement slurry. On this surface, layer of concrete not exceeding 150 mm
in thickness shall first be placed and shall be well rammed against old work,
particular attention shall be paid to corners and close spots; work thereafter
shall proceed in the normal way.
4.11.2. GREEN CUTTING:
The surface of the respective lift shall be thoroughly green cut with an
air water jet. Green cutting is usually done 8 to 12 hours after the top surface
of a concrete lift had been completed and sufficiently hardened. The actual
time for taking up the green cutting operation shall depend upon the
following factors.
a.

Concrete placement temperature;

b.

Atmospheric temperature;

c.

Concrete mix; and

d.

Slump.

The air water jet will remove the thin surface film of laitance and grout
to expose clean surface.
Green cutting, if done at the proper time, shall yield very good results.
When started too early, it shall result in over cutting and removing too much
mortar. It is also liable to loosen the aggregate particles and leaving too poor
a surface to bind the fresh concrete. On the other hand, if green cutting were
delayed too long, the cutting action of the air and water jet would be
ineffective for proper removal of laitance. It, therefore, requires much greater
care and judgment for proper use at proper time.
Skill of Jet Operator: Besides determining the proper time for initiating
green cutting, the process will require constant attention on the part of the
air water jet operator. By correct manipulation of the high velocity air-water
get, a trained operator can ensure the removal of the thin surface film of
laitance and grout effectively and at the same time, leaving, the aggregate
stones, already embedded in the mortar, undisturbed.
Proper Air-water Gun: In addition to the skill of the jet operator, a
proper air water gun is also a vital requirement for effective green-cutting,
the issuing nozzle must be about 460 mm (18 inches) long to ensure the
requisite cutting force close to the concrete surface.
Quantum of Compressed air and Water: For effective green cutting, it is
essential that the air pressure should be around 6.33 to 7.03 Kg/Cm 2. It

should not be allowed to fall below 6.33 kg/cm 2. The water pressure, of
course, should be sufficient to bring the water into effective influence of the
air pressure. As an approximate estimate, the quantity of compressed air
required by the green-cutting gun is 2 cubic meters per minute and the
quantity of water is 60 gallons (273 Liters) per minute.
An important aspect to be taken note of is that green cutting as an
exclusive operation shall be fully useful only if the next lift of concrete is
placed within 3 to 4 days (or a maximum of 5 days) of the placement of the
previous lift. If there be a delay in concrete placement beyond this period, the
laitance will come up to the concrete surface again at some places. Removal
of such laitance shall then be not possible by the ordinary green cutting
operation alone. Light sand blasting of even the green-cut lifts shall have to
be resorted to. However, if there is excessive delay in concrete placement, it
will require either "Wet sand blasting" or the application of high pressure
"Water blaster" to remove the laitance for effective binding with the fresh
concrete. The effect to achieve this will be considerably less if green cutting
has already been done.
4.11.3. SAND BLASTING:
Sand blasting is the process of roughening and cleaning the surface of
old and set concrete by means of coarse sand and air applied under pressure
of 6.33 to 7.03 KG/CM 2 through a nozzle, so as to erode the laitance and grout
from the old concretes. Sand blasting of rock is also done so that concrete
may be placed on or against a clean surface of rock as required according to
specifications.
There are two types of sand blasting, namely "Wet sand blasting" and"
dry sand blasting". In wet blasting water is also used along with sand and air
under pressure, while in the later, only sand and air under pressure are used.
Normally the concrete and rock surface etc., are wet sand blasted to keep
down the dust.
The percentage of different sizes of sand particles for efficient sand
blasting shall be as follows:
SIZE

PERCENTAGE

Mesh per inch (25.40 Millimeters)

26

16

Mesh per inch (25.40 Millimeters)

30

30

Mesh per inch (25.40 Millimeters)

23

50

Mesh per inch (25.40 Millimeters)

21

For effective sand blasting, it is essential that pressure of air should be

between 6.33 to 7.03 KG/CM2. If pressure falls below 6.33 KG/CM2, sand
blasting becomes ineffective. If sand having large percentage of fines is used,
it will not provide the requisite cutting power and the whole effort goes
waste. Good quality well-graded sand (sand-blast-sand) is needed for
achieving the objective of sand blasting.

High pressure Water Blasters Green cutting is far cheaper than sand
blasting. Proper quality sand (known as sand-blast sand) is most expensive
item and special efforts are needed to arrange such sand. High-pressure
water blaster offers a breakable alternative to sand blasting.
Summary: Green-cutting offers the most economical methodology in the
preparation of good construction joints. It has, however, to be initiated at the
proper time and with a proper air-water gun to yield the best results. It is far
cheaper than sand blasting. If a delay of more than 3 to 5 days is anticipated
in placing the concrete over the previous lift, the concrete surface of the lift
should be properly "green cut" and thereafter (say one day prior to
placement of concrete) it should be light sand blasted or water blasted in
order to remove the "re-appeared" laitance.
4.11.4. OTHER REQUIREMENTS OF CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION:
4.11.4.1
All Concrete construction shall confirm to the permissible tolerances
and technical provisions as described in the section. All structures shall be
built in a workman-like manner, to the lines, grades and dimensions shown in
the drawings or as prescribed by the Engineer. The location of all the
construction joints shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The
dimensions of each structure shown on the drawings shall be subject to such
change as may be found necessary by the Engineer to adopt the structure to
the conditions disclosed by the excavation.
4.11.4.2.
Concrete in various components of Bridges, under tunnels,
Aqueducts etc.
Expansion joints shall be constructed as shown on the drawings or as
directed. Pre-moulded bituminous fiber type expansion joint material shall be
constructed in the parapets as directed by the Engineer. Open joints or false
joints shall be constructed as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer. Preformed expansion joint filler shall be placed in the roadway and
sidewalls where shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
4.11.4.3.

CONCRETE IN BLOCKOUTS:

(a) Care shall be taken in placing the concrete in block outs in order to
ensure satisfactory bond with the concrete previously placed and to
secure complete contact with all metal work in the block outs. (b)
The roughening of the concrete surface performed by chipping or
sand blasting as approved by the Engineer and in such a manner as
not to loosen, crack or shatter any part of the concrete beyond the
roughened surface. The surface of the concrete shall then be
cleaned thoroughly of loose fragments, dirt and other objectionable
substances in order to ensure good mechanical bond between the
existing and new concrete. All concrete, which is not hard, dense
and durable, shall be removed to the depth required to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.11.4.4.

EMBEDMENT IN CONCRETE:

In some of the locations of structures, a few conduit openings shall

have to be provided through RCC/PCC as shown in the drawings. Placement of
concrete shall be suitably carried out around such conduits or openings. No
extra claim shall be entertained.
4.12.0. CURING:
4.12.1

.GENERAL:

All equipment, material etc., needed for curing and protection of

concrete shall be at hand and ready for installing before actual concreting
begins.
Detailed plans, methods and procedures and protection shall be settled
and got approved in writing from the Engineer sufficiently in advance of the
concreting. The equipment and method proposed to be utilized shall avoid
interruption or damage to the work.
The vertical and stopping concrete surfaces shall be kept saturated
with a system of perforated pipes / mechanical sprinklers / porous hoses/any
other suitable method which will keep all surfaces continuously wet.
4.12.2. MOIST CURING:
Exposed surfaces of concrete shall be kept continuously in a damp or
wet condition (to avoid formation of surface cracking due to alternate wetting
and drying) by ponding or by covering with layer of sacking, canvas, Hessian
or similar materials and kept constantly wet for at least SEVEN DAYS from the
date of placing of concrete, if O.P. Cement is used in the concrete.
It may be reduced to 3 to 4 days when rapid hardening Portland
cement is used, but greater care shall be exercised, particularly at early
stages when rate of hydration is high.
4.12.3. MEMBRANE CURING:
Approved curing compounds shall be used in lieu of moist curing with
the permission of the Engineer-in-charge. These compounds shall be applied
to all exposed surfaces of the concrete as soon as possible after the concrete
has set and the free water on the surface has disappeared and no water on
the surface has disappeared and no water sheet is seen. But not so late that,
the compound will be absorbed into the surface pores of the concrete.
4.13.0. SAMPLING AND STRENGTH OF CONCRETE:
4.13.1. GENERAL:
The sampling shall be done as per the specifications laid down in IS:
1199 - 1959 - specification for sampling and analysis specification for testing
strength of concrete.
For relatively small and unimportant buildings and structure in which
quantity of concrete is less than 15 cum. the strength tests may be waived by
the Engineer-in-charge.
The sampling scheme given in clause: 14 and the acceptance criteria
given in clause: 15 of IS: 456-1978 are applicable to both design mix and
nominal mix concrete. In the case of the later, the preliminary tests for
establishing the mix proportions are not necessary.

Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.

The Concrete under acceptance shall be notionally divided into lots for
the purpose of sampling, before commencement of work. The delimitation of
lots shall be determined by the following:
i.

No individual lot shall be more than 30 Cum in volume.

ii.

At least one cube forming an item of the sample representing the lot
shall be taken from concrete of the same grade and mix proportions
cast any day.

iii. Different grades of mixes of concrete shall be divided into separate

lots.
iv. Concrete of a lot shall be used in the same identifiable component
of the structure.
4.13.2. SAMPLING AND TESTING:
a)

Concrete for making 3 test cubes shall be taken from a batch of

concrete at point of delivery into construction according to
procedure laid down in IS: 1199.

b)

A random sampling procedure to ensure that each of the concrete

batches forming the lot under acceptance inspection has equal
chance of being chosen for taking cubes shall be adopted.

c)

150 mm cubes shall be made, cured and tested at the age of 28

days for compressive strength in accordance with IS: 516. The 28day test strength result for each cube shall form an item of the
sample.

d)

These test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at
28 days. Additional cubes may be required for various purposes
such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days or for any
other purpose.

e)

The test strength of the sample shall be the average of the strength
of 3 cubes. The individual variation should not be more than 15%
of average.

f)

Frequency: The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each

shall be :

QUANTITY OF CONCRETE IN WORK, CUM NO. OF SAMPLES

1-5
6-15
16-30
31-50
51 and above
additional 50 cum

1
2
3
4 + one additional
sample
for
each
part there of.

At least one sample shall be taken from each shift of work.

4.13.3: Test procedure

In order to get a relatively quicker idea of quality of concrete, optional

tests on beams for modulus of rupture or at 72+2 hours at 7 days, on
compressive strength tests at 7 days may be carried out in addition to at 28
days compressive strength Tests for this purpose the value given in table may
be taken for general guidance in the case of concrete made with ordinary
Portland cement. In all cases, the 28 days compressive strength specified in
Table shall be alone be the criterion for acceptance or rejection of the
concrete. If, however, from tests carried out in a particular job over a
reasonably long period, it has been established to the satisfaction of the
engineer that a suitable ratio between 28 days compressive strength and the
modules of rupture at 72+2 hours or 7 days or compressive strength at 7
days may be accepted, the engineer may suitably relax te frequency of 28
days compressive strength provided the expected strength values at the
specified early age are consistently met.
OPTIONAL TESTS REQUIREMENTS OF CONCRETE
Grade of
Concrete

Compressive
Strength
on 15 cm
Cubes,

Modules of Rupture
By Beam Test, Min
at 72+2h

at

(3)
N/mm2
1.2
1.5
1.7

(4)
N/mm2
1.7
2.1
2.4

days

(1)
M-10
M-15
M-20

Min,
at 7 days
(2)
N/mm2
7.0
10.0
13.5

4.13.3.1. STANDARD DEVIATION:

(I)

STANDARD DEVIATION BASED ON TEST RESULTS:

(a) Number of test results: The total number of test results required to
constitute as acceptable record for calculation of standard deviation
shall be not less than 30. Attempts should be made to obtain in the
30 test results, as early as possible, when a mix is used for the first
time check additional condition of about 5 samples.
(b) Standard deviation to be brought upto date: The calculation of the
standard deviation shall be brought upto date after every change of
mix design and at least once a month.
(ii) Determination of Standard Deviation:
(a) The standard deviation of concrete of given grade shall be
calculated using the following formula from the results of individual
tests of concrete of that grade.
Estimated standard deviations

= Sqrt (sigma(delta sqr)/(n-1) =

-----(n-1)

Where,
delta = deviation of the individual test strength from the average
n = number of sample test results.
(c) When significant changes are made in the production of concrete
batches (for example changes in the materials used, mix design,
equipment or technical control) the standard deviation value shall
be separately calculated for such batches of concrete.
4.13.3.2

ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION:

Where sufficient test results for a particular grade of concrete are not
available, the value of standard deviation given in the following table may be
assumed.
ASSUMED STANDARD DEVIATION
______________________________________________________________________________
________
Standard Deviation
Grade of concrete
For Different degree of Control in
N/mm2
______________________________________________________________________________
__________
Very good

Good

M 10

2.0

2.3

M 15

2.5

3.5

M 20

3.6

4.6

Fair
3.3
4.5
5.6
However, when adequate past records for a similar grade exist and
justify to the designed value of standard deviation different from that shown
in the above table, it shall be permissible to use that value.
4.13.3.3.

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

The concrete shall be deemed to comply with the strength requirements

if:
(a) Every sample has a test strength not less than the characteristic
value : or
(b) The strength of one or more samples through less than the
characteristic value; is in each case not less than the greater of :
1)

The characteristic strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation;

and

2)

0.80 times the characteristic strength and the average strength of

all the samples is not less than the characteristic strength plus.
(1.65 / - 1.65 sqmt. (number of samples) times the standard
deviation.

The concrete shall be deemed not to comply with the strength

requirements if:
(a) The strength of any sample is less than the greater of :
(1) The characteristic strength minus 1.35 times the standard deviation;
and
(2) 0.80 times the characteristic strength; or
(b) The average strength of all the samples is less than the
characteristic strength plus.
(1.65-3/sqmt. (number of samples) times the standard deviation.
3.00
1.65 ---------------

standard

deviation
No of samples
Concrete, which does not meet the strength requirements as specified
but has strength greater than that required may, at the discretion of the
designer, be accepted as being structurally adequate without further testing.
If the concrete is deemed not comply the structural adequacy, of the
parts affected shall be investigated and any consequential action as needed
shall be taken.
Concrete of each grade shall be assessed separately.
Concrete shall be assessed daily for compliance.
Concrete is liable to be rejected if it is porous or honeycombed; its placing has been
Interrupted without providing a proper construction joint (or)
been met. However, the hardened concrete may be accepted after
carrying out suitable measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
4.13.3.4: CORE AND LOAD TESTS:
Inspection: Immediately after stripping the formwork, all concrete shall be
carefully inspected and any defective work or small defects either removed or
make good before concrete has thoroughly hardened.
In case of doubt regarding the grade of concrete used, either due to
poor workmanship on based or results of cube strength tests, compressive
strength tests of concrete and/or load test may be carried out.
A)

CORE TEST:

The points from which cores are to be taken and the number of cores
required shall be at the discretion of the Engineer and shall be representative
of the whole of concrete concerned. In no case, however, shall fewer than
three cores be tested.

Cores shall be prepared and tested as described in IS: 516-1959.

Concrete in the member represented by a core test shall be considered
acceptable if the average equivalent cube strength of the cores is equal at
least 85 percent of the cubes strength of the grade of concrete specified for
the corresponding age and no individual core has a strength less than 75
percent.
In case the core test results do not satisfy the requirements of or where
such tests have not been done, load test may be resorted to.
B)

LOAD TESTS ON PARTS OF STRUCTURES:

Loading tests should be carried out as soon as possible after expire of

28 days from the time of placing of concrete.
The structure should be subjected to a load equal to full dead load of
the structure plus 1.25 times the imposed load for a period of 24 hours and
then the imposed load shall be removed.
NOTE:

Dead load includes self-weight of the structure members plus weight

of finishes and walls of partitions, if any, as considered in the
design.

The deflection due to imposed load only shall be recorded. If within 24

hours of removal of the imposed load, the structure does not recover at least
75 percent of the deflection under superimposed load, the test may be
repeated after a lapse of 72 hours. If the recovery is less than 80 percent, the
structure shall be deemed to be unacceptable.
4.13.4. ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:
Two sets of criteria for demonstrating that the concrete as produced
and casted either complies or does not comply with the IS: 456-1978
requirements for concrete quality.
a)

Requirements of strength, and

b)

Requirements of workmanship.
Compression strength:

When both the following

conditions
are
met,
the
concrete complies with the
specified
compressive
strength:
a)
The
mean
strength
determined from any group of
four
consecutive
samples
should exceed the specified
characteristic
compressive
strength.
b) Strength of any sample is
not less than the specified
characteristic
compressive
strength minus 3 MPa.

4.13.5. REJECTION CRITERIA:

Concrete is liable
rejected if it is

to

be

a) Porous or honey-combed,
(due
to
incorrect
mix
proportion
or
improper
compaction techniques
b) Its placing has been
interrupted without providing
proper construction joint.
c) The reinforcement has
been displaced beyond the
tolerance have not been.
d) If the core tests / load test
does not yield the results.
e) If the strength of the
concrete produced and tested
does not yield the strength
requirements of the code.
f) If the test results of the test
cubes obtained as per IS:
1199 and tested as per IS:516
does not yield the strength
requirements of the code
accordance
criteria,
the
Engineer-in-charge with the
consultation of the Designer
will consider the technical
consequences
such
as
durability,
strength,
serviceability,
economic
consequences,
cost
replacement,
cost
of
strengthening the weak point
etc.,
However, the hardened concrete shall be accepted only after carrying
out suitable remedial measures to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
4.14.

UNACCEPTABLE WORK:

All defective concreting work including but out limited to defects

arising out of honey combing, under sizing, under strength etc., are liable to
be demolished and rebuilt by the contractor at his cost. In the event of such
work being accepted by carrying out repairs etc., as specified by the Engineer
the cost of repairs shall be borne by the contractor. Acceptance of such works
will be in accordance with the provisions of IS: 456-1978.
Visible defects noticed in the workmanship and quality, which could be
rectified through remedial measures, shall be rectified to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.

Deficiency in workmanship which is considered to be attributable to

some inadequacy in concrete production or concrete haulage, or concrete
placement method, or compaction, should be got remedied from the
contractor by the Engineer through additional inputs and up gradation of
methodology and work taken up subsequently only when the needed
augmentation has been done. If the subsequent work is within acceptable
level, steps should be taken to remedy the defects noted in the earlier work
through appropriate measures. After the defects have been remedied to the
satisfaction of Engineer and provided that the inputs (cement, aggregates,
water etc.,) are within the specified quality standards, the concerned work
shall be accepted.
In case the Engineer observes basic and serious deficiencies in the
quality of inputs and outputs as well as in the workmanship, revealed through
perusal of test records and visual inspection as well including say,
examination of cores (taken from in situ concrete lining), as also serious
inadequacies in construction equipment and job facilities in enforcing the
technical specifications, such portions of works shall be rejected and not
accepted for any payment. In the absence of any positive measures to
strengthen these structures/works, the Engineer may arrange for their
demolition and reconstruction.
There could be portions of work/works, where some sort of slight
transgression of specification quality levels has taken place and which is not
feasible of rectification in full. In case it is determined that the integrity of
such portions of work is not significantly impaired and that the functional
capability can be assured, consideration may be given by the Engineer
(subject to full satisfaction of the Engineer) to accept these at reduced
payment to the contractor instead of demolishing the concerned portion of
work and reconstructing it.
4.15.

CONCRETING UNDER SPECIAL CONDITONS:

4.15.1. CONCRETE UNDER WATER

When it is necessary to deposit concrete under water, the methods,
equipment, materials and proportions of mix to be used shall be got approved
from the Engineer before any work is started. Concrete shall contain 10 per
cent more cement than, that required for the same mix placed in the dry.
Concrete shall not be placed in water having a temperature below 5
degrees Celsius. The temperature of the concrete, when deposited, shall not
be less than 16 degrees Celsius, nor more than 40 degrees Celsius.
Cofferdams or forms shall be sufficiently that to ensure still water
conditions, if practicable, and in any case to reduce the flow of water to less
than 3 meters per minute through the space into which concrete is to be
deposited. Cofferdams or forms in still water shall be sufficiently tight to
prevent loss of mortar through the joints in the walls. Pumping shall not be
done while concrete is being placed or until 24 hours thereafter. To minimise
the formation of laitance, great care shall be exercised not to disturb the
concrete as far as possible while it is being deposited.

All under water concreting shall be carried out by Tremie method only,
using Tremie of appropriate diameter. The number and spacing of the tremles
should be worked out to ensure proper concreting. The tremie concreting
when started should continue without interruption for the full height of
member being concreted. The concrete production and placement equipment
should sufficient to enable the underwater concrete to be completed
uninterrupted within the stipulated time. Necessary stand-by equipment
should be available for emergency situation.
The top section of the tremie shall have a hopper large enough to hold
one full batch of the mix or the entire contents of the transporting basket as
the case may be. If tremie pipe shall not be less than 200 mm in diameter
and shall be large enough to allow a free flow of concrete and strong enough
to withstand the external pressure of the water in which it is suspended, even
if a partial vacuum develops insider the pipe. Preferably, flanged steel pipe of
adequate strength for the job each tremie pipe with its hopper at the upper
end. Unless the lower end of the pipe is equipped with an approved
automatic check valve, the upper end of the pipe shall be plugged with a
wadding of gunny sacking or other approved material before delivering the
concrete to the tremie pipe through the hopper, so that, when the, concrete
is forced down from the hopper to the pipe it will force the plug (and along
with if any water in the pipe) down the pipe and out of the bottom end, thus
establishing a continuous stream of concrete. It will be where only in raise
slowly the tremie in order to allow a uniform flow of concrete, but it shall not
be emptied so that water is not allowed to enter above the concrete in the
pipe. At all times after placing of concrete is started and until all the required
quantity has been placed, the lower of the tremie pipe shall be kept below
the surface of the plastic concrete. This will cause the concrete to build up
from below instead of flowing out over the surface and thus avoid formation
at large of sustime. If the sand in the tremie is lost while depositing the
tremie shall be raised above the concrete surface and unless sealed by a
check value, it shall be re-plugged at the top end, as at the beginning before
refilling for depositing further concrete.
4.15.2. COLD WEATHER CONCRETING.
Where concrete is to be deposited at or near freezing temperature,
precautions shall be taken to ensure that at the time of placing, it has a
temperature of not less than 5 degrees Celsius and that the temperature of
the concreting shall be maintained above 4 degree Celsius until it has
thoroughly hardened. When necessary concrete ingredients shall be heated
before mixing but cement not be heated artificially other than by the heat
transmitted to it from other ingredients of the concrete. Stock-piles aggregate
may be heated by the use of dry heat or steam. Aggregates shall not be
heated directly by gas or on sheet metal over fire. In general the temperature
of aggregates or water shall not exceed 65 degrees Celsius. Salt or other
chemicals shall not be used for the prevention of freezing. No frozen material
or materials containing ice shall be used. All concrete damaged by frost shall
be removed. It is recommended that concrete exposed to freezing weather
shall have entrained air and the water content of the mix shall not exceed so
litres per 50 kg of cement.

4.15.3. HOT WEATHER CONDITIONS

When depositing concrete in very hot water precautions shall be taken
so that the temperature of wet concrete does not exceed 40 degrees Celsius
while placing. This shall be achieved by stacking aggregate under the shade
and keeping them moist, using cold water, reducing the time between mixing
and placing to the minimum, cooling form work by sprinkling water, starting
curing before concrete dries out and restricting concreting as far as possible
to early morning and late evenings. When ice is used to cool mixing water, it
will be considered a part of the water in design mix. Under no circumstances
shall the mixing operation be considered complete until all ice in the mixing
drum has melted.
The contractor will be required to state his methodology for the
Engineer's approval when temperatures of concrete are likely to exceed 40
degrees Celsius during the work.
4.16.

INSPECTION AND TESTING OF STRUCTURES:

Immediately after stripping the formwork, all concrete shall be

carefully inspected and any defective work or small defects either removed or
made good before concrete has thoroughly hardened. In case of doubt
regarding grades of concrete used, either due to poor workmanship or based
on results of CUBE STRENGTH TESTS, Compressive strength tests on concrete
structural elements shall be done as specified in clause 16.3 - for core test
and as specified in clause 16.5 - for Load tests on the part of the structures.
4.17.

FINISHING:

4.17.1. GENERAL
Immediately after removal of forms, exposed bars or bolts, if any, shall
be cut inside the concrete member to a depth at least 50 mm below the
surface of the concrete and the resulting holes filled with cement mortar. All
fins caused by form joints all cavities produced by the removal of form ties
and all other holes and depression honey comp spots, broken edges or
corners and other defects, shall be through, cleaned, saturated with water,
and carefully pointed and rendered with mortar of cement and fine aggregate
mixed in the proportion used in the grade of concrete that is being finished
and of as dry a consistency as is possible to use. Considerable pressure shall
be applied in filling and pointing to ensure through filling in all voids.
Surfaces, which have been pointed, shall be kept moist for a period of 24
hours. Special pre-packed proprietary mortars shall be used where
appropriate or where specified in the drawing.
All construction and expansion of joints in the complete work shall be
left carefully tooled and free from any mortar and concrete. Expansion joint
filler shall be left exposed for its full length with clean and true edges.
Immediately on removal of forms, the concrete work will be examined
by the Engineer before any defects are made good.
a)

The work that sagged or contains honeycombing to an extent

detrimental to structural safety or architectural appearance will be
rejected.

b)

Surface defect of a minor nature shall be made good as directed by

the Engineer-in-charge.

4.17.2. CONCRETE SURFACE IRREGULARITIES

a)

General: Bulges, depressions and offsets are defined as concrete

surface irregularities. .Concrete surface irregularities are classified
as 'abrupt' or 'gradual' and are measured relative to the actual
concrete surface.

b)

Abrupt surface irregularities: Abrupt surface irregularities are

defined herein as offsets such as those caused by misplaced or
loose forms, loose knots in form timber, or other similar forming
faults. Abrupt surface irregularities are measured using a short
straight edge, at least 150 cm look, held firmly against by direct
measurement.

c)

Gradual surface irregularities are defined herein as, bulges and

depressions resulting in gradual changes on the concrete surface.
Gradual surface irregularities are measured using a template
conforming to the design profile of the concrete surface being
examined. Templates for measuring gradual surface irregularities
shall be provided by the contractor. Templates shall be at least 2.5
m in length. The magnitude of gradual surface irregularities is
defined herein as a measure of the rate of change in slope of the
concrete surface.

d)

The magnitude of gradual surface irregularities on concrete surface

shall be checked by the contractor to ensure that the surfaces are
within specified tolerances. The engineer will also make checks of
hardened concrete surface as deemed necessary to ensure
compliance with these specifications. Templates for these surface
shall be furnished by the contractor free of charge and shall be
available for use by the Engineer at all times.

4.17.3.1.

REPAIR OF CONCRETE

GENERAL
(a) Repair of concrete shall be performed by skilled workers and in the
presence of an Engineer-in-charge. Repairs and correction of all
imperfection on formed concrete shall be completed as soon as
practicable after removal of forms and within 25 hours after removal
of forms. Concrete that is damaged from any cause and concrete
that is honey combed, fractured on otherwise defective and
concrete, which because of excessive surface depressions, must be
excavated and built up to bring the surface to the prescribed lines,
shall be removed and replaced by dry pack mortar or concrete as
hereinafter specified. Where bulges and abrupt irregularities
protrude outside the limits specified the protrusions shall be
reduced by bush hammering and grinding or that the surfaces are
within the specified limits.

(b) Before repair is to commence, the methods proposed for the repair
shall be approved by the Engineer. Routine curing should be
interrupted only in the area of repair operations.
4.17.3.2.

METHODS OF REPAIRS

FOR NEW WORKS FOUR METHODS ARE USED AS UNDER :

a) Dry Pack Method:
This methods should be used for holes having a depth nearly a depth
nearly equal to, or greater than the least surface dimensions; for cone bolt,
and bolt and grout absorb holes, and narrow bolts cut for the repair of cracks.
Dry pack should not be used for relatively shallow depressions where lateral
restraint cannot be obtained; for filling in back of considerable lengths of
exposed reinforcement; nor for filling holes which extend entirely through the
wall, beam etc,
b) i. Concrete Replacement Method
Concrete repairs made by bonding concrete to repair area (without use
of an epoxy bonding agent or mortar grout applied on the prepared surface)
should be made when the depth of the area exceeds 15 cms and the repair
will be of appreciable continuous area, as determined by the Engineer.
Concrete repairs should also be used for holes extending entirely
through concrete sections, for holes in which no reinforcement is encountered
and which are greater in area than 900 Sq.cms, and deeper than 10 cms.,
and in reinforced concrete for holes greater than 1400 sq. cms. The engineer
may also permit Epoxy bonded concrete repair as an alternative to concrete
repair.
ii) Mortar Replacement Method
Portland cement mortar may be used for repairing defects on surface
not prominently exposed where the defects are too wide for a dry pack filling,
the defects are too shallow for concrete filling and where they are not deeper
than the far sider of the reinforcement, that is nearest the surface.
iii) Epoxy Method
A thermo setting plastic known as epoxy can be used as a bonding
medium whenever long time curing of conventional concrete cannot be
assured. Epoxies can be used to bond new concrete or mortar to old concrete
when ever the depth of repair is between about 3.75 cm and 15 cm. Also
epoxy mortars of fine sand as well as plain epoxy are suitable for concrete
repair work and should be used whenever every thin patch is to placed or
immediate reuse of the epoxy is required or where moist curing cannot be
effectively accomplished. Preparation for epoxy bonded repairs should in
general be identical to that for other concrete repairs except that every effort
should be made to provide surfaces thoroughly dry. Drying of the immediate
surface for at least 24 hours and warming to temperature between 18 0 to 27o
C are essential for proper application of epoxy-bonded repairs. Preparation for
the use of epoxy mortars should include thorough cleaning and drying of the
areas to be repaired. A wash of dilute (1:4) muriate acid rinsing with clean
water and subsequence drying is desirable, where feasible. If acid wash is not

feasible, preparation may be accomplished as for other concrete repairs with

final cleanup being by means sandblast method, followed by air water jet
washing and thorough drying. Only trained personnel shall carry out epoxy
repairs.
(C) REMOVAL OF CONCRETE:
All concrete of questionable quality should be removed. It is better to
remove too much concrete than too little because affected concrete generally
continue to disintegrate and while the work is being done it costs but little
more to excavate to ample depth. Moistening, cleaning, surface drying and
complete curing are of utmost importance when making repairs which must
be thoroughly bonded, watertight and permanent. Surfaces within trimmed
holes should be kept continuously wet for several hours, preferably overnight
prior to placing new concrete, Immediately, before placement of the filling,
the holes should be cleaned so as to leave to a surface completely free from
chipping dust, dried grout and all other foreign materials. Final cleaning of the
surfaces to which the new concrete is to be bonded should be done by wet
sand blasting followed by washing with air water jet for thorough cleaning
and drying with an air jet. Care should be taken to remove any loose
materials embedded in the surface by chisels during the trimming and to
eliminate all shiny spots indicating free surface moisture. Cleaning of the
steel if necessary should be accomplished by sand blasting. The Engineer
shall approve the prepared surface.
(D) DRY PACK OF CONCRETE:
For this method of repair, the holes should be sharp and square at the
surface edges, but the corners within the boles should be rounded. Especially
when water tightness is required. The interior surfaces of holes left by cone
bolts, the bolts etc. should be roughened to develop an effective bond. Other
holes should be under cut slightly in several places. Holes for dry pack should
have a minimum depth of 25mm.
(E) CONCRETE REPLACEMENT:
i)

Holes should have minimum depth of 100 mm in new concrete and

the minimum area of repair should be 500 sq. cms for reinforced
and 1000 sq.cm for un-reinforced concrete.

ii)

Reinforcement bars should not be left partially embedded. There

should be a clearance of at least 25 mm around each exposed bar.

iii) The top edge of the face of the structure should be cut to a fairly
horizontal line. If the shape of the defect males it advisable the top
of the cut may be stepped down and continued on a horizontal line.
The top of the hole should be cut 1 to 3 upward stop from the back
towards the face of the wall on beam. It may be necessary in fill the
hole from both sides, in which case the slope of the top of the cut
should be modified accordingly.
iv) The bottom and sides of the holes should be cut sharp and
approximately square with the face of the wall when the hole goes
entirely through concrete section. Spalls or feather edges shall be

avoided by having chippers worked from both faces. All interior

corners should be rounded to maximum radius of 25 mm.
(F) MORTAR REPLACEMENT:
When mortar gun is used with this method, comparatively shallow
holes should be flared outwardly at about 1 to 1 slope to avoid inclusion of
rebound. Corners within the holes should be rounded. Shallow imperfections
in new concrete may be repaired by mortar replacement if the work is done
promptly after removal of the forms and while the concrete is still green for
instance, when it is considered necessary to repair the peeled areas resulting
from surface material sticking to steel forms the surfaces may be filled using
mortar gun without further trimming or cutting. Whenever hand placed
mortar replacement is used, edges of chipped out areas should be squared
with the surface leaving no feather edges.
Best results with replacement mortar are obtained when the mortar is
pneumatically applied using a small mortar gun. After the areas to be
repaired have been cleaned and surface dried, the mortar shall be applied
immediately. No initial application of cement, cement grout etc. is to be
made. The mix proportion shall be I part cement to 4 parts natural sand by
dry volume or weight. Well graded sand passing No.16 screen shall give best
results. Cement and sand shall be mixed with water to approximately the
same consistency as for dry pack repair.
For repairs of more than 2.5 cm depth, the mortar shall be applied in
layers not more than about 20mm. thick to avoid nagging and loss of bond.
After completion of each layer, a time of about 30 minutes shall be allowed
before the next layer is placed. This time shall be so adjusted that the mortar
of the previous layer does not get dry;
G)

USE OF DRY PACK MORTAR:

The Surface after preparing should be thoroughly brushed with a stiff

mortar or grout barely wet enough to thoroughly wet the surface after which
the dry pack material should be immediately packed into place before the
bonding grout has dried. The mix of bonding grout shall be I to I cement and
fine sand mixed to a consistency like thick cream. Under no circumstances
should bonding coat be wet enough or applied heavily enough to make the
dry pack material more than very slightly rubbery. Dry pack is usually a mix
(by dry volume or weight) of one part of cement to 1 1/2 part of sand.
4.18.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

4.18.1

MEASUREMENT:

(a) Except or otherwise especially provided for in the specifications,

measurement of concrete for payment shall be made on the basis of
the volume of concrete calculated as contained with in the concrete
out lines shown on the relevant drawings.
(b) Measurement for payment for the concrete laid in pockets in the
foundation shall be made on the basis of the volume of the pockets
filled.

(c) No measurements shall be made for the concrete backfill beyond

the minimum lines of excavation shown on the drawings except
where such payment is specifically authorized. Measurement of
concrete shall be made after deducting the volume of all recesses,
passageways, chambers, openings, cavities and depressions, but
without deductions for round or beveled edges or space occupied
electrical conducts and reinforcement.
(d) Concrete in bridges, sidewalls, kerbs and parapets in full length of
the structure and block-outs etc., shall be measured on the relevant
drawings.
4.18.2. RATE
a)

The unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all materials,
labour, tools and plant required for mixing, placing in position,
vibrating and compacting, finishing as per directions of the
Engineer, curing and all other incidental expenses for producing
concrete of specified strength to complete the structure or its
components as shown on the drawings and according to these
specifications. The rate shall also include the cost of providing,
fixing and removing of all centering, scaffolding formwork
requirement for the work unless otherwise specified in the contract.

(b) The unit rate also includes the cost of dewatering, diversion and
protection work as may be necessary during and after concreting
work.
(c) All expenses likely to be incurred by the contractor in transporting
materials supplied to him to the site of work, the expenses incurred
improving the quality of materials to acceptable levels (such as
screening, washing etc.) and the expenses incurred in proper
storage of materials as directed by the Engineer are deemed to be
included in the unit rate.
(d) Payment of the various classes of concrete shall be made on the
basis of unit rate per cubic metre entered in respective items in the
Schedule 'A'.
(e) In respect of cross drainage structures, even if these shall be
completed to the specified quality standards, they will not qualify for
full payment until and unless the respective in fall and outfall
channels are duly excavated and graded as per design
requirements. Payment of the value of work done on cross drainage
structures shall not be released until the above requirements are
met.
(f) For reinforced concrete works, the cost of steel and its fabrication
changes are not included in the unit rate.
4.20.

STEEL REINFORCEMENT

4.20.1. GENERAL:
a)

This section covers specifications for providing steel reinforcement

to Bridges. Under Tunnels, Aqueducts, Super passages retaining

walls, Canal Side Walls, Inlets, Outlets, Head Walls, Cut of walls,
cross Regulators, Off-take Sluices and of other similar Structures.
b)

A list of IS codes applicable is finished below:

LIST OF I.S. CODES:

I.S. 456-1978

Code of practice for plain and Reinforced Concrete

I.S.1786-1985

Specification for High Strength deformed Steel bars and

wires for concrete reinforcement.

I.S. 432 1982

Specifications for mild steel and medium tensile steel

bars for concrete

(Part-I)

reinforcement and hard drawn steel wire.

I.S. 818-1968

Code of practice for safety and healthy requirement and

gas welding and cutting operations.

I.S.3016-1986

Code of practice for fire precautions in welding and

cutting operations.

I.S. 280-1978

Mild Steel wire for general Engineering purpose

I.S. 2502-1963

Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for

concrete reinforcement.

I.S. 9417-1989

Recommendations for welding cold worked bars for

reinforced concrete construction.

I.S. 2751-1979

Welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars for

reinforced Construction.

I.S. 814-1991

Covered electrodes for manual metal are welding of

carbon and carbon manganese steel.

I.S.1278-1972

Filler rods and wires for gas welding.

In addition to the above Indian Standard specifications, wherever

necessary, the specifications prescribed in APSS shall also be followed.
4.20.2. SCOPE:
Supplying, fabrication and placing grills of M.S./HYSD
Reinforcement of different diameter including cost and conveyance
of Reinforcement bars sampling, testing, binding wire, cleaning,
cutting, bending, welding, tying the grills and placing them in
position with necessary chairs and cover blocks including all leads,
lifts delifts and all other operations necessary to complete the
finished item of work as per drawings, specifications and as directed
by the Engineer-in-charge.
4.20.3. MATERIALS:
i)

The provisions of schedule 'D' shall apply.

ii)

Cutting, Bending and Binding of Reinforcement:

(a) Reinforcing steel shall conform accurately by the dimensions given

in the bar bending schedules shown on relevant drawings.

(b) Bars shall be bent to the specified shape and dimensions by the
bender by hand or power to attain proper radii of bends as shown in
drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
(c) Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure
the material.
(d) Bars bent during the transport or handling shall be straightened
before being used on work, they shall not be heated to facilitate
bending.
(e) "U" hooks shall invariably be provided at the end of each bar, if
specified in Drawing or ordered by the Engineer. The radius of the
bend shall not be less than twice the diameter of round bar and the
length of the straight part of the bar beyond the end of the curve
shall be at least four times the diameter of the round bar. In the
case of bars, which are not round, and in the case of deformed bars,
the diameter shall be taken as the diameter of a circle having an
equivalent effective area.
(f) The hook shall be suitably encased to prevent any splitting of the
concrete.
4.20.4. PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT:
(a) Before the reinforcement is placed, the surface of the bars and the
surfaces of any metal bar supports shall be cleaned of the rust,
loose mill scale, dirt, grease and other objectionable foreign
substances.
(b) All reinforcing bars shall be securely held in position during placing
of concrete by annealed binding wire, and by using stays, blocks or
metal chairs, spacers, metal hangers, supporting wires or other
approved devices, at sufficiently close intervals.
(c) Wire for binding reinforcement shall be soft and annealed mild steel
of 16 SWG and shall conform to IS: 280-1978. Binding wire shall
have tensile strength of not less than 5600 Kg/CM 2. and an yield
point of not less than 3850 Kg/CM2.
(d) Bars shall not be allowed to sag between supports. They shall not be
displaced during concreting or any other operation over the work.
(e) The contractor shall also ensure that there is no disturbance caused
to the reinforcing bars already placed in concrete.
(f) All devices used for positioning shall be of non-corrodible material.
Metal supports shall not extend to the surface of the concrete,
except where shown on the drawing. Pieces of broken stone or brick
and wooden blocks shall not be used. Where portions of such
supports will be exposed on concrete surfaces designated to receive
F2 or F3 finish, the exposed portion of support shall be galvanized or
coated with other corrosion resistant materials without which the
concreting will not be permitted. Such supports shall not be exposed
on surfaces designated to receive F4 finish unless otherwise shown
on the drawings.

(g) Placing of layers of freshly laid concrete in work progresses for

adjusting bar spacing shall not be allowed.
(h) Layers of bars shall be separated by space bars, pre-cast blocks or
other approved devices.
i)

Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be maintained in a

clean condition until completely embedded in concrete. Special care
shall be taken to prevent any displacement of reinforcement in
concrete already placed.

j)

To protect reinforcement from corrosion, concrete cover shall be

provided as indicated on the drawings. All bars protruding from
concrete and to which other bars are to be spliced and which are
likely to be exposed for an indefinite period shall be protected by
thick coat of neat cement grout.

(k) Bars crossing each other, where required, shall be secured by

binding wire (annealed) of size not less than 1 mm dia and
conforming to IS.280-1978 in such a manner that they do not slip
over each other at the time of fixing and concreting.
(l)

As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case this is not
possible, overlapping of bars shall be done as directed by Engineer.
When practicable, overlapping bars shall not touch each other, but
be kept apart by 25mm or 1 1/4 times the maximum size of the
coarse aggregate whichever is greater, by concrete between them
where, not feasible. Overlapping bars shall be bound with annealed
steel wire, not less than 1mm thickness twisted tight. The overlaps
shall be staggered for different bars and located at points, along the
span where neither shear nor bending moment is maximum.

(m) The minimum allowable clearance between parallel round bars shall
not be less than 1 1/2 times the diameter of the larger bars and for
square bars shall not be less than twice the side dimensions of the
larger bars or 1 1/2 times, the maximum size aggregate whichever
is greater.
(n) Dissimilar diameter rods should not be joined together.
4.20.5. SPLICING:
(a) Where it is necessary to splice reinforcement the splices shall be
made by lapping, by welding or by mechanical means.
(b) When permitted or specified on the drawings, joints of
reinforcement bars shall be but welded so as to transmit their full
strength, welding of bars shall be done as directed by the Engineer
and conforming with requirements of Clause. 11.4 of IS: 456-1978.
or reinforcement placing.
(c) Reinforcing bars 25mm in diameter and less may be either lapped or
Butt-welded, whichever is the most practicable.
(i)

But welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed either by the gas

pressure or flash pressure welding process or by the electric arc
methods under cover from weather.

(ii) Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested at the rate of 0.5%

of total number of joints welded. Specimen shall be taken from the
actual site of work. Strength of the weld provided shall be at least
25% higher than the strength of bar.
(d) Welded joints of splices shall preferably be located at points where
steel will not be subject to more than 75% of the maximum
permissible stresses and welds so staggered that at any section not
more than 20% of rods are welded. Approval of such additional
splices will generally be restricted to splices not closer than 8
meters in horizontal bars or 4 meters in vertical bars measured
between mid point of laps.
4.20.6. COUPLING OF BARS:
a)

Wherever indicated on the drawings or desired by the Engineer to

use mechanical couplings for reinforcing bars, bars shall be joined
by couplings which shall have across-section sufficient to transmit
the full strength of bars. The ends of bars that are joined by coupling
shall be for sufficient length, so that the effective cross-section of
the base threads is not less than the normal cross-section of the bar.
The threads shall be standard whit worth threads. Steel for
couplings shall conform to IS.226. The contractor shall submit
samples of the proposed coupling to the Engineer for approval not
less than 60 days prior to their proposed use.

ii)

If it is proposed to use welded splices in reinforcing bars, the

equipment, the material and all welding and testing procedure shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The Contractor shall also
carryout test welds as required by the Engineer. No extra rate will be
paid for welding reinforcement test-welds as tender rate in
schedule-A is inclusive of this item.

iii) For welded splices for reinforcing bars conforming to IS.1786-1985,

welding shall be done in accordance with IS: 9417-1979. For
reinforcing bars conforming to IS: 432 (Part-I) -1982, welding shall
be done in accordance with IS: 2715 1979. Electrodes for manual
metal arc welding shall conform to IS: 814 (Part-II) 1974 and IS: 814
(Part-II) 1974. Mild steel filler rods of Oxy-acetylene welding shall
conform to IS: 1278-1972 provided they are capable of giving a
minimum butt weld tensile strength of 41 Kg/mm2.
iv) Only electric arc welding using process which excludes air from the
molten metal and conforms to any or all other special provisions for
the work shall be accepted. Suitable means shall be provided for
holding the bars securely in position during welding. It must be
ensured that no voids are left in welding and when welding is done
in two or three steps, previous surfaces shall be cleaned well. Ends
of bars shall be cleaned of all Iron, Scale, rust, grease, paint and
other foreign matter before welding.
b)

Reinforcing bars of 20 mm in diameter and larger may be connected

by butt welding provided that lapped splices will be permitted if

found to be more practical than butt welding and if lapping does not
encroach on cover limitation or hinder concrete.
4.20.7
a)

4.20.8

CARE OF PLACED REINFORCEMENT AND CONCRETE:

Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and
afterwards bent back into their original position, care shall be taken
to ensure that at no time the radius of the bend is less than 6 x
diameter for deformed bars and 4 x diameter for plain mild steel
bars. Care shall also be taken, when bending such bars, to ensure
that the concrete around the bars is not damaged.
.TOLERANCES:

a)

As specified in clause 11.3 of IS : 456-1978 unless otherwise

specified by the Engineer, reinforcement shall be placed within the
following tolerances.

i)

For effective depth 200mm or less = + 10 mm

ii)

For effective depth more than 200 mm + 15 mm

b)

The cover shall in no case be reduced by more than one third of

specified cover or 5mm which ever is less.

4.20.9. DOWELS:
a)

The dowels shall be of the same H.Y.S.D. bars of grade Fe 415

conforming to I.S. 1786-1985 as used for reinforcement.

b)

Details for dowels shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed

by the Engineer.

c)

Dowels shall be placed in the concrete where shown on the

drawings or where directed and will be inspected for compliance
with requirements as to size, shape, length, position, and amount
after they have been placed, but before being covered by concrete.

d)

Before the dowels are embedded in concrete, the surfaces of dowels

shall be cleaned of all dirt, grease or other foreign substances,
which in the opinion of the Engineer are objectionable.

e)

The dowels shall be accurately placed and secured in position so

that they will not be displaced during the placing of the concrete.

4.20.10.MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

A) MEASUREMENT:
Measurement for payment, for furnishing and placing reinforcing
bars will be made only on the calculated weight of the bars placed in
concrete, in accordance with the drawings or as directed by the
Engineer.
b)

The calculated weight for reinforcing bars shall be determined as

follows:

i)

Reinforcement shall be measured in length separately for different

diameters as actually used in the work excluding overlaps. Length
shall include hooks at ends.

ii)

From the length measured, weight of reinforcing bars shall be

calculated on the basis of weights specified in the table in schedule
'D'.

iii) Wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars, dowels

and annealed steel wire for binding shall not be measured and the
cost of these items shall be deemed to have been included in the
rates for reinforcement.
iv) The unit for payment shall be one metric tone weight of steel.
C)

PAYMENT RATE:

The tender rate in the schedule-A for reinforcement shall include cost
of steel, sampling and testing binding wire or welding material at site of work,
its cutting, bending, cleaning, placing, binding or welding and fixing in
position as shown on the drawings and as directed by the Engineer. The unit
rate shall also include cost of all devices for keeping reinforcement in
approved position, cost of jointing as per approved methods and all wastage,
overlaps, dowels, binding wire or welding material and spacers of bars and
cost of all incidental operations necessary to complete the work as per
drawings and as per specifications.
5.0. CANAL LINING
5.1. GENERAL:
(a) These specifications apply to:
Clearing site, preparation of sub grade in soils and rock, providing
under drainage, pressure relief arrangements, anti salt treatment,
placing model sections, laying plain cement concrete with machine
crushed hard broken graded quartzite/granite/other than granite
metal of 40 mm/20 mm maximum nominal size and using cement
level of not less than 250 kgs. per cubic meter of concrete to yield a
28 days characteristic compressive strength specified based on
laboratory tests for bed and sides respectively using conventional
placement of concrete lining.
(b) If during construction, it is found necessary to after the canal
sections and side slopes without altering the thickness of lining, the
contractors shall be informed in writing of such changes. The rates
quoted being on one square meter basis for specified thickness, the
contractor shall have to execute the work at the same tender rates
as quoted in schedule-A without any extra claim for change in the
section of canal.
(c) The scope of work also includes the following :
i)

Dewatering the canal section for preparing the base for lining and
for laying concrete lining.

ii)

Providing necessary, under drainage arrangements consisting of

longitudinal and transverse drains, pressure relief valves as per
drawings.

iii) Providing filter materials of approved quality as per designs.

iv) Bed and side lining of the grade as specified in the schedule=A i.e.
cement concrete with machine crushed hard broken graded
Quartzite/granite/other than granite metal of 40 mm/20mm nominal
size and using cement of not less than 250 kgs/cum of concrete to
yield a characteristic compressive strength specified based on
laboratory tests respectively.
v)

Providing grooves for joints by cutting the concrete to the required

depth and with as per drawings.

vi) Curing
vii) filling joints :
5.2. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
All concrete, its constituents, methods and procedures of manufacture
shall conform to Indian Standard Specifications and other publications listed
below unless otherwise specified.
Indian Standards.
1.

IS: 456-1978 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete (Second
Revision) (Amendment No.1)

2.

IS: 3873-1978

Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete

lining of canals (First Revision).

3.

IS: 2505-1980

General requirements
immersion type.

4.

IS: 2506-1985

General requirements for screed board concrete

vibrators.

5.

IS: 3366-1965

Specification for Pan vibrators.

6.

IS: 3558-1983

Code of practice for use of immersion vibrators for

consolidating concrete.

7.

IS: 4558-1983

Code of practice for under drainage of lined canals

(First Revision).

8.

IS: 5256-1968

Code of practice for sealing joints in concrete lining

on canals.

9.

IS: 3085-1965

Methods of test for permeability of cement mortar

and concrete.

for

concrete

vibrators

10. IS: 1199-1959

Method of sampling and analysis of concrete.

11. IS: 516-1959

Method of tests
(Amendment No.1)

12. IS: 5529-1985

Code of practice for In-situ permeability test.

(Part 1 & 2)

13. IS: 9103-1979

Specifications for admixtures for concrete.

14. IS: 2720-1980

Methods of test for soils Determination of water

content-dry density relation using light compaction
(Second Revision).(Part. 7)

for

strength

of

concrete

In addition to the above I.S. codes, the specifications of A.P.S.S. and

manual for quality control and Inspection shall also be complied with.
5.3. PREPARATION OF SUBGRADE:
5.3.1. SCOPE
Preparation of sub grade (Back filling in canal side and bed lining with
CNS soils of approved quality obtained from available canal spoil including
cost and conveyance of soils, clearing the site, dewatering if necessary,
treatment of the soil laying moistering compacting to 98% proctor's density
with suitable compacting equipment, trimming, all water leads, leads lifts,
delifts and all the operations necessary to complete the finished item of work
to specifications, as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
5.3.2. CLEARING SITE:
The area proposed for lining the canal as a whole shall-be cleared of all
objectionable material. Any waste material contained from such site
clearance shall be disposed off in a manner directed by the Engineer. The
cost of this operation shall be deemed to have been covered under the rates
quoted for canal lining.
5.3.3.

GENERAL:

The provisions of this Para shall apply to the preparation of all sub
grade upon which concrete lining it to be laid.
The work of trimming canal section up to the under side of concrete
lining and preparing sub-grade for concrete placement includes removal of
ground section. Ground equivalent to thickness of lining on sides and in bed
on the underside of lining should be left un-excavated and the removal of this
ground should be done prior to laying of lining but in no case, should the time
interval exceed 3 days in normal weather and two days in adverse weather
conditions.
It shall be ensured that the sub grade is made thoroughly moist with
fine water spray, through deployment of proper nozzles, to a depth of about
15 cms to prevent it from absorbing water from the freshly laid concrete.
Soil in all reaches should be tested for salt content before lining is
started. Where the salt content is over one percent or sodium sulphate is
over 0.36 percent, the sub grade should first be covered with about 2 mm
thick layer of bitumen if ordered by the Engineer. It shall be treated in
accordance with para 4.3 of IS: 873-1978.
Preparation of sub grade for concrete lining shall conform to clause 4.1
to 4.5 of IS 3873-1978.
Wherever rock is over excavated it shall be filled as specified under
subsequent paras.
At the end panels of existing lining against which lining is to be laid
under these specifications, all these materials shall be removed and all voids
beneath the existing lining shall be refilled and thoroughly compacted.
5.3.4.
(i)

SUB-GRADE
Preparation of sub grade consisting of earth.

(a) The sub grade shall be prepared, dressed and rolled true to level
and according to the required cross - section of the canal to form a
firm compacted bed for the lining.
(b) The contractor shall place selected bedding material, test profile
true to the cross - section of the canal at times and places
designated by the Engineer to show the adequacy of his
construction procedures for laying bedding material. The test
sections shall conform to clause 4.5.2 of I.S. 3873-1978. The cost of
this operation shall be deemed to have covered in the rates quoted
for side and bed lining.
(c) In other than predominantly sandy reaches where the dry density of
the natural soil is not less than 1.8 gms per cubic centimetres initial
excavation shall be done upto about 300 mm above the final section
and the cutting to final shape shall be done immediately before
lining. The compaction shall conform to Clause 4.5.6 of IS 3873 1978.
(d) If at any point material of prepared sub grade has been excavated
beyond the neat lines required to received to receive lining, the
excess excavation shall be filled in horizontal layers with suitable
semi pervious soil material compactable with the sub grade material
moistened and thoroughly compacted in accordance with CI. 4.5.5
and 4.5.6 of IS 3873 - 1978. Where placing and compacting bedding
material is on sloping foundation, the layers may be placed parallel
to the surface of the foundation. If at any point, the foundation
material is disturbed or loosened during the excavation process or
other wise, it shall be moistened if required, and thoroughly
compacted by tamping, rolling or other approved methods to form
firm foundation for placing the concrete lining. Slope compactors
may also be used for effective compaction of subgrade.
(e) In bed, where the dry density of the natural soil is less than 1.8 gm
per cubic centimetres and sub soil water is near the sub grade, the
consolidation shall be done by under cutting the bed by 7.5 cm and
then ploughing upto 15.0 cm below the sub grade level. The
loosened soil shall then be re-compacted with suitable devices. All
along the canal alignment the rain cuts on the banks shall be filled
up with approved soil and shall be compacted adequately to
required lines, dimensions and levels.
(f) In bed, where the sub soil water is low, requiring no dewatering and
the dry density of the natural soil is less than 1.8 gm per cubic
centimetres, the consolidation shall be done by digging the canal
upto sub grade level and after loosening the earth below subgrade
upto 15.0 cm by disc-harrows, or ploughing and compacting the
same to a layer of 11.0 cm. After that, the second layer of 15.0 cm
of earth shall be laid over the compacted layer by taking earth from
lip cutting and compacting this to a depth of 11.00 cm. The
compacted layer of 7.0 cm above the subgrade level shall be
removed and the subgrade brought to design profile before laying
the lining.

(g) Consolidation on sides shall be done by suitable slope compactors to

obtain a minimum dry density of not less than 90%98% of the
density at optimum moisture content obtained in accordance with
IS: 2720 (Part vii) 1965. Compaction by manual labour shall not be
permitted.
(ii) Preparation of subgrade consisting of rock.
(a) The subgrade in rock shall be excavated to the required cross
section. Final cutting for 450-600 mm in hard rock shall be carried
out by wedging, barring, controlled blasting or trimming with the
help of suitable equipment. No extra payment will be made to this.
(b) The bed and side slopes of the canal excavation profile over which
the bedding material., under drainage and pressure relief
arrangements are to be placed and over laid with lining shall be
finished accurately to true and even surfaces and to the dimensions
shown on the drawings.
(c) All excavation including over breakages below the lines of the
underside of lining shall be back filled as follows:
In slopes: In slopes, the selected bedding material shall be semi
pervious materials forming, the bulk of back fill with smaller aggregate filling
the voids and a layer of gravel as binding material duly compacted with
rammers to form a firm backing for the lining (IS: 3873-1978).
In Bed: In case of bed, the selected bedding material shall be rock spall
and chips available from canal cutting duly compacted with Diesel Road
Roller to form a firm backing to lining (IS: 3873-1978).
Tolerance in Excavation: Excavated profile provides the final base for
lining and tolerances should be compressible to the following:
Departure from established alignment.
(+) or (-) 2-mm on straight section
(+) or (-) 50 mm of tangents, and
(+) or (-) 100 mm of tangents, and
(+) or (-) 20 mm Departure from established alignment
The above tolerances shall be negotiated gradually, through smooth
transition in a length of 50m. No over-run in excavation. Filling with
the materials as directed by the engineer, shall be paid to the
contractor.
The selected bedding material in the cases of bed and sides of canal
profile in normal soils shall be graded filter material compactable
with sub grade material and throughly compacted.,
(iii) Preparation of sub grade consisting of expansive soils. (IS :
9451:1995)
a)

Field and laboratory experiments shall be carried out to determine

the physical, textural, Engineering and chemical properties of the
black cotton soils/expansive soils and evaluate the swelling

pressures of soils in various reaches to establish the thickness of

CNS layer required so that the determination is within the
permissible limit.
In respect of the provision of CNS layer is worked out from the
consideration of swelling pressure. However the thickness of CNS layer to be
provided on slopes shall, in addition, be governed by the construction
considerations viz., from rollable with consideration for achieving effective
compaction. However making due allowance for field controls, variations in
the properties of CNS materials in the field an optimum thickness of 600 mm
normal to the slope shall be used in the channels of discharge) more than 1
cumec. The thickness shall be appropriately decreased to 300 mm (150 mm
in small section of less discharges) channels. Filling and compaction of CNS
material in such channels shall be done by pad/file and cut method as
specified in the drawings.
5.3.5.Formation of CNS soils backing to lining for bed and sides of the canal
including breaking clods, sectioning, watering, and consolidation with 8- 10
ton power roller to 98% proctor's, density at optimum moisture content
including spreading of horizontal layers of not more than 100 to 150 mm
thick upto top level of P.C.C. lining.
The surface to receive the filling shall be first cleared free from all
roots, vegetation or spoil and then wetted and rolled thoroughly. The C.N.S.
soils to be used for filling shall be free form salts or organic or other
deleterious matter. All clods of the soils selected shall be broken to small
pieces less than 100mm size. No stones cobbles having maximum
dimensions more than 100 mm size shall be placed in the fill. Filling shall be
done in layers not exceeding the compacted thickness of 100 to 150mm,
each layer being watered and compacted before succeeding layer is laid. If
the moisture is below the optimum moisture content for the given
compaction. Then the required water shall be added by sprinkling. If the
moisture content in the soils is more than the optimum moisture content then
it shall be allowed to dry down to the optimum moisture content. The
moisture content shall be uniform through the layer of material. Compaction
shall be achieved by using appropriate power roller. The number of passes
shall be determined by testing the density of the compacted soil at site after
taking trial compaction for specified passes of the roller. The roller shall be
taken close to the sides of the trench. In cases where the compaction by
roller is not possible compaction shall be done as specified by the Engineer.
Care shall be taken to ensure that over compaction does not take place. The
CNS material shall be filled in layers not exceeding the compacted thickness
of 100 to 150mm upto T.B.L. and shall be consolidated with 8 to 10ton power
roller to the proctor's density of 98% at optimum moisture content. Serrations
should be provided in expansive soil to present contact slides between CNS
materials and expansive soil. The work shall be tackled in continuous
horizontal layers. On resuming work each day or after an interval of few days
or when work is not done in continuity the previous layer shall be well raked
and water sprinkled over it before the fresh layer is laid and compacted.
Special precautions shall also be taken while rolling the spread soil near
structures, conduits, slices etc., Quality, control tests shall regularly be
carried out to determine the suitability of the soil used for filling and to

control moisture contend to ensure that the specified density is obtained. All
tests shall be done in accordance with the relevant Indian standards. The
frequency of the test shall be as determined by the Engineer-in-charge. The
work shall be done to the construction profile.
The canal section including the thickness of the lining shall be
excavated in CNS soils and canal sides and bed are trimmed to receive PCC
slab lining and cast-in-situ lining respectively.
The soils excavated shall be re-handled and used for forward reach as
directed by the Engineer. No extra payment will be made for the excavation
of CNS soil in canal section and re-handling the soils as above separately.
i)

Gradation of C.N.S Soil

1.

Clay (less than 2 microns)

15 to 20%

2.

Silt (0.06mm-0.002mm)

30 to 40%

3.

Sand (2 mm - 0.06mm)

30 to 40%

4.

Gravel (Greater than 2mm) -

0 to 10%

(ii) The CNS material shall be non-swelling, with a maximum swelling

pressure of 10 KN/m2 when tested in accordance with IS: 2720 (Part41) - 1977 at field moisture content oven dry condition and
minimum cohesion.
(iii) Index Properties:
1. Liquid Limit: Less than 50% but greater than 30%
2. Plasticity Index Less than 30% but greater than 15%
(b) If the expansive clay is in thin layers or in small pockets in an
otherwise suitable sub grade shall be over excavated as determined
by the Engineer and replaced with suitable non-expansive soil and
compacted suitably.
(c) After the canal prism has been shaped to a reasonably true and
even surface, selected bedding materials shall be placed on
throughly wetted surfaces in layers of 15 cm maximum thickness to
bring the bedding material to a height where it can be trimmed to
form a true and even surface upon which to place the concrete
lining. Each layer shall be moistened and thoroughly compacted as
per specification 3.2. Where the bedding material is placed and
compacted on a slopping ground layers may be placed parallel to
the surface of the foundation. The moisture content of the bedding
material at the time of compaction shall be optimum. The
compaction procedures used shall be as described below:
i)

The contractor shall place demonstration or test sections of selected

bedding material at time and places designated by the Engineer to
show the adequacy of his construction procedures for placing and
compacting the bedding material. The test section shall conform to
clause 4.5.2 of IS 3878-1978.

ii)

The bedding material shall be placed to sufficient thickness in the

test sections to allow practical density testing of the compacted

material. The dimensions and densities of the compacted bedding

materials shall be acceptable to the Engineer. The procedures shall
then be used to compact the selected bedding material on the
remaining work.
iii) When placing and compacting selected bedding materials on a
sloping foundation, the layers may be placed parallel to the surface
of the foundation. If at any point the foundation material is disturbed
or loosened during the excavation process or otherwise it shall be
moistened if required and thoroughly compacted by tamping, rolling
or other approved methods to form firm foundations upon which to
place the concrete lining. The bottom and side slopes, including the
surfaces of compacted embankment, compacted selected bedding
materials and compacted back fill over which concrete lining is to be
placed shall be furnished accurately to true and even surfaces to the
dimensions shown on the drawings. The loading, handling,
transporting and placing of the selected bedding material is subject
to approval of the engineer and shall be such as will result in a
uniform mixture of the material being placed without separation or
segregation. Selected, bedding materials required should be
obtained from excavation in areas where material in excess of that
required to construct the adjacent embankments is available or the
material approved by the Engineer.
(iv) Immediately prior to placing the first lift of bedding material, the
surfaces of excavation and embankment to receive the material
shall be adequately wetted to a depth of 15 cm of to impermeable
material which ever is less as approved by the Engineer.
(v) Suitable material trimmed from the canal shall be used to complete
canal embankments, to construct road embankment, for selected
bedding material in the forward areas. Where material suitable for
selected bedding as determined by the Engineer is encountered
during trimming operations and cannot be placed in one continuous
operation, such material shall be stockpiled along the right-of-way
where designated by the Engineer.
5.3.6.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

All linear measurements shall be in metres corrected to 0.01M and

volume shall be worked out to nearest to 0.01 cum. Payment shall be for ten
cubic meter of finished work. The unit rate for CNS backing to lining includes.
(1) Mark out
(2) Cost and conveyance of CNS soil to the site of work.
(3) Filling the C.N.S. soil in layers of not exceeding 100 to 150 mm thick
and consolidation with appropriate power rollers to a proctor's
density of 98% at optimum moisture content.
(4) Cutting the canal section, including the thickness of lining in the
compacted C.N.S. soil.
(5) Re-handling the extra excavated CNS soil to the forward reach.

(6) Forming and removal of steps and ramps, benching, battering,

formation of temporary tracks for diversion of surface flows, bailing
out seepage water and such other temporary arrangements unless
otherwise specified.
(7) Shrinkage allowance.
5.4. UNDER DRAINAGE.
5.4.1.

GENERAL

For a lined canal where the ground water level is higher or likely to be
higher than the water level inside the canal so as to cause damaging
differential pressure on the lining or where the subgrade is sufficiently
impermeable to prevent free drainage of the under side of lining in case of
rapid draw-down, pressure relief arrangements for under drainage shall be
provided suitably as indicated in the drawing in accordance with IS: 4551968.
5.4.2.

FILTER DRAINS:

a)

Scope: Forming longitudinal/transverse filter drains of Specified

sized in bed with 10mm to 40mm machine crushed metal of
specified variety and Sand including cost and conveyance of all
materials, labour charges for laying with all leads, lifts, delifts,
seigniorage charges, sampling and testing, dewatering, packing and
all other incidental and operational charges necessary to complete
the finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.

b)

Whenever necessary, longitudinal/transverse filter drains shall be

laid in the concrete lining true to the canal grade as shown in the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The number of layers
comprising the filter, thickness of each layer and the materials to be
used shall be as shown in the drawings. The filter material shall be
clean, round and well graded sand or coarse aggregate the
requirements of grading of which will be established in the field
laboratory on the basis of mechanical analysis of adjacent materials.
Particles of decomposed loose debris; wood, vegetable matter or
other deleterious materials shall not be permitted in the filter.
Before placing the filter the bed shall be prepared as explained in
the above paragraphs.

c)

The longitudinal drains shall be laid to the grade of the canal while
the transverse drains in bed shall have a fall towards the centre of
the canal bed from the edge as shown in the drawing.
The sand shall be clean, round and well graded before placing the
filter, the bed shall be prepared as specified in paragraph above.

d)

Measurement and Payment: Payment for filter drains described

above shall be made at the unit rate per linear meter bed, in the
schedule 'A', which unit rate should include the cost of providing
longitudinal and lateral drains in bed and filled with porous concrete
blocks and sand as per drawings including the cost of excavation of

drain and cost of conveyance of all materials including leads, lifts,

delifts, packing and dewatering complete for finished item of work.
5.4.3.

PRESSURE RELIEF ARRANGEMENT:

A) SCOPE:
Laying and fixing of porous concrete plugs is in position in bed/sides
of specified size including manufacturing of plugs, using 20mm size
machine crushed aggregate of specified variety and cement of
specified quantity for each plug including cost and conveyance of
cement and all other materials. Seigniorage charges, labour charges
for manufacturing of plugs, form work, moulds, machine mixing,
manufacturing, curing, sampling and testing laying and fixing in
position with all leads, lifts, delifts, dewatering, all water leads and
all other incidental and operation charges necessary to complete
the finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by
Engineer in charge.
b)

The porous plugs shall be installed in position in the filter drains in

the bed normal to the canal slope in the local filters in the side at
the location shown the drawings or as directed by the Engineer.

POROUS PLUG :
(i)

Wherever specified, the porous concrete shall be composed of one

part of cement and 4 parts of coarse aggregate viz., no fine
concrete by weight of not more than 20mm size. Only so much
water.

5.4.3.
(a) Laying and fixing of porous concrete plugs/flap valves in position in
filter pockets including (a) Manufacturing of plugs using 20mm size
machine crushed/hand broken aggregate of specified variety and
Cement of specified quantity for each plug (or) Manufacturing of flap
valves consisting specified internal diameter with P.V.C. pipe, with
P.V.C. flange and rubber flap with all accessories and (b) excavation
of pit for laying filter pocket and filling the filter pocket with filter
materials including cost and Conveyance of Cement and all other
materials, Seigniorage charges, labour charges for Manufacturing
plugs/flap valves, excavation of filter pocket, filling of pocket with
specified grade of filter material, form work, moulds and machine
mixing, manufacturing, curing, sampling, testing, laying, fixing in
position with all leads, lifts, delifts, dewatering, all water leads, all
other operational and incidental charges necessary to complete the
finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer in charge.
(b) The porous plug/flap valve shall be installed in position in the filter
drains in the bed, normal to the canal slope in the local filters in the
sides at the locations shown in the drawings or as directed by the
Executive Engineer.
C)

FLAP VALVES:

Flap Valves consisting of 40mm internal diameter polyvinyl chloride

(P.V.C.) pipe with P.V.C. flange and rubber flap shall be fabricated with all
accessories as shown in the drawings. The flap valve shall be designed as to
open automatically at a differential head of not more than 100 mm of water.
The Contractor shall arrange for performance tests of all the flap valves and
those that do not conform to the specified functioning shall be rejected.
Installation of flap valves shall not be permitted without the acceptance test
of the same.
The flap valves shall be installed in position in the filter drains in the
bed and normal to Canal slope in the local filters in the side at the location
shown in the drawings or as directed by the Engineer in charge.
The tendered unit price for this item of Schedule 'A' shall be inclusive
of the cost of manufacture, handling, testing and installation in position with
excavation of pocket and filling with fiter material complete and shall be
inclusive of all those operations as well as those defined in the nomenclature
of the item. Placing the filter the bed shall be prepared as specified in
paragraph above.
Shall be used in concrete as required to produce a paste, which will
cost the particles without filling the voids. In placing porous concrete in
moulds, care shall be taken to ensure that it is not over tamped or compacted
so as reduce its porosity. The porous hardens (i.e., attains final setting) it
should be sprinkled and kept most for at least 14 days. The compressive
strength of porous concrete @ 7 days age as determined by tests 15cm
diameter, 30cm height cylinder should not be less than 70 Kgs/sq. cm and
the porosity at 7 days be such that water shall pass through slab of concrete
30 cm thick at a minimum rate of 500 litres/min/square meter of the flap with
a constant 10cm depth of water on the slab.
(d) Precast porous concrete plugs (cylinders) 100 mm dia and 375 mm
long shall be provided in bed all sides as shown in the drawings with
filter materials.
(e) The porous plugs shall be so inserted into the lining that their
porosity is not lost or reduced when the concrete for the lining is
vibrated.
(f) Measurement and Payment: Measured and Payment for porous
plugs shall be made on the basis of numbers at the unit rate in the
schedule 'A'. The rate shall include the cost of manufacturing curing,
excavation and refilling the pits inclusive of materials and labour as
per drawings and incidental operations necessary to execute the
work as per specifications as well as those defined in the
nomenclature of the item.
5.5. ANCHOR BOLTS:
In hard rock anchor bolts of 700 mm long manufactured with HYSD
steel bars of size 25mm, diameter, as shown in drawing shall be taken to a
depth of 600mm into rock and 100mm to be embedded inside each panel of
concrete lining.

Measurement and payment for the anchor bolts shall be made on the
basis of number at the unit rate in schedule 'A'. The rate shall include the
cost of steel rod, cutting, bending, splitting and drilling in rock, fixing and
labour as per drawings and incidental operations necessary to execute the
work as per specifications as well as those defined in the nomenclature of the
item.
5.6 LAYING OF C.C LINING:
A)

SCOPE:

Laying cement concrete lining of Specified thickness in M10 grade

using a minimum cement of 250Kg/cum of concrete and 40mm MSA machine
crushed graded metal of specified variety including cost and conveyance of
cement and all other materials of approved quality, seigniorage charges,
sampling and testing preparing the base for laying concrete, batching,
machine mixing, conveyance of concrete, placing of concrete in position
either by using machinery on by manual labour as specified in schedule 'A'.
Vibrating, finishing, cutting grooves for panel joints, dewatering, curing with
water with a net work of pipeline system, hire and operational changes of
machinery, all leads, lifts, delifts, all water leads and all other incidental and
operational charges necessary to complete the finished item of work of castin situ lining in bed/sides as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer in
charge.
b)

The work of laying in situ cement concrete canal lining shall

generally conform to IS: 3873-1978 and all concrete shall be
governed by IS 456-1978 concrete canal lining shall be done in the
canal prism as shown in the drawing using well graded aggregate
for 10 cm thick lining shall be 40mm. It shall be 20mm for lining
thickness of 7.5 cms.

c)

i) Concrete shall be produced in a stationary weight batching and

mixing plant/plants of adequate capacity installed at a suitable
place by the contractor and concrete conveyed to the placement
site/sites in transit mixers. The slump of concrete at placement site
shall range from 50mm to 65mm with a water cement ratio of less
than 0.6.

Alternatively:
ii)

Mobile self loading weigh batching mixing transporting equipment

with adequate capacity of mixer drum, shall be deployed by the
contractor for production of controlled concrete and transportation
to the placement site/sites. Number of such equipment to be
deployed shall be such as to achieve the construction schedule
targets.

Alternatively, the Engineer may allow the use of standard

portable/stationary concrete mixes along with weight batching and
measuring arrangement for proportioning and production of concrete and
placement of concrete with conventional (manual) method.
5.6.1. TESTING:

Concrete cubes at random shall be collected during laying concrete

and shall be tested in the labs. If results are substandard, the entire work of
the day on which cubes were collected shall have to be replaced by the
Contractor at his own cost.
Core Test: Securing and preparing test specimens from hardened concrete :
As specified in clause 4.1 of IS 1119 - 1959 (Bureau of Indian Standards
Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete) cores shall be taken at random
so as to ascertain the strength, permeability, thickness of concrete layer and
cement content used. As the canal lining work progresses, testing of output
shall upon regular basis. Accordingly, to evaluate the quality of concrete
lining completed and cores shall be determined by the Engineer. Broadly it
could be one core each from bed lining completed and cured for 28 days in
respective reaches, cores shall be taken. Frequency of drill cores shall be
determined by the Engineer, Broadly it could be one core each from bed
lining per 200 Square meters (or even at the discretion of Engineer) of in situ
lining.
The cores shall be tested for compressive strength and if needed for
permeability, and cement concrete etc. as well. The cores shall be tested for
28 days compressive strength.
The Contractor shall allow facilities and co-operation towards collection
of cores. The testing of cores shall be carried out at the testing laboratories
set up at the site or at any other laboratory that the Engineer may so decide
and the results given there by shall be considered correct and authentic by
contractor. The contractor shall be given access to all operations and tests
that may be carried out as aforesaid so that he may satisfy himself regarding
the procedure and methods adopted. The payments shall be made only after
satisfactory core test results acceptable to the Engineer.
A standard test cylinder has a diameter one half of its height (viz., the
length-L, diameter-D, ratio is 2). However, the cores taken fromin-situ lining
shall not have these relative dimensions and consequently L/D ratio will not
be 2. Accordingly the test strengths of the cores shall need to be corrected.
The curve in Attachment-I may be used to correct the indicated strengths to
make them comparable with those obtained from standard specimens. The
contractor shall stack the cores properly in the sheds.
The criteria of acceptance of core strength shall be as outlined in IS: 456 1978.
5.6.2.

PLACING AND COMPACTION:

Sub-Grade Well in advance for placement of lining, the subgrade over

which concrete is to be laid should be moistened adequately through very
fine water spray so as to be thoroughly moist (but not muddy) so that water
cannot get withdrawn from freshly placed concrete. Spray nozzles should be
used to assure even applications of moisture and to prevent local erosions.
5.6.2(a) Placing of concrete shall not be started until all form work,
installation of parts to be embedded and preparation of surface's
upon which concrete is to be laid have been completed. All
absorptive surfaces against which concrete is to be laid shall be

moistened thoroughly so that moisture will not be withdrawn from

freshly placed concrete. The surfaces, however, shall be free from
standing water and mud.

h)

b)

In the placement register containing the list of various work items in

sequential order, the contractor or his representative shall write,
''completed preparation of sub grade, earth work, installation of
parts to be embedded as per specifications and ready for placing
concrete" and sign. Then the Engineer's authorized representative
shall inspect and write in the Register against the item allowed for
concreting: and sign. Then only, the Conctrctor shall commence
placing of concrete. If concreting is not started within 24hours after
approval, it shall be got approved again.

c)

Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of a duty authorized

representative of the Engineer.

d)

Hand mixing of the concrete shall not be permitted under any

circumstances.

e)

Concrete shall be deposited in all cases as neatly as practicable in

its final position and shall not be allowed to flow in a manner to
permit segregation. Excessive separation of the coarse aggregate
caused by allowing the concrete to fall freely from too great height
or at too great angle from the vertical shall not be permitted and
where such separation would otherwise occur the Contractor shall
provide suitable means to convey the concrete without allowing
such separation.

f)

Concrete shall be deposited and spread on the bed of the canal as

indicated on the drawings. Concrete may be so laid as to facilitate
placing, vibration, finishing and curing operations. Concrete required
for keys as shown on the drawings shall be laid after placing side
panels PCC as directed by the Engineer.

g)

The design mix for lining shall to secure dense concrete of required
strength for that grade.

The compaction shall be with suitable vibrators approved by the

Engineer and it shall be effective so as to have durable impermeable
concrete.
i)

The concreting near the joints shall be done with utmost care so as
to avoid segregation and collection of goose place of aggregate
along form work which may result in honey combing.

j)

The concrete near the junction of the side concrete panels and bed
concrete shall be done as shown in drawings such that both shall
rest firmly against each other to resist any back kick from external
hydrostatic forces.

k)

When concrete placing operations are stopped for the day

interrupted because of break down or delayed by other causes of
where the contractor selects to construct a joint such as would
result from constructing one of the lining in one pas, the edge of the
fresh concrete lining shall be bulk headed to a surface normal to the

lining along transverse and longitudinal lines. Before placing

operation is resumed the surface of the hardened concrete shall be
prepared as construction joint. Whenever a substantial break down
occurs in the concrete production or concrete transportation system,
a joint shall be formed as close to the face of the fresh concrete as
possible.
i)

The fresh concrete shall then be placed against the existing

concrete with the full groove for required construction joint formed
in between them. The completed groove shall be sealed with sealing
compounds as per clause 6.3 of IS 3873-1978 and as shown in the
drawings.

m) If mention is made in the schedule 'A' wording for machinery, the

contraction should use stationary weigh batching plant, transit
mixtures, conveyer belt or any other machinery for transporting
concrete and pavers for laying concrete. The quoted rates shall
include hire operational charges of all the machinery, setting of
machinery, dismantling of machinery and any other contingent
works for the movement of machinery and any other contingent
works for the movement of machinery and making good after laying
of lining. The quoted rates should include all the above costs. No
separate payment shall be allowed other than the quoted rate for
respective item in schedule 'A'.
ii)

COMPACTION: The concrete shall be compacted with vibrators to

give a dense concrete, which is durable and impermeable ensuring
the desired strength. Concrete shall not be over vibrated. The
vibration shall be sufficient to remove all undesirable air voids from
the concrete including air voids trapped against the forms. After
consolidation, the concrete shall be free from aggregate pockets and
honey areas and shall be closed against all surfaces of forms and
embedded materials. All concrete shall be properly consolidated
before initial setting and should not be subsequently disturbed.

For vibrators shall be used in conjunction with slip form lining machines
for consolidation. The Engineer may remove samples of hardened concrete
for testing and examination and the contractor shall replace at no extra cost
to the department concrete from which such samples are removed.
5.6.3.

FINISHING:

a)

The contractor shall notify the Engineer before commencing

concrete finishing. Unless inspection is waived in each specific case,
finishing of concrete lining shall be performed only when a
Engineer's representative is present Concrete surfaces will be tested
by the Engineer in accordance with para 5.6.1, where necessary to
determine whether the concrete surface is within the specified
tolerances. Finished concrete, which is not in the specified
tolerances, shall be repaired as detailed below.

b)

Immediately on the removal of forms, unsightly ridges or lips shall

be removed and undesirable local bulging on exposed surfaces shall
be remedied by tooling and rubbing. All exposed concrete surfaces

shall be cleaned of impurities lumps of mortar or grout and unsightly

stains.
c)

Repairs to concrete surfaces and additions where required shall be

made by cutting regular openings not less than 70mm depth into
the concrete and placing fresh concrete to the required lines. The
chipped openings shall be sharp. The fresh concrete shall be
reinforced and chipped and troweled to the surface of the openings,
the mortar shall be placed in layers not more than 20mm in
thickness after being compacted and each layer shall be compacted
thoroughly.

d)

The surface of concrete finished against forms shall be even,

smooth and shall be free from projections, pockets, honey combing
and other objectionable defects.

e)

The top portions of the side slopes of the canal lining extending 1.5
meter vertically below the top of the lining shall receive a nonskid
longitudinal brush finish as approved by the Engineer.

f)

Use of any finishing tool in areas where water has accumulated shall
be prohibited and all finishing operations shall be delayed until the
water has been absorbed evaporated or removed by draining,
mopping or such other means.

g)

The contractor is not entitled for any extra payment for the work
under finishing paragraph as the tender rates in the schedule 'A' are
inclusive of finishing the lining.

5.6.4.

TOLERANCES

The permissible tolerances for the canal lining shall be as under in

accordance with section 5.3 of IS 3873-1978.
______________________________________________________________________________
________
(a) Departure from Established alignment

+20mm on straight reaches

+50mm on partial curves or

tangents
(b) Departure from Established grade

+20mm on small canals.

(c) Variation in thickness of lining

+10%
provided average
thickness is not
less
than specified thickness.
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________
5.6.5.

CURING

The bed lining shall be water-cured for 28 days through provision of

earth bunds of small heights so that a column of water is available above
lining.

The joints of plain cement concrete slabs lining on side slopes shall be
water cured through sprinkling of water at regular intervals for at least 21
days.
The Engineer-in-Charge may instruct contractor to provide pipeline
system and sprinklers for curing of the lining work. If the Engineer-in-charge
feels that the manual curing is not sufficient. The Contractor shall abide by
the instructions and erect the pipe line system the quoted date shall include
for erection of pipe line system and dismantling of the pipes after curing
instead of manual curing if the work involved is more in length and quantity
no separate payment will be allowed and the quoted rates for respective
schedule 'A' item shall include the erection of pipe line system pumping of
water, dismantling of pipe line system after curing.
If the contractor fails to do curing to the satisfaction of the Engineer
the latter shall make arrangements for curing at the first and cost of the
contractor or the lining work will be pulled down. The contractor at his own
cost shall rebuild the lining so pulled down.
The Contractor is not entitled for any extra payment for curing as the
tender rate for lining in schedule-'A' is inclusive of curing.
5.6.6.
A)

TESTING OF CONCRETE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK:

GENERAL:

Systematic testing of the raw materials for concrete as well as the

concrete shall be done both while it is fresh and after it has hardened by the
Quality Control and Inspection Division on representative samples taken at
the site of laying the concrete in accordance with relevant Indian Standard
Specifications.
b)

Sampling Procedure: A random sampling procedure shall be adopted

to ensure that each concrete batch has a reasonable change of
being tested; that is, the sampling should be spread over the entire
period of concreting and cover all mixing units.

ii)

Frequency: The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each

grade shall be in accordance with the following:

Quantity of concrete
Number of Samples
(Cubic meter in the work.)
1-5
6 - 15
16 - 30
31 - 50

1
2
3
4

51 and above
additional 50
part there of

4 plus one additional for each

meters
or

NOTE: At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.

III) TEST SPECIMEN:
Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28
days. Additional cubes may be required for various purposes, such as to
determine the strength of concrete at 7 days or at the time of striking from
work or to determine the duration of curing or to check the testing error.
Additional cubes may also be required for testing by accelerated methods as
described in IS: 9013 - 1978. The specimen shall be tested as described in IS:
516 - 1959.
IV) TEST STRENGTH OF SAMPLES:
In all cases, the 28 days characteristic compressive strength specified
based on laboratory tests shall be the criteria for acceptance or rejection of
the concrete in so far as the strength of plain cement concrete lining is
concerned.
The test strength of the sample shall be the average of three
specimens. The test strength shall be greater than the specified strength. The
over all coefficient of variation shall not be more than (i) 15 per cent of the
average for the three consecutive samples tested, not more than 20 percent
of the specimen strength shall be less than 80% of the specified strength.
Contractor shall provide necessary unskilled labour and facilities for
transport collection of samples, cores, etc., are taken. Testing shall be carried
out at the testing laboratory at the nearest Lab, or at any other laboratory
that the Engineer may decide upon and the results given thereby shall be
considered as correct and authentic and acceptable to the Contractor. The
Contractor shall be given access to all operations and tests that may be
carried out as aforesaid. All testing charges are to be borne by the contractor.
V)

CORE TEST:

The points from which cores are to be taken and number of cores
required shall be at the discretion of the Engineer. In no case however shall,
fewer than three cores be taken and tested. Core shall be tested as
described in IS: 516-1959.
5.6.7

ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA:

(a) The cores shall be tested for 28 days compressive strength. These
shall be inspected examined for segregation / honey combing and
checking the thickness of lining. The engineer may also arrange to
test the core for permeability and cement content. If considered
necessary. Concrete in the member represented by core test shall
be considered acceptable if the average equivalent cube strength of
cones is equal to at least 85 percent of the cube strength of the
grade of concrete specified for the corresponding age and no
individual core has a strength not less that 75 percent.

(b) The density of concrete shall not be less that 85 percent of specified
density of 2400 kgs/m3.
(c) In case the concrete does not conform to the accepted criteria for
strength as specified above, the Engineer reserved the right to
reject the work or accept the same at a reduced rate derived from
tendered rate and as approved by him after examining all aspects
and provided structural integrity is not effected. In case the cores
taken from concrete lining panels. Inherit heavy segregation or
honey combing the engineer shall reject the concerned panels and
the contractor shall have to dismantle the same and have to cast
new panels at his expense.
Whenever necessary for the purpose of obtaining economy, work
ability, density, impermeability, durability, strength or on account of
variation in the quality and gradation of aggregates or other
materials, except cement the Executive Engineer shall based on
laboratory tests make necessary changes in the proportion of mix
and vibration. Contractor shall have to affect these changes and will
not be entitled to any compensation. On account of such changes,
relevant para of IS: 456 - 1778 shall apply.
Regarding particular canal reach/reaches, though the lining is fully
completed to acceptable quality, levels, such reach/reaches will not quality
for acceptance and payment till the associated works necessary for safely of
lining during rains, such as dowel banks, drainage are also completed along
with.
d)
5.6.8.

The final payment shall be made only after satisfactory core tests
acceptable to the engineer as per IS: 456 - 1978.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:

(a) The concrete for sides and bed lining should be placed in alternate
days of not more than 3mts. days remaining in between may be
filled after a gap of at least one day with premier one litre per four
square meters.
(b) The shuttering should be clean, well - oiled, smooth and firmly fixed
to the sub-grade and concrete near the shuttering properly placed
and specially compacted.
(c) Faces to be painted with scaling compound.
(d) The concrete shall be laid continuously and the construction joints
shall be left at the close of the day (or) 45 meters whichever is less
vide clause in column 26.3 of I.S. 456/1978.
5.6.9.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

All linear measurements shall be in meters, correct to 0.01 meter.

Areas shall be computed in square meters, correct to 0.1 square meters.
Payment for lining shall be made for the thickness shown on the drawing and
on one square meter basis of the superficial area (peripheral area). The
thickness of lining shall be determined in relation to final subgrade on which
lining is to be laid. The thickness shall be crosschecked by (i) Volume of

concrete placed and area covered (ii) use of probe when concrete is given
and (iii) cores if required. Any over run in lining shall not be paid to the
contractor.
5.6.10. RATE:
The unit rate for lining includes:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)
9)

Preparation of sub-grade.
From work.
Plants and equipment.
Mixing and conveying.
Placing.
Compaction with vibrators.
Curing.
Finishing.
Dewatering the sections during placing of canal lining where
required.
Cost of all ingredients of concrete.
Cost of cutting groves for contraction and expansion joints, cost of
construction joints and their treatment.
Cost of producing samples for testing.
All incidental operations, equipment, Labour, tools, etc., required for
carryingout this work.
Cost of sampling and testing of materials and concrete.

10)
11)
12)
13)
14)
5.7.

R.R. LINING
a)

Scope: Construction of R.R. side lining of specified thickness using

specified variety of stone in cement mortar of specified proportion
including cost and conveyance of cement and all other materials,
sampling and testing, mixing of mortar, labour charges all leads, lifts
and delifts, seigniorage charges dewatering, curing, all water leads
and all other operations necessary to complete the finished item of
work to specifications as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.

b)

Construction operations: The provisions of specification 6.0 shall

apply.

c)

Measurement and Payment: The provisions of specification 6.11

shall apply.

5.8. JOINTS:
5.8.1.

EXPANSION JOINTS:

(a) Scope: Expansion joints of 12mm width shall be provided on each

template where adjacent panels rest. 12mm thick asphalt pads shall
fill in the joint, when concrete lining is laid for canals in embankment
or in cutting where subgrade does not get physically bonded with
the joints. Where concrete lining is in physical bond with subgrade
such as in case of hard rock reaches, expansion joints need not be

provided. The details of joint are shown in the drawings. Sealing

compound in the joint shall conform to IS: 5256 - 1968, including
cost and conveyance of all materials, labour charges, all leads, lifts
and delifts complete for finished item of work to specifications as
per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
(b) Expansion joint shall not be provided except where structure
interests the canal lining.
(c) In case of sandy soils it is preferable to provide felt/asphalt pad over
the template and in the vertical joint between the panels to prevent
leakage through joint as shown in the drawings.
5.8.2.

CONTRACTION JOINTS:

(a) Scope: Providing contraction joints in bed, side lining including

painting the grove with approved prime and filling grove with hot
pour sealing compound of approved quality conforming to IS: 5256 1968 including cost and conveyance of all materials, cleaning of
groves, placing, dewatering, labour charges, all leads, lifts and
delifts complete for finished item of work to specifications as per
drawings and as directed by the Engineer in - charge.
(b) Contraction Joints shall be provided at places shown in the drawings
or as directed by the Engineer in accordance with the provisions laid
down.
(c) When lining is cast panels, before laying cement concrete slabs, the
top of the sleepers both in bed and side slopes shall be treated with
two layers of sealing compound as prescribed in IS: 5256 - 1968
and as shown in drawing to reduce the leakage across the joints.
Slabs shall be laid in alternate compartments with an interval of at
least one day for setting and contraction. The faces of the previously
placed concrete shall be painted with sealing compound as
prescribed in IS: 5256 - 1968 to ensure that no bonding takes place.
(d) The grooves at the joints shall be of the size shape as prescribed in
(b) and filled with hot applied sealing compound.
(e) Filling of the joint with hot-applied sealing compound should be
taken up after curing period is over. In the mean time the joints are
liable to be filled with earth. Which will be difficult to clean. It is,
therefore, advisable to fill these joints with coarse sand during the
curing period. The sand can be easily blown out from the joints
when require.
5.8.2.1 FILLER:
(a) The grooves in canal lining shall be filled with sealing compound
conforming to IS: 5256 - 1968.
(b) The grooves shall be clean and free from foreign substances when
sealing compound is filled.
(c) Grooves shall not be filled while it is raining or when there is free
water in the grooves. The grooves shall be filled as soon as the

concrete has become sufficiently stiff to prevent appreciable

distortion of groove shape or damage to the concrete.
(d) The expansion joint shall be filled with the mixture of following
materials with proportion specified against each.
Maxphalt 80-100

30% by volume.

Sand

51% by volume.

Cement

17% by volume.

Hemp cut into length

Not exceeding 3mm

2% by volume.
----------------------100% by volume.

5.8.2.2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

The unit for measurement and payment shall be one running metre
corrected to 0.01 meters for finish item of work.
5.9. PRECAST CEMENT CONCRETE LINING FOR SIDES OF THE CANAL
A) SCOPE OF WORK:
The work covered under this section consists of lining the sides
including manufacturing of PCC slabs including cost of all materials.
Construction of platforms for manufacturing of PCC slabs, construction of
curing ponds, curing, stacking, conveyance to the site and also laying lining
including cost of cement mortars, pointing as directed by the Engineer-incharge.
Precast lining the sides of the canal with precast cement concrete slabs
of size 550 x 550 x 50 mm. or any other size specified by the Engineer,
manufacturing the slabs using a cement content of 250 Kg./cum. giving a 28
days characteristic compressive strength specified based on laboratory tests
using 20mm maximum size hard broken machine crushed metal obtained of
approved quality including cost and conveyance of all materials, form work,
machine mixing, air entraining agents, laying vibrating, curing of PCC slabs
and conveyance of slabs to work-site, handling, laying slabs over a bed of
12.5 mm thick cement mortar (1:5), using not less than 3.75Kgs of cement
per square, metre for first layer and 10mm, thick cement mortar (1:3), using
not less than 6 kgs of cement per one square metre for second layer and
fixing the P.C.C. slabs in 6mm thick cement mortar (1:3) using not less than
3.6 Kgs of cement per one square metre including curing the lining and all
other operations necessary to complete the finished item of work as directed
by the Engineer for side lining of canal.
B)

SLUMP:

The amount of water used in the concrete shall be charged as required

to secure concrete of proper consistency and to adjust for any variation in the
moisture content or grading the aggregates as they enter the mixture.
Addition of water to compensate the stiffening of the concrete resulting from
over mixing or objectionable drying before placing shall not be permitted.
Uniformity in consistency from batch to batch shall be required. To have close
control of consistency and workability of the concrete, the slump of concrete

shall not vary more than 20 mm.which would otherwise interfere with the
aggregate and quality of the work.
5.9.1.

MANUFACTURING P.C.C. SLABS:

(A) Construction of platform and curing ponds:

P.C.C. Slabs are cast at one or more places as directed by the Engineerin-charge and transported to the site of construction after curing as needed.
A cement concrete platform shall be constructed for manufacturing centers
making it into required compartments to manufacture the required P.C.C.
slabs per day in a compartment. The other compartments shall be used for
the other days work by using the same moulds used on the 1st day curing
pond should be constructed adjacent to the platforms for curing the P.C.C.
slabs. The platform and curing ponds shall be constructed preferably at a
central place of the work site or at a place as directed by the Engineer-incharge. The land required for platform, curing ponds, stockyard, manufacturer
yard shall be acquired by the contractor at his cost. Construction of curing
ponds and platform shall be at the expense of the contractor and no extra
payment will be made for their construction. The rates quoted by the
contractor shall include the cost of construction of curing ponds and platform.
(B) MOULDS:
Adequate no of steel moulds shall be procured for casting P.C.C. slabs
of sizes of 550X550X50 mm. as indicated in the drawing or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
(C) CASTING OF P.C.C. SLABS:
The edges of the moulds shall be cleaned, and joint oil shall be applied
to the inner edges of the moulds and the platform. The moulds shall be
arranged in rows keeping sufficient way for walking and working between the
moulds and row. The machine mixed concrete shall be placed only in the
presence of an authorized representative of Engineer. The concrete shall be
placed and compacted before setting commences. The method of placing
should be such as to preclude segregation. The size and shape of the slabs
grooved can be varied by the use of the different moulds. The slabs shall be
have all sides and faces true and square and shall be at right angles to the
faces to each other. Proper consolidation of concrete in the moulds through
provision of "Shaking tables" (Vibration table) is essential.
The moulds shall be straight and sufficiently strong so that while
concrete is laid and vibrated, they retain their shape having neat and straight
edges when the moulds are removed.
All exposed concrete surface shall be cleaned of from impurity, lumps
of mortar or grout and unsightly stains. The finished surface shall be
equivalent in evenness. Smoothness and free from pockets and surface to
that obtainable by effective use of a long handed steel trowel. The P.C.C.
slabs thus manufactured shall be stacked after curing at the stock yard on
edge vertically on a level ground over 50mm sawdust or husk so as to avoid
damage to edges. Packing not less than 12mm. thick with saw dust or husk
shall also be given in between slabs at stock yard. Stacking an packing shall
be to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

The slabs shall be provided with tongues and grooves as given

below.
i) A tongue on one side and groove on the opposite side of the slab
shall be provided in the middle of the side running through out the
length of that side.
ii) The tongue shall be a projection with a semi circular cross section of
radius 13mm.
iii) The grooves shall be a depression with semi circular cross section of
radius 12 mm.
iv) The position of tongue and grooves shall be similar on all the slabs
with respect to each other.
5.9.2

A) CURING.

After 24 hours of casting the P.C.C. slabs, the moulds shall be removed
and the slabs shall be kept in the curing ponds for at least 28 days for curing.
After 28 days curing, P.C.C. slabs shall be taken out of curing ponds, stacked
carefully for use as directed by Engineer. After about four to six hours of
casting, the moulds shall be properly covered by the Hessian cloth rolls which
are to be kept continuously wet till the moulds are removed and P.C.C. slabs
are put in the curing tanks (moulds to be placed in shed).
b)

Testing of concrete and acceptance

The permissible tolerance on the length and width shall be as
follows :for Slabs
550x550x50mm

In
In
In
In

the
the
the
the

length
width
diagonals
thickness

+
+
+
+

3 mm.
3 mm.
4.50 mm.
2 mm.

for Slabs
550x275x50 mm
+ 3 mm.
+ 1.5 mm.
+2.25 mm.
+ 2 mm.

The contractor shall provide all facilities and co-operation towards

collection of samples, cores etc., and shall be present at the time when
samples, cores etc., are taken. The tests shall be carried out at the testing
laboratories setup at the site or any other laboratory that the Engineer in
Charge may decide and the results given there shall be considered correct
and authentic by the contractor. The contractor shall be given access to all
operations and tests that may be carried out as aforesaid so that he satisfied
himself regarding procedure and methods adopted.
5.9.3.

LAYING P.C.C. SLABS

Special care shall be taken while transporting P.C.C. slabs from

stockyard to work site and stacked near P.C.C. slabs either damaged or
cracked or broken shall not be used for lining. Compacted canal slope shall be
wetted and first layer of 12.5mm thick cement mortar (1:5) shall be applied,
leveled, and compacted using wooden steel or any approved screened board
to form uniform surface. The second layer of 10mm thick with cement mortar
(1:3) shall be applied when the first layer of mortar is used for one day. The
surface of second layer of mortar shall be leveled and P.C.C. slabs are fixed in

6mm thick cement mortar (1:3). The slabs shall be pressed gently so that the
mortar squeezes through joints. These joints are neatly finished flush with top
surface of the slab. The P.C.C. slab lining shall be done from bottom to the top
in a stretch no more than 10 mts length and vertical break joints shall be
ensured in P.C.C. slabs completion of P.C.C. lining in length of not less than
100 meters, the in-situ bed lining and top plug shall be laid in the next 100
meters reach cast in-situ cement concrete with a cement level of not less
than 250 kgs/cum. The line surface shall be even true to the face smooth to
give designed co-efficient of rugosity.
TOLERANCE IN ALIGNMENT AND GRADE
a) Departure from established alignment.
reaches.

20

millimeters

straight

50 millimeters on curves or

tangents.
b)

Departure from established grade.

5.9.4.

20 millimeters on small canal.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

All linear measurements shall be in meters, correct to 0.01 m Area
shall be worked out to nearest 0.01 square meters payment shall be
for one square metre of finished work at the quoted rate in schedule
'A'.
The unit rate for P.C.C. Slab lining includes.

(i)

Constriction of casting platforms curing ponds, manufacturing yard,

stock yards and including acquisition of lands for the same.

(ii)

Manufacture of P.C.C. slabs includes the cost of materials machine

mixing vibrating etc., as specified by the Engineer-in-charge.

(iii) Curing in ponds for 28 days.

(iv) Stacking at the stock yard including cost of packing materials.
(v)

Conveyance of P.C.C. slabs to the site of work.

(vi) Dewatering the sections during placing P.C.C. slab lining where
required.
(vii) Cost of all ingredients required for CM (1:5), first layer, CM (1:3) for
second layer and CM (1:3) for third layer for fixing slabs.
(viii) Cost of producing samples for testing.
(ix) All incidental operations, equipment Labour for fixing curing tools
etc., required for the finished item of work.
(x)

Engraving letters as per the standards specified by the Engineer.

(xi) Testing of all materials and concrete.

6.0. STONE MASONRY FOR STRUCTURES
6.1. GENENRAL
The section detailed specifications for :

Random Rubble Masonry and Coursed Rubble Masonry in cement

mortar including scaffolding, curing etc., for sub-structure and superstructure.
This also includes dewatering wherever necessary.
6.2. A LIST OF IS CODES APPLIABLE IS FURNISHED BELOW.
1.

IS: 1121 - 1974 (Part 1 to 4)

Method of test for determination of

strength properties of natural building
stones.

2.

IS: 1122 - 1974

Method of test for determination of true

specific gravity of natural building stones.

3.

IS: 1123 - 1975

Method of identification
building stones.

4.

IS: 1124 - 1974

Method of test for determination of water

absorption apparent specific gravity and
porosity of natural building stones.

5.

IS: 1125 - 1974

Method of test for determination

weathering of natural building stones.

6.

IS: 1126 - 1974

Method of test for determination of

durability of natural building stones.

7.

IS: 1127 - 1970

Recommendation for dimensions and

workman ship of natural building stones
for masonry work.

8.

IS: 1129 - 1972

Recommendation of dressing of natural

building stone.

9.

IS: 1542 - 1977

Specification for sand for plaster.

10. IS: 1597 - 1967

(Part I & II)

Code of practice for construction

of stone masonry.
Part I - Rubble Stone Masonry

of

natural

of

Part II - Ashlar Masonry

11. IS: 1706 - 1972

Method for determination of resistance of

wear by abrasion of natural building
stones.

12. IS: 2116 - 1980

Specification
mortals.

13. IS: 2250 - 1981

Code of practice for preparation and use

of masonry mortars.

14. IS: 4101 - 1967

Code of practice for external facing and

veneers stone masonry.

15. IS: 4121 - 1967

Method of test for determination of water

trans mission rate by capillary action
through natural building stones.

for

sand

for

masonry

16. IS:4122 - 1967

Method of test for surface softening of

natural building stones by exposure to
acidic atmosphere.

17. IS: 4348 - 1973

Method of test for determination of

permeability of natural building stones.

18. IS: 5218 - 1969

Method of test for toughness of natural

building stones.

19. IS: 8381 - 1977

Recommended practice for quarrying

stones for construction purposes.

20. IS: 1200 - 1976

Measurement of
engineering works
stone masonry.

(Part IV)

building

and

civil

21. IS: 11216 - 1985

Code of practice for permeability test for

masonry (during and after construction)

22. IS: 3696 - 1978

(Part I)

Safety code of scaffolds and ladders

23. IS: 3696 - 1991

Safety code of scaffolds and ladders

In addition to the above I.S. codes the specifications of A.P.S.S. and

manual for quality control and inspection shall also be complied with.
6.3. MATERIALS:
Provisions of schedule 'D' shall apply for cement, sand, stone, water
etc.,
6.4. MORTAR
(a) Cement and sand shall be mixed in specified proportion given on the
drawings. Cement shall be proportioned only by weight by taking
the unit weight as 1440 Kg per cubic metre and the sand shall be
proportioned by volume after making due allowance for bulkage.
(b) The mortar shall be mixed intimately in mechanical mixes of tilting
type having calibrated water tank for storing water. The first batch
of mortar at the commencement of work with any mixer shall be
made richer by mixing 10 percent more cement over and above that
required for the particular mix. In case of mechanical mixing the
mortar shall be mixed for at least 3 minutes after addition of water.
Hand mixing shall not be allowed. However, in exceptional
circumstances such as mechanical break down of mixer work in
remote areas or when the quantity of work is very small hand
mixing shall be permitted and it shall be done on a smooth
watertight platform, large enough to allow efficient turning over of
the ingredients before and after adding after. Mixing platform shall
be so arranged that no foreign material shall get mixed with mortar
nor does the mixing water flow out. Dry sand and cement shall be
mixed thoroughly by turning over to get a mixture of uniform colour.
Enough water shall then be added gradually and mixing continued

until mortar of required consistency of 90 to 100 millimeters as

required in Clause 9.1.1. of IS : 2250 - 1981 is obtained.
(c) All ingredients shall be fed to the mixer simultaneously. The required
quantity of water to achieve the required consistency shall be
predetermined by trial mixes, and portion of water from 5 to 10
percent shall precede and the like quantity shall follow the
introduction of other materials. The reminder of water quantity shall
be added during operation.
(d) The wet mortar shall be used within 30 minutes of mixing. Mortar
remaining unused after above time shall be rejected and shall not
be allowed to be used. The cost of rejected mortar shall be borne by
the Contractor.
(e) In case of cement mortar, that has stiffened because of evaporation
of water, the same shall be re-tempered by adding water as
frequently as needed to restore the requisite consistency but this retempering shall be permitted only within thirty minutes from the
time of addition of water at the time of initial mixing. The cost of
retaining of mortar shall be borne by the Contractor.
(f) Necessary tests of determine compressive strength of the mortar,
for consistency of the mortar and its water retentivity shall be
carried out in accordance with IS : 2250 tests for compressive
strength of mortar shall be in accordance with the procedure laid
down in IS : 2250 appendix. As amended from time to time. A
minimum of 3 test specimens shall be made for each 120 cms of
each class of mortar for given age. There shall be at least only a few
cum of particular mortar is manufactured in a day.
6.5.1.

SCOPE:

R.R. masonry /CRS masonry in cement mortar of specified

proportion/grade using R.R. stone/CR stone of specified variety/specified sort
including cost and conveyance of cement and other materials, sampling,
testing, mixing of mortar, labour charges, all leads, lifts and de-lifts,
seigniorage charges, scaffolding, dewatering, curing, all water leads, and all
other operations necessary to complete the finished item of work to
specification as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer in charge.
6.5.2.The type of masonry used for structures shall be random rubble
masonry (coursed or uncoursed) or coursed rubble masonry. The actual type
of masonry used for different parts of structures shall be as specified on the
drawings.
6.6.

CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

6.6.1.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

(a) The dressing of stone shall be as specified for individual type of

masonry work and it shall also confirm to the general requirements
for dressing of stone covered in IS : 1129. Other specific
requirements are covered separately with respect to particular type
of rubble stonework.

(b) Stone shall be sufficiently wetted before laying to prevent

absorption of water from mortar. The bed which is to receive the
stones shall be cleaned, wetted and covered with a layer of fresh
mortar. All stones shall be laid full in mortar both in bed and in
vertical joints and settled carefully in place with a wooden mallet
immediately on placement so that 'I' is solidly bedded in mortar
before the same has set. Clean chips and spalls shall be wedged
into the mortar joints and beds wherever necessary to avoid thick
beds or joints of mortar. Whenever foundation masonry is laid
directly on rock, the face stands of the first course shall be dressed
to fit into the rock sungly when pressed down in the mortar bedding
over the rock. No dry or hollow space shall be left and where in the
masonry and each stone shall have all the embedded faces
completely covered with mortar.
(c) Courses of the masonry shall ordinarily be pre-determined. They
shall generally be of the same height. Where there is variation in the
height of courses, larger courses shall be placed at lower levels, with
height of courses decreasing gradually towards the top.
(d) Vertical joints shall be staggered as far as possible.
(e) All necessary chases for joggles, dowels and cramps shall be formed
in the stones before hand.
(f) Sufficient transverse bond shall be provided by the use of bond
stones extending from the front to the back of the masonry. In case
of thick walls bond stones shall overlap each other in their
arrangement.
(g) Bell shaped bond stones or headers shall not be used. The position
of bond stones shall be marked on faces for identification and
verification.
(h) At all angular junctions stones at each alternate courses shall be
well bonded into the respective course of the adjacent wall.
(i)

All connected masonry in structure shall be carried out at one

uniform level throughout as far as possible, but when breaks are
unavoidable, the masonry shall be raked in sufficient long steps to
facilitate joining of new work with old. The stepping of ranking shall
not be more than 45 degrees with the horizontal. Wing walls,
abutments and piers, etc., shall be carried out to truly plumb or to
the specified batter.

(j)

Face work and hearting shall be brought up evenly. The top of each
course, however, shall not be leveled up by use of flat chips.

(k) After the day's work, the face and top of masonry shall be cleaned
well with brushes or broomsticks to remote all the dead mortar on
the stones.
(l)

Green work shall be protected from rain by suitable covering.

Masonry work in cement or composite mortar shall be kept
consistently moist on all faces for a minimum period of fourteen
days. The top of the masonry work shall be left flooded with water at

the end of the day. During hot weather all finished or partly
completed work shall be covered or wetted in such a manner as to
prevent rapid drying. The racking of joints where necessary shall be
done at the end of day's work when mortar is green.
(m) When fresh masonry is to be placed against existing surface
material, roughened and wetted as directed the Engineer so as to
achieve a good bond with the new work.
(n) Stone shall be sufficiently wetted before laying, to prevent
absorption of water from mortar. The bed which is to receive the
stones shall be cleaned wetted and covered with a layer of fresh
mortar.
(o) The scaffolding shall be sound and strong to withstand all loads
likely to come upon it; The holes, which provide resting space for
horizontal members shall not be left in masonry less than one metre
wide. The holes left in the masonry work for supporting the
scaffolding shall be filled and made good.
6.7 UNCOURSED RUBBLE OR RANDOM MASONRY
6.7.1
a)

6.7.2.

DRESSING.
The face stone shall be hammer dressed on the face, side and the
beds to enable it to come into close proximity with the neighboring
stone. The bushing in the face shall not project more than 40mm on
an exposed face and 12mm on a face to be plastered. Stones with
round surface shall not be used in construction.
SIE OF FACE STONES

a)

The width of face stones shall be not less than 150 mm of walls of
400mm thick, 200mm for walls 450mm thick, 250mm for walls of
600mm thick or more. Half the quantity shall not be less than 1/70
cum, 1/50 cum and 1/35 cum in volume for walls of the above
thicknesses respectively. No stone less than 150mm in height shall
be used on the face.

b)

Face stone shall be laid headers and stretchers, alternatively so as

to break joints by at least 75mm. care it to be taken to break joints
vertically. The stone shall be solidly bedded with joints not
exceeding 20mm in thickness, further dressing being done if
necessary to ensure this. No pinning what so ever shall be given on
the face and face stones shall extend well back into hearting. Height
of stones shall not exceed breadth at face or length in wards.

6.7.3
a)

CHIPS.
Chips and spalls of stone may be used wherever necessary to avoid
thick mortar beds or joints and it shall also be ensured that no
hollow spaces are left anywhere in the masonry. The chips shall not
be used below hearting stones to bring these up to the level of face
stones. Use of chips shall be restricted to filling of interstices

between the adjacent stones in hearting and they shall not exceed
10 percent of the quantity of stone masonry.
6.7.4.
a)

6.7.5.
a)

6.7.6.
a)

6.7.7.

HEARTING STONES
The hearting or interior filling of wall face shall consist of rubble
stones not less than 15 cm in any direction, carefully laid and
hammered down with a wooded mallet into position and solidly
bedding in mortar and should be laid nearly level with facing and
backing.
BOND STONES.
Through bond stones shall be provided in masonry upto 60 cm
thickness and in case of masonry above 60 cm thickness, a set of
two or more bond stones over lapping each other at least by 15 cm
shall be provided in a line from face to back. In case of highly
absorbed types of stones (porous limestone and sand stone, etc.,)
the bond stone shall extent only about two-third into the wall as
through stones in such cases may give rise to penetration of
dampness and, therefore, for all thicknesses of such masonry a set
of two or more bond stones over lapping each other by at least 15
cm shall be provided. One bond stone or a set of bond stones shall
be provided in each layer at 1.5 to 1.80 m interval.
QUOIN STONE
The stone specially and neatly dressed for forming an internal angle
in masonry work shall not be less than 0.03 cubic metre in volume.

PLUM STONE
The Plum Stones are selected long stones embedded vertically in
the interior of masonry to form a bond between successive courses
and shall be provided at about 90 cm interval.

6.7.8.
a)

6.7.9.
a)

LAYING
the masonry shall be laid with or without courses as specified. The
quoins shall be laid header and stretcher alternately. Every stone so
as to form neat and close joint, face stone shall extent and bond
well in the back. These shall be arranged to break joints, as much as
possible, and to avoid long vertical lines of joints.
JOINTS
The face joints shall not be more than 20mm thick, but shall be
sufficiently thick to prevent stone-to stone contact and shall be
completely filled with mortar.

6.8. COURSED RUBBLE MASONRY

6.8.1.
a)

DRESSING
Face stones shall be hammer dressed on all beds and joints so as to
give them approximately rectangular shape. These shall be square
on all joints and beds. The bed joints shall be chisel drafted from at

least 8 cm back from the face and for at least 4cm for the side
joints. No portion of the dressed surface shall show a depth of gap
more than 6 mm from straight edge placed on it. The remaining
unexposed portion of the stone shall not project beyond the surface
of bed and side joints. The requirements regarding bushing shall be
same as for random rubble masonry.
6.8.2.
a)

6.8.3.
a)

6.8.4.
a)

HEARTING STONE
The hearting or interior filling of the wall shall consist of flat-bedded
stone carefully laid on their proper beds in mortar. The use of chips
shall restrict to the filling in interstices between the adjacent stones
in hearting and these shall not exceed 10 per cent of the quantity of
masonry. While using chips it shall be ensured that no hollows
spaces are left anywhere in the masonry.
BOND STONES.
The requirements regarding through or bond stone shall be same as
for random rubble masonry but these shall be provided at 1.5 metre
to 1.8 metre apart clear in every course.
QUOIN STONES
The quions which shall be of the same height at the course in which
these occur shall be formed of header stones not less than 45 cm in
length. They shall be laid lengthwise alternately along each face,
square in their beds, which shall be fairly dressed to a depth of at
least 10 cm.

6.8.5. FACE STONES

a)

6.8.6.
a)

6.8.7.
a)

Face stone shall tail into the work for not less than their heights and
at least one-third of the stones shall tail into the work for a length
not less than twice their height. These shall be laid headers and
stretchers alternately.
LAYING
The stones shall be laid on horizontal courses and all vertical joints
shall be truly vertical. The quoin stones shall be laid stretches and
headers alternately and shall be laid square on their beds. Which
shall be roughly chisel dressed to a depth of at least 10 cm.
JOINTS.
The face joints shall not be more than 10mm thick but shall be
sufficiently thick to prevent stone-to-stone contact and shall be
completely filed with mortar.

6.9. TESTS.
a)

At least three sets of test specimen of cement mortar used be taken

from each day's work and it shall be tested for 28 days strength in
accordance with Appendix-A of IS : 1965, code of practice for
preparation and use of masonry mortars given below :
Mix grade

Minimum compressive strength

1. MM

30 Kgs/Square centimeter

2. MM

50 Kgs/Square centimeter

3. MM

7.5

75 Kgs/Square centimeter

b)

From the design mortar mix, cubes shall be cast in the laboratory at
suitable intervals and their strength found out.

1)

The average strength of any 3 consecutive samples strength shall

be greater than specified strength.

2)

The over all co-efficient of variation for any 10 consecutive samples

shall not be less than 15%.

3)

Not more than 10% of the specimen strength be less than 85% of
the specimen strength.

6.9.1.

Additional tests shall be carried out as and when directed. These

strengths shall be deemed as the standard strength for that mortar.
The strengths of the test cubes shall be found out and that strength
shall not be less than 80 per cent of the standard strength
mentioned above. For acceptance, the 28 days strength of tests
cubes shall be the criterion. 80 percent of the test cubes should
satisfy the above criteria. All laboratory testing work shall be carried
out by the concerned Quality Control circle. & A.P.E.R. Laboratories,
Hyderabad as per relevant Indian Standards and the Contractor shall
be permitted to watch the test if he so desires. The cost of testing
shall be borne by the Department. However, arrangements for
taking test samples, and transporting the same to the laboratory
shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

6.9.2.

The Engineer may direct the contractor to conduct percolation, tests

in the masonry in accordance with IS-11216-1985. These tests shall
be conducted at regular intervals as the masonry work progresses
and that if the water loss is more than 2.5 lug eons in the upstream
portion of masonry and 6.0 lug eons in the rear portion, remedial
measures like drilling and grouting shall be taken to achieve the
acceptance standards duly backed up with confirmatory tests.

6.10.

CURING

a)

Watering shall be done carefully so as not to washout the mortar

joints or disturb the masonry in any manner. The top masonry work
shall be left flooded with water at the close of the day. All masonry
built with cement mortar shall be kept watered continuously for a
minimum period of two weeks from the date of construction.

b)

If the contractor fails to do the curing to the satisfaction of the

Engineer the latter will either make arrangement for curing the
masonry at the risk and cost of the contractor or order the masonry
to be pulled down. The masonry so pulled down should be rebuilt by
the contractor at his own cost.

6.11.
a)

Measurement and payment.

Stone masonry shall be measured in cubic meters and shall be to
the pay lines shown in the drawings. 450 mm thickness from face
will be measured as coursed Rubble Stone Masonry in cement

mortar mix MM5 grade and the balance thickness of wall will be
measured as Random Rubble masonry in cement mortar mix MM5
grade.
b)

Payment for stone masonry shall be made at the quoted rate in the
schedule A for 1 cubic metre of finished work.

The rate is inclusive of quoins, cost and conveyance of stone,

seigniorage charges, dressing of stone, chisel drafting, smooth rubbing of
joints, stacking of stones, mortar mixing, cost and conveyance of cement and
all other materials, sampling cost of materials, testing charges of materials
and the work, construction charges, scaffolding charges, labour charges, flush
pointing with same mortar, curing, all water leads, labour charges, all leads,
lifts and de-lifts and all other operations necessary to complete the finished
item of work as per drawings as per specifications and as per instructions of
the Engineer-in-charge.
7.0. PLASTERING AND POINTING
7.1. GENERAL:
7.1.1. The surface of Masonry shall be finished by "pointing" or by
"Plastering". For a surface, which is to be subsequently pointed or plastered,
the joints shall be squarely racked out to depth not less than the width of the
joint or as directed while the mortar is still green. The racked joints shall be
well brushed to remove dust and loose particle and the surface shall be
thoroughly washed and cleaned and wetted.
7.1.2.SCOPE:
Plastering of specified thickness with specified mortar proportion to the
exposed faces of R.R. masonry/brick masonry/concrete including cost and
conveyance of cement and all other materials, sampling, testing mixing of
mortar, labour charges, all leads, lifts, de-lifts, seigniorage charges,
scaffolding, curing, all water leads, and all other operations necessary to
complete the finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
7.1.3.

MATERIALS:
Provision of schedule 'D' shall apply for cement, sand, water etc.,

7.1.4.

MORTAR

PREPARATION OF MORTAR FOR PLASTERING, POINTING WORK

a)

Unless otherwise specified, the cement mortar used in plastering,

pointing work shall be of cement mortar mix MM7.5 grade, or any
other specified grade using minimum 360 kgs. of cement per cubic
metre of mortar. The other specifications and conditions enunciated
in paragraph 6.4 shall apply for mortar for plastering work.

7.1.5.

PLASTERING WITH CEMENT MORTAR MM. 7.5 GRADE OR ANY

OTHER SPECIFIED GRADE:

7.1.6

PREPARATIONS OF SURFACE:

a)

The roughening of the background improves the bond of plaster. All

joints shall be thoroughly racked. After roughening the surface, care

shall be taken to moisten the surface sufficiently before plastering

as otherwise freshly exposed surface may tend to absorb
considerable amount of water from the plaster. The surfaces shall be
wetted evenly before applying the plaster. The surfaces shall be
wetted evenly before applying the plaster. A fog spray may be used
for this work as far as possible; the plasterwork shall be done under
shade.
7.1.7.

LAYING OF PLASTERING :

a)

The mortar used for plastering shall be stiff enough to cling and hold
when laid. To ensure even thickness and true surface, plaster shall
be applied in patches of 150mm X 150mm of the required thickness
more than 2 meters intervals horizontally and vertically over the
entire surface to serve as guides. The surface of these guides shall
be truly in the plane of the finished plaster surface and truly plumb.
Plastering shall be started from top and worked down. All the pot log
holes shall be properly filled in advice of the plastering. The mortar
shall then be applied to the surface to be plastered between the
guides with a trowel. Each trowel fall of mortar shall overlap and
sufficient presence shall be used to force it into thorough contact
with the surface. On relatively smooth surfaces, the mortar shall be
dashed on with the trowel to ensure adequate bond. The mortar
shall be applied to a thickness lightly more than specified using a
steering, stretched out between the guides. This shall then be
brought to a true surface by working with a long wooden float with
upward and side ways motion 50mm or 75mm at a time. The
surface shall be periodically checked with a steering stretched
across it. Finally the surface shall be rendered smooth with a small
wooden float: over working shall be avoided. All corners, arises, and
junctions shall be neatly finished. Metal floats shall not be used I.S.
1661-Code of practice for application of cement and cement lime
plaster finishes shall be applicable for this section.

b)

If it is necessary to suspend the work at the end of the day it shall

be left in a clean horizontal or vertical line not nearer than 150
millimeters from any corner on arises or corner tops or copings etc.,
when recommencing the work, the edges of the old work shall be
scraped clean and wetted and treated with cement slurry before the
new plaster is laid adjacent it. After the first coat is done it shall be
kept undisturbed for the next 24 hours and there after kept moist
and not permitted to dry until the final rendering is applied.

c)

After the plaster has sufficiently hardened cement slurry with cream
like consistency shall be applied evenly and rubbed to a fine
condition.

d)

No portion of the surface shall be left out initially to be plastered up

later on. The plaster shall be finished to a true and plumb surface
and to proper degree of smoothness as required by the Engineer.

e)

The average thickness of plaster shall not be less than the specified
thickness but not be thicker than 25mm in any case. Any cracks

which appear on the surface and all portions which sound hollow
when tapped or found to be sort or other-wise defective, shall be cut
in rectangular shape and redone as directed by the Engineer at no
extra cost, plastering shall be cured for 10 days.
7.2.1.

SCOPE:
Flush pointing/with cement mortar of specified proportion to the
exposed faces of CRS masonry including cost and conveyance of
cement and all other materials, sampling, testing, mixing of mortar,
labour charge, all leads, lifts, de-lifts, seigniorage charges,
scaffolding, curing all other operations necessary to complete the
finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.

7.2.2.

a)

PREPARATION OF SURFACE:

The joints in the masonry shall be raked out to a depth not less than the
width of the joint or as directed when the mortar is green. Joints are
to be brushed to clean the dust and loose particles with a stiff brush.
The area shall then be washed and the joints, thoroughly wetted
before pointing is commenced.

7.2.3.LAYING FLUSH POINTING:

a)

Flush pointing shall be done with cement mortar mix MM 7.5 grade
or any other specified grade. The mortar shall be pressed into the
rated out joints. The mortar shall not be spread over the corners,
edges on surface of the masonry. The pointing shall then be finished
as detailed below. The mortar, shall be, finished of flush and level
with true edges of the stones, so as to give a smooth appearance.
The edges shall be neatly trimmed with a trowel and straight edge.

d)

The pointing shall be cured for seven days.

7.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

a)

The work of plastering and pointing shall be measured in square

meters of the
surface treated.

b)

Payment for plastering and pointing shall be made at ten Square

meters tender rate in schedule-A. Which shall include the cost of all
labour, material, sampling, testing, tools, scaffolding, curing and
other expenses incidents to the work.

8.0. DRILLING AND GROUTING

GENERAL:

The specifications provide for drilling of "A" and "B" holes and grouting
of "A" and "B" holes with cement slurry for foundation treatment.
8.1.

A List Of IS Codes Applicable Is Furnished Below:

01.

IS 6066 - 1984 Recommendations of pressure grouting of Rock

Foundations in river valley projects.

02 .

IS 5441 - 1986 Portable pneumatic drilling machine

03.

IS 2529 - 1973 Code of practice for in-situ permeability tests.

8.2. a)

Drilling and grouting shall include drilling holes washing of holes,

washing of seams, fixing of grout pipes of packers for stage-wise
grouting, grouting with cement grout and back filling of holes.

b)

The purpose of grouting is to consolidate the foundations and to

reduce seepage through the foundations and uplift pressures under
the structure. The programme of grouting prescribed herein,
consists first of a low pressure shallow grouting for consolidating
and improving the stability of the upper portion of foundation rock
followed by a high pressure curtain grouting to create a tight curtain
which will cut off any paths of percolation.

C)

Drilling and grouting of foundations is inclusive of washing and testing of

permeability. The curtain grout holes for foundations treatment will be
drilled to a depth and spacing of holes as shown on the drawings of or
as directed by geologist of Geological Survey of India and holes shall be
drilled and grouted after the completion of excavation and prior to
placing masonry or concrete.
But if grouting to be done after
construction of masonry or concrete for 3.0 metre height 65 MM/Q.M.S.
Black Steel Pipes should be left in masonry or concrete. The Pipes will
be procured by the contractor and the contractor shall fix the pipes
vertically in position and see that no damage occurs to them while
laying masonry. In case the verticality is not maintained for pipes before
drilling and grouting operations are taken up, drilling through masonry
shall be done by the Contractor.

8.3.

EQUIPMENT:

a) Drilling Equipment: Grout holes will be drilled with standard core

drilling equipment. Plug or non-coring bit may also be used. Where
consolidation or blanket grouting is to be done from the foundation
surface, in rock, which does not produce mud slurries, percussion,
drilling in lieu of rotary drilling may be used for shallow holes.
1)

Creations pneumatic or electrical driven diamond drill machine and its

equipment.

2)

Deep hole jackhammer with 80'-0 drill capacity and its equipment.

3)

1000 Cft Air compressor or 500 cft Air compressor.

b)

Grouting Equipment: All equipment for mixing and injecting grout,

shall have adequate capacity and shall be maintained in first class
operating condition. The minimum equipment required will be,

1.

Four specially equipped, air driven duplex, double action slush pumps,
capable of operating at a maximum discharge pressure of about 500
P.S.I/35.00 Kgs/Sq. Cm.

2.

Four mechanical grout mixers.

3.

Four mechanically agitated sumps.

4.

Two high head water pumps for auxiliary water supply to be used in
pressure testing flushing and pressure washing operations.

5.

The suitable water meters suitably graduated.

6.

Sluice valves, pressure gauges, pressure hose, supply lines, packers

and small tools may be necessary to provide a continuous circulating
supply of grout and accurate pressure control.

c)

Hand operated grout pumps shall not be used to grouting low or high
pressure holes, only pumps which are capable of injecting grout into
holes at sustained highest allowable safe pressure are suited for this
type of grouting.

d)

The grout mixing and conveying system, consisting of the above

equipment, shall be laid out to provide sufficient capacity for a heavy
flow of grout. In general, an uninterrupted flow of grout shall be
maintained and the grout conveyed from the pump to the hole
through a hose or pipe of not less than 40 mm in diameter and return
line not less than 40 mm in diameter. Wherever practicable the grout
plant shall be placed as near the hole as possible and along pipe lines
avoided especially during hot weather. The flow of grout into the
holes at a constant speed of the pump shall be controlled by the
return valve on the header, by passing and returning to the agitator
all grout, not accepted by the hole at the desired pressure. As the
grout hole approaches refusal, or when the valves on the holes are
closed for any reason, the pump shall continue in full operation,
circulation the grout through the line to prevent setting or clogging.
Both the pump and the pipeline shall be flushed periodically with
clear water during grouting operations, especially when using thick
grout. Deposits of grout in the pump mixer and agitator not removed
by flushing shall be cleaned out, once a week, by scraping and
chipping. Upon the completion of any continuous operation or at such
time as found necessary, the pump grout lines header, cap and
mechanical expander shall be dismantled, thoroughly cleaned with
water and blown out with air.

e)

The mixer shall be provided with an accurate meter, for controlling,

and measuring the amount of mixing water in the grout. Specially
equipped pressure gauges shall be provided with diaphragms or by
filling a short gauge tube in the form a pigtail with semifluid water
proof grease and oil or other devices to prevent the entrance of grout
in the gauge. The combined ranges of the high pressure gauge shall
be 0.035kg/Sq. Cm/0.500 PSI for low pressure gauges shall be 0.0175
Kg/Sq. Cm/0.250 PSI one of the pressure gauges shall be mounted so
that it will measure directly the pressure on the hole and shall
preferably be mounted directly on the vertical pipe of the head

connected to the grout cap or expanding packer the other gauge shall
be mounted on the supply line at the pump.
8.4.

DRILLING GROUT HOLES AT FOUNDATIONS OF SPILL WAY,

BODY WALL

(a) LOW PRESSURE GROUTING:

The procedure for grouting of the foundation will be subject to
modification as determined in the field, but in general, will consist of.
(1) Drilling the holes of diameter 75MM to 50 MM to the required depth at
a time expect in the cases where shattered rock on crushed zone is
met with in such cases descending stage of drilling and grouting to be
done. After completion of drilling, the hole is to be protected by
capping till the grouting is completed.
(2) Plain washing of holes is to be done using G.I. pipes or drill rods, with
air and water lowering the pipes or rods to full depth.
(3) Washing of seams is to be done by fixing grout pipes or mechanical
expanding packers, in stages starting from bottom zone.
(4) The holes are to be washed after seam washing of each zone is to be
completed, and then seam washing of next higher zone is to be taken
up.
(5) After completion of washing of seams, the holes are to be flushed with
air and water and grouting to be started for bottom zones first by
using expanding packers. First grouting of all bottom zones in a
region are to be completed before taking up grouting of next higher
zones.
(6) During grouting of any hole, if inter-connection is found in neighboring
holes, the same are to be plugged till the grouting of the hole in
operation is completed and then the inter-connected holes are to be
drilled again and washed to full depth or required depth with water.
(7) Grouting is to be continued till the zone of the hole refuses to take
grout which can be found by measuring at the grout agitator or sump.
(8) Once grouting of holes in a region is completed the holes are to be
kept plugged for 48 hours and then blown with air and then back filled
to the top with some kind of mortar that is being using in that region
for construction of masonry.

b) HIGH PRESSURE GROUTING:

The holes for the high pressure grouting the foundation of the structure
shall and be drilled from the foundation to a depth and spacing of holes as
shown on the drawings are approximate and subject to revisions at the time
of drilling, testing, and grouting. The diameter of any grout hole shall not be

less than 50 MM core recovery will not be required. Grout holes shall be
drilled to varying depths and at carrying inclination, not to exceed 30 degrees
from that vertical. The exact depth direction and interval between holes will
be determined in the field from the conditions encountered, and as directed
by the geologist of Geological Survey of India, drilling of any grout hole to a
total depth greater than 60mm is not anticipate; however holes to greater
depths may have to be drilled if found necessary during execution whenever,
the drill water is lost on artesian flow encountered, the drilling operations or
not to be stopped, but continued taking precautionary steps.
Upon
completion of drilling of a hole, it shall be temporarily capped or otherwise
protected from entry of foreign material until grouting operations required it
to be opened.
8.5.

PIPES FOR FOUNDATION GROUTING

a)

Low pressure grout hole: 65mm or 75 mm diameter steel pipe of

length 0.6m into masonry in the drilled holes to a depth 0.3 m into
masonry or concrete from surface by reaming the hole with 80 mm or
100 mm bit to facilitate the easy washing of holes and prevent the
drillings from re entry into the holes; the cost of these pipes and
fixing them should be included in the unit rates for drilling and
grouting and no separate payment will be made.

b)

High pressure grout holes; Standard 65 mm steel pipe shall be used

wherever embedded pipe specified for grout holes and also in
foundation work over springs, crevices, seems, and other spots
disclosing foundation defects and elsewhere if required. Pipes and
fittings that are embedded in masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly
cleaned and shall be held firmly in position and protected from
damaged while masonry or concrete is being laid around them. The
pipes for the high pressure grout holes shall be over 0.9 mts long
from the foundation level so that where drilling is done later on,
difficulties inclination may be avoided. The above pipe shall be
procured by the contractor at his own cost. The contractor has to
embed these pipe without extra cost to the department.

8.6.

WASHING AND PRESSURE TESTING:

Before taking up grouting of drilled holes plain washing and seam
washing of holes is to be done as follows.

a)

A set of holes in 4 rows in a block is to be drilled and flushed to full

depth using air and water.

b)

Then washing of seams intersected by holes is to be carried out by

fixing expanding packers in pressure, Zone-wise until clear water
comes out from inter connected holes. The work of steam washing is
to be done carefully and as directed by fields officers regarding
changing of connection, procedure etc., (i.e.,) bottom zone are to be
taken up first for seam washing by fixing packing appropriate depths.
Once the steam washing of bottom zones is completed the expanding
packers are to be removed and the holes are to be flushed with air
and water to bring out clay or muck collected holes. Then seam
washing of next higher zones in to be taken up. This procedure is to

be continued till the full depth of hole, is completed. In no case

washing pressures should exceed the maximum grouting pressures,
which shall be decided by Executive Engineer.
c)

8.7.

When the seam washing is completed the holes are to be flushed with
air and water to full depth and pressure testing of holes to be taken
up by fixing expanding packers for zone required and water to be
pumped under pressure through water meter to record water
consumption. This consumption of water will decide the consistency
of cement grout. After pressure testing, the zone will be taken up for
grouting.
PRESSURE TESTING OF HOLES

a)

During the drilling of the holes, or after drilling completed or during or

after grouting, holes as required shall be water pressure tested. In all
grout holes when abnormal gain or loss of drill water is observed or
caving number of the holes or binding of the bit occur during drilling
or the drilling rods fall suddenly as through on open crack or cavity it
may be required that drilling be discontinued and the hole pressure
tested.

b)

The procedure for water pressure testing shall be as specified herein,

if hole drilled and tested sahll be isolated by sealing off with double
packers attacked to a perforated steel pipe and lowered into the hole.
If stage-drilling method is used, a single packer shall be used to
isolate the section to be tested. Water shall then be pumped into the
test section under pressure and for period specified herein.
The
time, pressure and quantities of water used for testing section of hole
shall be recorded. The length of test section shall be measured
parallel to direction of hole. Hole shall be tested in 2 to 5 meters
sections. The pressure testing apparatus shall be subject to periodic
tests for accuracy and satisfactory operations.

c)

The pressure test shall be performed in one continuous operation

using the following stages of pressure times.

______________________________________________________________________________
___________
Step No.

Pressure (p)

P.S.I.

Elapsed time Minute

______________________________________________________________________________
____________
1.

1/3

2.

2/3

3.

10

4.

2/3

5.

1/3

______________________________________________________________________________
__________
The Pressure P shall be
determined,
depending on geological conditions and on the depth of

upper packers however, this pressure need not exceed a maximum of

10Kg/Sq. Cm at the gauge. After steps No.4&5, time the value shall be closed
and pressure drop observed and recorded for a minimum period of 3 minutes
in each instance.
d)

A desirable degree of impermeability if considered to exit when the

leakage obtained by applying water test to section of a hole drilled is
less than two lug eons (L) i.e., two (2) Litres/meter/minute of hole
tested when pressure of 10Kg/Sq. Cm at the gauge point is applied for
a period of 10 minutes.

8.8. GROUT:
a)

Materials: i) Grout shall consist of cement and water in proportions

determined in the filed.
Cement water shall conform to the
requirements specified under schedule D.

ii)

Admixtures to be followed: There are number of admixtures when

added in small quantities will give the following desirable
characteristics.
Retarded for delaying the setting time
Accelerators for hastening the setting time.

b)

The water cement ratio by volume will be varied to meet the

characteristics of each hole as revealed by the grouting operation and
will range between 10:1 to 2:1 the greater part of the grout probably
being placed at ratio of about 10:1. In general, if pressure tests
indicate a tight role grouting shall be started with a thin mix. If an
open hole condition exits, as determined by loss of drill water or
inability to build up pressure during water testing operations, then
grouting shall be started with a thick mix and with grout pump
operating as nearly as practicable at constant speed at all times, the
ratio will decrease, if necessary until the required pressure has been
reached. When the pressure tends to rise too high, the water cement
ratio shall be increased. If necessary, to relieve premature stoppage,
periodic applications of water under pressure shall be made. Under
no conditions the pressure or rate of pumping be increased suddenly
as either operates may produce a water hammer effect which may
promote stops otherwise the grouting of any hole shall be continued
until the hole refuses to take grout practically. For pressure above
(14.00 Kg/Sq. Cm) 200 PSI. The grouting pressure shall be maintained
for such reasonable time to assure that the foundation has been
satisfactorily grouted. Should grout leaks develop, such leaks shall be
caulked promptly if, due to size and continuity of fractures, it is found
impossible to reach the required pressure after pumping a reasonable
volume of grout at the minimum workable water cement ratio, the
speed of pumping shall be reduced. Following such reduction in
pumping speed if the desired result is not obtained in, grouting the
hole. In such an event, the hole shall be cleaned, the grout allowed to
set, and additional drilling and grouting shall be done in the hole or in

the adjacent area as determined in the field until the desired

resistance is built up. All pressure grouting operations shall be
performed in the pressure of responsible Engineer-in-charge of
grouting. After the grouting of any stage of a hole is finished the
pressure shall be maintained by means of a stop cock or other
suitable devices until the grout has set to the extent that it will be
retained in the hole. The arrangements of the grouting equipment
shall be such as to provide a continuous circulation of grout through
out the system and to permit accurate pressure control at the hole by
operation of a valve on the grout return line, regardless of how small
the grout intake may be. The equipment and lines shall be presented
becoming fouled by the constant circulation of grout and the periodic
flushing out of the system with water flushing shall be done with the
grout in take valve closed, the water supply valve open and the pump
running at full speed.
8.9.

GROUT PRESSURE:

The pressure should be as high as practicable but controlled to avoid

disturbance of rock structure.
a)

Under no conditions of water under pressure or rate of pumping be

increased suddenly.
An injection should be continued (unless
prevented by leakage in any hole or there is negligible grout
consumption). A useful rule is to stop pumping when the grout
consumption is less than 1.5 lug eon at pressure upto 3.5
Kg/Sq.Cm/50 PSI and 2 lug eon at pressure between 3.50 Kg/ Sq.
Cm/50 PSI and 10.50 Kg/Sq. Cm/150 PSI. If due to size and continuous
fractures, it is found impossible to reach the required pressure after
pumping reasonable volume of grout the minimum workable water
cement ratio shall be used and the speed of pumping shall be
reduced. Following such reduction pumping speed, if the desired
result is not obtained, grouting the hole will be discontinued. In such
case the hole shall be cleaned the grout allowed to set, and additional
drilling and grouting shall then be done in this hole or in the adjacent
are so as determined in the field until the desired resistance is built
up. All pressure grouting operations shall be performed in the
presence of a responsible Engineer in charge of grouting. After the
grouting of any stage of hole is finished the pressure shall be
maintained in the hole.

b)

Grouting pressure must be properly and carefully varied to suit the

depth of the holes, and character of rock with reference to open the
joints, seams etc., The highest possible pressure consistent, with
safety, speedy work and the largest possible coverage as determined
by pressure testing during grouting should be used. In some cases,
where deemed necessary, the upper seams shall be grouted in
advance of the regular programme to avoid disturbance to rock
structure. It is expected that in general grout pressure may go upto
7.00 Kg/Sq. Cm/100 PSI for consolidation grouting. Grouting pressure
must be properly and carefully varied to suit the depth of the holes,
distance from exposed rock surface and character of rock with

reference to open joints, seams etc., The highest possible pressure

consistent with safety speed work and the largest possible coverage,
as determined by pressure testing and check leveling during grouting
should be used. Where deemed necessary the upper seams shall be
grouted in advance of the regular programme in order to permit the
use of increased pressure on the lower seams.
8. 10. METHODS OF APPLYING GROUT:
a)

In general, stage grouting shall be adopted. It may be necessary or

desirable with reference to the field conditions to use different
sections of the grout holes, especially those of the high-pressure
grout holes. When such grouting of a hole is necessary, the grouting
shall be performed by attaching a packer to end of grout to the top of
the bottom section i.e. required to be grouted at a different pressure,
grouting at the required pressure and allowing the packer to reduce in
place until there is in back pressures; with drawing the grout supply
pipe to the top of the next higher section i.e. required to be grouted
at a different pressure and thus successively grouting the hole in
section at the specified pressure until the entire hole is completely
grouted, except that the grouting of the section shall be performed
without the use of packer. The Packers shall preferably consist of
elastic rings of rubber, leather or their suitable material attached to
the end of the grout supply pipes. The packers shall be designed so
that they can be expanded, to seal the drill holes at the specified
elevation and when expanded, shall be capable of withstanding
without leakage, for water pressure and the maximum grout pressure
to be used.

b)

For doing the high pressure grouting, the first holes shall be spaced
widely and shall be grouted before intermediate holes are drilled and
in this manner the drilling and grouting of the holes shall be
completed with such final spacing and depth of holes so as obtain to
continuous grout curtain.

8.11
a)

.TEST OF GROUTED WORK:

To test the efficiency and penetration of grout in the grout curtain,
core drill holes shall be drilled in the place of the grout curtain after
deep grouting operations are completed, core drilling shall be
preferably done with NX size bits and double tube core barrels and
they shall produce core 22mm in diameter. The NX holes will be
required to drill to be maximum depth of 30m/ 100 feet. All core
drilling shall be performed in a workman like manner, by competent
and experienced work men, and special care shall be exercised to
obtain cores in as good condition as possible from all holes. The drill
bit shall be pulled and the core removed as often as necessary to
secure the maximum possible layout of core. Wood on core boxes,
securely nailed, shall be used for placing the core in the correct
sequence and they will be aggregated accurately by the labeled
wooden blocks accounting to the measure distances in the hole. No
box shall contain core from more than one hole.

b)

8.12

The core drill holes shall be tested under a water pressure equal to or
a little less than the pressure for high pressure grouting and the
accounting and the account and limit of leakage in each hole
measured. If any hole should seam excessive leakages it shall be
grouted under pressure no test hole shall be driven and tested under
pressure the same manner. The foundation will be considered to the
consolidation satisfactory if the cement consumption less than 0.5
bags (25 Kgs) per 0.3 m of grout hole. If the cement consumption is
more, secondary and or tertiary and shall be drilled and grouted. The
test efficiency and generation of the low pressure grouting more drill
test holes shall be drilled at the rate of one for either 90 mm grouted
area.
.TECHNICAL FIELD RECORDS:

a)

Drilling pressure, washing pressure, testing and grouting records shall

be kept neatly and systematically as the work proceeds, by the
departmental Officers and the contractors should assist for the same.
The exact location of hole with reference to the existing changes
along the regulator shall be recorded and on accurate log of all
operation kept. Record maps and sections shall be completed showing
all subsurface conditions as found and corrected by grouting
operations. Representative cores shall be suitably boxed and
referenced. All information regarding the grouting, amount of grout
effect observed in the surrounding holes or rock etc., may be kept
under the following holes.

1.

Hole number.

2.

Type of hole and method of drilling.

3.

Position chainage with distance up steam or downstream of the

regulator.

4.

Top level and depth.

5.

Date and time of commencement of grouting.

6.

Date of Completion.

7.

Quantity of Cement consumed.

8.

Observations during grouting, concerning behaviour or hole under air

and water pressure, appearance of water of grouting application and
retention of grout pressure connection to and effect on adjacent holes
method of application of grout, stage grouting to enable completion of
geographical record of the foundation.

8.13.

PAYMENT

a)

Drilling of consolidation grout holes washing testing and grouting

holes will be done by the contractor as per pattern directed by
geologist of Geological Survey of India.

b)

Payment of drilling of 50 mm to 75 mm diameter grout gap hole made

on the unit rate of each running metre of holes drilled as entered for
in schedule A and all including cost of drilling 50mm to 75mm

diameter holes, grouting of holes, conducting in-situ permeability

tests using single packer/double packers including hire charges of
machinery, cost of all materials, all leads and lifts, depth initial
dewatering,
dewatering
during
drilling,
mobilization
and
demobilization of labour and equipment and all other operations
necessary to complete the finished item of work as per drawings and
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
8.14.

CURTAIN GROUTING:

a)

Curtain grout holes for curtain grouting to be drilled through after

contract is land to facilitate drilling of the these holes 75mm M.S.
black steel pipes will be kept in concrete masonry upto floor level.
The pipes for grout holes will be placed. The pipes and specials will
be procured by the contractor and he shall fix the pipes for holes as
per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
The
contractor shall see that no damage occurs to these pipes while
laying concrete/masonry. In case the required inclination is not
maintained by the contractor, before the drilling and grouting
operations are taken up, the re-drilling through masonry/concrete
upto foundation level shall be done by contractor.

b)

Payment for drilling of curtain grout hole 50mm to 75mm as per the
pattern indicated by the Geological Survey of India shall be made on
the unit rate of each running metre of holes drill as entered for in
schedule A and shall include cost of drilling 50mm to 74mm holes,
washing of holes conducting in-situ permeability test, cost of all
materials, all leads and lifts and de-lifts initial dewatering, dewatering
during drilling, mobilisation and demobilisation of labour and
equipment and all other operations necessary to complete the
finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the
Executive Engineer.

8.15.

GROUTING

a)

Grouting of curtain grout holes and consolidation grout holes 50mm

75mm will be done for foundation treatment as per I.S. 6066-1971 at
required pressure.

b)

Payment of grouting holes with cement slurry shall be made on unit

rate of one metric tonne of cement injected into the hole including
hire charges of machinery, erection and dismantling and shifting of all
machineries, labour charges, piping with all fixtures for supply of air
and water and all operational charges including the cost and
conveyance of cement Sampling of cement, testing etc., to complete
the finished item of work.

9.0.

OTHER ITEMS

9.1GRAVEL BACKING
Morum or Gravel backing to rough stone dry packing.
9.1.1. Gravel backing specified thickness to the rough stone dry packing
using the gravel of approved quality including cost and conveyance of
gravel, sampling and testing of gravel, stacking of gravel, seigniorage

charges, all water leads, preparation of base, mixing with water,

puddling, laying in position, with all leads, lifts, de-lifts, ramming,
finishing and left to sky until it dries up, and does not show signs of
yielding, all labour charges and all other operations necessary to
complete the finished item of work to specifications as per drawings
and as directed by engineer-in-charge.
9.1.2. PREPARATION OF BASE.
The surface to receive the gravel backing shall be neatly
trimmed to the required slope dimensions and free from all roots and
vegetation and profusely wetted before morum is laid on.
9.1.3. GRAVEL QUALITY :
a)

The gravel shall be composed of well added, course siliceous grains,

sharp and gritty touch and free from dirt and other deleterious matter.
It shall not contain lumps larger than 20mm and the fines (passing
through 75 Microns IS sieve) shall not exceed 10%.

b)

The liquid limit shall be - 20.

c)

Plasticity index-Not more than 6.

d)

Morum stacking shall be as per standards.

9.1.4. PREPARATIONS AND LAYING :

a)

Gravel shall be mixed with water on the previous day. Next day
morning it shall be well mixed and worked with mamoties till it can be
formed into stiff plastic walls.

b)

Gravel so mixed shall be carried in baskets to where it is to be laid

and deposited in a single layer to give 150 mm thick of finished
thickness and shall be well rammed in position with flat wooden
rammers or any other method approved by the Engineer.

c)

The finished surface of gravel shall be left untouched until it dries up

and does not show sings of yielding.

d)

If any thickness other than 150 mm is specified the work shall be

executed to this specification ramming in layers not exceeding 150
mm thickness.

9.1.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

A) MEASUREMENT:
a)
All linear measurements shall be in meters, correct to 0.01 of a
metre.
b)
c)

All Volumes shall be computed correct to 50.01 cubic metres.

The gravel shall be stacked and pre-measurements shall be taken

before lying.

One cubic metre of finished item of work shall not be less than 1.16
cubic metre of stack measurement.
B) PAYMENT:

A) The unit for payment shall be one cubic metre.

The tender rate in schedule - A shall be for 1 cubic metre of finished
work inclusive of cost of all material, sampling and testing, all leads, lifts,
labour charges, conveyance charges and incidental charges for completing
the work to the specifications and drawings.
9.2

ROUGH STONE
REVITMENT

DRY

PACKING

FOR

APRONS

AND

SIDE

9.2.1. GENERA:
The specifications for construction of 600mm/ 450mm/ 300mm rough
stone dry packing for aprons and revetments as specified in schedule A and
its materials.
9.2.2. SCOPE
Rough stone dry packing of specified thickness in single layer upto
600mm thick, in two layers for 1000mm (400mm thick layer in the bottom
and 600 mm thick layer on the top) and in three layers for 100 mm thick
using the stone of specified variety for bed pitching/side revetment including
cost and conveyance of stone, sampling and testing of stone, seigniorage
charges, preparation of bed, stacking of stone to departmental gauge for
premeasurements, packing, all leads, lifts, de-lifts, seigniorage charges,
labour charges, and all other operations necessary to complete the finished
item of work to the specifications as per drawings and as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge.
9.2.3. MATERIAL:
The provision of schedule D shall apply
a)

Stacking shall be done as detailed below at the locations specified or

ordered by the Engineer.

i)

Stacks shall be formed to regular shape and uniform cross sections.

ii)

Materials shall be stacked on even ground.

done in flood zones or in water logged area.

Stacking shall not be

iii) Rough stone shall be packed so closely as to give minimum quantity

of voids possible without actual dressing of stone to fill interstices. In
case of improper stacking done by the Contractor, the Engineer shall
have the right to either reject the stacks partly or completely.
iv) Unless otherwise specified templates shall be provided to the sizes
and dimension of the stack as may be specified at the contractors
expense.
9.2.4. PREPARATION OF BED AND SLOPES:
A. BED:

The surface on which the rough stone is to be laid shall be excavated

to the required level and leveled and prepared for the length and width as
shown on the drawings. The base shall be compacted suitably with hand
rammers or other means to have an even bedding.
No packing shall be on uncompacted made up soil.
B. SIDE SLOPES.
a)

9.2.5.

The sides of banks to receive rough stone revetment shall be trimmed

to the required slope and profiles put up by means of line and pegs at
intervals of 3 meters to ensure, regular, straight and an uniform slope
throughout. Depressions shall be filled and throughly compacted.
LAYING APRON (BED PITCHING) AND REVETMENT (PITCHING
TO SIDES):

i)

Apron (Bed Pitching)

a)

Apron shall be provided to the dimensions and levels shown on

drawings.

b)

To ensure regular and orderly disposition of the full intended quantity

of stone in the apron, template or cross walls on dry masonry shall be
built about a meter thick and to the full height of the specified
thickness of apron at intervals of 10 meters or closer as directed by
the Engineer, all along the length and width of the apron. In between
the cross walls the stone shall be hand-packed.

c)

The thickness of the apron shall be made with one stone only. Total
thickness shall not be made up in two or more layers.

d)

The stones shall be laid closely in position of the prepared bed and
firmly set with their broadest ends downwards so that they may meet
all round their bases and with the top of the stone level with finished
surface of packing. The stones shall be laid breaking joint as far as
possible in the direction of the flow of water. The stones shall be
placed normal to the surface to be protected.

e)

The interstices between adjacent stones shall be filled in with stones

of the proper size, well driven in, with crowbars to ensure tight
packing and complete filling or all interstices. Such filling shall be
carried on simultaneously with the placing in position of the large
stones and shall in no case be permitted to log behind. The final
wedging shall be done with the largest size chips or spalls practicable,
each chip or spall being well driven home with a hammer so that no
chip or spall possible of being picked up or removed by hand to
ensure tight packing. The sizes of spalls shall be minimum 25mm and
shall be suitable to fill the voids in the pitching.

f)

On completion, the surface presented by the apron revetment shall

be even throughout, free from irregularities and the required length,
breadth and slope as specified or as shown on the plans.

ii)

Revetment (Pitching to sides):

a)

Revetment shall be constructed to the required length, level, depth

and slopes shown on the drawings.

b)

Profiles or strings and pegs shall be put up to ensure that the pitching
is done true, straight and to the proper slope throughout.

c)

Revetment shall in all cases be built up from the foot of the bund to
be riveted and built up in courses upward Care is necessary that a
strong toe wall or other protection is always given to the revetment.
Which protective measure shall be shown on the plans.

d)

Stones shall be placed to the required length by derrick or by hand.

Stones shall be set normal to the slope and placed so that the largest
dimension is perpendicular to the face of the slope unless such
dimension is greater than the specified thickness of pitching. The
largest stones shall be placed in the bottom courses and for use as
headers for subsequent courses.

9.2.6. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

1) MEASUREMENT:
a)

These protection works shall be measured as set forth to close below.

i)

Unless otherwise specified, for measurement, materials shall have to

be stacked before laying and no extra cost will be paid to the
Contractor for

ii)

All linear measurements for apron and revetment shall be in meters

corrected to 0.01 metre. Volume shall be in cubic meters corrected to
0.01 cubic meter. The unit for payment shall be one cubic metre. 1
M3 revetment / Bed pitching shall not be less than 1.10 M3 of stock
measurements.

iii) Preparation of bed and trimming of the side slopes for laying apron
and revetment to sides shall be deemed to have been included in the
main item and shall not be measured separately unless otherwise
specified.
iv) No extra payment for the construction of template, cross walls in
apron shall be made.

2) PAYMENT:
a)

The tender rate for one cubic metre in the schedule A for finished
work of apron shall include the cost of preparing base, profiles, cost of
all material, conveyance, labour, tools and plants for laying
completing the work according to the drawings and specifications.

b)

The rate for one cubic metre of stone pitching to side slopes in
schedule A shall include the cost preparing the base by trimming,
putting the profiles, laying stone pitching of dry rubble to the
specified thickness, lines, curves, slopes and levels and cost of all
labour and materials including conveyance as well as tools and plants
required for the work in completing the work as per drawings.

9.3. C.C. GROUTING TO THE APRONS AND REVETMENTS INCLUDING

POINTING.
(REAPIR GROUTING)
9.3.1. SCOPE:
Repair grouting to aprons and revetments upto specified depth with
cement concrete of specified proportion using 20mm MSA graded metal and
pointing with cement motor of specified proportion including cost and
conveyance of cement and all other materials, seigniorage charges, sampling
and testing, all water leads, mixing charges, all leads, lifts and de-lifts and
other labour charges and all other operations necessary to complete the
finished item of work as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-incharge.
9.3.2. MATERIALS:
The provision of Schedule shall apply
9.3.3. (i)
The surface of the apron or revetments shall be thoroughly
cleaned and joints racked out 250 mm. depth or to any other depth as
specified by the Engineer. The whole surface shall be swept clean.
(ii) The joints shall then be filled in with cement concrete of
specified mix and graded broken aggregate of maximum size 20mm.
of the interstices are large, a larger size aggregate as specified by the
Engineer may be used. The concrete shall be rammed with flat bars,
trowels or flat ends or small thin crowbars to ensure effective
consolidation.
(iii) The surface shall then be neatly flush pointed with cement mortar of
specified mix covering the joints of the newly laid concrete while the
concrete filling still green.
(iv) The concrete and pointing shall be continuously kept wet for three
weeks.
9.3.4. MEASUREMENT:
All linear measurements shall be in meters, correct to 0.01 of a meter.
All areas shall be worked out correct to 0.01 of a square metre.
The unit rate in schedule A shall be per ten square meter., The rate
shall include all costs of cement concrete, surface, cleaning, filling joints with
cement concrete, ramming pointing, watering and tools and appliances
required for completing the grouting operation. This shall also include the
cost of bailing out of water where required unless otherwise specified.
9.4.

ELASTOMERIC BEARING

9.4.1. SCOPE OF WORK:

a)

The Section covers specifications for fully moulded Elastomeric

Bearings Pads.

9.4.2. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:

1)

Ministry of shipping and Transport Specification for Roads and Bridges

work section-2000 (including all amendments)

9.4.3. ELASTOMER BEARINGS:

The term bearing in this case shall refer to an Elastomeric bearing
consisting of one or more Elastomer slabs bonded to metal plates during
manufacture so as to form a sand-witch arrangement, while bearing pads
shall denote single unreinforced elastomer slabs.
9.4.4. MATERIALS:
(I) ELASTOMER:
(a) The elastomer to be used for bearings shall be made from natural or
synthetic rubber and shall satisfy the physical properties given below.
The test pieces required for the tests shall be selected from the
central layer of the bearings making up the selection.
9.4.5. PROPERTIES OF ELASTOMER
______________________________________________________________________________
____________
Test Method, IS

Value of the

characteristic
Property

Unit

specification

specified

reference
______________________________________________________________________________
____________
1.

Physical Properties

1.1. Hardness
60+5

IRHD

IS:

3400

(Part II)
1.2.
17

Minimum Tensile

MPa

Strength
1.3
400

Minimum Elongather

Maximum Compression
Set

Per cent

IS
(Part I)

Per cent

IS : 3400
(Part X)
duration

temperature
(h)
(deg C)

3400

3400

(Part I)

at break
2.

IS

CR
100+135
3.

+0

to

24.2

Accelerated Ageing
IS : 3400
(Part IV)
duration

temperature
(h)
(deg C)
CR
100+1
3.1 Max change in Hardness
+15
3.2
15

Max change in Tensile Per cent

+70
IRHD
-

Strength
3.3 Max change in Elongation
Per cent
40
______________________________________________________________________________
___________
II) ADHESIVE
Adhesive used in bearing location or attachment to bridge decks shall
be subject to the approval by the Engineer. It shall be of high viscosity
resign, which are cold setting and free of solvent. Adhesives shall not be
used to bond layers of cured elastomer.
III) REINFORCEMENT
Mild steel used for plate reinforcement shall comply with the
requirements of IS: 226.
9.4.6. CERTIFICATION
The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer a certificate by the
Manufacturer that, the elastomer and fabric (if used) in the Elastomeric
bearing conform to all the above requirements. The certification shall be
supported by an authenticated copy of the results of tests, performed by the
Manufacturer upon samples of the elastomer and fabric to be used in the
bearings.
9.4.7. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
(a) Thickness of a single layer bearing shall not exceed 20 percent of the
least plan dimension. The total thickness of a laminated bearing shall
not exceed 40 percent of the least plan dimension.
(b) Thickness of any internal layer of elastomer shall not be less than
6mm, nor greater than 12mm.
(c) The thickness of outer plates shall not be less than 3 mm and that of
inner plate not less than 1.5mm. Metal plates in which dowels are

located shall be in general, not less than 6mm. Thick. The edges of
all plates shall be slightly rounded to approximately 15mm radial.
The metal plates referred above should not be composed of thinner
plates joined together.
(d) Lamination bearing shall have side cover of elastomer of minimum
thickness of 6mm to protect the ends of the steel plates and to give a
reduced surface to that occurring at the edge of the bonded plates
but shall not be considered in evaluation of deformations. The cover
of elastomer at the top and bottom surfaces shall neither less than
3mm nor more than half the thickness of internal layer. The outer
cover at top and bottom surfaces, having thickness less than half that
of a single internal layer and not exceeding 3mm, may be considered
as a simple protection and need not therefore be considered in
calculating deflections.
Where the above elastomer covers are
provided, there is no objection to keep the thickness of top most and
bottom most plates same as that of inner plates.
(e) Bearing shall be set back from the edge of a bearing surface at a
distance not less than the thickness of the layer of Elastomer in
contact with the bearing surface to allow for spreading of the
elastomer under load.
(f) Bearing may be located in position by means of dowels or studs or
their devices, or bonded to the structure with approved adhesives
which shall general be of the high viscosity resin type, cold setting
and free from solvent.
(g) For spans on an inclined grade and without hinge bearings, the sole
plates shall be provided and the same beveled so that the concrete
surfaces and the bearing shall be kept horizontal.
(h) The plan dimensions of the bearings to be finally adopted shall
preferably be selected from series R 20 of IS: 1076-1967.
(i)

The arrangement of placing only one bearing under a girder shall be

permitted. Further, bearings of different sizes shall not be placed
next to each other to support a span.

(j)

The bearings shall be fully moulded when metal laminations are used.
These laminated Elastomeric bearings shall consist of one or more
elastomer slabs bonded to metal plates so as to from a sandwich
arrangement. Such fully moulded bearings shall be manufactured to
required size.

(k) The Bond between elastomer and metal or fabric shall be such that,
when a sample is tested for separation, failure shall occur within the
elastomer and not between the elastomer and metal or fabric.
9.4.8. INSPECTION AND TESTING
(a) The Contractor shall, whenever required during the course of
manufacture, arrange and offer all facilities for the purpose of
inspection and test of all or any of the materials used therein, any
officer as directed by the Engineer and the bearing OR, similar parts
shall not be used in the superstructure except on the production of

certificate of acceptance thereof from the Directorate of inspection

whenever necessary. All the inspection charges shall be payable by
the Contractor.
(b) The Contractor shall get the bearings tested for physical properties
and performance of bearings. The test pieces required for the test
shall be selected from the central layer of bearing. For the size of the
test pieces, methods of tests etc., the relevant MOST Standard shall
be followed. All the necessary tests shall followed. All the necessary
tests shall be carried out in a laboratory approved by Engineer.
Specimens for tests as may be required shall be supplied by the
Contractor at his cost and testing charges shall also be fully born by
the Contractor.
Only those bearings which pass the tests
satisfactorily will be accepted and will be permitted to be used. The
Engineer will not accept any responsibility for the cost of bearings
rejected.
9.4.9. PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION.
Proper arrangement shall be made by the Contractor to avoid
corrosion of metal plates or deterioration of adhesive by encasing he
bearings totally in elastomer or by some method approved by the
Engineer.
9.4.10. FIXING IN POSITION
a)

When bearing assemblies in plates are shown on the drawing to be

placed (not embedded) directly on concrete, the concrete bearing
area shall be constructed slightly above grade and shall be finished
by grinding.

b)

It shall be ensured that bearings are set truly leveled and in exact
position as indicated on the drawing so as to have find and even
bearings on the seat. Thin mortar pads (not exceeding 12mm) may
be made to meet with these requirements.

c)

It shall be ensured that the bottoms of the girders to be received on

the bearings are plane at the location of these bearings and care shall
be taken that the bearings are not displaced while placing the girders.

d)

Before fixing the Elastomeric bearings, the concrete surface on which

the bearings are to be placed shall be finished with wood float to a
level plane which shall not carry more than 1.5mm from a straight
edge placed in any direction across the area.

e)

The position of the bearings shall be accurately marked on the

pier/abutment cap and the area where the bearings are to be located
leveled accurately.

f)

The concrete surface shall be free from any loose material and
cleaned of any grease, oil paint etc., and it shall be dry at the time of
fixing.

g)

The surface of elastomer shall be free from any foreign material.

h)

Once prepared, the concrete or elastomer shall not be touched with

bare hand.

i)

The bearings shall be covered with canvas or a suitable covering

material to protect them from direct sunlight and weather until the
concrete of superstructure is cast.

j)

The bearings shall be fixed in position with epoxy resin adhesive of

approved quality.

k)

The concreting of superstructure shall be taken up only after ensuring

that the adhesive for fixing the bearing on pier / abutment cap has
set.

9.4.11.

TOLERANCES:

The tolerances given in table 2000-2 of MOST shall apply.

9.4.12.

MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

a)

Measurement for payment of Elastomeric bearing shall be on the

basis of cubic content measured in cubic centimeters of bearing pads
actually fixed in position on each as specified in schedule A.

b)

The rate of each type of bearings shall include the cost of supplying
including labour, material, equipment cost of anticorrosive
applications, cost of samples and their testing as directed by the
Engineer, the cost of adhesive for fixing them, fixing the bearing in
position and also costs of all operations necessary to complete the
work as per the drawings.

9.5.

REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES

9.5.1. APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

1)

IS: 459 - 1988 Specifications for concrete pipes with and without
reinforcement (Third revision)

2)

IS: 783 - 1985

Revision)

3)

IS:

4)

IS: 6066 - 1984

Recommendations for pressure grouting of rock
foundations in river valley projects (First revision)

5)

IS: 1838 - 1983

Specification for preformed fillers for expansion
joints in concrete pavements and structures (non-extruding and
resilient type) Part 1 Bitumen impregnated fiber (First Revision)

6)

IS: 3597 - 1985

7)

IS: 5382 - 1985 Rubber sealing rings for gas mains water mains and
sewers (First revision)

8)

IS: 5751 - 1969 precast coping blocks

code of practice for laying of concrete pipes (First

9766 - 1981 Flexible PVC Compounds

Methods of test for concrete pipes (First revision).

OTHER PUBLICATIONS
Ministry of Shipping and Transport Specifications for road and bridge
works N. 7900
9.5.2. SCOPE

The scope for the items include supply, laying joining reinforced
cement concrete pipes including collars of the diameter and lengths
require at the locations as shown on the drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer and in accordance with the requirements of these
specifications.
9.5.3. SUPPLY OF PIPES
a)

Pipes shall be of specified diameter. NP Class conforming to IS: 4581988. Minimum length of the pipe shall not be less than 2.5 Meters.
The contractor shall order and supply the pipes for work on the basis
of the drawings.
The following information shall be clearly marked on each pipe for
acceptance.

i)

Class of pipe

ii)

Date of manufacture

iii) Name of manufacturer or his registered trade-mark or both, and

iv) I.S.I. certification mark
9.5.4. HANDLING AND LAYING OF PIPES
(a) Work shall be done as per IS: 783-1985 or its latest editions.
(b) Reasonable care shall be exercised, in loading, transporting and
unloading or concrete pipes. Handling shall be such as to avoid
impact.
(c) All pipe sections and connections shall be inspected carefully before
being laid Broken or defective pipe shall not be used.
(d) Trench shall be of sufficient width to provide a free working space on
each side of the pipe the free working space shall be preferably, not
more than one third of the diameter of the pipe and not less than 15
cm. on either side.
(e) Pipes shall be lowered into the trenches carefully by mechanical
appliances.
(f) Pipes shall be laid true to line and grade as shown on drawings.
(g) Laying of pipes shall always proceed upgrade of as slope. If the pipes
have spigot and socket joints, the socket ends shall face upstream. In
case of pipes, with joints to be made with loose collars, the collars
shall be slipped on before the next pipe is laid.
(h) The sections of the pipe shall be joined together in such a manner
that there shall be as little unevenness as possible along the inside of
the pipe.
(i)

In no case pipe shall be laid directly on rock or any such hard

materials.

(j)

In pipes shall be placed in position until the foundations have been

approved by the Engineer.

9.5.5. JOINTING OF PIPES

Semi-flexible type joint as per IS : 783-1985 and as shown on the

drawing shall be provided. The rubber sealing rings used in the joint shall
conform to type 1 A of IS: 5382 - 1985. Rubber ring shall be placed on the
SPIGOT, which shall be forced into the socket of the pipe previously laid. This
shall compress the rubber ring as it rolls into angular space formed between
the two surfaces of the spigot and socket so as to form a flexible and water
TIGHT joint. The recess at the end of the pipes shall be filled with the cement
mortar (1:2). Every joint be kept wet for about 14 days.
9.5.6. BACK FILLING OF TRENCHES
a)

Trenches shall be kept free from water until the material in the Joints
has hardened. Walking or working on the completed pipe shall not be
permitted until the trench has been back filled to height of at least 45
com over the pipe except as may be necessary for back filling and
compaction.

b)

Trench shall be back filled after pipe has been laid subject to the
condition that jointing material has hardened. Only selected material
shall be used for back filling. Filling of the trench shall be carried out
simultaneously on both sides of pipe in such a manner that unequal
pressure does not occur.

c)

The cement concrete for pipe bedding and around joints shall be
provided as per drawings. The specifications of concrete mix shall be
as per the relevant specification N. 4.0

9.5.7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

Measurement, for payment, will be on running meter basis on the
pipeline laid including joints. The rate per R.M. of pipe in schedule A shall
include the cost of pipes and collars including loading, unloading, hauling,
handling, storing, laying in position, cost of rubber rings, rings, jointing and
curing including back filling and all other operations to complete the work as
per the specifications.
Concrete for bedding shall be paid separately based on the quantity
laid at relevant rate in schedule A on cubic metre basis.
9.6. PUDDLE CLAY
9.6.1. SCOPE:
Puddle clay made from impervious soils and laid around pipe barrels to
reduce seepage.
REQUIREMENTS:
The material used for these purposes, shall be impermeable, free from
excessive shrinkage and swelling, shall resist erosion and have adequate
stability. As for as possible, G-C or S.C. materials shall be used.
LAYING:
The material shall be mixed with water on the previous day Next day
morning it shall be well mixed and worked with mamoties till it can be formed
into stiff plastic balls. Material so mixed shall be carried in basket where it is

to be laid and deposited in layers of 150 mm thick and shall be well rammed
in position with wooden or iron rammers.
The finished surface of morum shall be left untouched until it dries up
and does not show signs of yielding.
MEASUREMENT:
Dimensions shall be measured to the nearest 0.01 meters and volume
worked out to the nearest 0.01 cum.
RATE:
The rate shall be for a unit of 10 cum and shall include all
operations of quarrying, transporting, watering, mixing, puddling and
laying in a position, ramming etc., complete. The rate shall include
cost and conveyance of water and earth with all leads lifts and de-lifts
and all other operations necessary to complete the finished item of
work as per drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
9.7. PROVIDING AND FIXING IN POSITION 25 MM EXPASION JOINTS
WITH 300 MM WIDE P.V.C. WATER STOPPERS AT JOINTS IN
BARRELS AND WING WALLS ETC. INCLUDING APPROVED JOINT
FILTER.
9.7.1. GENERAL
a)

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) water stops shall normally have a centre Bulb
of 12.4 mm inside diameter and 25 mm out side diameter. It shall be
300 mm width and shall have minimum of two or three longitudinal
ribs on each side of the bulb evenly distributed between the bulb and
the edge of the Water stop, Each rib being 635 mm heigh and the rib
adjacent to the edge shall have a web thickness of 12.5mm and the
rib adjacent to the edge shall have a web thickness of 10mm and the
Contractor however, will be permitted to use water stops of any
alternative manufacture, such as water stops with diamond shape and
bulb provided, they conform to the specifications and the functional
and constructional requirements. For this purpose, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer for approval, four sets of drawings
showing details of the water stops, including dimensions, shapes and
details of intersections and splices between water stops of the same
size and of different sizes. Fabrication and procurement of materials
shall be made only after the approval of the drawing by the Engineer.
Any fabrication or procurement of material performed prior to
approval of the drawings shall be at the Contractors risk. The
Engineer shall have the right to ask the Contractor to make any
changes in the drawings, which may be necessary to make the
finished installation conforming to the requirements and intent of
these specifications without additional cost. Approval by the Engineer
to the Contractors drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of his
obligation to meet all the requirements of these specifications or of
the responsibility for the correctness of the Contractors drawings.

b)

One set of the above drawings will be returned to the Contractor

approved, disapproved, or conditionally approve and these shall be
resubmitted for approval, if so directed.

c)

The water stops shall be dense, homogeneous and free from holes
and other imperfections. The water stops shall meet the material and
test requirements given hereinafter. The cross section of the water
stops shall be uniform along its length and the thickness shall be
symmetrical transversely. Tolerance for the dimensions given above
shall be plus 5mm in width, plus 2mm in thickness and plus 1mm for
other dimensions.

d)

Certified copies of the laboratory test report on the physical

properties of the PVC water stops and a certificate starting that PVC
water stops as furnished, meeting with all other requirements of those
specifications, be obtained by the Contractor from the manufacturer
of the PVC water stops and shall be submitted to the Engineer for
approval. Three 1.5 meters long samples of the PVC water stops shall
be obtained by the Contractor from the supplier and shall be
submitted to the Engineer. These supplies shall be furnished at least
60 days prior to embedment of any water stops in the structures.

e)

The contractor shall arrange to obtain the water stops from the
supplies in rolls securing packed, containing a single length of not less
than 12 linear meters and having inside diameter of not less than 0.3
meter.

9.7.2. MATERIALS
a)

The PVC water stops shall be fabricated by an extrusion process from

an Elastomeric plastic compound, the basic resin of which shall be
virgin polyvinyl chloride. No reclaimed polyvinyl chloride shall be
used.

b)

The compound shall contain any additional resins plasticizer,

inhibitors or other materials, needed to ensure that the finished
product will have the following physical characteristics.

i)

Tensile Strength minimum

ii)

Ultimate elongation minimum

iii) Tear resistance minimum

116 Kg/sq.cm
300%
49kg/Sq.cm

iv) Stiffness in flexure minimum

24.6 Kg/Sq.cm

v)

Accelerated extraction

24.6 Kg/Sq.cm

vi) Tensile strength minimum

105 Kg/sq.cm

vii) Ultimate elongation minimum

250%

viii) When tested in accordance with the effect of alkali test as described
in the following paragraphs, the material shall not shown an increase
in weight of more tan 0.25 percent or a loss in weight of more than
0.10 percent after 7 days, or more than 0.40 percent increase in
weight or more than 0.30 percent loss in weight after 28 days. After
28 days immersion the dimensions of the samples shall not differ

from those of the original sample by more that than 1.0 percent.
After 7 days immersion, the Durometer hardness reading of the
sample shall not differ by more than plus or minus 5 from reading the
original sample.
ix) When tested in accordance with the cold bend test described in the
following paragraph, the material shall show no signs of cracking or
hipping.
9.7.3. INSPECTION AND TESTS:
a)

All water stops shall be subject to laboratory tests before transport.

Samples of the finished water stops and material for tests shall be
furnished to the Engineer. All tests shall be made by and at the
expense of the contractor.

b)

Samples for laboratory tests to determine physical properties of the

compound shall be taken in accordance with the random process to
obtain following number of test units from each lot received.
Size of lot received
45 linear meter
45 to 90 linear meter
90 to 450 linear meter
450 to 900 linear meter
Over 900 linear meter

Number of test unit

1
2
4
8
15

c)

Laboratory tests determine physical properties of the water stops

required to be furnished under those specifications shall be performed
test specimen cut from test units taken from the finished products.
The contractor shall furnish the specimens at his cost for tests at
places as directed.

d)
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)

Tests shall be conducted in accordance with the following methods:

Tensile strength ASTM designation D 638
Elongation - ASTM Designation D 638
Durometer hardness - ASTM Designation D 2240 (Type a)
Accelerated contraction test.
Effect of alkali.
Clod bend test.
Impact resistance.

9.7.4. INSTALLATION:
a)

Location and embedment of the PVC water stops shall be shown on

the drawings, with approximately one-half of the width of the water
stop embedded in the concrete on each side of the joint. In order to
eliminate faulty installation that may result in leakage. Care shall be
taken that the water stops are correctly positioned and secured
during installation. All water stops shall be given installed so as to
from a continuous water -tight diaphragm in the joint, unless

otherwise shown. Adequate provision shall be made to completely

protect the water stops during the progress of the work.
b)

Additional vibration, over and above that used for adjacent concrete
placement, shall be carried out to assure complete embedment of the
water stop in the concrete. Large pieces of aggregate near the water
stop shall be removed in hand during embedment to assure complete
contact between the water stop and the surrounding concrete.
Splices in the continuity or at the intersection of junctions of PVC
water stops shall be performed by heat scaling the adjacent surface
in accordance with the Manufacturers recommendations.
A
thermostatically controlled electric heat source shall be used to make
all splices. The correct temperature at which splices should be made
will differ with the material compounds but should be sufficient to
melt. All splices shall be neat with ends of the joined water stops in
true alignment. A meter box guide and portable saw shall be
provided and used to cut the ends to be joined to ensure good
alignment and contact between joined surfaces. After splicing a remoulding iron with ribs and corrugations to match the pattern of the
water stop shall be used to reform the ribs at the splices. The
continuity of the members of the cross sections of the water stop (ribs
tubular center axis, protrusions and the like) shall be maintained
across the splices.

c)

Where splices are required between water stops of different sizes, the
splices shall be made as recommended by the manufacturer of the
water stops and drawings showing the details of the splices shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval as required in paragraph
General above.

d)

Prior to embedment, the edge of the water stops shall be secured to

looped wire in the end bulbs to improve the concrete bond as shown
on the drawings. The bars shall conform to the provisions of
specification 4.20 Reinforcement. The manner in which the water
stop is secured to the reinforcing bars shall be subject to approval.

9.7.5. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

Measurement for furnishing and placing PVC Water stops shall be made
along the centerline of water stops. Payment shall be made at the applicable
unit rate for one running meter rate, in the schedule A, with no allowance
for lap at splices and inter sections. The unit rate shall include the cost of
making splices and intersections and of furnishing all labour, equipment, and
materials required for installing the water stops and protecting the water
stops from damage during the progress of the work. The unit rate shall also
include the cost of preparing and submitting the drawings, producing samples
for approval of the Engineer and costs of all incidental work needed to
complete the work as per the specifications.
9.8.

PROVIDING WEEP HOLES:

Providing Weep holes as shown on the drawings and providing filters

and jali as per the drawings including cost of materials and labour complete.
9.8.1. GENERAL:
a) Rectangular weep holes:
Weep holes of the size 75 mm wide and 150 mm high or of circular
pipe size of 100 mm diameter as shown on the drawings shall be provided
and they shall extend through the full width of the masonry with a slope of
about 1 vertical to 20 horizontal towards the draining face drain moisture
from the back filling. The spacing of holes shall be as per the drawings, in
either direction staggered. The sides and bottom of weep holes in the interior
shall be made up in the stone/concrete having fairly plain surface and
channel so formed over with stones/ concrete lintels not less than 150 mm on
each side.
In stone masonry, generally the height of weep holes shall be the same
as the height of the course in which they are formed as directed by the
Engineer.
Filters behind weep holes with jali shall provided to the dimensions and
grades as shown on the drawings.
b)

In case of pipes, where the length of pipe falls short of the required
length, it shall be joined with necessary collars in CM 1:3 or as
directed by the Engineer to form a continuous hole in the body of
wall.

c)

Defective work shall not be paid. The interior of the weep holes shall
be free from all sand, mortar, stone pieces, dirt and other foreign
matter. Care shall be taken to prevent entrance of any foreign matter
into the weep holes during progress of the work.

9.8.2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:

Measurement for payment of weep holes shall be on the basis of
numbers actually formed. The payment will be made at the rate tender in
schedule A for each weep hole.
The rates shall include cost of furnishing all materials, transporting,
storing, testing, laying, fixing including jali pipes, filter as shown on the
drawings and cost of all incidental operation charges for carrying out the
work in accordance with the specifications.
9.9.

PROVIDING AND LAYING 100MM INTERNAL DIAMETER G.I.PIPE

DRAINAGE SPOUTS INCLUDING NECESSARY CAST IRON
GRATING AS PER DRAWINGS FOR ROAD BRIDGES.

9.9.1. SCOPE:
The waterspout shall be 100mm internal dia G.I. pipes. The pipe shall
be of medium grade used for domestic water supply conforming to IS: 1239
(Part. 1) - 1979 and shall also bear the mark of certification issued by the
Bureau of Indian Standards. The wall thickness shall be 4.5mm. The spouts

shall project at least 10cm outside the concrete and shall be rigidly fixed. A
cast iron grating shall be provided at the entry of the waterspout and shall be
fixed in the recess so as to be flush with the road surface. The grating shall
be painted with two coats of anticorrosive black bitumen paint. The quantity
and the size of the grating shall be got approved from the Engineer.
9.9.2. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT:
Measurement for payment shall be per number of water spouts fixed.
Payment at the unit rate mentioned in schedule A shall include cost of all
materials, labour, tools and incidental operations to complete the work as per
the specifications.
9.10

.PROVIDING ARCHITECTURAL COPING SLABS OF 150MM THICK

WITH CEMENT CONCRETE OVER WING/RETURN/PARAPET
WALLS WITH CEMENT MORTAR MM 7.5.
9.10.1 SCOPE:
a)

The coping slabs shall be precast with M-10 grade concrete using not
less than 220.00 Kgs of cement per cubic meter of concrete with
machine crushed graded aggregate of 40mm maximum size.

b)

The precast slabs shall be cured at least for 28 days prior to

transporting to site of fixing.

c)

For fixing cement mortar of MM-7.5 grade shall be laid evenly to an

average thickness of 15mm to the full width of the top of the wall and
the slabs be fixed. The joints shall be pointed with cement mortar
MM-10 mix.

d)

Measurement and Payment shall be on one cubic metre basis at

tender rate in schedule A which shall include cost of materials
recasting, curing, storing, transporting, fixing including cost of cement
mortar for fixing and pointing and all other incidental charges for
completing the work as per specifications.

9.11. RAILINGS:
9.11.1 General:
Railings shall not be placed until the centering of false work for the
span has been released and the pan is self-supporting.
The type of railing to be constructed shall be as shown on the
drawings.
The railing shall be carefully erected true to line and grade. Posts shall
be vertical within a tolerance not to exceed 6mm in 3 meters.
9.11.2 .

METAL RAILING:

All pipes used for railing shall be wrought iron, and all steel elements
shall be galvanized.
All complete steel rail elements, terminal sections posts, bolts, nuts,
hardware and other steel fittings shall be galvanized or painted with an
approved paint.

If galvanized, all element of the railing shall be free from abrasions,

rough, sharp edges and shall not be kinked or bent. If straightening is
necessary it shall be done by methods approved by the engineer.
The railing shall be carefully adjusted prior to fixing in place to ensure
proper matching at abutting joints and correct alignment and camber
throughout their length. Holes for field connections shall be drilled with the
railing in place in the structure at proper grade and alignment. Welding may
be substituted for riveting in field connections, only with the approval of the
Engineer.
Unless otherwise specified on the drawings metal railing shall be given
one shop coat of paint and three coats of paint after erection if sections are
not galvanized.
9.11.3.

CAST-IN SITU RAILING:

a)

The portion of the railing or parapet, which is to be cast in place, shall

be constructed in accordance with the requirements for cement
concrete for structures in specification 4.0.

b)

Forms shall either be of single width boards or shall be lined with

suitable material duly approved by the Engineer. Forms Joints in
plane surface will not be permitted.

c)

All moulding panel work and level strips shall be constructed

according to the details shown on the drawings. All corners in the
finished work shall be true, sharp and clean-cut and shall be free from
cracks, spalls or other defects.

9.11.4.
a)

PRECAST RAILING:

P recast members of railings shall be reinforced cement concrete and

shall conform to the specifications given in section 4. The precast
members shall be remove from the moulds as soon as practicable and
shall be kept damp for a period, of at least 21 days. During this period
they shall be protected from sun and wind. Any precast member that
becomes chipped marred, or cracked before or during the process of
placing shall be rejected.

9.11.5.

MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT:

Railing shall be measured in running meters. The rate of railing in

schedule A shall include the cost of all labour material, tools and plant
required, for doing the work, complete in all respects in accordance with
above specifications and shown on the drawings.
SCHEDULE - D:
MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP:
1.1.
1.1.1.

General
a)
No material shall be used for construction in any work until
notice has been given by the Executive Engineer that the test results
are satisfactory. No oral instruction should be followed.
b)
Recommendation of stacking and storage of construction
materials at site shall be in accordance with IS: 4082-1977.

c)
To be the best Quality: All materials, articles, and
workmanship shall be the best of their respective kinds for the class
of work described in the contract specifications and schedule. The
word best as used in the specifications shall mean, that in the
opinion of the Executive Engineer there is no superior quality of
material or finish of articles on the market and that there is no better
class of workmanship available for the nature of the particular item
described in the contract schedule. The contractor shall upon the
request of the Executive Engineer, furnish him with the vouchers to
prove that the materials are such as are specified.
1.1.2.

The tenderer has to do his own testing of materials and satisfy

himself that they conform to the specifications of respective I.S.I.
codes, before tendering.

1.1.3.

The contractor shall himself procure the required construction

materials of approved quality including the earth for formation of
embankment and water from quarries/sources of his choice. All such
quarries / sources of materials required for the work shall be got
approved by the Engineer-in-charge in writing well before their use on
the work. The materials as per standards of relevant I.S.I. codes only
will be accepted.

1.2.

SAMPLES

1.2.1

The representative samples of all materials should be procured by the

contractor and arrange to send them to the Engineer-in-charge for
conducting pre-construction tests and approval duly informing the
source of materials from where he has collected the samples.

1.2.2

The raw and processed samples should be supplied at the

contractors expense to the Engineer-in-charge within 14days after
signing of the agreement. For testing of samples maximum of 60
days time will be required, each sample shall approximately consist of
100 Kgs, of materials or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

1.2.3

If the contractor desire to change the source of materials, he shall

supply the raw and processed representative samples at his own
expense to the Engineer-in-charge at least 60 days before its use for
pre-construction tests and approval.

1.2.4

In addition to pre-construction tests and approval of quarries, the

Engineer may test the aggregate for their suitability during their
processing. The contractor shall provide such facilities as may be
necessary for procuring at no extra cost representative samples at
the aggregate processing plant and at the batching plant. Final
acceptance of the materials will be based on the acceptable test
results of samples taken from the construction site only.

1.2.5.

The contractor has to bear the cost of raw and processed

representative samples, laboratory tests and field tests.
The
contractor has to arrange the required men and material for collecting
the samples and bear the cost thereon required for transporting them
to the laboratory also. The contractor should quote his rates for
finished item or work for the items or works of Schedule A Keeping in

view the cost of pre and processed samples to be submitted to the

Engineer and also the rate of progress and the time required for
conducting laboratory tests. No extension of time will be granted for
any delay occurred in collecting the samples and conducting preconstruction tests in the laboratory and getting approval.
1.3.

PROCUREMENT

1.3.1

The rates quoted for all items shall include cost and conveyance of all
materials with all leads.

1.3.2

It will be the tenderers responsibility to satisfy himself that sufficient

quantities of construction materials required for the works shall exist
in the borrow areas or quarry sites. The Dep. does not accept any
responsibility either in handing over the quarries or procuring the
materials or any other facilities. The tenderer will not be entitled for
any extra rate or claim for the misjudgment on his part for quantity
and quality of materials available in the quarries.

1.3.3

Failure by the Tenderer to have done all the things, which in

accordance with this condition, he is deemed to have done, shall not
relieve the successful tenderer of the responsibility for satisfactory
completing the works as required at the rates quoted by him.

1.3.4

The contractor shall make his own enquiries regarding the availability
of other materials and make his own arrangements for procuring
them.

1.3.5

The materials for embankment construction shall be obtained and got

approved by the Engineer-in-charge. The responsibility for arranging
and obtaining the land for borrowing or exploitation in any other who
shall rest with the contractor, who shall ensure smooth and
uninterrupted supply of materials for the quantity required in
construction during the construction period. No separate cost will be
paid.

1.3.6

Similarly, the supply of aggregates for construction shall be of

approved quality approved by the Executive Engineer. Responsibility
for arranging uninterrupted supply of materials from the source shall
be that of the contractor. No separate cost will be paid.

1.3.7

The contractor has to open and develop the quarry for the stone and
aggregate required. All incidentals such as removal of over burden,
stripping etc. in the quarry should be done by the contractor. The
contractor shall make his arrangements for maintaining the approach
roads to quarry for conveying the materials to site of work.

1.3.8

The contractors have to make their own arrangements for storage

and conveyance of water and storage at work site for construction
purpose, no extra payment will be made to the contractor over and
above their tender rates for water lead for storage arrangements.

1.3.9

The tenderer should inspect the site and check-up the possible water
source for carrying out the entire work throughout the year in
monsoon and non-monsoon seasons irrespective of the quantum of

rainfall and quote their rates accordingly. No subsequent claims for

extra water lead will be entertained under any circumstances.
1.3.10 The materials and labour utilized in the execution of work by the
contractor shall not be less than that given in the A.P.P.W.D. standard
data for the relevant item.
1.3.11 Lay-out of material stacks: the Contractor shall deposit materials for
the purpose of the work on such parts only of the ground as may be
approved by the Engineer in charge. He shall submit, for the approval
of the Executive Engineer, before starting work, a detailed site survey
clearly indicating positions and areas where materials shall be
stacked and sheds built.
1.4.

DEFECTIVE MATERIAL:

1.4.1

All materials which the Executive Engineer/his representative has

determined as not conforming to the requirements of the contract will
be rejected whether in place or not.
They shall be removed
immediately from the site as directed. Materials, which have been
found defective, and which have been subsequently corrected, shall
not be used in the work unless approval accorded in writing by the
Engineer in charge. Upon failure of the contractor to comply with any
order of the Engineer in charge, given under this clause, the Engineer
in charge shall have authority to cause the removal of rejected
material and to deduct the removal cost hereof from any money due
to the contractor.

1.4.2

The rejected rubble and spoils should be dumped far away from work
spot as directed by the Engineer in charge. The muck, boulders etc.
fallen on the approach roads, ramps, etc. below the place should be
removed by the contractor immediately after blasting at the
contractors cost. In case the above materials are not cleared within
24 hours of issue of departmental instructions, the same will be
removed by the Department and the cost thereof will be recovered
from the contractors bills.

1.4.3

The Dept. will not be liable for any compensation due to breakdown in
machinery, water supply or electricity or delay in supply of materials
and for damage due to rains and floods.

1.4.4

The Executive Engineer shall have power to reject at any stage, any
work which he considers being defective in quality of material or
workmanship and he shall not be debarred from rejecting wrought
materials by reason of his having previously passed them in not
worked condition. Any portion of the work or materials rejected or
pronounced to be inferring or not in accordance with the drawings
and specifications shall be taken down and removed from the worksite at the contractors expense, within 24 hours after written
instructions to that effect have been given by the Executive Engineer.
Replacement shall at once be made in accordance with the
specifications and drawings, at the contractors expense.

1.4.5

In case of default on the part of the contractor to carryout such orders

the Executive Engineer shall have power to employ and pay other

persons to carry out the orders at the contractors risk and all
expense consequent thereon and incidental thereto shall be borne by
the contractor.
1.4.6

Executive Engineers decisions to prevent dispute and litigation, it

shall be accepted as an inseparable part of the contract in the
matters regarding materials, workmanship, removal of improper work,
interpretation of the contract drawings and contract specifications,
mode of procedure and the carrying out of the work, the decision of
the Executive Engineer shall be final and binding on the contractor
and in any technical question which may arise touching the contract,
the Executive Engineers decision shall be final and conclusive. In the
case of any difference between Executive Engineer and contractor on
matters regarding materials, workmanship, removal of improper work,
interpretation of contract drawings and contract specifications, mode
of procedure and the carrying out of the work the contractor shall
have a right of appeal to the next higher authority viz., the
Superintending Engineer of the circle, and the decision of the latter
shall be final and conclusive.

TEST INSPCETION AND REJECTION OF DEFECTIVE MATERIAL AND

WORK:
1.5.

LABORATORY SETUP:

1.5.1.

For the works costing Rs. 50.00 lakhs and above the contractor shall
setup a laboratory and equip the same with adequate equipment and
personnel in order to carry out all required tests and Quality Control
work as per specifications or as directed by the Engineer. The internal
layout of the laboratory shall be as given in the drawing and list of
equipment shall be got approved from the Engineer in advance.

1.5.2.. The cost of laboratory building including services, essential supplies

like water, electricity, sanitary and their maintenance and cost of all
equipment, tools, materials, labour and incidentals to perform tests
and other operations of quality control according the specification
requirement shall be deemed to be incidental to the work and no
extra payment shall made for the same.
1.6.

STANDARD TESTS AND QUALITY

1.6.1.

The day to day and a periodical tests to be carried out on materials,

finished or otherwise shall be specified by the Engineer in charge
from time to time and the contractor shall allow all facilities and
cooperation towards collection of samples and cores etc., The
contractor shall however make good at his cost, materials, mixes and
cores with similar or other materials as may be directed and to the
satisfaction of the Engineer in charge.

1.6.2.

An authorized representative of the contractor shall remain present at

the time when the samples or cores etc., are taken shall authenticate
the fact if so required. Should the contractors agent fail to be
present as aforesaid the samples or cores etc., taken by the Engineer
in charge, or his representative shall be considered to be authentic.

The contractor however will be informed of the details of such

samples and cores etc., having been taken.
1.6.3.

The material, mixes and cores etc., shall be tested day to day
periodically at the laboratory available at the site or at other
laboratory or place that the Executive Engineer may direct and the
results given thereby shall be considered correct authentic by the
contractor. It shall then be the contractors responsibility to execute
work to the standard, based on the laboratory designs and tests.

1.6.4.

The contractor shall provide proper facilities at all times, for the
testing of materials, and inspection of work by the Engineer in charge,
and the Engineer in charge shall accordingly also have access at all
times to the place of storage or manufacture where materials are
being made for use under the contract to determine that manufacture
is proceeding in according with drawings and specifications.

1.6.5.

The contractor shall, upon demand, also forward for the Executive
Engineers inspection, test certificates supplied by the vendors, when
he is purchasing consignments of cement, steel and other materials in
respect of which such certificates are usually available.

2.1.

EARTH FOR EMBANKMENT:

2.1.1.

The suitability of foundation for placing embankment materials

thereon and all materials proposed for use in construction of
embankment shall be determined by the Engineer well in advance on
the basis of laboratory test results. Chemical and physical tests of
the materials proposed for construction of embankment shall be
carried out to ensure that the soil does not contain soluble lime
content, Soluble lime salt content or cohesion less fines, in quantities
harmful to the embankments.

2.1.2.

Materials for construction of embankment should be free from the

organic material. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer all
materials shall be deposited in embankment so that cobbles, gravel
materials shall be deposited in embankments so that cobbles, gravel
and boulders are well distributed through other material and not
rested in any position within or under the embankment as per clause
6.4 of I.S. 4701-1982.

2.1.3.

The soils and Morum useful for construction of embankment shall be

classified as impervious and semi pervious based on laboratory test
results. They shall utilize on the embankment work.

2.1.4. SOILS FOR EMBANKMENT:

To ascertain the suitability of soils for embankment purpose, soils
samples shall be taken in accordance to clause.
No.303.2.1.1. and
303.2.1.2. of A.P.S.S.
2.1.5. TESTING AND SELECTION OF SUITABLE SOILS:

The soil samples collected as above shall be tested in accordance

with the Indian standards for the following properties to Asses their suitability
for embankment.
(a) Grain size analysis.
(b) Atlernbourg limits.
(c) Shrinkage limit.
(d) Optimum Moisture content.
(e) Proctors density.
(f) Shear strength of optimum Moisture content and 100% saturation.
(g) Permeability at Proctors density.
Note: Additional tests shall be conducted where so required.
2.1.6. HOMOGENEOUS SECTION:
The soil for embankment construction of Homogeneous section shall
generally be in accordance with the recommendations contained in
I.S. 8826-1978 (Para. 8)
2.1.7. ZONAL EMBANKMENTS:
CH and SC type of soils with high plasticity index shall not be used in
the casing zone.
2.1.8.

The impervious zone shall be built of materials having sufficient

percentage of clay so that it can be compacted at optimum moisture
content by suitable compacting equipment to maximum dry density.
Soils, which are sufficiently impervious but have lower plasticity and
higher density and shear strength shall be used in the hearting zone.
The dry density of the soil fraction in compacted embankment
material shall not be less than 98% of the maximum dry density at
optimum moisture content obtained in accordance with I.S.2720(Part. VII) - 1980 or as specified.

2.2. CEMENT:
2.2.1.

The contractor has to make his own arrangements for the

procurement of cement required for the works subject to the
following.

2.2.2.

The contractor shall procure 43 grade ordinary portland cement

conforming to IS 8112-1989 or 53 grade OPC as per IS.12269-1990 in
standard packing of 50kg/bag as fresh as possible from the authorized
manufactures/dealers. Cement procured from non-B.I.S. license firms

will not be allowed.

The Contractor shall make necessary
arrangements at his own cost to the satisfaction of the Executive
Engineer for actual weighment of random samples from the available
stock. Cement shall be got tested as directed by the Executive
Engineer at least 15 days in advance before its actual use on work.
Cement required for the testing shall be supplied by the contractor
free of cost. All tests shall be conducted in accordance with I.S.4031 1988 and I.S.4032 - 1968 and I.S.3535 - 1986.
2.2.3.

The contractor has to purchase the cement on the name of work and
on the name of contractor. The cement without mentioning the above
two names will not be accepted. Vendors test certificates and
weighment bills are to be furnished to the Executive Engineer. Any
quantity purchased without test certificate will not be accepted for
use on the work.

2.2.4.

a)
The contractor should procure the cement, required during the
next 30 days, at least a fortnight in advance to facilitate conducting
test on the quality of cement, so brought to site and shall be stored in
accordance with clause No.112 of APSS The contractor shall forth with
remove from the work site any cement that the Engineer in charge
may disallow for use on account of its failure to meet with the
required standards.
b)
No cement procured by the contractor shall be used in any work
until notice has been given by the Executive Engineer, that test
results are satisfactory. Physical and chemical requirement shall
conform to IS: 269-1989.
c)
The contractor has to furnish the test certificates and samples
for testing of each batch and each consignment to the Executive
Engineer immediately after receipt of cement into the godown for
verification and testing.

2.2.5.

The contractor will have to construct sheds at approved locations

having a capacity for storing cement required for not less than 30
days use. The Executive Engineer or his representative shall have
free access to such stores at all times for verifications of the stocks
received, used on works and balance. A stock register should be kept
in the store shed to facilitate such verification. If any difference is
observed based on the carriage in-wards, carriage outwards and
theoretical requirement of cement for finished work. The contract will
be cancelled and the contractor will be blacklisted.

2.2.6.

The contractor shall further, at all times satisfy the Executive

Engineer on demand by production of records and books or by
submission of returns and other proofs as directed that only the
cement tested and approved by the Executive Engineer is being used.
The contractor shall at all times keep his records upto date to enable
the Executive Engineer to apply such checks as he may desire.

2.2.7.

Cement more than 3 months shall invariably be tested to ascertain

that it satisfies the acceptability requirements. If any reduction in
strength of cement is observed in the tests the contractor shall forth
with remove the respective consignment from the stores. For such
rejection/removed no claim will be entertained.

2.2.8.

Usage of cement on works, be it for concrete or for mortar or

otherwise, should be done only by weight and not by volume.

2.2.9.

Cement Storage: Recommendations of stacking and storage of

cement at site shall be as per IS: 4082-1977.

a)

Cement bags shall be stored in dry, weather proof godown, adequate

precautions shall be taken to ensure stacking of cement bags in such
as to keep them about 150mm to 200mm clear above floor and
250mm to 300mm clear of walls.

b)

The height of stack shall not ordinarily be more than 10 bags and in
no case more than 15 bags (except for very short periods) to prevent
possibility of lumping up under pressure. Cement bag shall be
stacked in a manner to facilitate their removal and use in the order in
which they are received.

c)

Cement shall be stored at the work site in such a manner as to

prevent deterioration to moisture.

d)

Cement which has become caked or otherwise damaged by getting

wet or for any other reason shall on no account be used on the work.

e)

If cement is not properly stored as specified above, the contractor will

not be allowed to use the cement for the work.

2.3.

STEEL:

2.3.1.

The various types for steel shall conform to relevant

I.S. Specifications as provided in A.P.S.S.No.126.

2.3.2.

The contractor has to make his own arrangements for procurement of

tested steel required for the work. Steel for use in head works, major
bridges/ buildings, water supply schemes and major structures on

main canals, branch canals, etc., shall invariably be procured from

main manufacturers. Test certificates conforming to I.S. No. 17861985 are to be furnished to the Executive Engineer before using the
steel on works. The HYSD steel (I.S.1786 -1985) bars should have
TOR mark.
2.3.3.

The contractor has to purchase the steel on the name of work and on
the name of contractor and furnish the same Executive Engineer. The
steel with out mentioning the above two names will not be accepted,
vendors test certificates and weighment bills are to be furnished to
the Executive Engineer. Any quantity purchased without test
certificates will not be accepted for use on the works.

2.3.4.

If any difference is observed based on carriage inwards, carriage

outwards theoretical requirement of steel for finished work, the
contract will be cancelled and the contractor will be black listed.

2.3.5.

The diameter and weight of steel should be as per I.S.1786-1985 or

relevant I.S. specification with subsequent revisions from time to
time.

______________________________________________________________________________
_________
Sl.

Diameter of rod Sectional weight in Kilogram per running

meter
No

both for M.S. and HYSD Steel

______________________________________________________________________________
___________
1.

6 Millimeters

0.22

2.

8 Millimeters

0.39

3.

10 Millimeters

0.62

4.

12 Millimeters

0.89

5.

14 Millimeters

1.21

6.

16 Millimeters

1.58

7.
8.

18 Millimeters
20 Millimeters

2.00
2.47

9.

22 Millimeters

2.98

10.

25 Millimeters

3.85

11.

28 Millimeters

4.83

12.

32 Millimeters

6.31

13.

33 Millimeters

6.71

14.

36 Millimeters

7.99

15.

40 Millimeters

9.86

16.

42 Millimeters

10.88

Note: If any rods other than those specified above are used, the weights shall
be as per standard steel tables.
2.3.6. PROCUREMENT
a)

The contractor has to furnish the test certificates issued by the

vendors

and

samples

for

testing

for

each

batch

and

each

consignment to the Executive Engineer immediately after receipt of

steel in the stockyard at site of work for verification and for testing.
b)

No steel procured by the contractor shall be used in any work until

notice has been given by the Executive Engineer, that the test results
are satisfactory.

Storage:

a) Reinforcement steel and binding wire shall be stored above

ground surface up on platform, skids or other supports protected as

far as practicable from surface deteriorations by direct contact with
undesirable elements or by exposure to conditions producing rust and
corrosion. Bars shall be so supported as to avoid distortion and
sagging of long lengths. All the reinforcement of same designation
shall be stacked separately and distinctly marked.
b)

Recommendation of stacking and storage of steel at site shall be in

accordance with IS : 4082-1977

2.4.

BLASTING MATERIALS

2.4.1.

The contractor shall make his won arrangements to procure blasting

materials.

It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to store

materials in accordance with the rules of the explosive act or other

rules framed by the Govt. of India, He should possess acquire proper
license for transport, possession, and use of explosives and short
firers licenses as per revised explosives Act 1983.
The contractor has to purchase the blasting materials on the name of
work and on the name of contractor.

The blasting materials with out

mentioning the above two names on the bills will not be accepted.
2.4.2.

All the materials such as explosives, detonator, fuse coils, tamping

materials etc., that are proposed to be used in the blasting operations shall
have the prior approval of the Engineer. Only explosives of required make and
strength are to be used.
Black powder and safe explosives shall be used wherever possible.
Explosives with nitro-glycerin shall be used where the above explosives are
not effective.
The use of use with only one protective coat is prohibited., The fuse
shall be sufficiently water resistance as to be unaffected when immersed in
water for thirty minutes. Rate of burning of the fuse shall be uniform and not
less than 25 millimeters of length per 4 seconds with 10% (ten percent)
tolerance on either side. The fuse known as instantaneous fuse shall not be
used.
The fuse shall be inspected before use and the moist, damaged or
broken ones discarded. The rate of burning of all new types of fuses shall be
examined.

When they have been in stock for a long time, they shall be

treated before use.

The detonators used shall be capable of producing

effective blasting of the explosive.

2.4.3. STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES:
The Contractor shall build a magazine or make suitable permanent
arrangements at his cost for safe storage of the explosives. Contractor shall
provide portable magazine for carrying the explosives to work-spot form the
magazine at his cost. The site of the magazine, its capacity and design shall
be subject to approval by the Engineer and the Inspector of explosives before
the construction is taken up. As a rule, the explosives should be stored in a
clean, dry, well ventilated, bulletproof and Fireproof building, on an isolated
site.

The Contractor shall provide armed guard security of required number

of explosives magazine, or while transporting to worksite, as per rules in
force at his cost.
The explosives, detonators, and fuse coils shall each be separately
stored.
A careful and day to account of the use of explosives shall be kept by
the Contractor in a register in a manner prescribed by the Engineer. The
Engineer may also pay surprise visits to the storage magazine. In case of any
unaccounted storage of the explosives, or if the account is not found to have
been maintained in a manner prescribed, by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall be liable to be penalized, in which case, he shall not be entitled to any
compensation for the losses etc. The action taken under this clause shall be
in addition to that which might be taken by the competent civil authorities in
the Court of Law.
The magazine shall at all times be kept scrupulously clean.
No unauthorized person should at any time be admitted inside the
magazine. A notice shall be hang near the storage prohibiting entrance of
unauthorized persons.
The magazine on no account be opened during or on the approach of
a thunder storm and no person shall remain in the vicinity of the magazine
during such periods.
Magazine shoes without nails shall at all times be kept in the
magazine and a wooden tub or cement through about 300 millimeter high
and 450 millimeter in diameter filled with water shall be fixed near the door
of the magazine.
Persons entering the magazine must put on the magazine shoes
which shall be provided by the Contractor for the purpose and be careful:
(i)

not to put their feet on the clear floor unless they have the magazine
shoes on :

(ii) not to allow the magazine shoes to touch ground outside the clean
floor:
(iii) not to allow any dirt or grit to fall on the clean floor.
Persons with bare foot shall, before entering the magazine, dip their
feet in water and then step direct from tub over the barrier (if there be one)
on the clean floor.
A brush or broom shall be kept in the lobby of the magazine, for
cleaning the magazine on each occasion it is opened for the receipt, delivery
or inspection of explosives. No matches or inflammable material shall be
allowed in the magazine. Light shall be obtained from the electric storage
battery lantern.
No person having articles of steel or iron on him shall be allowed to
enter the magazine.

Oily cotton, rags, wastes and articles liable to spontaneous ignition

shall not be allowed inside the magazine.
Workmen shall be examined before they enter the magazine to see
that they have none of the prohibited articles on them.
No tools or implements other that those made of copper, brass
gunmetal or wood shall be allowed inside the magazine. All tools shall be
used with extreme gentleness and care.
Boxes of explosives shall not be thrown down or dragged along the
floor, and shall be stacked on wooden trestles.
Where there are white ants, the legs of the trestles should rest in
shallow copper, lead or brass bowls containing water, Open boxes of
Dynamite shall never be exposed to the direct rays of the sun. Empty boxes
or loose packing materials shall not be kept inside the magazine. Magazines
shall be inspected at least twice a year by an officer representing the
Engineer.
He shall see that all the rules are strictly complied with. The
magazine shall have lightning conductor, which should be got tested at least
once a year. The contractor shall, comply with all the recommendations
made by the officer testing the lightning conductor and also rectify the
defects notified to him within 15 days, failing which the Engineer shall be
entitled to comply with the same at the contractors expenses, which shall
not be open to question. The Engineer may take any action that he may
consider fit at the cost of the Contractor.
The following shall be hanged in the lobby of the magazine.
a)

A copy of rules both in English and in the languages which the

workers concerned are familiar with.

b)

A statement showing the stock in the magazine on that day.

c)

A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightning

conductor.

d)

A notice that smoking is strictly prohibited.

2.5.
STONE FOR MASONRY:
2.5.1. GENERAL
2.5.2.

The following specifications shall govern the quality of material and

general practices of construction of masonry for the dams and
appurtenant structures like spill ways, non-over flow dams, retaining
walls, regulators, bridges and other massive masonry structures with

a view to ensure strength durability, impermeability and uniformity.

The masonry shall conform generally to I.S. 8605-1977 and special
specifications elaborated hereunder.
2.5.3. MATERIALS
2.5.4. STONE
2.5.6. QUALITY:
All stones used shall be hard, dense, durable, tough sound and clean.
They shall be free from decay, weathered faces, soft seams, coatings, holes,
veins, flaws, cracks, stains and other defects Stones not in uniform colour
texture and/or with stains may be permitted only after proper tests.
2.5.7. STRENGTH:
The strength of stones shall be adequate to carry the load imposed
allowing a suitable factor of safety.
The crushing strength shall be
determined in accordance with the I.S.1121 (Part-1) 1974., and shall be not
less than what is detailed below :
Sl.No.

Type of Stone

Minimum crushing Strength

1.

Granite

1,000 Kg/Sq. Cm.

2.

Basalt

400 Kg/Sq.cm.

3.

Lime Stone

200 Kg/Sq.cm.

2.5.8. Water absorption: The percentage of water absorption shall

generally not exceed 5 percent by weight as determined in
accordance with I.S.1124-1974.
2.5.9. STONE FOR MASONRY:
The stone for masonry shall satisfy the requirement in respect of
compressive strength, durability and water absorption and its general quality
as indicated in 5.6 to 5.8. The size of stone shall normally vary from 0.05 to
0.01m3. The stones shall be taken from quarries approved from Geological
and Engineering considerations. No stone shall weigh less than 25 Kg. The
stone used in the hearting shall be roughly cubical in shape. No stone
weighing between 75 Kg and 150 Kg shall be less than 225 mm in any
direction and no stone weighing between 25 Kg and 75 Kg shall be less than
150 mm in any direction.
2.5.10. Spalls with minimum dimensions of 200 mm to 100 mm shall be used
to wedge into thick mortar spaces. They shall not normally exceed 10
percent of the volume of stone masonry.

2.5.11. Stone for coursed face work: The height of the stone for face work
shall be uniform and is recommended to be 300 mm including mortar joint.
The length and depth of the face stone shall not be less than the height of
the stone. At least 50 percent of the stones shall have length more than
twice the height of the stone. At least one third of the stones shall be bond
stones projecting not less than 2 1/2 times the height into the masonry. The
remaining shall be header stones with depth not less than 1 1/2 times the
height of the stone. The stones shall hammer dressed on face and one line
chisel dressed on bed, top and sides for a minimum depth of 75 mm upto,
which the stones shall be true and rectangular. Beyond 75mm depth, the
stones may be tapered but the tail end of the stones shall have at least half
the area of the face.
Bushing on the faces of the stones shall not project more than
40mm.
2.5.12.

HEADER STONES

The header stones shall not be less than 300mm in length, one and
half times in depth.
2.5.13.

STRETCHER STONES

The stretcher, stones shall not be less than 600mm in length and not
less than its height in depth.
2.5.14.

QUOINS:

Quin stones shall be of the same height as the faces but shall be true
and rectangular on two faces with the face dressing for 75mm depth in beds
and sides. The stone shall be at least 300 mm long on one face and 450 mm
on the other face.
2.5.15.BOND STONES:
The bond stones shall not be less than 300 mm in length and two and
half times its height in depth.
2.5.16.

Stone for uncoursed face work: Stones for uncoursed face work

shall be selected from stones meeting the requirement of stones for coursed
face work (See 5.11) except that the stones shall be hammer dressed. The
stones shall be nearly rectangular.
2.5.17.

ROUGH STONE (For pitching & Revetment)

Stone shall be used from the surplus useful excavated rubble or from
the approved quarries if required, and shall be subject to through inspection

and approval by the Engineer. The bed pitching material shall consist of the
most durable rock fragments of approved quality selected for the purpose.
The stone shall be sound, hard, dense, resistant to abrasion, durable, and
free from segregation, seams, cracks, shale partings weathered portions,
conglomerate bands and other structural defects or imperfections tending to
affect their soundness and strength.,

Stone shall generally be freshly

quarried with sharp edges and clean faces. They shall be free from rounded,
worn or weathered surfaces or skin or coating.

Stone subject to marked

deterioration by water or weather shall not be used.

individual stones shall be angular.

The shape of the

Stones when immersed in water for 24

hours shall not absorb water by more than 5% of their weight when tested as
per IS: 125-1974 or its Latest edition.
2.5.18.

SIZE OF STONE

The size of the stone to be used for various thickness of revetments

shall be as follows:
The size of stone shall be as large as possible.

In no case any

fragment shall weigh less than 40 Kg. The specific gravity of stones shall be
as high as possible and it shall not be less than 2.50.
Unless otherwise specified, for revetments upto 450mm thickness,
the length of the stone shall be equal to the revetment thickness.

For

revetment over 450mm thick at least 50% of the stones shall be 450mm
long. No stone shall have any dimension less than 150mm or less than 50%
of the maximum dimension of the stone.
The minimum volume of the individual stones used for various
thickness of revetments shall be as follows:
Thickness of revetment

Volume of stones.

225 mm

0.015 Cum

300 mm

0.015 Cum

450 mm

0.030 Cum

600 mm

0.045 Cum

2.5.19. STACKING.

Stacking shall be done as detailed below at the locations specified or

ordered by the Engineer.
i)

Stacks shall be formed to regular shape and uniform cross sections.

ii)

Materials shall be stacked on even ground.

Stacking shall not be

done in flood zones or in water logged areas.

iii) Rough stone shall be packed so closely as to give minimum Quantity
of voids possible without actual pressing of stone to interstices. IN
case of improper stacking done by the contractor. The Engineer shall
have the right have either reject the stacks Partly or Completely.
iv) Unless otherwise specified, templates shall be provided to the size
and dimension of the stack as may be specified at the contractors
expense.
2.6.

COARSE AGGREGATE

2.6.1. GENERAL
For the purposes of these specifications, the term Coarse Aggregate
designates clean well graded aggregate most of which is retained on 4.75mm
I.S. Sieve and containing only so such finer materials permitted for various
types described under clause 2.2 of I.S.383-1970. Coarse aggregate for
concrete shall consist of uncrushed gravel for stone, crushed gravel or stone
and partially crushed gravel or stone. Course Aggregate shall generally have
uniform and stable moisture content. In case of variations, clause 9.2.3. Of
I.S.456-1978 shall govern during batching.
2.6.2. QUALITY
The coarse aggregate shall consist of naturally occurring (crushed or
uncrushed) stones and shall be hard, strong, durable clear and free from
veins and adherent coating and free from injurious amounts of disintegrated,
pieces alkaline aggregate will be rejected if it fails to meet any of the
following requirements.
2.6.3. LOS-ANGLES ABRASION TEST:
The abrasion value of aggregates when tested in accordance with the
method specified in I.S.2386 (part-IV) using Los-Angles machine shall not
exceed 30% for aggregates to be used in concrete for wearing surface and
50% for Aggregates to be used in other concrete.

2.6.4. Aggregate crushing strength test: Aggregate crushing value,

when determined in accordance with I.S.2386 (part-IV) 1963 shall not exceed
45% for aggregate used for concrete other than wearing surface and 30% for
wearing surfaces. As an alternative to the crushing strength test, aggregate
impact value will be determined with the method specified in I.S. 2386 (partIV) 1963, the aggregate impact value shall not exceed 45% by weight for
aggregates used for concrete for other than wearing surfaces, and 30% by
weight for concrete for wearing surfaces such as runways, roads and
pavements.
2.6.5. Soundness Test: The coarse aggregate to be used for all concrete
works shall pass sodium or magnesium sulfate accelerated soundness test
specified in I.S.2386 (Part-V) _1963 and the average loss of weight after 5
cycles shall not exceed the limits specified in clause 3.6.67 of I.S. 383-1970.
2.6.6. SPECIFIC GRAVITY: 2.60 minimum.
2.6.7. Deleterious materials: The maximum quantity of deleterious
materials in coarse Aggregate shall not exceed the limits specified in Table-I
of I.S.386-1970 when tested in accordance with I.S.2386-1963.
2.6.8. GRADING
a)

Coarse aggregate shall be well graded to give a dense concrete of the

specified strength and consistency that will work readily into position
without segregation and without the use of excessive water content.

b)

Coarse aggregate shall be supplied in the nominal sizes given in

table-2 of IS 383-1970. For any one of the nominal sizes, the
proportion of other sizes as determined by the methods described in
IS 2386 (Part-I)_1963 shall also be in accordance with Table - 2
reproduced below.
TABLE - 2

Nominal sizes and Corresponding grading for single size and graded
aggregates.
IS Sieve
passing
Graded

Designation Percentage Passing by weight

For single Size
aggregated of nominal size

Percentage

by weight for
aggregated of nominal size

63mm 40mm 20mm 16mm 12.5mm 10mm 40mm 20mm

16mm 12.5mm
1

2
11

10

80mm

100
--

--

--

--

--

--

100

--

63mm

85-100
--

100

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

40mm

0-3085
--

100

100

--

--

--

95-100

100

--

20mm

0-5
100

0-20
100

85-100

100

--

--

16mm
100

---

--

--

85-100

100

--

--

--

90-

-90-100

--

--

--

85-100

100

--

--

--

0-5
40-85

0-5

0-20

0-30

0-45

4.75mm
10

-0-10

--

0-5

0-5

0-10

0-20

0-5

0-10

0-

2.36mm

---

--

--

--

--

0-5

--

--

--

12.5mm

10mm
70

30-70 95-100

85-100 10-35 25-55 30-

However, the exact gradation required to produce a dense concrete of

specified strength and desired workability shall be decided by the
Engineer.
c)

The material passing through the screen shall be in grade ranging

from 40mm to 4.75mm. Each grade shall be stacked separately.

d)

Specific gravity: 2.60 minimum.

III) STORAGE

a)

Aggregate shall be stacked in such a way as to prevent the admixture

of foreign materials such as soil, vegetable matter etc., Heaps of fine
and coarse aggregates shall be kept separate.

2.7. FINE AGGREGATOR (SAND)

2.7.1. GENERAL: The term sand is used is used to designate aggregate
most of which assess 4.75 mm I.S. Sieve and contains only so much coarser
materials as permitted in clause 4.3 of I.S. 383-1970. Sand shall be
predominantly natural sand, which may be supplemented with crushed sand
to make up deficiencies in the natural sand gratings.
2.7.2. Sand shall have uniform stable moisture content. Determination of
moisture content shall be made as frequently as possible the frequency for a
given job being determined by the Engineer-in-charge according to weather
conditions. (I.S.456-1978).
2.7.3. QUALITY: The sand shall consist of clean, dense, durable, un coated
rock fragments as per IS: 383-1970.
2.7.4. Sand may be rejected if it fails to meet any of the following quality
requirements.
2.7.5. Organic impurities in Sand: Colour no darker than the specified
standard in clause 6.2. of I.S.2386 (Part-III) 1963 (Indian Standard method of
test for aggregate for concrete Part-II estimation of deleterious materials and
organic impurities).
2.7.6. Sodium Sulphate Test for Soundness: The sand to be used shall pass
a sodium or Magnesium Sulphate accelerated test as specified in I.S.2386
(Part-V) 1963 for limiting loss of weight.
2.7.7. SPECIFIC GRAVITY: 2.6 minimums
2.7.8.

Deleterious Substances

2.7.9. The amounts of deleterious substances in sand shall not exceed the
maximum permissible limits prescribed in table I Clause 3.2.1. of I.S.383 1970 (Indian Standard Specification for coarse and fine aggregates from
natural source for concrete) when tested in accordance with I.S. 2386-1963.
2.7.10.
GRADING: Sand for mortar shall conform to the grading of
sand given in Clause 4 of I.S.2116-1980 as indicated below.
Grading of Sand for use in masonry mortars
I.S. Sieve designation
Percentage by weight passing by
mass
4.75 mm

100

2.36 mm

90 to 100

1.18 mm

70 to 100

600 micron

40 to 100

300 micron

5 to 70

150 micron

0 to 15

2.7.11. Sand whose grading falls out-side the specified limits due to excess
deficiency of coarse of fine particles may be processed to comply with the
standard by screening through a suitably sized sieve and/or blending with
required quantities of suitable size sand particles. The sand for concrete as
batched shall be well graded and when tested by means of standard sieves
shall conform to the limits given in table-4 of I.S.383-1970 and shall be
described as Fine aggregates, grading zones - I, II, III and IV. Sand complying
with the requirements of any of the fourth grading zones is suitable for
concrete. But, sand conforming to the requirements of grading zone-IV shall
not be used for reinforced cement concrete work.
2.7.12.

FINENSES MODULUS:

a)

Sand shall have a fineness modulus between 2.4 to 3.0 subject to the
gradation specified in the preceding paragraph.

b)

The modulus shall be computed by adding cumulative percentage of

sand retained on the standard screens 4.75 mm, 2.36mm, 1.18mm,
600 micron, 300 micron, 150 micron, IS sieves and dividing the sum
by 100. Gradation of sand shall be so controlled that the fineness
modulus of at least 9 out of 10 consecutive test samples of finished
sand shall not vary by more than 0.10 from the average of 10 test
samples. Sand having any deviation from the specified range of
gradation and fineness modulus shall not be permitted to be used in
work without the written permission of the Engineer.

STORAGE
All sand shall be stored on the site of work in such manner as to
prevent intrusion of foreign matter.
2.8.

SAND FOR FILTER MATERIAL

2.8.1. The filter material shall consist of clean, sound and well graded sand
and crushed rock. The materials shall be free from debris, organic matter
and other deleterious matter. It shall be ensured that the surface over which

the filter is to be laid has been well consolidated to not less than 95 percent
of proctors density.
2.8.2. The filter materials in contact with earth or foundation soil shall be of
any available clean, well graded sand having a maximum size of 6mm. This
shall be over laid with well graded, hard durable coarse aggregate of size
10mm to 75 mm. IN contact with rock fill, riprap shall be used.
2.9.

MATAL FOR FILTER

2.9.1. The coarse aggregate as filter material unless otherwise specified

shall consist of clean, sound, hard, dense, durable, sharp, angular pieces,
broken to specified sizes, free from all dust, dirt, and vegetable matter., Flaky
and weathered stones shall not be used. The aggregates shall not contain
any harmful material such as iron pyrites, coal, mica, shale or similar
laminated material, clay, alkalic, soft fragments organic impurities etc.,
2.9.2. The aggregate shall be well graded and of size 10mm to 75mm.
Broken rock obtained from rock excavation of canal or from approved quarries
shall be approved by the Engineer prior to being transported to the areas of
depositing.
2.10

.ROCK FILL FOR TOE OF EMBANKMENT (Rock Toe)

2.10.1. Rock fill shall consist of sound, durable and well graded broken rock
obtained from approved from excavation of work and / or from
approved quarries and shall be approved prior to being transported to
the areas of deposition., The materials shall range in size from 75mm
to 450mm. However, no load shall contain more than 15 percent by
volume or rock fragments smaller than 75mm in size All brush roots,
or other perishable materials shall be removed from rock fill during
the spreading.
2.11

.WATER

2.11.1. The water used in making and curing of concrete, mortar and grout
shall be free from objectionable quantities of silt, organic matter
injurious amounts of oils, acids, salts and other impurities etc., as per
I.S. Specification No. 456-1978. Potable water generally considered
satisfactory for mixing and curing.
2.11.2. The Engineer-in-charge will determine whether or not such quantities
impurities are objectionable.
2.11.3. Such determination will usually be made by comparison of
compressive strength, water required, time of set and other
properties of concrete made with distilled or very clean water and
concrete made with the water proposed for use. Permissible limits for

solids when tested in accordance with I.S. 3025-1964 shall be as

tabulated below:
PERMISSIBLE LIMITS FOR SOLIDS:
1.

Organic

Maximum permissible limit 200 mg/litre

2.

Inorganic

3000mg/litre

3.

Sulphates (as SO4)

500 mg/litre

4. Chlorides (as Cl)

for R.C.C.
5.

2000 for plain concrete work and 1000 mg lt

works

works

Suspended matter

2000 mg/litre

If any water to be used in concrete, mortar or grout is suspected by

the Executive Engineer as exceeding the permissible limits for solids, samples
of water will be obtained and tested by the Engineer- in-charge in accordance
with I.S.3025-1964.
2.12

.ADMIXTURES/AIR-ENTRAINING AGENTS:

2.12.1. An admixtures air entraining agent may be used in the concrete in

such quantities as to produce a total workable concrete as may be
permitted, upto 5% by volume of concrete. the admixture agent shall
satisfy the relevant specifications for air-entraining agents (I.S.91031979) and the dosage shall be determined based on specific
laboratory studies.
2.12.2. The department will specify and approve the admixtures / Airentraining agents required for the works.
The use of such
admixtures/ Air entraining agents shall be made as per the
conveyance, storage, bathing, mixing of admixtures shall be borne by
the contractor and shall be included by him in the quoted rates for
respective items of works involved in the use of cement.
2.13

. STORAGE OF MATERIALS.
Storage of materials shall conform to the I.S.458 - 1978 and I.S.
457 - 1957.

SPECIAL NOTE ON CONTRACT PRICE AND PAYMENTS:

The Contract price shall comprise of total value of the work for E.P.C. Turnkey contract including
operation and maintenance of the installation for a period of 2 (Two) years as per contract agreement.
The employer will pay the contractor a firm contract price for completion of all works as specified
under the scope of the work / employers requirement which shall include but not limited to supply and
installation of all plants and its accessories leading to successful commissioning of the pumping scheme
with allied works including operation and maintenance of the pumps, other allied electrical equipment for a
period of 2 (Two) years after successful commissioning of the project on E.P.C. turnkey cum O &M
contract basis.
Intermediate payment for the works shall be made on the basis of the quantity executed and
corresponding quoted rates in the contract. The measurement and payment clauses under the technical
specifications of various items in the Volume-II pertain to intermediate payments only

and in all cases

payment shall be limited to the total price quoted by the contractor against each item of works.

WELL FOUNDATIONS
3.1.40. DESCRIPTION:
This work consists of construction of well foundation, taking it down to the founding level
through all kinds of sub-strata, plugging the bottom, filling the inside of the well, plugging the top and
providing a well cap in accordance with the details shown on the drawing and as per these specifications, or
as directed by the Engineer.

In case of well foundations of size larger than 12m diameter, supplemental construction
specification will be necessary.
3.1.41. GENERAL:
(a) Wells may have a circular, rectangular, or D-shape in plans and may consist of one, two or
more compartments in plan. The outer well of the well is known as well staining, which may be cellular.
The process of taking down the well to the founding level is known as well sinking. After
reaching the founding level, the hollow inside the well (Dredge hole) is plugged at the bottom by concrete
(bottom plug). The dredge hole is then filled with approved filling upto the level indicated on the drawings
and provide with a concrete plug (Top plug).
To facilitate sinking of well, steel cutting edges is fabricated and connected to a concrete well curb
of required shapes. On top of the well curb, adequate height of well staining is cast and the process of
sinking is carried out. After a portion of the well has been sunk, another height of well staining in cast on
top of the previous section and further sinking carried out. This process is continued till the bottom level of
the well reaches the founding level.
At the top of the well staining, an adequately designed well cap is laid which transmits the loads
and forces from the Sub-structure (Piers abutments) to the foundations.
(b) At least one borehole must be available / carried out in accordance with these specifications at
each well foundation location, prier to commencement of work. The depth of boreholes should extend upto
a depth equal to one and a half time the outer diameter/least dimension of the well below the anticipated
founding level. The results of soil exploration should be presented in accordance with SS 3.1.12 in case the
well foundation is to rest on a rocky strata, it may be necessary to undertake additional borings/probing
prior to commencement of work to ascertain the actual profile and the quality of the rocky state, at the level
of which the well has to be seated etc.
Blasting may have to be resorted to in order to facilitate sinking through difficult strata, such as
boulders and rocks etc. In case blasting in anticipated, protective/strengthening measuring specified in SS
3.3 shall be taken. The grade of concrete in bottom 3 meters of staining shall not be leaner than M 20 or as
shown on the drawings.
(d) In case the borehole data shows the presence of steeply dipping rock, chiseling may have to be
resorted to so as to obtain proper seating of the foundation. For this purpose, the well may require to be
dewatered completely under high air pressure inside the well. This process is known as pneumatic sinking.
Pneumatic sinking may also have to be resorted to in cases where obstacles such as tree trunks, large size
boulders or hard strata etc., not be removed by open dredging. The necessity of adopting pneumatic
sinking shall be decided by the Engineer.
The curb and steining have to be specifically designed for special leading when pneumatic sinking
is added.
3.1.42
SETTING OUT AND IREPARATIONS FOR SINKING:
(a)

Necessary reference points shall be fixed, away from the Zone of blow-ups or possible settlements
resulting from well sinking operations.
Such references points shall be connected to the
permanent theologize stations with the base line on the banks. The center of the individual wells
shall be marked with reference these stations. The distance, wherever practicable, shall be
checked with the help of accurate tapes and precision distomat.

Reference points shall also be fixed to mark X-X axis (usually canal flow direction) and Y-Y axis
(normal to X-X axis) accurately.

A temporary benchmark shall also be established near the well foundation, away from the zones of
blow-ups or possible settlement. The benchmark shall be checked regularly with respect to the
permanent benchmark established at the Aqueduct site.
(b)

For wells, which are to be pitched in water, an earthen or sand island shall be constructed. Sand
islands are practicable for water depths of about 5 M under stable bed soil conditions. For greater
depths or in fast flowing rivers or for locations where soil is too weak to sustain Sand Island,
floating caissons may have to be adopted.
The plan dimensions of sand islands shall be such as to have a working space of at least 2 meters
all around the steining. The dimension of the sand island shall-however be not less than
twice___________________________
The dimension in plan of the well or caisson. Sand islands shall be maintained to perform their
functions, until the well is sunk to a depth below the bed level at least equal to the depth of water.
Sand Island shall be protected against scour and the top level shall be sufficiently above
the prevailing water level to be decided by the Engineer so that it is safe against wave action.
While Sand Island is constructed at well location, floating caissons are generally
fabricated at or near the banks on dry land or dry docks. Floating caissons are towed into position
in floating caissons are towed into position in floating condition.
Floating caissons may be of steel, reinforced concrete or combination of the two. They
should have at least 1.5m free board above water level and increased, if considered necessary, in
case there is a possibility of caissons sinking suddenly owing to reasons such as scour likely to
result from the lowering of caissons, effect of waves, sinking in very soft strata etc.,
Stability of floating caissons shall be ensured against over turning and capsizing while
being towed and during a sinking for the caution of water current, wave pressure, wind etc.,
For floating caissons, a detailed method statement for fabrication, floating and sinking of
caissons shall be prepared and furnished to the Engineer. Such statement shall include the total
tonnage of steel involved, fabrication and welding specifications, list of materials and plant and a
description of operations and manpower required for the work., The caisson shall be tested for
leakages before being towed to site.

EQUPMENT:
Equipment shall be deployed for construction of well foundation as required and as
directed by the Engineer. Generally, the following equipment may be required for the work.
i)
ii)
iii)
iv)
v)
vi)
vii)

Crane with grab buckets-capacity 0.5 to 2.0 Cum.

Submersible pumps.
Air compressors, air locks and other accessories where pneumatic sinking of
well is anticipated.
Chisels of appropriate sizes.
Aqua-header for cutting rocky strata.
Diving helmets and accessories.
Equipment for concrete production, transportation planning and compaction.

3.1.43.

CUTTING EDGE:
(a)

The mild steel cutting edge shall be made from structural steel sections.
The cutting edge shall weigh not less than 40 Kgs. Per meter lengths
and he properly anchored into the well curb, as shown in the drawing.

When there are two or more compartments in a well, the bottom end of the cutting edge of the
inner walls of such wells shall be kept at about 300mm above that of outer walls.
(b)

The parts of cutting edge shall be erected on level firm ground.

Temporary supports shall be provided to facilitate erection and
maintaining the assembly in true shape. The fabrication may be carried
out in the shop or at site. Steel sections shall not be heated and forced
into shape. However, V cuts may be made in the horizontal portion,
uniformly throughout the length, to facilitate old bonding.
After
bending, such V cuts should be closed by welding. Joints in the
length of structural sections, unless otherwise specified shall be fillet
welded using single cover plate to ensure the requisite strength of the
original section.

The cutting edge shall be laid about 300mm above prevalent water level.

3.1.43

WELL CURB:
a)

The well curb may be precast or cast-in-situ. Steel from

work for well curb shall be fabricated strictly in conformity
with the drawing. The outer face of the curb shall be
vertical. Steel reinforcements shall be assembled as shown
on the drawings. The bottom ends of vertical bend rods of
steining shall be fixed securely to the cutting edge with
check nuts or by welds.

The formwork on outer face of curb may be removed within 24 hours after concreting.
formwork of inner face shall be removed after 72 hours.
(c)

The

All concreting in the well curb shall be done in one continuous

operation

.
3.1.44

.WELL STEINING:

(a)

The dimensions, shape, concrete strength and reinforcements of the well shall strictly conform
to those shown on the drawings. The formwork shall preferably be of M.S. Sheets shaped
and stiffened suitably. In case timber forms are used, they shall be lined with plywood or
M.S. Sheets.

(b)

Steining built in the first lift above the well curb shall not be more than 2 meters and in
subsequent lifts if shall not exceed the diameter of the well or the depth of well sunk below
the adjoining bed level at any time. For stability, the first lift of steining shall be cast only
after sinking the curb at least partially for stability. Concreting of steining may be carried out

in subsequent lifts of about 2 to 2.5 meters. Attempts should be made to minimize the
number of construction joints. The concreting layers shall be limited to about 450mm
restricting the free fall of concrete to not more than 1.5m Laitance formed at the top surface of
a lift shall be removed to expose coarse aggregates before setting of concrete at the proposed
construction joint. As per as possible, construction joints shall not be kept at the location of
lapse in the vertical steining bars.
(b)
The steining of the well shall be built in the straight 1m from bottom to top such that if the wall is
tilted, the next
of steining will be aligned in the direction of the tilt. They will be checked
carefully with the said of straight edges of lengths approved by the Engineer. Plumb bob or spirit level
shall not be used for alignment. After sinking of a stage is complete, damaged portions if any, of steining
at top of the previous stage shall be properly repaired before constructing the next stage.
(c)

The height of steining shall be calibrated by making at least 4 gauges (preferably in canal
flow direction and in a direction normal to canal flow direction) distributed equally on the
outer periphery of the well each in the form of a 100mm wide strip painted on the well, with
every meter mark shown in black paint. V The gauges shall start with zero at the bottom of
the cutting edge. Marking of the gauges shall be done carefully with a steel tape.

(d)
After reaching the founding level, the well steining shall be inspected to check for any damage or
cracks. The Engineer will direct and the contractor shall execute the remedial measures before acceptance
of the well steining. In case the well cannot be accepted even with any remedial measures, then the well
shall stand rejected.
(B) Use of Kent ledge as Sinking load.
Kent ledge shall be placed in an orderly and safe manner on the loading platform and in such a
way that it does not interfere with the excavation of the material from inside the dredge hole and also does
not in any way damage the steining of the well.
Where tilts are present or there is a danger of well developing a tilt, the position of the load shall
be regulated in such a manner as to provide greater sinking effort on the higher side of the well.
Use of Water jetting.
Water jetting may be employed for well sinking wherever necessary.
(d)

Use of Explosives.

Mild explosive charges maybe used as

aid for sinking of the well only with prior permission of the
Engineer. Blasting of any sort shall only be done in the presence of the Engineer and not before the
concrete in the steining has hardened sufficiently and is more than 7days old. When likelihood of
blasting is predicted in advance, protection of the bottom portion of the well shall be done as per these
specifications. After blasting operations are completed, the well curb and steining should be examined
for any cracks and remedial measures taken.
If blasting has been used after the well has reached the design foundation level, normally 24 hours
shall be allowed to lapse before the bottom plug is laid.
The charges shall be exploded well below the cutting edge by making a sump so as to avoid
chances of any damages to the
or to the steining of the well. A minimum sump of 1 metre depth
should be made before resorting to blasting. Use of large charges of about 0.7 Kg. or above, may not
be allowed except under export direction and with the permission from the Engineer. Suitable pattern
of charges may be arranged with delay detonators to reduce the number of charges fired at a time. The
burden of the charges may be limited to 1 metre and the spacing of holes may normally be kept as 0.5
to 0.6 metres.

All prevalent laws concerning handling, storing and using of explosives shall be strictly followed.
All safety precautions shall be taken as per IS 4081 Safety code for Blasting and related Drilling
operations to the extent applicable, whenever blasting is resorted to.
There should be no equipment inside the well nor shall there be any labour in the close vicinity of
the well at the time of exploding the charges.
If rock blasting is to be done for seating of the well, the damage caused by flying debris should be
minimized by covering blasting holes by rubber mats before blasting.

(e)

Use of divers:

Use of divers may be made both for sinking purpose like removal or obstructions, rock blasting and for
inspection. All safety precautions shall be taken as per any acceptable safe code for sinking with
divers or any statutory regulations in force.
Only persons trained for the diving operation shall be employed and shall be certified to befit for
diving by an approved doctor.
They shall work under expert supervision.
The diving and other equipments shall be of
acceptable standard and certified to this effect by an approved independent agency. It shall be well
maintained for safe use.
Arrangement for sample supply of low-pressure clean cool air shall be ensured through an
armored flexible hosepipe stand by compressor plant shall be provided in case of breakdown.
Separate high-pressure connection for use of pneumatic shall be made. Electric lights w\here
provided shall be at 50
(maximum). The raising of the diver from the bottom of wells is
controlled so that decompression rate conforms to the rate
laid down in appropriate regulations.
f)
i)

Use of Pneumatic sinking.

General.

The Engineer shall familiarize himself with particular reference to caisson diseases and working of the
medical air lock. A Doctor competent to deal with cases of Caisson Diseases or other complications
rising as a result of working under high pressure shall be stationed at the construction site when
pneumatic sinking is under progress.
The Contractor shall provide complete facilities including the issuing of orders to ensure strict
enforcement of the equipments outlined in these specifications.
A safety provision as contained in IS 1138 and these specifications shall be strictly followed.
Pneumatic sinking shall be restricted to a depth of 30.0m.
ii)

Man-locks and shafts

Locks, reducers, and shaft used in connection with casing shall be of reverted construction throughout.
The material used in their manufacture shall be steel plate with thickness not less than 6 mm.

Shafts shall be subjected to hydrostatic or air pressure test of at least 0.5 Mpa, at which pressure
they shall be tight. The pressure at which testing has been done shall be clearly and visibly displayed.
Shafts shall be provided, with a safe, proper and suitable staircase for its entire length including
landing platforms, which are not more than 6 metres apart. Where this is impossible due to space
constraint, suitable ladders along with landing platforms shall be installed. These shall be kept clear
and in good condition at all time and shall be constructed, inspected and maintained to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer.
A.1.o m wide platform with 1.0 m high railing shall be provided, all round the caisson air locks.
Where 15 or more man are employed, caissons shall have to locks, one of which shall be use dasa
man lock.
Locks shall be located so that the lowest part of the bottom door shall not be less than1 metre
above high water level.
The supply of fresh air to the working chamber shall at all times be sufficient to permit work to be
done without any danger or excessive discomfort. All air supply lines shall be supplied with check
valves and carried as near to the face as practicable.
A man-lock shall be used solely for the compression or de compression of persons, and not for the
passage of plant and shall be maintained in a reasonably clear and sufficiently term state. However,
any hand tool or hand instruments used for the purpose of the work may be carried in to the man-lock.
Where it is not reasonably practicable to provide a separate man-lock for use by persons only, the
lock when it is in actual use for compression or decompression of a person of persons shall not be put
simultaneously, to any other use and shall be in a reasonably clean and sufficiently war state.
iii)

Valves:

Exhaust valves shall be provided, having risers extending to the upper part of the chamber. These
shall be operated, whenever necessary especially after a blast. Precautions shall be taken that men and
not allowed to resume work after a blast until the gas and smoke are cleared.

iv)

Medical supervision and certification.

Every employee absent from work for 10 or more consecutive days due to illness or any other
disability shall be required to pass the regular physical examination by the doctor before being
permitted to return to work.
After a person has been employed continuously in compressed air for a period of 2 months. He
shall be re-examined by the doctor and shall not be permitted to work until such re-examination has
been made and the report in satisfactory.
No person known to be addicted to the excessive intoxicants
shall be permitted to work in compressed air.
The doctor shall, at all times keep a complete and full record of examination made by him, which
shall contain dates of examination, a clear and full description of the person examined, his age and
physical condition at the time of examination and a statement as to the period such a person has been

engaged in such employment. Records shall be kept at the place where the work is in progress and
shall be subject to inspection by authorised officers.
Every man lock shall always have a doctor or a responsible person in attendance. In case the
person in charge is note doctor he must have positive means of promptly communicating with and
securing the services of a competent doctor in case of emergency. Such arrangements shall invariably
be subject to the approved of the Engineer.
If the air pressure exceeds 0.2 Ta gauge of if 50 o9rmore men are employed, it is obligatory for the
person in charge of medical lock to be a doctor experienced in this type of work.
All cases of compressed air illness shall be reported and copies of all such reports shall be kept on
file at the place of work.
(ii) Lighting:
All lighting in compressed air chambers shall be operated only by electricity. Two independent
electric lighting systems with independent sources of supply shall be used. These shall so arrange that
the emergency source shall become automatically operative in case of failure of the regularly used
source.
The minimum intensity of light on any walkway ladder, stairway, or lower working level shall be
one quarter (1/4) candlepower. In all work places, the lighting shall always be such as to enable
workmen to see their way about clearly.
All external parts of lighting fixtures and electrical
equipment lying with the 2.5 metres above the floor shall be constructed of non-combustible nonabsorbing insulating materials. If metal is used it must be effectively earthed. Portable lamp shall
have non-combustible non- absorbing insulating sockets, approved handles, bucket guards and
approved cables. The use of worn of defective portable and pendant conductors, shall be prohibited.
(vi)

Safety against fire hazard.

No oil, gasoline, or other combustible material shall be stored within 30 metres of any shaft,
caisson, or funnel opening. However, oil may be stored in suitable tanks in isolated fire
buildings, provided such buildings are not less than 15 meters any shaft, caisson, or tunnel
opening or any building directly connected there to.
Positive means shall be taken to prevent leaking flam
specifically mentioned in the proceedings paragraph.

liquids from flowing into areas

Where feasible, a fire hose connected to suitable sources of water shall be provided at the
top o every caisson. Where fire means are not accessible, a supply of water shall be stored in
tanks near the top of every caisson, provided fire pails or suitable pumps are kept available.
Approved fire extinguishers shall also be provided.
(vii)

Sanitation:

Properly boated, lighted and ventilated dressing rooms shall be provided for all employees
engaged in compressed air work, such rooms shall contain lockers and benches and be open and
accessible to men during intermission between shifts. Adequate toilet gas accommodation of one
for every twenty-five employees shall be provided.
Care shall be taken to keep all parts of the caissons and other working compartments,
including locker rooms, dry rooms, rest house, and other equipment in a good sanitary condition
an free from fuse, decaying or other objectionable matter.

No nuisance shall be tolerated in the air chamber. Sinking shall be strictly prohibited
and all matches and smoking materials shall be left out of the locker rooms.
A separate dry-room shall be provided where working clothes may be dried within
reasonable time.
(viii) Protection against gases:
In all cases where gas is expected including alluvium impregnated with decayed
vegetable matter the use of divvy safety lamp shall be compulsory.
(ix) Additional safety provisions.
a)
The weight of the pneumatic platform and that of steining and Kent ledge, if any, shall be
sufficient to resist the uplift from air in side, skin friction being neglected in this case. If at any
section the total weight acting down word pressure more than the uplift pressure of air inside,
additional Kent ledge shall be placed on the wall.
If it is not possible to make the wall heavy enough during
excavation, blowing down may be used. The men
should be within and air pressure reduced.
The well
should then begin to move small deduction in air
pressure. Blowing down should only used when the
ground is such that it will not heavy up inside chamber
when the pressure is reduced. When the well does not
with the reduction in air pressure, Kent ledge should be
added. Blowing down should be in short stages and
the drop should not exceed metre at any stage.
To
control sinking during blowing down, use of packing are
recommended.
(b)
The pneumatic sinking plant and other allied machinery shall not only be of proper
design and make, but also shall be worked by complete at and well trained personnel. Every part
of the machinery and its fixtures shall be minutely examined before installation and use.
Availability of appropriate spares, standbys, safety of personnel as recommended in IS 14138 for
working in compressed air must be ensured at site. Codes for safety and for working in
compressed air & other labour laws and practices prevalent in the country, as specified to provide
safe, efficient and expeditious sinking shall be followed.
c)

Inflammable materials shall not be taken in to air locks and smoking shall be prohibited.
Wherever gasses are suspected to be gushing out of dredge hole, the same shall be analyzed by
trained personnel and necessary precautions adopted to avoid hazard to life and equipment.

d)

Where blasting is resorted to, is shall be carefully controlled and all precautions regarding
blasting shall be observed.
Workers shall be allowed inside after blasting only when a
competent and qualified person has examined the chamber and steining thoroughly and found the
same to be safe.

g)

Precautions during sinking.

a)

When the wells have to be sunk close to each other and

clear distance between them is not greater than the diameter
of wells, sinking shall be taken up on all wells and they
shall be sunk alternately so that sinking of wells proceeds
uniformly.
Simultaneous and even dredging shall
be\carried out in the wells in such a manner that the

difference in the levels of the sump and cutting edge in the\

adjacent wells does no exceed half the clear gap between
them. Plugging of all the wells shall be done together.
b)

During sinking of dump-bell or double D-Shaped wells, the

excavation in both the dredge holes should be carried out
simultaneously and equally.

c)
Bore chart shall be referred to constantly during sinking for taking adequate care while
piercing different types of strata. The type of soils as obtained during the well sinking should be
compared with bore chart so as to take prompt decisions.
d) Before seasonal floods all wells on which sinking in progress shall be sunk to sufficient depths
bellow the designed occur level. Further, they shall be temporarily filled and plugged so that they do
no suffer any tilt or shift during the floods.
e) All necessary precautions shall be taken against any possible damage to the foundations of existing
structures in the vicinity of the wells, prior to commencement of dredging from inside the well.
f)
The dredged material shall not be allowed to accumulate over the well, It shall be dumped and
spread, as far away as possible, and them continuously and simultaneously recovered as directed by the
Engineer. In case the river steam flows along one edge of the well being sunk, the dredged material shall
not be dumped on the dry side of the bank but on the side on which the river current flows.
g)
Very deep sump shall not be made below the well curb, as it entails risk of jumping (sudden
sinking) of the well. The depth of sump shall be generally limited to one-sixth of the outer diameter/least
lateral dimension of the well in plan. Normally, the depth of sump shall not exceed 3.0 metres flow the
level of the cutting edge unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Engineer.
h)

In case a well sinks suddenly with a jerk, the steining of the well shall be examined to the
satisfaction of the Engineer to see that no damage has occurred to it.

i)

In pneumatic sinking, the well shall not, at anytime, be dropped to a depth greater than 500 mm
by the method of blowing down.

j)

Dewatering shall be avoided if sand blows are expected. Any equipment and men working in
side the well shall be brought out of the well as soon as there are nay indications of a sand-blow.

k)

Sand blowing in wells can often be minimized by keeping the level of water inside the well
higher then the water table and also by adding heavy kept ledge.

l)

In soft strata prone to settlement/creep, the construction of the abutment wells shall be taken up
only after the approach embankment for a sufficient distance near the abutment has been
completed.

H) Tilts and Shifts:

The inclination of the well from the vertical is known tilt and the horizontal displacement
of the center of the work at the founding level from its theoretical position is known as shift.
Unless otherwise specified, the tilt of any well shall not exceed 1 (HORIZENTAL) in 80
(VERTICAL), and the shift at the well base shall not be more than 150mm in any resultant direction.
Tilts and shifts shall be carefully checked and recorded in the format vide Appendix-II regularly
during sinking operations. For the purpose of measuring the tilts along the work axes of the aqueduct
reduced level of the marks painted on the surface of the steaming of the well shall be taken.
For

determination of shifts, locations of the ends of the two diameters shall be precisely measured the ends
of the two diameters shall be precisely measured the ends of the two diameters shall be precisely
measured along the two axes, with reference to fixed reference points.
Whenever any tilt is noticed, adequate preventive measures like placing econotric Kent ledge,
pulling, strutting, anchoring or dredging unevenly and depositing dredge material unequally, putting
obstacles below cutting edge. Water jetting etc., shall be adopted before any further sinking. After
correction, the dredged material shall be spared out uniformly.
A pair of wells close to each other has a tendency to come closer while sinking; timber struts may
be introduced in between the steining of these wells to prevent tilting.
Tilts occurring in a well during sinking in dipping rocky strata can be safeguarded by suitably
supporting the curb.
In the event of a well developing tilt or shift beyond the specified permissible values, the
Contractor shall have to carryout, at his own cost, suitable remedial measures to satisfaction of the
Engineer, to bring the tilt and shift within permissible values, as far as practicable.
If the resultant tilt and / or shift of any well exceed the specified permissible values, generally it
should not exceed 1 in 50 and 300 mm respectively.
The well so sunk shall be regarded as not
conforming to specifications and a substandard work.
The Engineer in his sole discretion may
consider accepting such a well provided.
(i) Calculations for foundation pressures and steining stresses, accounting for the actual tilt and shift
furnished by the contractor show that the well is safe. Any remedial measures required to bring the
stresses within permissible values (such as increase in the dimension of the well cap, provision of
dummy weights on the
well cap etc.,) shall be carried out by the Contractor with out claiming for any extra
cost.
(ii)

The Contractor shall agree to reduction in rates in accordance with

clause 5.5.3.1.54(g).

In case the Engineer, in his discretion, rejects the wells, the Contractor shall
dismantle the rejected well to the extent directed by the Engineer and
remove the debris. Further, the contractor shall, at his own risk and expense
complete the aqueduct with modified span arrangement acceptable to the
Engineer.
I) Seating of Wells:
The well shall be uniformly seated at the founding strata. It shall be ensured by test borings that
the properties of the soil encountered at the founding strata and upto a depth of one and a half times the
well diameter is identical to the adopted in the design. The procedure for test borings shall satisfy the
provisions of these specifications. In case, the soil encountered is inferior to that adopted in design, the
well shall be redesigned by the Engineer adopting the soil properties actually encountered and the founding
level intimated the contractor, who shall carry out the work.
In case of seating of wells in hard rocky strata, where the rock profile is steeply sloping,
pneumatic methods of sinking may be adopted to seat the well evenly as directed by the Engineer. The
decision of adopting pneumatic sinking shall be taken by the Engineer. The cutting edge may also be
embedded for a suitable depth in the rocky strata, and decided by the Engineer keeping in view the quality
of rock. As an additional measure of safety, the well shall be anchored to the rocky strata by anchor bars

provided in the steining of the well, as shown on the drawing irrespective of the fact of the well, as shown
on the drawing irrespective of the fact that tension develops or not at the base of the well under design
loads. After the wall has been evenly seated on good hard rock, arrangements shall be made to facilitate
proper in dry and visible conditions before the bottom plug is laid.

3.1.47.

BOTTOM PLUG.
For bottom plug, the concrete mix shall be designed (in dry condition) to attain the concrete
strength as mentioned on the drawing and shall contain10 per cent more cement that required for
the same mix placed dry, to cater for under water concreting. However, the total cement content
shall not be less than 363 Kg/Cum. of concrete with as lump in the range of 150 mm to200mm.
Admixtures maybe added to the concrete to impart the required characteristics indicated herein.
Concrete for the bottom plug shall be laid by tramio pipe method. Tammie concrete
when started shall be continued without interruption for full operating in the bottom plug. The
Concrete reduction equipment and placement equipment should be sufficient to enable under
water concreting within stipulated time. Necessary standby equipment should be available for
emergency situation.
Before commencing plugging, all loose material from the bottom of the well shall be
removed.
Concreting shall be done in one continuous operation till the dredge hole is filled up to
the required height and there after sounding shall betaken up to ensure that the concrete has been
laid to the required height.
Least disturbance shall be caused to the water inside the well while laying concrete in the
bottom plug.
Concrete shall not be disturbed in any way for at least.

14 Days.
In order to check any rise in the level of the bottom plug soundings should be taken at the close of
concreting and once every day for the subsequent 3 days.
The soundness of the bottom plug mazy be tested by dewatering the well by 5 metres below the
surrounding water level and checking the rise of water. The rate of rise shall preferably be less than 10
cum. per hour. In case the rate is higher, suitable remedial measures as directed by the Engineer, shall be
taken by the Contractor at his own cost.
3.1.48. SAND FILLING:
Sand filling shall commence after a period of 3 days of laying of bottom plug. Also, the height of
the bottom plug shall be verified before starting sand filling.
Sand shall be clean and free from earth, clay clods, roots, boulders, shingles, etc., and shall be
compacted as directed, sand filling shall be carried out up to the level shown on the drawing, or as directed
by the Engineer.
]

3.1.49

TOP PLUG:

After filling sand up to the required level a plug of concrete shall be provided over it as shown on
the drawing, or as directed by the Engineer.
3.1.50.

WELL CAP:
A reinforced cement concrete well cap will be provided over the top of steining in accordance with
the drawing. Formwork will be prepared conforms the shapes of well cap. Concreting shall be
carried out in dry condition. Properly designed false steining maybe provided where possible
toensurethewe3ll cap is laid in dry conditions.
The bottom of the well cap shall be laid preferably and lows possible, account the water
level prevalent at the time of casting.
Bond rods of steining shall be anchored in to the well cap.

3.1.51.

TOLERANCES:
The permissible tilt and shift shall not exceed I (horizontal) in 80 (Vertical) and the shift at the
well base shall not be more than 150 mm in any resultant directions.
For the well steining and well cap the permissible tolerances shall be as follows:-

(a) Variation in dimension

(b) Misplacement from specified
Position in plan.
Surface irregularities measured
with 3 m straight edge.
d) Variation of levels at the top
3.1.52.

1 + 50mm 10 mm

15mm

:
:

5mm
+25mm

MEASUREMENT FOR PAYMENT

All quantities shall be measured from the drawing, or as ordered by the Engineer, accepting those
required to be provided by the contractor at his cost.
(a)

The cutting edge shall be measured in tones based on the net weight of material used in it,
as per A.P.S.S. 110.

(b)

The concrete in curb, well steining and well cap shall be measured in cubic meters in
each of the items as per 5.5.4.18. The reinforcements shall be measured in tones
separately in each of the items as per 5.5.4.20.10.

(c)

The measurement for well sinking shall be made in running metres only irrespective of
clarification of soils mint with. The depth of sinking shall be measured from the level
specified in the contract. If no level has been specified in the Contract, sinking shall be
measured from the low water level or from the level at which the cutting edge was laid,
whichever is higher. Pneumatic sinking shall not be paid separately. The quoted rate for
well sinking shall include this cost also.

(d)

The quantity of concrete in bottom and top plug shall measured in cubic metres as per
5.5.4.18.

(e)

The quantity of sand filling shall be measured in cubic metres.

3.1.53.

RATE:
a)

The Contract unit rates of cutting edge shall cover all costs of labour material,
tools, plant and equipment, including placing in position, sampling and testing,
and supervision, all as per respective section of Structural steel work and as
described in this section.

b)

The Contract unit rates for concrete in curb, steinig, bottom plug, top plug and
well cap shall cover all costs of labour, material, tools, plant and equipment,
form work and staging including placing, in position, sampling and testing, and
supervision, all as per respective section of structural concrete and as described
in this section.

c)

The Contract unit rates for reinforcement in curb, steining, and well cap, shall
cover all costs of labour material, tools, plant and equipment, including bending
to shape, placing in position, sampling, testing and supervision, all as per
respective section of steel reinforcement and as described in this section.

d)

The Contract unit rates for sand filling shall cover all costs of labour, materials,
tools, plant and equipment, including placing in position, sampling testing and
supervision, all as described in this section.

e)

The concrete unit rates for sinking shall cover the costs of labour, tools, and
equipment and plant and for all operations and other incidentals for sinking of
well including seating excepting provisions, of pneumatic sinking described in
this Section. The unit rates shall be for all soils, H.D.R. I & rock and Hard
rock. The rate shall cover all testing and supervision required for the work.

f)

The contract unit rate of material to be excavated pneumatic sinking shall cover
all costs of labour, materials, tools, plant and other equipment and other
incidental and safety provision and supervision required for pneumatic sinking
as per this section.

g)

Reduction in contract unit rates for sinking as a penalty, in pursuance of clause

3.1.46(II).

If any well with tilt and / or shift exceeding beyond permissible values is accepted
by the Engineer, the Contractor shall give a reduction is the rates as follows:-

S.No

1.
2.
3.

Amount of Tilt and /or Shift

Percent deduction on the rate(s)

Or sinking of well.

Tilt exceeding the specified permissible

Value but equal to or within 1 m 60.

5 per cent.

Tilt exceeding 1 in 60 but equal to or within

1 in 50

10 per cent

Tilt exceeding 1 in 50

20 per cent.

4.
5.

Sift exceeding the specified permissible

Value but equal to or within 200mm.
Shift exceeding 200mm but equal to
Or within 300 mm.

2 per cent.
5 per cent.

6.
Shift exceeding 300 mm.
10 per cent.
- - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- - - - - -- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Penalties for excessive tilt and shift shall be deducted separately.

APPENDEX - I.
HISTORY OF SINKING OF WELL No. ____________
BED LEVEL _________ _ LOWER WATER LEVEL _______ HIGHEST OF FLOOD
LEVEL ___________ FOUNDING LEVEL __ _ ___ _ OF CURB _ _ _ ___.
-------------------------------------------------------------STEINING
SINKING
- - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Reduced
RL of
RL of
Height
Total
RL of
Initial
Level (RL) Top
Top
of Stein- Height of
reference
Gauge
Of Bottom
of
steining
ing
of steining
level ( at
Reading
Of cutting
steining after castcasting
(including)
which
Metre.
Edge.
Casting.
Ing.
Cast(Col.1, Curb &
cutting Edge
Col.3
cutting
is placed).
Metre.
Edge(Col.4,
Col.3)Metre.
- -- - - - - - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SinkRL of
Depth of
Strata
KENTILEDGE
Ing
Bottom
Sump
Net
Weight Eccentri- Eccentricity
During of Cutting
below
With
Tonnes. City
Along
The Day Edge(Col.7 cutting edge
Along
Y- AXIS
(Col.9
Col.8)
Metre
XZXIX
Col.8)
Metre.
Metre.
Metre.
- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2.

Report Regarding
Report Any
Remarks.
SIGNATURE OF
Obstacles or sand
special method
SUPERVISING OFFICER:
Or sand below
of sinking
During sinking.
Employed.
--------------------------------------------------------------

APPENDIX II.
TILT AND SHIFT IN WELL No:_________________
-----------------------------------------------------------Total Total
ALONG X. A XIX
ALONG Y. AXIX
Steining sinking (PLACE) (PLACE) Differ- (U/s) (D/s) Difference
Metre. Metre.
END
END. ence.
Col.8,
(Col.5,
Col.7)
Col.4)
METRES.
METRE.
-- - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - Along Tilt Along Resultant
SHIFT ---------Y. AXIX
Tilt.
Along
Along
RESILTANT
Col. 9
(Col.10,
X.AXIX
Y.AXIX
S((Col.13)2+
Divided by
Col.11).
With
With
Col.14)2)
Well Dia.
Direction
Direction
METRE.
Hire.
Metre.
------------------------------------------------------------10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - -------------------------------------------------------------Action Taken for
Remarks
Signature of
Rectification.
Supervising Officer.
-------------------------------------------------------------16.
17.
18.
--------------------------------------------------------------

LOAD TEST FOR WELL FOUNDATION:

Department may select any one or more well foundations (Combination of four wells at well cap
level) for load test. They shall be tested by suitable placed approved vertical leading. The test load on the
foundation well caps will be in accordance with the \normal practice for Road Bridge.
The Contractor shall be paid separately for load testing as per schedule of item. However no
extension of time of completion of the work shall be allowed on this account.
For wells with tilts and shifts beyond the permissible limits, load testing shall be carried out if
required by the Engineer and the cost of such load testing and adopting remedial measure shall been
entirely borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor shall in all cases of load testing.
(i)

Prepare all necessary calculations and details of arrange for such load testing, well in time.
The magnitude of the test load, mode and method of carrying out the test, the application of
Kent ledges, duration of keeping the test load, the observations to be made during placement
of the test loads in position etc., shall be got approved by the Engineer, before commencement
of the load testing work.

(ii)

Make all necessary arrangements for the observations, the centering equipments etc., that may
be needed for measuring the settlements, dislocations etc., as required for the test to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer.

(iii)

Provide all labour and materials and make all observations during the test.

After the load test, the Contractor shall submit a report on the results of the test. The Engineer shall
then communicate as to whether the test has been satisfactory or not or any further tests if
reconstruction or strengthening will be necessary to correct any limits revealed during the test.
Any defect in the Structure or any damage done to the bridge at the time of testing which affects
or is likely to effect the strength of the bridge shall be rectified by the contractor at his own cost by
remedial measure of replacement as approved by the Engineer.